Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Creating A Hellenistic World PDF
Creating A Hellenistic World PDF
C REATING
A HELLENISTIC
WORLD
Editors
Andrew Erskine
and
Lloyd Llewellyn Jones
Contributors
Elizabeth Carney, Stephen Colvin, Andrew Erskine,
Robin Lane Fox, Richard Hunter, Lloyd Llewellyn-Jones,
Alan B. Lloyd, Daniel Ogden, James I. Porter, Joseph Roisman,
Peter Schultz, Shane Wallace, Hans-Ulrich Wiemer,
Josef Wiesehöfer, Stephanie Winder
Distributor
Oxbow Books,
10 Hythe Bridge Street,
Oxford OX1 2EW
Tel: +44 (0)1865 241249
Fax: +44 (0)1865 794449
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval
system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,
recording or otherwise, without the prior permission of the publisher.
ISBN
A catalogue record for this book is available from the British Library.
Typeset, printed and bound in the UK by Gomer Press, Llandysul, Ceredigion, Wales
–––––––––––––––––
The Classical Press of Wales, an independent venture, was founded in 1993, initially to support the work
of classicists and ancient historians in Wales and their collaborators from further afield. More recently it has
published work initiated by scholars internationally. While retaining a special loyalty to Wales and the Celtic
countries, the Press welcomes scholarly contributions from all parts of the world.
The symbol of the Press is the Red Kite. This bird, once widespread in Britain, was reduced by
1905 to some five individuals confined to a small area known as ‘The Desert of Wales’ – the
upper Tywi valley. Geneticists report that the stock was saved from terminal inbreeding by the
arrival of one stray female bird from Germany. After much careful protection, the Red Kite now
thrives – in Wales and beyond.
CONTENTS
Page
Abbreviations xi
Introduction xiii
Andrew Erskine and Lloyd Llewellyn-Jones
PART I
NEW WORLDS
PART II
RULERS AND SUBJECTS
v
Contents
PART III
THE POLIS
Part IV
THE COURT
9 Between philosophy and the court: the life of Persaios 177
of Kition
Andrew Erskine
Part V
CHANGING AESTHETICS
13 Against λεπτότης: rethinking Hellenistic aesthetics 271
James L. Porter
Index 345
vi
CONTRIBUTORS
vii
Contributors
viii
Creating a Hellenistic World
ix
ABBREVIATIONS
Abbreviations for ancient texts follow OCD 3 for the most part or are easily
identifiable. For papyrological abbreviations such as P.Berol., P.Cair.Zen,
P.Herc see http://scriptorium.lib.duke.edu/papyrus/texts/clist.html.
xi
Abbreviations
xii
INTRODUCTION
xiii
Introduction
xiv
Creating a Hellenistic World
fortunes of the two regions are in many ways reversed. Under the Persian
empire Persis was central while Egypt was a troublesome (but economically
important) land on the periphery of that empire, but now in the third
century Egypt is home to a powerful and rich kingdom and all that that
entails while Persis is reduced to being a relative backwater, a mere
secondary province of the Seleucid empire. In the old Greece, on the other
hand, the polis is learning to cope with this new environment, although
there it may be hard to let go of the past. As Shane Wallace demonstrates,
the Persian Wars are still a potent symbol on the Greek mainland long after
the disappearance of the Persian empire itself. Nor are old aspirations of
hegemony easily put aside as Hans-Ulrich Wiemer’s chapter on Rhodes
makes clear. Here there was the Colossus of Rhodes, a giant statue
celebrated in a short and recently discovered epigram by Posidippus. The
contrasting scales here, explored in James Porter’s chapter, are emblematic
not only of Hellenistic art and literature but also of the vast and complex
character of the Hellenistic world.
It is common and not unreasonable for scholars examining times of
transformation to talk of change and continuity,6 but these in themselves
can mislead. What might be seen as change in one place might be
continuity in another. From a Greek perspective we might pick out the
court as a new phenomenon, but from a Macedonian and eastern
perspective it may have been the polis that was the anomaly. The
Macedonian court would of course have been very different from its
Persian counterpart (although a Persian model for the fifth-century
Macedonian court must not be overlooked) but both took kingship for
granted. Several chapters explore various aspects of the court, its tensions
and pressures, the place of the intellectual (see Erskine) and in particular
the role of women (see Carney; Llewellyn-Jones and Winder; Ogden).
We may be able to name few women from Classical Greece, but the same
problem does not occur in the Hellenistic period, even if many of them are
called Cleopatra. Changes too can be observed that on investigation were
already under way; after all change does not come out of nowhere but
sometimes circumstances allow things to develop and flourish in ways that
would have been otherwise impossible. In other words continuity can be
an essential element of change. It is striking in these chapters how influential
Athens is on the Hellenistic world, culturally (see Hunter on Alexandria
and the letter of Aristeas), artistically (see Schultz on the Hellenistic
baroque), linguistically (see Colvin on the koine); in each case, however,
Athens’ legacy is transformed by contact with this new Macedonian world.
In some ways the end of the old world and the beginning of the new
are captured in the story of the demise of the Silver Shields, the veteran
xv
Introduction
xvi
Creating a Hellenistic World
Notes
1 Prayers (on the cylinder of Antiochos I): Kuhrt and Sherwin-White 1991;
Bibliography
Chamoux, F.
2003 Hellenistic Civilization, Oxford (first published in French, 1981).
Cohen, G.
1995 The Hellenistic Settlements in Europe, the Islands, and Asia Minor, Berkeley.
2006 The Hellenistic Settlements in Syria, the Red Sea Basin, and North Africa, Berkeley.
Davies, J.
1984 ‘Cultural, social and economic features of the Hellenistic world’, CAH 2
7.1, 257–320.
Erskine, A. (ed.)
2003 A Companion to the Hellenistic World, Oxford.
Ferguson, N.
1997 Virtual History: Alternatives and counterfactuals, London.
Fraser, P. M
1972 Ptolemaic Alexandria, Oxford.
Habicht, C.
1997 Athens from Alexander to Actium, Boston.
Kuhrt, A. and Sherwin-White, S.
1991 ‘Aspects of Seleucid royal ideology: the cylinder of Antiochus I from
Borsippa’, JHS 111, 71–86.
Ma, J.
2003 ‘Kings’, in Erskine 2003, 177–95.
Robert, L.
1968 ‘De Delphes à l’Oxus: inscriptions grecques nouvelles de la Bactriane’,
Comptes rendus de l’Académie des Inscriptions et Belles-Lettres, 416–57 (reprinted
in L. Robert, Opera Minora Selecta 5, Amsterdam, 1989, 510–51).
Rowlandson, J.
2003 ‘Town and country in Ptolemaic Egypt’, in Erskine 2003, 249–63.
Shipley, G.
2000 The Greek World after Alexander 323–30 BC, London.
Stanwick, P.
2002 Portraits of the Ptolemies: Greek kings as Egyptian Pharaohs, Austin.
xvii
Introduction
Strootman, R.
2007 The Hellenistic Royal Court. Court culture, ceremonial and ideology in
Greece, Egypt and the Near East, 336–30 BCE, Dissertation, University
of Utrecht. (http://igitur-archive.library.uu.nl/dissertations/2007-0725-
201108/UUindex.html)
Yailenko, V.-P.
1990 ‘Les maximes delphiques d’Ai Khanoum et la formation de la doctrine du
dhamma d’Asoka, Dialogues d’Histoire Ancienne 16, 239–56.
xviii
PART I
NEW WORLDS
The ancients had no word for the Hellenistic Age. It is the famous coinage
of young Johann Gustav Droysen and is explained in the preface to his
History of the Successors which he published in 1836 at the age of 28. Just
as ‘Romanistik’ and ‘Germanistik’ had combined in early medieval Europe
and the ‘Romance’ languages had been born, so, Droysen believed, the
fusion of the Hellenistic and the Oriental produced the culture and koine-
language of a Hellenistic age after Alexander.1
The relation between Greek and non-Greek cultures in Asia is still
important in Hellenistic studies but it is no longer quite as Droysen
proposed. For Claire Préaux there was actually no new ‘mixed’ culture at
all.2 Instead there is a scholarly emphasis on bi-culturalism whereby
individuals might speak two languages, adopt two names (one Greek, one
non-Greek) and move between two different ways of life.3 It might seem
more reassuring to Droysen that Fergus Millar has argued that there was
one area close to his conception: the Phoenician cities in the Hellenistic
age. How far their non-Greek culture extended has now been questioned,
but even so, Millar poses problems for Droysen’s periodization.4
Hellenisation, he observes, began in these cities before Alexander, an
‘agreeable paradox’, and even more tellingly ‘we might well wonder why it
was in Rome and not in Phoenicia that there evolved, entirely without the
aid of a conquering Macedonian state, the only literary culture which really
was a fusion in Droysen’s sense.’
1
Robin Lane Fox
2
The first Hellenistic man
3
Robin Lane Fox
scholars’ view, who left a terrible problem of sources and Indian topography
to subsequent students and only the bad example of conquest and global
ambition to his effective and more orderly Successors?
I wish to reconnect the early Hellenistic world to Alexander its founder,
following Droysen’s example but not his definitions. I will then turn to
other constituents of the new age, its art, literature and philosophy where
Droysen’s ‘fusion’ is not a defining element. Instead I will consider where,
if at all, Alexander’s existence made an impact on them too. In conclusion
I will connect him to a particular view of ‘Hellenistic man’ and a particular
‘Hellenistic moment’.
II
If the fusion of Greek and non-Greek does not characterize the Hellenistic
age, what does? Warfare, we might think, but it varied over time: during the
Roman dominance, cities in Greece have even been credited with ceasing
to build or maintain walled defences after the 140s BC.15 Much depends, as
usual, on the social level which we study. One level is the land and those
who worked it, to whom the Hellenistic age certainly brought changes of
status, economic connections and new crops and technology.16 Another is
the world of Greek poleis whose numbers certainly mushroom in western
Asia in Alexander’s immediate wake. In this world of many more poleis we
can study their ‘network of peer contacts’.17 But this network existed under
yet another level, one which was universal, as never before in Greek
history: Greek-speaking kings and their courts, including queens,
concubines and daughters. I incline to Daniel Ogden’s simple point: kings
and courts are the really distinctive element in the Hellenistic age.18
There is, however, a problem: kings were not a constant element in its
first eighteen years. From June 323 until autumn 317 one king was a half-
wit, Philip’s son Philip III. From early autumn 323 until 310 the other king
was a child, Alexander’s son by Roxane, Alexander IV. In 319 the kings
were escorted out of Asia where they were never seen again. Then from
310 until 306 there was no king at all: the competing Successors hesitated.
In summer 306 Antigonos finally took the title, whereupon the other
competitors (including Ptolemy) quickly followed suit.19 Taking the title
meant wearing a diadem like Alexander. But why had they waited?
After Alexander IV’s death, one route to legitimacy, an attractive one,
was to marry Alexander’s sister Kleopatra. In consequence she was killed,
in 308/7.20 Without her, a king needed to be sure of a capable son, the heir
for a new dynasty. Ptolemy and Seleukos did not yet have one, but
4
The first Hellenistic man
Antigonos had the flamboyant Demetrios, and when he was proven by his
Cypriote victory at Salamis, it was the cue for his father’s proclamation.
A Successor king needed a dynastic successor before taking the plunge.
Locally, the competing Successors had already been addressed as ‘king’,
but they had not exploited the title publicly. We can now follow the process
in contemporary Babylonian documents thanks to the fundamental study
of T. Boiy.21 From 323 Philip Arrhidaios is called ‘king’ in Babylonian
scribes’ dating-formulae, as is young Alexander IV. Philip III even persists
as ‘king’ in 316 after his death. Then, in December 316/January 315 the
dating is by Antigonos, but only as ‘general’ (or apparently as ‘satrap’ on
two occasions). From 312/1 Alexander IV is the identifying king with
Seleukos now as ‘general’. From 305 onwards Seleukos is ‘king’. There are
two crucial points here. For Babylonians, Antigonos is never the king,
although Greek sources do talk of him being addressed as ‘lord of Asia’
after his victory over Eumenes in 316 BC.22 Meanwhile, both Philip III and
Alexander IV continue to date documents as ‘kings’ as if their regnal years
continued after their death.
The hiatus in kingship was therefore only apparent. Even in the four
years from 310 to 306, kings were assumed to be continuous; we can see
the same in Egypt where dating by Alexander IV continued long after his
death.23 This formal respect for kings characterized Greek and Macedonian
participants too, even in Asia from 319 onwards when the kings were far
away in Macedon. Even in 319–15 while the successor-armies fought each
other, the treasurers at Alexander’s treasuries in Asia guarded the royal
resources and did not plunder them.24 They would make them available
only to someone who had letters of permission from the kings. So, too,
those hardened Macedonian ‘athletes of war’, the Silver Shields, would
follow Eumenes, the Greek ‘pest from the Chersonese’, rather than the
Macedonian Seleukos, a commander with Alexander, because Eumenes,
but not Seleukos, had letters from the kings.25 The years from 323 to 306
were not years of anarchy, although the kings were weak, absent, or non-
existent.
What, though, did non-Greeks think of it? We have only one source
surviving in its own non-Greek words, subsumed, but somewhat neglected,
in the Old Testament Book of Daniel. In the second chapter, an anonymous
Jew gives us his impressions of the years after Alexander from 323 to
c. 301 BC.26 Updating an older prophecy about the previous kingdoms in
Asia, he presents Alexander’s reign (without naming him) as the age of
iron ‘which breaketh in pieces and subdueth all things’, followed by an age
in which ‘the kingdom shall be divided’, the age of the competing
Successors. In it, some of the ‘strength of the iron’ will persist, mixed,
5
Robin Lane Fox
however, with weak ‘potter’s clay’. The components are grim, but even in
this symbolic view of the new age, kings and kingdoms predominate.
Some, at least, of Alexander’s all-conquering ‘iron’ persists in the divided
age. How important was Alexander’s example to the early Successors’ royal
style? Their uses of his name as their password, of his idealized image to
symbolize continuity on their coins, of his throne and attributes as a setting
for their meetings are well known.27 What about some of the specific items?
Alexander’s own weapons, sceptre and diadem were kept on one side
and did not follow Philip III and the child to Macedon.28 Instead what we
see is cult paid locally by Greek communities to Philip III and others after
him.29 Inarguably, it was Alexander and his prowess who had made this
sort of cult a widespread Greek reaction. There had been stirrings before,
and in Philip’s lifetime a cult at his Philippi is now almost certain,30 but
Alexander had the unique power, the prowess and the capacity for
benefaction to which ‘god-like honours’ were a response. Here his legacy
to the Hellenistic age was decisive. There was no ‘deification decree’ from
Alexander himself 31 and neither he nor the early Successors personally
imposed cult on their courtiers or subjects.32 Just as Alexander had been
receiving such honours here and there in the Greek world before his Exiles
Decree of summer 324, so we can see how Demetrios at Athens or Sikyon
and Ptolemy on Rhodes were honoured locally at a city’s own initiative.33
After Alexander, in return for a big benefaction, no less could be offered
to a Successor than had been offered to Alexander himself: his example
had established a new norm. As for divine ‘sonship’, we might query the
credibility of Alexander’s claims, but Seleukos deliberately emulated them
for a ‘Successor’ public, claiming that oracles of Apollo at Didyma had
vouched for his sonship of the god.34 The huge oracular temple at Didyma
is his acknowledgement in stone, our biggest visible survival from the early
Successors’ years.
Politically, human influence at a Hellenistic court depended on access to
the king. We see it already under Alexander, whether for his weapons-
officers or even (by letter) his sister.35 Under the early Successors there
were still no constitutions or obligatory council-meetings to bind the kings’
actions. A king dispensed decisions and judgements which overrode local
laws.36 Fergus Millar’s ideal type of a Roman emperor, dispensing justice
and responding to petitions, goes back in the Greek world to Philip,
Alexander and the first Successors. Epigraphically we see its role very well
in the endless rulings on the status of the tyrants’ descendants which were
inscribed at Eresos.37 Spanning Alexander and his early Successors the
questions and answers rolled on in the kings’ presence as if no wars were
going on meanwhile.
6
The first Hellenistic man
7
Chapter XX
elephants still fought, but now on both sides of a battle; one Indian
mahout, however, showed Greeks how spikes could be used against their
soft feet (Ptolemy then copied him).49 Bosworth has written bleakly of the
‘waste’ of forests in Alexander’s grand expedition: here too the early
Successors followed suit, felling big trees in the Lebanon and even some
huge cedars (up to 130 feet high) which still grew on Cyprus.50
In their battles, the basic line-up and tactics were still Alexander’s too.
Tarn, however, suggested that the battle of Antigonos and Eumenes at
Paraitakene in late 317 BC was something new, the first example of a battle
directed throughout by a general.51 Tarn’s role for Antigonos here is not
supported by Diodorus-Hieronymos, the only account of it, while at
Gabiene a few months later we see the two generals, ‘supercharged on
Alexander’ as Lendon well puts it, still charging into combat among the
first of their men.52 Under Alexander Ptolemy had killed a chieftain in
single combat: even Eumenes had wrestled and duelled with Neoptolemos:
prowess was in Alexander’s generals’ blood as Pyrrhos and his sons
exemplified, true followers of Alexander’s style.53 Quite apart from the
problem of dust-clouds there was no question of a general departing from
Alexander’s example and operating as a controller at a distance. Early
Hellenistic generalship was not yet the generalship which Polybius admired
many years later.54
Soldiers for these Hellenistic battles came increasingly from land-grants,
the kle-roi in Ptolemaic Egypt and the katoikiai or military colonies, especially
those in Seleucid Asia.55 Alexander had also, of course, founded poleis, not
‘six’ (as Fraser claims) but at least 16. His example was followed by his
Successors, especially outside Egypt. Curtius 7.10.15 (not discussed by
Fraser) refers to his 6 newly-founded ‘oppida’ on high hills in ‘Margania’
and although the point has been disputed, I agree with Bosworth that the
text should not be emended to Margiana, the Merv oasis. There may have
been an Alexandria there too, but the oasis has no such hills.56 After Grenet
and Rapin revisited some of the relevant territory on the Oxus’s further
bank, they suggested that Curtius’s topography is met precisely at one site:
Termez.57 Sir William Tarn would be gratified if his site for an Alexandria
had finally proved plausible, though not for the complex reasons which
he constructed for it. However, Termez’s excavator has vigorously rejected
the suggestion: we need to look elsewhere, in my view further to the east
along the Oxus’s ‘Sogdian’ bank.58 Meanwhile, Curtius’s precise topographic
details cannot simply be rejected: he even adds that the six ‘oppida’ there
‘nowadays’ forget their origins and serve those whom they once commanded.
He, or his source, did not believe that they quickly disappeared.
Besides founding new cities, Hellenistic kings had to control existing
8
The first Hellenistic man
9
Robin Lane Fox
10
The first Hellenistic man
11
Robin Lane Fox
12
The first Hellenistic man
III
13
Chapter XX
14
The first Hellenistic man
15
Robin Lane Fox
16
The first Hellenistic man
IV
17
Robin Lane Fox
Acknowledgements
I am very grateful to Dr. J. L. Lightfoot, Dr. J. Ma, and Dr. Paolo Crivelli
for extremely helpful advice and expertise. This paper was composed in
early 2006 and then reorganized after the February Conference in
Edinburgh. I therefore wrote it without reference to the excellent Cambridge
Companion to the Hellenistic World, edited by Glenn R. Bugh (published in
2006) where A. B. Bosworth also writes on ‘Alexander the Great and the
Creation of the Hellenistic Age’ (pages 9–27). Our chosen themes and
approaches are very different (even down to the editions of Droysen we
cite), but I continue to disagree with some of Bosworth’s main points, that
after Alexander ‘nothing more was heard of world conquest’ ( his p. 11;
my n. 94), that like other foundations Alexandria-the-Furthest was seen as
a ‘sinister parasite’ (contrast Arr. 4.1.3–5 and even Curt. 7.7.1), that the
taking of the kings back to Macedon in 319 ‘marked the real beginning of
the new age’ (his p. 13) or that there is ‘no parallel to Alexander’s self-
conscious promotion of his own divinity’ (his pp. 20–1; with Plut., Demetr.
10–13). I hope that my readers, too, will engage and profit, as I do, from
the challenge of his views.
Notes
1 Droysen 1836, preface; Bichler 1983.
2 Préaux I 1978, 5–9; II 1978, 542ff., 562, 598–9; Préaux 1965, 129–39, a very
important paper.
3 Stephens 2003; Koenen 1973, 25–115; Sherwin-White 1983, 209–21; Thompson
Mithridates’ image.
10 Robert 1976, 25–26.
11 Robert 1983, 117 sees Asandros, satrap of Karia under Philip III, as ‘exécuteur
18
The first Hellenistic man
and he had it submitted to the Delphic oracle which did, separately, endorse the
Iranian.
12 Bosworth 1988, 250 and 1996, 29–30.
13 Briant 1982, 318–30 and 1996, 896, but contrast Lane Fox 2007.
14 Brosius 2003, 183.
15 Camp 2000, 41–58.
16 Thompson 1999, 107–38.
17 Ma 2003, 24.
18 Ogden 2002, x–xi.
19 Diod. 20.53; Plut. Demetr. 17.2–18; Heidelberg. Epitom. FGrH 155 F 1; Just. Epit.
15.2.10; Nep. Eum. 13.2; Müller 1973, 79. Gruen 1985, 260 is corrected by Lehmann
1988, 1–17; I disagree with Hammond 1989, 261–70 who has Alexander IV killed
‘c.309’, but his death concealed by Kassander until 306.
20 Diod. 20.37.5.
21 Boiy 2002, 241–57.
22 Diod. 19.90.4; Parke 1985, 45; J. Hornblower 1981, 170 n. 276.
23 Mehl 1986, 139–47.
24 Diod. 18.60.2, 62.2, 63.4–6.
25 Plut. Eum. 16.4, 18.2, 13.3–4; Diod. 18.58.3–59.3.
26 Book of Daniel 2.31–45; Bickerman 1988, 23–6.
27 Plut. Eum. 6.10; Diod. 19.90.4; 18.60–61; 19.19.3–4; Plut. Pyrrh. 7–8.
28 Diod. 18.61.1; Borza 1987, 110–20 is quite unconvincing in claiming that they
1957–8, 152.
30 SEG 38.658, with M. Hatzopoulos 1989, 435.
31 Lane Fox 1973, 439 and 545; Lane Fox 1986, 115; Flower 1997, 258–60.
32 Bickerman 1963, 71–85, still the decisive study: Lane Fox 1973, 322–3 and 439;
Arr. Anab. 4.10.5–11 is inconsistent with Arr. 4.12.3 (which emphasises the kiss, based
on the well-placed contemporary Chares) and is therefore later fiction.
33 Plut. Demetr. 10.4–12; Diod. 20.102.3; 20.100.3–4.
34 Just. Epit. 15.4.8; Parke 1985, 50–1 and n. 233.
35 Syll.3 312; Delrieux 2001, 160–89. Memnon FGrH 434 F 1 (4.1).
36 Bickerman 1938, 11; Fraser 1972, 114–5; Rhodes and Lewis 1997, 544.
37 Rhodes and Osborne 2003, no. 83; Koch 2001, 169–217 is the best discussion.
38 Lock 1977, 91–107; Hammond 1985, 156–60: Hammond and Walbank 1988,
19
Robin Lane Fox
48 Chaniotis 2005 says surprisingly little about this early phase or the excellent
evidence in Diod. 18–20.
49 Meiggs 1982, 137–40 and 165–9; Diod. 18.71.3 and 19.83.2.
50 Bosworth 1996, 30; Diod. 19.58.2–5 and Pliny HN 16.203, brilliantly illumined
Blyth 2004, 44 and Philo, Quod Omnis Probus Liber Est, 96 for very different Kalanos-
fictions.
83 Grenfell and Hunt 1906, 139–57, esp. 143.
84 Neugebauer 1975, 599, 607–9, 706; compare the evidence in Rémondon 1964,
126–46.
20
The first Hellenistic man
85 Arr. Anab. 3.16.4, on which I certainly do not believe Kuhrt and Sherwin White
1987, 77.
86 Sherwin-White and Kuhrt 1993, 114–40, with a different emphasis to mine.
87 Droysen 1926, 445; Berve 1926, 296, nr. 597.
88 Grenet 1991, 147–151. Compare Robert 1983, 115–8, where Bagadates surely
an die Parodos der Phoenissae’, but neither he nor anyone else has ever followed up
this thought.
93 Eur. Phoen. 202–25, 280–7: Mastronarde 1994, 208–9 is thus confirmed by the
Tyrians’ own later reading of these verses; Eur. Phoen. 1060–1, for ‘fair children’.
94 Lehmann 1988, 14, on Köln Papyrus 1.25 where Antigonos is said to aim to
‘hege-sesthai [te-s oiko]umene-s hapase-s’ like Alexander, in 306 BC; Hornblower 1981, 167–71.
-
95 Polyb. 5.108; Walbank 2002, 127–36.
96 Fraser 1972, 553–6; 784–93.
97 Elliott 1970.
98 Men. Aspis 35; Lane Fox 1996, 166 nn. 183–4; Pliny, HN 37.70; Kuttner 2005,
F 13.
103 Pollitt 1986; Fowler 1989; Robertson and Pollitt 1993, 67–103; see also Stewart
2006, 158–85.
104 Préaux II 1978, 682.
105 Diod. 18.26–28.2; Miller 1986, 401–12; Stewart 1977, 125.
106 Stewart 1993, 402–7, for sources.
107 Pliny HN 34.67.
108 Wootton 2002, 265–74.
109 Pliny HN 35.98; Strabo 8.381.
110 Chares 125 F 4.
111 Lucian, Herodotus or Aetion 4–7; Stewart 1993, 183–6 actually claims it was
‘exhibited for sale’ and was originally ‘by no means free of irony’, arguably showing
an ‘ambivalence’ in Alexander before a ‘sexually threatening female’ and perhaps
‘playing to resentment against Alexander’s increasing Orientalism’. I reject these
misreadings of Lucian and this charming picture.
112 Chamoux 2003, 373.
113 Kuttner 2005.
114 Bopearachchi and Flandrin 2005: spectacular, if it is not a fake. Unlike them I
would then date it to the Susa mint, 325/4 BC, fitting Lane Fox 1996, 87–108 almost
too neatly to be true. But a fake, I fear, it is.
115 Bopearachchi 1991, pl. 8.22 and Série 17 J.
116 Bosworth 1996, 28; Bopearachchi 1991, pl. 4. Série 1.
21
Robin Lane Fox
117 They most liked Pliny HN 35.85–6.
118 Bevan 1913; Dodds 1951, 242–3; Festugière 1968; contrast Chamoux 2003,
165–213; van Bremen 2003, 313–30.
119 Fraser 1972 vol. I, 310–16; 427; 445; 774–5.
120 Sandbach 1985, 56.
121 Diog. Laert. 4.14.1–2 (note the ‘To Hephaistion’, also); 5.27; 5.47; for
Speusippus as forerunner, 4.5 and Diog. Laert. 4.9; 4.8 is perhaps apocryphal: at 4.1,
I am tempted to correct the chronologically unlikely ‘Kassandrou’ to ‘Philippou’
and see Speusippos’s visit precisely in autumn 336; in general Sonnabend 1996, esp.
280–7.
122 Sonnabend 1996, esp. 280–7.
123 Festugière 1968, 27–37.
124 Cic. Tusc. Disp. 3.33; W. Harris 2001, 235–40, 362–72. By contrast, some of
Aristotle’s followers considered ‘iracundia’ to be good and useful: Cic. Tusc. Disp. 4.43.
125 Murray 2005, 203.
126 Robert 1968; Fraser 1972, 315, 321.
127 Heraclid. Pont. ap. Diog. Laert. 9.50.
128 Plut. Mor. 329 A–D; Diog. Laert. 7.33–4; Murray 2005, 210.
129 Arr. Anab. 4.4.1: ‘ethelontai ’, despite Bosworth 1995, 26.
130 Strabo 1.4.9; Plut. Alex. 27.11; Mor. 180 D.
131 Diog. Laert. 7.61.
132 Zanker 1995.
133 Walbank 1981, 220; Rostovtzeff 1941, 1115–26; 1304–7.
134 Christ 1994,167–202.
135 Fraser 1996, 78–86; Geus 2003, 232–46; Plut. Alex. 35.1–9; Bosworth 1993,
Eumenes curse his traitors, which is also not in Diodorus; his 14.4.21, even so, has
none of Diodorus’s moral conclusion.
139 Parker 2004, 131–53.
140 Hornblower 1981, 35; Parker 2000, 299–314, observing that pre-battle sacrifices
and divination are conspicuously absent from Diod. 18–20: did Hieronymos, too,
omit them?
Bibliography
Austin, M. M.
1986 ‘Hellenistic kings, war and the economy’, CQ 36, 450–66.
Bernard, P.
1982 ‘Alexandre et Ai Khanoum’, Journal des Savants, 125–38.
1997 ‘Les origines thessaliennes de l’Arménie vues par deux historiens
thessaliens de la génération d’Alexandre’, in P. Briant (ed.) Topoi: Supplément
I, 131–216.
Berve, H.
1926 Das Alexanderreich auf prosopographischer Grundlage, Munich.
22
The first Hellenistic man
Bevan, E. R.
1913 Stoics and Sceptics, Oxford.
Bichler, R.
1983 ‘Hellenismus’. Geschichte und Problematik eines Epochenbegriffs, Darmstadt.
Bickerman, E. J.
1938 Institutions des Séleucides, Paris.
1988 The Jews in the Greek Age, Cambridge, Massachusetts.
Bickermann, E. J.
1940 ‘La lettre d’Alexandre aux bannis Grecs’, REA 42, 25–35.
1963 ‘À propos d’un passage de Chares de Mytilène’, Parola de Passato 18, 241–55.
Boiy, T.
2002 ‘Royal titulature in Hellenistic Babylonia’, Zeitschrift für Assyriologie 92, 241–57.
2005 ‘The fifth and sixth generation of the Nikarchos – Anu-Uballit Family’,
Revue d’Assyriologie 99, 105–10.
Boiy, T. and Verhoeven, K.
1998 ‘Arrian Anabasis 7.21.1–4 and the Pallucatu Channel’, in H. Gasche and
M. Tanret (eds) Changing Watercourses in Babylonia: Towards a reconstruction of
the ancient environment in lower Mesopotamia, Ghent, Chicago, 147–58.
Bopearachchi, O.
1991 Monnaies gréco-bactriennes et indo-grecques, Paris.
Bopearachchi, O. and Flandrin, P.
2005 Le portrait d’Alexandre le Grand, Monaco.
Borza, E.
1987 ‘The royal Macedonian tombs and the paraphernalia of Alexander the
Great’, Phoenix 41, 105–21.
Bosworth, A. B.
1988 Conquest and Empire: The reign of Alexander the Great, Cambridge.
1993 ‘Aristotle, India and Alexander’, Topoi 3, 407–24.
1995 A Historical Commentary on Arrian’s History of Alexander, II, Oxford.
1996 Alexander and the East, Oxford.
2000 ‘Ptolemy and the will of Alexander’, in A. B. Bosworth and E. Baynham
(eds) Alexander the Great in Fact and Fiction, Oxford, 207–41.
2003 ‘Arrian, Megasthenes and the making of myth’, in Juan A. López Férez
(ed.) Mitos en la Literatura Griega Helenística e Imperial, Madrid, 299–320.
Bravo, B.
1968 Philologie, histoire, philosophie de l’histoire. Étude sur J. G. Droysen, historien de
l’antiquité, Warsaw.
Briant, P.
1982 Rois, tributs et paysans, Paris.
1996 Histoire de l’empire perse, Paris.
1999 ‘Katarraktai du Tigre et muballitum du Habur’, Nouvelles Assyriologiques
Brèves et Utilitaires 1999, 15–16.
2004 ‘Alexandre et l’hellénisation de l’Asie: l’histoire au passé et au présent’, Studi
Ellenistici 16, 9–70.
Brosius, M.
2003 ‘Alexander and the Persians’, in J. Roisman (ed.) Brill’s Companion to
Alexander the Great, Leiden, 169–96.
23
Robin Lane Fox
24
The first Hellenistic man
25
Robin Lane Fox
26
The first Hellenistic man
Millar, F. G. B.
1983 ‘The Phoenician cities: a case-study of Hellenization’, PCPS 209, 55–71.
Miller, S. G.
1986 ‘Alexander’s funeral cart’, Archaia Makedonia = Ancient Macedonia IV, 401–12.
Momigliano, A.
1970 ‘J. G. Droysen between Greeks and Jews’, History and Theory 9, 139–53.
1977 Essays in Ancient and Modern Historiography, Oxford.
Müller, O.
1973 Antigonos Monophthalmos und ‘Das Jahr der Könige’, Bonn.
Murray, O.
2005 ‘Zeno and the art of polis maintenance’, in M. H. Hansen (ed.) The Imaginary
Polis: Acts of the Copenhagen Polis Centre 7, Copenhagen, 202–21.
Nawotka, K.
2003 ‘Freedom of Greek cities in Asia Minor in the age of Alexander the Great’,
Klio 85, 15–41.
Neugebauer, O.
1975 A History of Ancient Mathematical Astronomy Part Two, Berlin-New York.
Ogden, D.
2002 ‘From Chaos to Cleopatra’, in D. Ogden (ed.) The Hellenistic World: New
perspectives, London and Swansea, i–xv.
Orrieux, C.
1983 Les papyrus de Zénon: L’horizon d’un Grec en Égypte au III e siècle avant J. C., Paris.
Palagia, O.
2002 ‘Hephaistion’s pyre and the royal hunt of Alexander’ in E. Baynham
and A. B. Bosworth (eds) Alexander the Great in fact and fiction, Oxford,
167–206.
Parke, H. W.
1985 The Oracles of Apollo in Asia Minor, London.
Parker, R. C. T.
2000 ‘Sacrifice and battle’, in H. van Wees (ed.) War and Violence in Ancient Greece,
London and Swansea, 299–314.
2004 ‘One man’s piety: the religious dimension of the anabasis’ in R. Lane Fox
(ed.) The Long March: Xenophon and the Ten Thousand, Yale, New Haven and
London, 131–53.
Passerini, A.
1934 ‘La tryphé nella storiografia ellenistica’, Studi Italiani di Filologia Classica, ns.
11, 35–50.
Pocock, J. G. A.
1975 The Machiavellian Moment: Florentine political thought and the Atlantic Republican
tradition, Princeton.
Pollitt, J. J.
1986 Art in the Hellenistic Age, Cambridge.
Pomtow, H.
1917–8 ‘Delphische Neufunde’, Klio 15, 27.
Préaux, C.
1965 ‘Réflexions sur l’entité hellénistique’, Chronique d’Égypte 40, 129–39.
1978 Le Monde Hellénistique I et II, Paris.
27
Robin Lane Fox
Rapin, C.
1987 ‘Les textes littéraires grecs de la Trésorerie d’Ai Khanum’, BCH 111,
225–66.
Reinach, T.
1890 Mithridate Eupator, Paris.
Rémondon, R.
1964 ‘Problèmes du bilinguisme dans l’Égypte lagide (UPZ I 148)’, Chronique
d’Égypte 39, 126–46.
Rhodes P. J. and Osborne, R. G. (eds)
2003 Greek Historical Inscriptions 404–323 BC, Oxford.
Robert, L.
1968 ‘De Delphes à l’Oxus: Inscriptions grecques nouvelles de la Bactriane’,
Comptes-Rendus de l’Académie des Inscriptions et Belles-Lettres, 416–57.
1976 ‘Monnaies grecques de l’époque impériale: types monétaires d’Hypaipa de
Lydie’, Revue Numismatique 18, 25–56.
1983 Fouilles d’Amyzon en Carie I, Paris.
Robertson, M. and Pollitt, J. J.
1993 ‘What is ‘Hellenistic’ about Hellenistic art?’, in P. Green (ed.) Hellenistic
History and Culture, Berkeley, 67–103.
Romm, J. S.
1989 ‘Aristotle’s elephant and the myth of Alexander’s scientific patronage’, AJP
110, 566–75.
Rostovtzeff, M. I.
1941 The Social and Economic History of the Hellenistic World, Oxford.
Rotroff, S. I.
1996 The Missing Krater and the Hellenistic Symposium: Drinking in the Age of Alexander
the Great, Christchurch, N. Z.
Roueché, C. and Sherwin-White, S. M.
1989 ‘The Greek inscriptions from Failaka’, Chiron 15, 1–39.
Sandbach, F. H.
1985 Aristotle and the Stoics, Cambridge Philological Society Supplementary
Volume 10, Cambridge.
Scheer, T.
2003 ‘The past in the Hellenistic present’, in Erskine 2003, 216–32.
Schmidt, E.
1941 ‘Die Griechen in Babylon und das Weiterleben ihrer Kultur’, Jahrbuch des
Deutschen Archäologischen Instituts: Archäologischer Anzeiger LVI, 786–841.
Seyrig, H.
1970 ‘Seleucus I et la fondation de la monarchie’, Syria 47, 290–311.
Sherwin-White, S. M.
1983 ‘Aristeas Ardibelteios: some aspects of the use of double names in Seleucid
Babylonia’, ZPE 50, 209–21.
Sherwin-White, S. M. and Kuhrt, A.
1993 From Samarkand to Sardis: A new approach to the Seleucid Empire, London and
Berkeley.
28
The first Hellenistic man
Sonnabend, H.
1995 Die Freundschaft der Gelehrten und die zwischenstaatliche Politik im klassischen und
hellenistische Griechenland, Hildesheim.
Stephens, S. A.
2003 Seeing Double: Intercultural Poetics in Ptolemaic Alexandria, Berkeley.
Stewart, A. F.
1976 Skopas of Paros, New Jersey.
1993 Faces of Power: Alexander’s image and the Hellenistic world, Berkeley.
Tarn, W. W.
1936 Hellenistic Military and Naval Developments, Cambridge.
1940 ‘Two notes on Seleucid history’, JHS 60, 89–94.
Taub, L.
2003 Ancient Meteorology, London.
Thompson, D. J.
1994 ‘Literacy and power in Ptolemaic Egypt’, in A. K. Bowman and G. Woolf
(eds) Literacy and Power in the Ancient World, Cambridge, 67–83.
1999 ‘New and old in the Ptolemaic Fayum’, in A. J. Bowman and E. Rogan
(eds) Agriculture in Egypt: From Pharaonic to modern times, Proceedings of the British
Academy 96, Oxford 109–38.
2001 ‘Hellenistic Hellenes: the case of Ptolemaic Egypt’, in I. Malkin (ed.) Ancient
Perceptions of Greek Ethnicity, Cambridge, Massachusetts, 301–22.
Tondriau, J.
1948 ‘La tryphé: philosophie royale ptolémaique’, REA 50, 49–54.
Uebel, F. O.
1968 Die Kleruchen Ägyptens unter den ersten sechs Ptolemäern, Berlin.
Van Bremen, R.
2003 ‘Family structures’, in Erskine 2003, 313–30.
Walbank, F. W.
1981 The Hellenistic World, London.
2002 ‘Η ΤΩΝ ΟΛΩΝ ΕΛΠΙΣ and the Antigonids’, in his Polybius, Rome and the
Hellenistic World, Cambridge, 127–36.
Whitehead, D. and Blyth, P. H.
2004 Athenaeus Mechanicus, Historia Einzelschriften 182, Stuttgart.
Wilcken, U.
1894 ‘Amastris’, in RE 1.2, 1750.
Wootton, W.
2002 ‘Another Alexander Mosaic: Reconstructing the Hunt Mosaic from
Palermo’, Journal of Roman Archaeology 15, 264–74.
Zanker, P.
1995 The Mask of Socrates: The Image of the Intellectual in Antiquity, Berkeley.
29
2
Stephen Colvin
1. The koine has traditionally proved a difficult notion to pin down. Partly
this is owing to the fact that the ancient sources are themselves confused,
and I shall argue that such confusion typically grows out of a linguistic
environment characterized by koine and diglossia. Modern studies suggest
that, in cultures which employ a koine based on a prestigious literary canon,
it is symptomatic of linguistic thought that it is focussed on the written
language to such a degree that the relationship (historical and synchronic)
between the spoken language(s) and the written language is ignored or
misunderstood. One of the reasons that Western scholarship has found it
difficult to unravel the linguistic culture of the postclassical world is
precisely the dysfunctional relationship with language that was inherited
from that world; a useful way to sidestep the lens through which we view
the linguistic landscape is to turn to modern linguistic studies of parallels
from other cultures. We shall look for a general model of how a koine
works in the context of prestigious literary and cultural heritage; for
although the Greek koine is often supposed to have been a feature of
verbal interaction, we have in fact very little evidence about the spoken
language in the postclassical Greek world. Modern studies may provide
typological parallels to help us fill the gaps.
31
Stephen Colvin
world gradually taken over and reunited by the Roman state. The starting
point is arbitrarily, and not unreasonably, set at the end of the fourth
century BC when the Macedonian state overran the Greek world, first under
Philip II (died 336 BC) and then under Alexander. There are reasons to
believe that its linguistic forebear(s) had been crystallizing over the previous
two centuries,1 but since the koine is a political and ideological term as
much as a linguistic one, extending the term back in time would be
confusing and misleading. As the liturgical language of the Greek church
was more or less koine, and had a lasting and profound effect on the
history of the Greek language, it is far more difficult to assign a convenient
end-date; in practice texts later than Justinian (died AD 565) are rarely
quoted to illustrate koine (as opposed to Byzantine) Greek. We shall return
to this question at the end.
The term koine has passed into modern linguistics to mean a language
variety used over a wide area by speakers who engage in levelling (the
levelling out of regional peculiarities) for the sake of communicational
efficiency: a compromise across dialects, implying some degree of institutional
standardization. The word has been used to denote a variety of different
situations, but key overlapping features2 generally include the following:
i) a koine arises from related dialects (or closely related linguistic
varieties) rather than from languages which are wholly distinct from
each other
ii) levelling: it arises from several dialects, by a process in which local
peculiarities are ironed out
iii) it may be the result of the transportation of related varieties to new
proximity in a new geographical location, or it may be due to a new
social or political circumstance in an existing area
iv) it may become a literary or national standard; it may become nativized3
An implication of the above is that there are likely to be identifiable stages
in the evolution of a koine, each marked by salient characteristics which do
not necessarily pertain to the whole lifecycle of the phenomenon. In
general the notion of koine implies a lingua franca, though the two are not
exactly equivalent and should not be confused (a lingua franca does not
imply a koine).
If we consider the features listed above in the context of the Greek koine
it may lead to some useful distinctions between that situation and modern
usage of the term.
2.1 Firstly, the Greek koine was ‘common’ in the sense that it became a
national standard, where previously dialectal diversity had existed. It was
not common in the sense that the word seems often to have in a modern
32
The koine: A new language for a new world
Some say that if in fact the Common Dialect is composed of four elements
[sc. Attic, Ionic, Doric, Aeolic] it should not be called ‘common’, but ‘mixed’
– for we do not call a salve that is made of four drugs ‘common’, but ‘mixed’.
And this is a good argument against those who claim that the Common
Dialect arose from a combination of the four dialects; and they have another
good argument when they say that the Common Dialect is the mother
[sc. of the other dialects]. For if somebody uses the expression ‘in the Doric
dialect’, we say that this is equivalent to ‘in common Doric’, and the same
for ‘in Aeolic’, or ‘in Ionic’, or ‘in Attic’.4
The koine was, rather, an expanded and Ionicized form of Attic, which (at
least in its literary form) showed a small admixture of lexical items that
appear poetic from the perspective of classical Attic. This may be because
they were Ionic in origin, or simply because of the artificial nature of the
literary koine: later writers drew on the lexical resources of the classical
past, and this sometimes included the poets (especially epic).5 It is the case,
however, that the Greek koine developed in a context of closely related
dialects. To the extent that there was levelling, this ironed out some of the
specifically Attic peculiarities of inflection, which led to a simplified
led to forms such as λεώς, νεώς from λᾱός etc. The koine ‘reintroduced’
λαός from the non-Attic-Ionic dialects (and it was familiar from Homer).
The treatment of this in the later grammatical tradition lumps it together
with a separate phenomenon, the wavering over the adoption of the Attic
inflection of i-stem nouns in place of the non-ablauting pattern common
to the other dialects (including Ionic):
33
Stephen Colvin
(b) Hdn. (On the Declension of Nouns) Gr. Gr. III, 2. 704–5:
ἄξιόν ἐστι ζητῆσαι διὰ ποίαν αἰτίαν τὸ βοῦς βοός οὐ γίνεται κατ’ ἔκτασιν
Ἀττικὴν τοὺ ο εἰς τὸ ω. ἔστιν οὖν εἰπεῖν ὅτι τὰ ἐκτείνοντα τὸ ο εἰς τὸ ω ἐπὶ
τῶν καθαρευόντων καὶ τὸ παραλῆγον φωνῆεν εἰς ε µεταβάλλει οἷον ὄφις
ὄφιος ὄφεως, πόλις πόλιος πόλεως, ναός νεώς, λαός λεώς.
It is worth enquiring why bous [nom.] ~ boos [gen.] is not affected by the
Attic lengthening of o to o-. One can state that those cases which lengthen o
following a vowel to o- also change this penultimate vowel to e, as in ophis ~
ophios/opheo-s, polis ~ polios/poleo-s, na-os/neo-s, la-os/leo-s.
In the spoken language there can hardly have been any phonological
difference between ὄφιος and ὄφεως at this time. The distinction is
orthographic, and this is typical of the culture of the koine:
(c) (i) Hdn. (On Orthography) Gr. Gr. iii.2, 432:
ἔστι γὰρ ὄφις ὄφιος κοινῶς. οἱ ᾿Αττικοὶ οὖν ἔτρεψαν τὸ ι εἰς ε καὶ τὸ ο εἰς ω
καὶ ἐγένετο ὄφεως καὶ πόλεως.
ophis ~ opheo-s ...the inflection with long o is the Attic one; such words are also
inflected in the Ionic manner with a short o. However, it is our normal
practice in writing to use the Attic inflection.
On the whole i-stem nouns (like all third-declension masc. and fem. nouns)
ended up in a merger with the a-stem declension in post-classical Greek,
but traces of an Atticizing inflection remain (πόλη ‘city’ can have a gen.
sing. πόλης or πόλεως in the modern language: the latter being less frequently
used, but felt to be more correct by speakers).7
In other cases the compromise between Attic and Ionic led to forms
which looked like dialect forms (West Greek, Aeolic): thus Attic πράττειν
and Ionic πρήσσειν ‘to do’ resulted in a hybrid πράσσειν, which was identical
to the West Greek form. There were, indeed, some borrowings from West
Greek in the koine: either for morphological reasons of the type noted
above, whereby the word λαός ‘people’ replaced an awkard Attic form λεώς
(Ion. λήος); or the unpredictable borrowings that all languages engage in. So,
for example, βουνός ‘hill, mountain’ entered mainstream Greek from the
West Greek dialects (it was already known to Herodotos).
The ancient tradition that the koine was a mixture of the old classical
dialects may have reflected ideas of identity in the new Hellenistic world.
34
The koine: A new language for a new world
The new Greek world was both mixed and centralized, as opposed to the
independent and chauvinistic states of the earlier period; the new Greek
language was supposed to mirror this shift in ethnic and political identity.
The view that the koine was a mixture may also have been an oblique
reflection of the diglossic continuum that must have existed across the
Greek-speaking world: spoken koine will have been a closer or further
approximation to the written standard, depending on the speaker’s social
status, level of education, and immediate communicational context, etc.
On the lower end of the continuum it will presumably have reflected the
historical speech habits of the locality, including (at least in the Hellenistic
period, and probably well beyond) dialect traits, as for example Strabo
8.1.2.33 writes on the Peloponnese:
(d) σχεδὸν δ’ἔτι καὶ νῦν κατὰ πολεῖς ἄλλοι ἄλλως διαλέγονται, δοκοῦσι δὲ
δωρίζειν ἅπαντες διὰ τὴν συµβᾶσαν ἐπικράτειαν.8
Even now people speak in different ways in the various cities, though they
all appear to speak in Doric (according to the prevailing opinion).
The synchronic picture will have been one of the koine emerging out of
various dialect soups towards a common panhellenic standard.9 Since the
Greek grammarians (and this seems often to be part of the culture of
diglossia) confused historical and synchronic relationships when they
thought about the five different types of Greek they recognized (Attic,
Ionic, Doric, Aeolic and koine), it is easy to see how it was legitimate, and
indeed appropriate, to conceive of the new panhellenic language as one
which contained ingredients from the whole of its classical heritage. There
is some evidence that early Attic attempts to ‘appropriate’ the koine (in
the sense of ‘panhellenic standard’) caused irritation in this context. The
geographer Herakleides of Crete records a passage from Poseidippos
(de urbibus Graeciae 3.7 = PCG 30) in which a character complains that the
Athenians criticize the way that other Greeks speak:
(e) ὅτι δὲ πᾶσα ἧν κατηριθµήµεθα Ἑλλάς ἐστι, µαρτυρεῖ ἡµῖν ὁ τῶν κωµωιδιῶν
ποιητὴς Ποσείδιππος, µεµφόµενος Ἀθηναίοις ὅτι τὴν αὑτῶν φωνὴν καὶ τὴν
πόλιν φασὶ τῆς Ἑλλάδος εἶναι, λέγων οὕτως·
Ἑλλάς µέν ἐστι µία, πόλεις δὲ πλείονες.
σὺ µὲν Ἀττικίζεις ἡνίκ’ ἂν φωνὴν λέγηις
αὑτοῦ τιν’, οἱ δ’ Ἕλληνες ἑλληνίζοµεν.
τί προσδιατρίβων συλλαβαῖς καὶ γράµµασιν
τὴν εὐτραπελίαν εἰς ἀηδίαν ἄγεις;
...the comic poet Poseidippos shows us that Greece comprises all the places
we have enumerated, criticizing the Athenians because they say that their
own dialect is Greek and their own city is Greece: ‘There is only one
35
Stephen Colvin
Greece, but many cities. You speak Attic whenever you open your mouth,
and the rest of us Greeks speak Greek. Why make such a fuss over syllables
and sounds, turning your wit into unpleasantness?’
The ability of ancient grammarians to talk of the dialects as developments
of the koine (implied in passages (a) and (c) above, for example) and at the
same time to talk as though they were historically earlier is surprising to
modern linguistic sensibilities:10 but this flexible approach to historical
anteriority and genetic priority has parallels. Dante, in De vulgari eloquentia
(ca. 1303–5) undertakes investigation of where and how the Italian
‘illustrious vernacular’ (vulgare illustre) was to be identified. Dante sometimes
talks of the vulgare illustre as something which could be created out of the
vernacular Italian dialects (by a similar process of levelling and ‘purification’
that creates a koine):
(f ) Itaque, adepti quod querebamus, dicimus illustre, cardinale, aulicum et curiale vulgare
in Latio, quod omnis latie civitatis est et nullius esse videtur, et quo municipalia vulgaria
omnia Latinorum mensurantur et ponderantur et comparantur.
So we have found what we were seeking: we can define the illustrious,
cardinal, aulic, and curial vernacular in Italy as that which belongs to every
Italian city yet seems to belong to none, and against which the vernacular
of all the cities of the Italians can be measured, weighed, and compared.
(DVE 1.16, tr. Botterill)
At other times he talks of the illustre as prior to the dialects, a standard from
which they have declined (‘proto-Italian’ in the words of Mazzocco 1993:
138); in 1.10–11 he is explicit that the language of si had split from a single
language (unum ydioma) to many vernaculars (multa vulgaria). It is a paterfamilias
among the dialects (just as in (a) above the koine is the ‘mother’).
Research into language attitudes among speakers of modern Arabic gives
some insights into the origins of this uncertainty. Speakers of Arabic are
speakers of a modern Arabic vernacular, a range of which spread across the
Arab world, and which are not, unless contiguous, mutually intelligible at
the ‘lowest’ level. Insofar as educated speakers also know Modern Standard
Arabic (more or less a variety of the classical language) they believe this to
be their mother tongue. The vernacular has a low psychological awareness:
speakers may deny that they speak it, and may think of it (if at all) as a
casual or debased variety of the standard, rather than as a historical
descendant of that standard (the modern linguistic view). It is likely that a
similar linguistic culture prevailed in the world of the koine.11
2.2 In the modern world some of the koines that have been identified are
the result of the transportation of related languages to a new geographical
location: this was especially common in the context of slavery and
indentured labour in the new world. Others have grown out of a new social
36
The koine: A new language for a new world
By virtue of their naval power the Athenians have mingled with various
peoples and discovered all sorts of delicacies...further, hearing every kind of
language, they have taken something from each; Greeks on the whole prefer
to use their own language, way of life, and type of dress, but the Athenians
use a mixture from all the Greeks and barbarians.
Attic poetry and prose had always been heavily influenced by Ionic, and
there is evidence that in the second half of the fifth century the educated
élite started to adopt some Ionic idioms in speech. The new international
Attic was apparently adopted as the official language of the Macedonian
court in the fourth century BC, as the expansionist Macedonian kingdom
sought to position itself for a leading role in Greek affairs. Since it had
become the language of education and literary prose, it was a natural choice
as a pan-Hellenic medium of administration and lingua franca when most
of Greece fell under Macedonian control in the last decades of the century.
However, that is only half the story of the koine. As the Macedonians
expanded into former Persian territories in Anatolia, Egypt, the Levant
and the Near East the koine was exported as the medium of
communication at all levels. These new Macedonian subjects were not
(with the exception of coastal Anatolia) previously Greek speakers, and
the dynamics of the koine must have been very different in these regions.
There was greater potential for simplification and regularization of Greek
37
Stephen Colvin
38
The koine: A new language for a new world
39
Stephen Colvin
Western thought about language: linguists have used the term ever since
while arguing about what it means and criticizing Ferguson’s first attempt
to apply it (to Arabic). It describes a linguistic culture which has a distinct
‘High’ form of the language, deriving ultimately from a canonical corpus:
in the case of Arabic, the consciousness of speakers that they are Arabic
speakers is the result of the canonization of the language of the Qur’ân as
‘Arabic’ tout simple, and (as in Greece) the subservience of grammatical
activity to textual exegesis. The ‘Low’ form of the language is the everyday
vernacular. Ferguson was criticised for failing to recognise a continuum of
speech styles between these two poles: nevertheless, diglossia is a useful
shorthand for referring to a specific type of linguistic culture.
The development of a sense in the Greek world that there existed a body
of canonical ‘texts’ by the end of the fourth century was a vital factor in the
subsequent history of Greek. It would be a mistake to suppose that the
koine spread solely because it was the Macedonian language of
administration, or because a new variety of Attic, which we may call
expanded or international Attic, had developed over the course of the fifth
and fourth centuries (this is the language that the Old Oligarch complains
of, perhaps around the year 425): without the underpinning of koine it
would have been just one more lingua franca that perished when the
conditions which gave rise to it changed. The panhellenic text par excellence
was of course Homer, and the Ionic flavour of the vulgate may indeed
have contributed to the international clout of Ionic (though it can hardly,
as some have suggested, be the main reason for the spread of the
Hellenistic koine). The use of the term koinai to describe poetic traditions
such as epic is well established. But the new canon, the one instrumental
in setting the stage for the Attic-based koine, was the body of literature
which emerged after the Persian wars in the context of Athenian political
and cultural pre-eminence; and in particular, the status of Ionicized Attic
as the language of formal prose (documentary or literary) and education.
This was the situation which, hand in hand with the Macedonian
adoption of the new Attic as a lingua franca, resulted in the peculiar
linguistic and cultural circumstance that we call the koine. The two factors
are intertwined: neither could have done it without the other. This is all by
way of preface to returning to the Arabic model. I think that we have little
prospect of retrieving the spoken vernaculars of the Hellenistic world, the
language corresponding to Ferguson’s Low variety, since speakers of the
Low variety do not read or write. I see no reason to believe that the old
dialects disappeared in the Hellenistic and Roman periods, nor indeed the
local languages such as Lycian. They certainly stopped being written; and,
as in the case of modern Arabic vernaculars, may very soon have become
40
The koine: A new language for a new world
41
Stephen Colvin
42
The koine: A new language for a new world
Notes
1 See, e.g., López Eire 1993.
2 For which cf. Siegel 1985, 360.
3 i.e. it may become the first language for a group of speakers.
4 The argument seems to be that as ‘Doric’ is the genus of which the individual
Doric dialects are the species, so the koine bears the same relation to the four Greek
dialects (and cannot therefore be composed of or derived from them). This mirrors
the relation between panhellenic Greek identity and (for example) Athenian or Spartan
citizenship. My translation mostly follows that of Consani 1993, 35–6.
5 So also Dante (de Vulgari Eloquentia 2. 1. 1) argues that writers of prose most often
learn the koine (for him, the vulgare illustre) from poets.
6 Whether this is evidence that the koine had features in common with a creole is
difficult to say; arguments on this subject have perhaps not distinguished clearly
enough between the written and the vernacular language. Certainly the ancient
grammatical obsession with ‘analogy’ and ‘anomaly’ as forces in language starts to
look interesting in this regard.
43
Stephen Colvin
7 Horrocks 1997, 219–20.
8 More evidence for the persistence of Doric at Dio Chrysostom (2nd cent. AD), Or.
1. 60.
9 So Consani 1993, 34–5: ‘...les dialectes anciens ont exercé, avant de disparaître
définitivement, une action complexe qui a produit des formes diversifiées de koiné
parlée.’
10 See also Consani 1993, 35–7.
11 The parallel between the Greek koine and modern Arabic has been drawn by
1978.
15 See the essays of Lloyd, Janson and Wright in Wright 1991b.
16 Though in De vulgari eloquentia the term grammatica refers to any literary language
(including classical Latin and Greek) whose rules have to be learned by instruction and
application: ‘non nisi per spatium temporis et studii assiduitatem regulamur et
doctrinamur in illa’, DVE 1.3.
Editions
Dante De vulgari eloquentia. Edited and translated by Steven Botterill, Cambridge
2005.
Boissonade J.F. Boissonade, Herodiani Partitiones, London 1819.
Gr. Gr. Grammatici Graeci. I,1: Dionysi Thracis Ars grammatica ed. G. Uhlig; I,3: Scholia
in Dioysii Thracis Artem grammaticam rec. A. Hilgard; II,1–3: Apollonii Dyscoli
quae supersunt rec. R. Schneider et G. Uhlig. III,1–2: Herodiani Technici reliquae
coll. A. Lentz; IV,1–2: Theodosii Alexandrini Canones, Georgii Choerobosci
Scholia, Sophronii Alexandrini Exerpta rec. A. Hilgard; Leipzig 1867–1910.
Bibliography
Brixhe, C.
1987 Essai sur le grec anatolien au début de notre ère, 2nd edn, Nancy.
1993 (ed.) La koiné grecque antique: une langue introuvable? Nancy.
2010 ‘Linguistic diversity in Asia Minor during the Empire: Koine and non-
Greek language’, in E. Bakker (ed.) A Companion to the Ancient Greek
Language, Chichester.
Brixhe, C. and Hodot, R.
1993 ‘A chacun sa koiné?’ in Brixhe 1993, 7–21
44
The koine: A new language for a new world
Bubenik, V.
1989 Hellenistic and Roman Greece as a Sociolinguistic Area, CILT 57, Amsterdam.
Consani, C.
1993 ‘La koiné et les dialectes grecs dans la documentation linguistique et la
réflexion métalinguistique des premiers siècles de notre ère’, in Brixhe
1993, 23–39.
Ferguson, C. A.
1959a ‘The Arabic Koine’, Language 35, 616–30 [repr. in Structuralist Studies in
Arabic Linguistics, Leiden 1997, 50–68].
1959b ‘Diglossia’, Word 15, 325–40.
Horrocks, G.
1997 Greek. A history of the language and its speakers, London.
Janson, T.
1991 ‘Language change and metalinguistic change: Latin to Romance and other
cases’, in Wright 1991b, 19–28.
2002 Speak. A short history of language. Oxford.
Lloyd, P. M.
1991 ‘On the names of languages (and other things)’, in Wright 1991b, 9–18.
López Eire, A.
1993 ‘De l’attique à la koiné’, in Brixhe 1993, 41–57.
Mazzocco, A.
1993 Linguistic Theories in Dante and the Humanists. Leiden.
Meillet, A.
1929 Aperçu d’une histoire de la langue grecque 3. Paris.
Morpugo Davies, A.
1987 ‘The Greek notion of dialect’, Verbum 10, 7–28 [repr. in Tom Harrison
(ed.) Greeks and Barbarians, London 2002, 153–171].
Siegel, J.
1985 ‘Koines and koineization’, Language in Society 14, 357–78.
Versteegh, K.
1986 ‘Latinitas, Hellenismos, ‘Arabiyya’, Historiographica Linguistica 13, 425–48
[repr. in D. J. Taylor (ed.) The History of Linguistics in the Classical Period
(Amsterdam 1987), 251–74].
2002 ‘Alive or dead? The status of the standard language’, in J. N. Adams et al.
(eds) Bilingualism in Ancient Society (Oxford), 52–74.
Wright, R.
1991a ‘The conceptual distinction between Latin and Romance: invention or
evolution?’, in Wright 1991b, 103–13.
1991b (ed.) Latin and the Romance Languages in the Early Middle Ages, London,
103–13.
45
3
Richard Hunter
The so-called Letter of Aristeas (henceforth Ar )1 is not only one of the few
surviving pieces of extended literary prose from Ptolemaic Alexandria, but
its subject – the translation of the Hebrew sacred texts into Greek and,
more generally, the interaction of Greek and Hebrew traditions and culture
– places it very firmly at the centre of the ‘creation of a Hellenistic world’
and of how that world was imagined by those who actually lived in it.
In the form of a ‘letter’ addressed to one Philokrates, Ar narrates the
story of how, at the instigation of Demetrios of Phaleron, Ptolemy II
Philadelphos brought to Alexandria the best scholars from Jerusalem to
produce an authoritative Greek version of Hebrew scripture. Although
debate still rages, it is now generally assumed that Ar is the work of an
Alexandrian Jew with good knowledge of the workings of the Ptolemaic
administration and is to be dated to the second century BC; Ar thus
purports to offer an eyewitness account, by a Greek (rather than a Jewish)
courtier, of something which happened at least a century and a half before
the work was, as far as we can tell, actually written. It would, I think, be fair
to say that Ar does not enjoy a high reputation: Günther Zuntz, who shed
important light on Ar in two seminal studies, denies the author even
‘moderate imagination’ and castigates the ‘helplessness evidenced where
[the author] had no substantial tradition to follow’,2 though Erich Gruen’s
stomach is strong enough for him to call it ‘occasionally entertaining’ and
even to find something like humour lurking previously unnoticed.3 In her
recent study, Sylvie Honigman calls ‘close to unreadable for modern
readers’ the account of how Philadelphos posed ethical and political
questions to the Jewish scholars who had come to Alexandria to produce
the text for the Royal Library.4 Whether her explanation for this (‘changes
in literary taste’) is sufficient is at least open to question. Why Ar is not, for
most people, an easy read could actually be an interesting question to which
more attention might well be paid by those concerned with the history of
literary form and reading practices. Scholarship on Ar has, however,
perhaps not unreasonably been more concerned with issues of readership
47
Richard Hunter
and purpose, and of what we can actually learn from the work about the
history of the Ptolemaic Library and of the Alexandrian Jewish community.
Whether or not Ar is a ‘real letter’ is essentially a non-question, but the
ethical and quasi-private turn of this essay to Philokrates is something to
be considered in the context of the making of the Hellenistic world and the
particular quality of the writing and ideas it produced. Philokrates is chosen
as the addressee for a number of explicit reasons, but prominent among
these are his virtuous ‘love of learning’ (1–2, cf. 322), his concern for his
ψυχή (soul) (5), and the ‘impulse towards the καλόν (noble)’ (6) which he
shares with ‘Aristeas’. History, and reading history, are now directed
towards individual improvement. The prologue of Ar has often been
connected with certain trends in Hellenistic historiography, and we may
be reminded, in particular, of Polybius’ distinctions between types of
potential reader and of the reasons why one might read history; one can
read for pleasure or one can be, like Philokrates, φιλοµαθής (fond of
learning).5 Like Thucydides’ History, the programmatic chapters of which
Ar seems to echo,6 and indeed like Polybius’ Histories, Ar is written with
τὸ χρήσιµον (the useful) and τὸ ὠφέλιµον (the beneficial) in mind, but it is
now what is ‘useful’ for the improvement of the individual mind and soul
which is important. The encomium of paideia with which the prologue
concludes tells us much about the world which produced Ar, and it is a
world which is neither exclusively Greek nor exclusively Jewish: ‘neither
the charm of gold nor any other of the embellishments prized by the
vainglorious confers as great benefit as education and attention devoted to
culture’.7
Whether or not anything remotely like the events of the ‘Letter’ did
indeed happen under Philadelphos (or indeed under any Ptolemy) is a
matter of perhaps fiercer debate now than for a long time. It is easy enough
to point to elements of the narrative which seem ‘unhistorical’ – thus, for
example, there were very good reasons to include both Demetrios of
Phaleron and Philadelphos, the two figures most closely connected with
the legends of the Library, in the story of the translation, although most
scholars accept that Demetrios’ scholarly activity in Alexandria did not
outlive Ptolemy I Soter 8 – but the historicity of the basic structure of the
story remains a thornier problem. The linguistic and other arguments in
favour of the historicity of some translation of Hebrew books into Greek
in the first half of the third century are not to be lightly dismissed, and it
cannot at any rate be doubted that translations existed by the middle of
the second century. So too, the old view that, regardless of when the
Hebrew scriptures were first translated into Greek, Ar misrepresents the
procedure at least in presenting it as driven by the concerns of, and
48
The letter of Aristeas
49
Richard Hunter
the city’s foundation legends (cf., e.g., Alexander Romance 1.32). Dio
Chrysostom’s famously double-edged encomium of the Alexandrians
makes them by implication the true mercantile heirs of Alexander who
control ‘the whole oikoumene- ’ – their trade reaches even to the Indian Sea
and ‘the most remote tribes’ (as did Alexander’s conquests); the world is
now a polis writ large: ‘[Alexandria] is like the agora of a single city which
gathers all men into the same space, shows them to each other, and – as far
as possible – makes them members of the same race (ὁµοφύλους)’ (Dio
32.36).11 It is perhaps not too anachronistic to see something very like this
rhetoric informing the emphasis in Ar on the intellectual, moral, and
religious ‘kinship’ of Greeks and Jews (even if Jewish culture always
remains one step ahead).
In Ar Demetrios is given the wherewithal ‘to bring together (συναγαγεῖν),
if possible, all the books in the world’ (9); this is the intellectual heritage of
Alexander, just as the city’s trade represented his mercantile heritage.
Demetrios is however represented, not unreasonably, as being particularly
concerned with books (such as the Jewish holy books) which ‘deserve’ a
place in the Library; intellectual collection can never be divorced from
selection and judgement.12 So too, the High Priest worries about the safe
return of the Jewish scholars because he knew ‘how the king in his love of
excellence regarded it as a very great gain, wherever he heard of a man
surpassing others in culture and intellect, to summon him to himself’ (124);
the High Priest had heard that the King believed that ‘by having about
himself just and prudent men he would have the greatest protection for
his kingdom, for friends frankly advise what is best’ (125). The gathering
of (the best) books and the gathering of wise men are thus parts of the
same project, in more ways than one. These elements of what we might call
‘the Alexandrian myth’, such as we have seen it in, say, Dio Chrysostom,
are in fact familiar from the earliest days. Callimachus’ Aitia, which gestures
both towards a potential claim to embody ‘all the rituals and stories of the
world’ and which demonstrates the inevitability of selection, is the key text
here, both in its overall shape and in particular episodes. We may note, on
the one hand, Pollis the Athenian’s transplantation of Athenian rituals
to Alexandria (fr. 178 Pfeiffer = 89 Massimilla),13 a passage in which
Alexandria, where the scene is all but certainly set, is again imagined as a
place where everyone and every culture sooner or later washes up and is
then preserved. On the other hand, we have the poet’s insistence (fr. 43
Pfeiffer = 50 Massimilla) that the Muses fill in a gap in his otherwise pretty
comprehensive knowledge of the foundation stories of the cities of Sicily:
συµπλήρωσις – the filling in of gaps – is also what drives Demetrios’
activities in the Library (cf. Ar 29). Much has been written recently about
50
The letter of Aristeas
how the Ptolemies’ claim to be the true heirs to Alexander, and to the
Greek heritage more generally, was bolstered not merely by their
possession of Alexander’s body (cf. Strabo 17.1.8) but also by their equally
displayed cultural patronage, most visible in the institutions of the Museum
and Library;14 the politics of Ptolemaic cultural activity are now firmly on
the scholarly agenda. Moreover, Ptolemy and his Library were not to be
restricted to Greek culture – they were, again like Alexander himself, both
discerning and potentially omnivorous.
Much has been written in recent years – some, but by no means all,
stimulated by Foucault – about the organisation of knowledge in historical
societies and hence about the library as an image of the state or kosmos
(Umberto Eco’s The Name of the Rose is the best known popularisation of
the idea); classification and categorisation are needed not just for library
books, but for the successful management of whole states. As for the
Ptolemaic Library, ‘there is something imperialist in the treatment of the
books themselves’, as Andrew Erskine put it.15 The possessions of the
Library, no less than Alexander’s body and Pollis’ Attic rituals, required
‘preservation’, or (in the words of Ar ) ‘royal care’, πρόνοια βασιλική (30).
Philadelphos’ concern for the repair of books ‘which had fallen into
disrepair’ (29) perhaps suggests that already here the Library is an image,
or microcosm, of the whole state, which flourishes under the king’s
benevolent eye. Aspects of the presentation of the monarchy in Ar may
indeed remind us of Theocritus’ ‘Encomium for Philadelphos’: numbers
and stock counts matter to Philadelphos (Ar 10, cf. Theocritus 17.82–4);16
those he watches over ‘go about their business in quiet’, as Theocritus puts
it (17.97), and he not only keeps safe the stock he inherited, but also adds
to it (Theocritus 17.104–5). Collection is, moreover, not necessarily an end
in itself: what is collected is to be used for the greater glory of the gods (or
of God) and of the people under Philadelphos’ control (Theocritus
17.106–11). As for Ptolemaic scholarship, the hallmark Alexandrian search
for authentic, original texts, whether on book-hunting expeditions or
through the arts of textual criticism, which is here extended to the
translation of the Hebrew scriptures, speaks to the centralisation of power;
not for Ptolemaic scholars of Greek literature the minefield of allegorical
interpretation which might allow the creation of meaning ‘at the point of
reception’ and hence offer space to a multiplicity of authoritative voices.
Although the modes of Jewish exegesis on display in Ar are very different,
here too the Jewish scholars produce an agreed translation, and there is a
very strong sense that the ‘reading and clarification of each passage’
(ἡ ἀνάγνωσις καὶ ἡ ἑκάστου διασάφησις, 305) led also to agreed ‘meaning’;
translation and interpretation cannot be separated. Just as no further
51
Richard Hunter
52
The letter of Aristeas
the people who had educated all the Greeks and the barbarians, when
general education (ἐγκύκλιος παιδεία) was disappearing because of the
continuous disturbances which occurred in the period of the successors
of Alexander’ (FGrHist 246 F1 = Athenaeus 4.184b-c); the words of the
Thucydidean Pericles, ‘In summary, I declare that our whole city is an
education (παίδευσις) for Greece...’ (2.41), had already been echoed more
than once by Isocrates.21 The text of Athenaeus perhaps leaves uncertain
whether Andron and others imagined two periods in which Alexandria
saved the paideia of the world – one under the early Ptolemies and the other
(paradoxically) dating from the reign of Ptolemy VIII, whose expulsions of
intellectuals fostered the growth of paideia all over the rest of the Greek
world – but the link between political peace and ‘culture’ (understood very
broadly) which underlies this historical narrative is one which we recognise
from early Ptolemaic rhetoric, such as (again) Theocritus’ Encomium of
Ptolemy Philadelphos, and one which was to be taken over by Octavian/
Augustus.
The question of what sort of imaginative reconstruction Ar represents
can hardly be divorced from questions of readership. Broadly speaking,
the debate has been a tussle between a Greek readership and a Jewish one.22
For those who favour the former, the point of Ar is to introduce Greeks
to Jewish culture and wisdom, both of which had won the admiration
of so cultured a monarch as Philadelphos. If, on the other hand, the
readership is primarily Jewish, the point will be to make clear that the Greek
Bible (or a particular version of it) carries the same authority as the Hebrew
scriptures themselves and that those who read only it, and not the Hebrew
original, will not be missing anything important. The story of the translation
and its subsequent public promulgation seems, on the one hand, to have
been modelled on the Exodus story of the origin of the Hebrew Law itself; 23
on the other hand, most scholars now also stress the influence of the
paradigm of Alexandrian Greek scholarship, and particularly scholarship
on Homer. In her recent study, Sylvie Honigman stresses that the authority
of the Greek Bible is commended in Ar in much the same way as
Aristarchus’ text of Homer seems to have become ‘canonical’ within a very
short time; both the Hebrew scriptures and the text of Homer are now
‘corrected’ (διηκριβωµένα, cf. Ar 31, 310) and hence authoritative. Whatever
we may think of this account of the dissemination of the Aristarchan
edition, on any showing Ar’s narrative of the process of translation does
seem to make (rather confused) use of the Alexandrian scholarly practice,
which was not of course a universal practice, of the comparison of different
texts in order to arrive at the best, most authentic version;24 the existing
Hebrew texts have not yet been submitted to such collation, or, in the
53
Richard Hunter
courtly phrase of Demetrios (cf. above p. 000), ‘they have not received
royal attention’ (Ar 30). Here we might be tempted to think that Ar has
more than one audience in mind; Greek or Jewish paradigms can be
emphasised in accordance with the needs of different audiences.25 The
peculiar mixture of stemmatics and collective discussion, which is
represented by shutting the Jewish scholars up on an island to get on with
their business, looks to more than one set of exegetical practices.26
Similar conclusions may be drawn from the long episode of the sympotic
instruction of Ptolemy by the Jewish sages.27 The political questions posed
by the king put flesh on the idea of Ptolemy as god’s representative and
reflection here on earth, an idea which was (inter alia) very powerful in
Ptolemaic ideology 28 and in Hellenistic kingship theory more generally; ‘as
God benefits (εὖ ἐργάζεται) all men, so you, in imitation of Him, benefit
those under you’ (281, cf. 190) is as clear a statement as one could wish.
Some of what the sages advise the king hardly differs from, say, what
Pindar advises Hieron or the terms in which Theocritus praises Ptolemy,29
and no reader, Greek or Jewish, is going to find material for surprise here.
Some bits of the sages’ advice even sound like Greek gnomic wisdom:
µὴ πολλῶν ὀρέγου, ‘do not aim for [too] much’ (211), τῶν ἀνεφίκτων µὴ
ἐπιθύµει, ‘do not desire the unreachable’ (223). Philadelphos is, moreover,
certainly depicted as sympotikos, if not in quite the same way as in other
texts (cf. Theocritus 14.60–4); he is even depicted as a Plutarch before his
time – concerned with the appropriate conduct of symposia (286). Be that
as it may, the whole episode reveals a union of philosophical, religious and
political power which works to confirm both Philadelphos and the sages
in their respective, and mutually inter-connected, spheres. Other ways of
writing such a scene were certainly available. We may contrast Philostratus’
later account, written at a time when history provided more than one model
of a ‘bad king’, of a dinner of the Indian sages which was attended both by
Apollonius of Tyana and by the local Indian king, who used to consult the
sages on all matters.30 Philostratus depicts the king as someone who does
not know how to behave at symposia (he drinks too much, Life of Apollonius
3.30.1) and as someone who is too self-important to take advantage of the
presence of such wise men; Philadelphos, by contrast, is the model of an
enlightened king who constantly seeks self-improvement.
I have labelled Ar an ‘imaginative reconstruction’, and that would seem
to imply a view about how it was regarded by its first readers (whoever
they were). The status of Ar’s claims to truth has always been at the heart
of modern argument about the nature of the work. Sylvie Honigman argues
that Ar does indeed present a ‘true’ account, but that we have to
understand that truth, reasonably enough, within the conventions of
54
The letter of Aristeas
55
Richard Hunter
I suppose that everyone likely to get hold of this account will find it
incredible. But to falsify concerning matters extant in writing is not what
one should do; indeed, if I were to pass over any point, it would be an
impiety in a subject of this sort. But I describe (διασαφοῦµεν) the event
exactly as it happened (ὡς γέγονεν), solemnly acquitting myself of all error.
Accordingly I endeavoured to procure particulars of what transpired from
those persons who transcribe the proceedings (ἕκαστα τῶν γινοµένων) at
the king’s audiences and in his banquets, so impressed was I with the power
of [the sages’] discourse. For it is the custom, as you surely are aware, to
record in writing everything said and done from the moment the king begins
to give audience until he retires to bed – a good and useful practice. On the
day following, before audiences commence, the actions taken and the
remarks uttered on the previous day are read through and if any procedure
is incorrectly recorded it receives rectification (διόρθωσις). As I have said,
then, I obtained accurate information on all particulars from the archives,
and have recorded it in writing because I know how you cherish useful
learning. Letter of Aristeas 296–300
Here again we have a Thucydidean concern with offering a clear account
of ‘what actually happened’, together with a Thucydidean painstakingness
for finding this out; the language of detail, ἕκαστα τῶν γινοµένων, picks up a
language of historiography (and epic poetry) familiar from Aristotle
onwards.35 The appeal to written records offers a form of ‘authorising
fiction (‘Beglaubigungsapparat’)’, which however is ambiguous in its
implications.36 It is not, I hope, irreverent to be reminded of the scene
between Peisetairos and the oracle-monger in Aristophanes’ Birds (λαβὲ τὸ
βιβλίον...); ‘if you don’t believe me, go and consult the records’ is a challenge
which few readers are likely to take up. ‘I know that what I have written will
seem incredible’ may be a device for emphasising the truth of the account,37
an instance of protesting too much, or a rather cheeky piece of self-
knowingness. It is perhaps helpful to remember Lucian’s protestations in
the True Histories, particularly in his account of life on the moon: ‘I am
reluctant to tell you about the eyes [of the moon-people], lest someone
think that I am lying because the account seems incredible...anyone who
does not believe that this is a true account, will realise that I am speaking
the truth if ever he himself gets to the moon’ (1.25–6).
What in fact places Ar firmly in the mainstream of Greek Hellenistic
prose is its knowing anxiety about genre; it is a work filled with ‘effects of
the real’, one of which of course is the simple fact that it is structured as
an address to a single individual, and the history of its reception shows just
how convincing (and how distracting) those effects have been. Here, as
much as anywhere, it is a Hellenistic creation, as it also calls into creation
a Hellenistic world of the imagination.
56
The letter of Aristeas
Notes
This chapter is here reproduced much as it was delivered in Edinburgh; footnotes, on
what is a very thorny subject, have been kept to an absolute minimum. It will not need
to be stressed that I am completely unqualified to enter the debate on most of the
central issues concerning the Letter, particularly as they touch the history and practices
of Hellenistic Judaism. My purpose in allowing this paper to go further than the oral
presentation is rather to prompt classicists, particularly the large number currently
working on Hellenistic and later prose narratives, to pay it more attention than they
have hitherto.
1 There are accessible texts in Hadas 1951, Pelletier 1962, and Calabi 1995; English
translations are available in Hadas 1951 and Shutt 1985. The fullest study is now
Honigman 2003, but Calabi 1995 remains a valuable bibliographical resource, and cf.
also Fraser 1972, II 972–3 and Birnbaum 2004, 131–8. Fraser 1972, I 696–703 offers
a succinct introduction to the work and its problems (and see also ibid. II 970–2 on
the date of the work). A case for believing in the essential historicity of the narrative
of Ar has been stated by Collins 2000.
2 Zuntz 1959, 110, 125 [= 1972, 127, 142].
3 Gruen 1998, 218–21.
4 Honigman 2003, 18.
5 Cf. esp. Polybius 7.7.8; for discussion and bibliography cf. Hunter 1994, 1070–1.
6 Cf. below p. 000.
7 This and all subsequent translations are taken from Hadas 1951, modified where
appropriate
8 Cf., e.g., Honigman 2003, 88–90. The opposite case is fundamental to Collins
2000.
9 Selden 1998 is in part a stimulating discussion of this.
10 Achilles Tatius 5.1 is the most sustained display of these paradoxes.
11 For other aspects of this passage cf. Trapp 2004.
12 A similar phenomenon is the shifting distinction between the interest of the
Library and its scholars in all Greek books and their particular interest in those authors
who came eventually to form the lists of ‘the included’ (helpful summary in Easterling
1996).
13 For discussion and bibliography on this passage cf. Fantuzzi and Hunter 2004,
122–30.
15 Erskine 1995, 45.
16 Cf. Hunter 2003, 158.
17 The testimonia are gathered by Platthy 1968, 97–108. For arguments on both
sides cf. Allen 1913, Merkelbach 1952, Davison 1955, Pfeiffer 1968, 6–8, Canfora
1987, 185–6.
18 The story would illustrate a kind of reverse of the pattern for which Honigman
2003 argues in the case of the Hebrew Bible. A rival account had Peisistratos gathering
together four wise men for this task.
19 Cf. Hunter 2003, 37.
20 Cf. Honigman 2003, 23–4 on the description of Jerusalem and Aristotle, Politics
Book 7.
57
Richard Hunter
21 On these texts cf., e.g., Pfeiffer 1968, 252–3, Whitmarsh 2001, 7–9.
22 Gruen 1998, 221 considers the matter now clearly decided in favour of a Jewish
readership: ‘those Gentiles who happened to read the work would not have found it
particularly edifying’.
23 Cf., e.g., Orlinsky 1989, 542–8.
24 Zuntz 1959 is fundamental here.
25 I am conscious that this observation is not too far from one modern view,
particularly associated with scholars such as Ludwig Koenen, Susan Stephens, and
Dan Selden, of how Egyptian motifs, or what are alleged to be such, resonate in
Alexandrian Greek poetry.
26 Honigman’s claim (2003, 46–7) that this collective enterprise would rather have
recalled the work of ‘Alexandrian grammarians’ seems at best doubtful; Greek scholars
notoriously worked alone and notoriously quarrelled with each other.
27 Cf. esp. Murray 1967.
28 Cf. Hunter 2003, 94–5.
29 With the stress on justice (193, 209, 212, 291 etc.) cf. Pythian 1.86; with the
importance of benefactions and the proper use of wealth (205, 226) cf. Pythian 1.91;
with the importance of truthfulness (206) cf. Pythian 1.87.
30 It is perhaps noteworthy that Murray 1967, 347 n. 3 compared Alexander’s
verisimilitude with patent fiction without betraying the least awareness of contradiction
or absurdity’.
33 Here, in particular, I have benefited from, but unwisely disregarded, the proper
described in these chapters for the time of Philadelphos is not what is at issue here.
37 Cf. the phrases studied by Stinton 1976.
Bibliography
Allen, T. W.
1913 ‘Pisistratus and Homer’ CQ 7, 33–51.
Birnbaum, E
2004 ‘Portrayals of the wise and virtuous in Alexandrian Jewish works: Jews’
perceptions of themselves and others’, in W.V. Harris and G. Ruffini (eds)
Ancient Alexandria between Egypt and Greece, Leiden and Boston, 125–60.
Calabi, F.
1995 Lettera di Aristea a Filocrate, Milan.
Canfora, L.
1987 The Vanished Library, London.
Carleton Paget, J.
2004 ‘Jews and Christians in ancient Alexandria from the Ptolemies to Caracalla’,
in Hirst and Silk 2004, 143–66.
58
The letter of Aristeas
Collins, N. L.
2000 The Library in Alexandria and the Bible in Greek, Leiden.
Davison, J.A.
1955 ‘Peisistratus and Homer’, TAPA 86, 1–21.
Dettori, E.
2004 ‘Appunti sul “Banchetto di Pollis” (Call. fr. 178 Pf.)’, in R. Pretagostini and
E. Dettori (eds) La cultura ellenistica. L’opera letteraria e l’esegesi antica, Rome,
33–63.
Easterling, P.
1996 ‘Canon’, in S. Hornblower and A. Spawforth (eds) The Oxford Classical
Dictionary, 3rd edition, Oxford, 286.
Erskine, A.
1995 ‘Culture and power in Ptolemaic Egypt: the Museum and Library of
Alexandria’, Greece & Rome 42, 38–48.
Fantuzzi, M. and Hunter, R.
2004 Tradition and Innovation in Hellenistic Poetry, Cambridge.
Fraser, P.M.
1972 Ptolemaic Alexandria, Oxford.
Gruen, E.S.
1998 Heritage and Hellenism, Berkeley.
Hadas, M.
1951 Aristeas to Philocrates (Letter of Aristeas), New York.
Hirst, A. and Silk, M. (eds)
2004 Alexandria, Real and Imagined, Aldershot, Hants.
Honigman, S.
2003 The Septuagint and Homeric Scholarship in Alexandria, London.
Hunter, R.
1994 ‘History and historicity in the romance of Chariton’, in W. Haase and H.
Temporini (eds) Aufstieg und Niedergang der römischen Welt II 34.2, Berlin and
New York, 1055–86 [= Hunter 2008, 737–74].
2003 Theocritus. Encomium of Ptolemy Philadelphus, Berkeley.
2005 ‘Generic consciousness in the Orphic Argonautica?’ in M. Paschalis (ed.)
Roman and Greek Imperial Epic, Rethymnon, 149–68 [= Hunter 2008,
681–99].
2008 On Coming After. Studies in Post-Classical Greek literature and its reception, Berlin
and New York.
Johnson, S. R.
2004 Historical Fictions and Hellenistic Jewish Identity, Berkeley.
Kaesser, C.
2005 ‘The poet and the “polis”: the Aetia as didactic poem’, in M. Horster and
C. Reitz (eds) Wissensvermittlung in dichterischer Gestalt, Stuttgart, 95–114.
Maehler, H.
2004 ‘Alexandria, the Mouseion, and cultural identity’, in Hirst and Silk 2004,
1–14.
Merkelbach, R.
1952 ‘Die pisistratische Redaktion der homerischen Gedichte’, Rheinisches
Museum 95, 23–37.
59
Richard Hunter
Murray, O.
1967 ‘Aristeas and Ptolemaic kingship’ Journal of Theological Studies 18, 337–71.
1987 ‘The Letter of Aristeas’ in B. Virgilio (ed.) Studi ellenistici II, Pisa, 15–29.
Orlinsky, H. M.
1989 ‘The Septuagint and its Hebrew text’, in W. D. Davies and L. Finkelstein
(eds) The Cambridge History of Judaism II, Cambridge, 534–62.
Pelletier, A.
1962 Lettre d’Aristée à Philocrate, Paris.
Pfeiffer, R.
1968 History of Classical Scholarship, Oxford.
Platthy, J.
1968 Sources on the Earliest Greek Libraries, Amsterdam.
Selden, D.
1998 ‘Alibis’ Classical Antiquity 17, 289–412.
Shutt, R. J. H.
1985 ‘Letter of Aristeas’, in J. H. Charlesworth (ed.) The Old Testament
Pseudepigrapha Vol. 2, London, 7–34.
Stinton, T. C. W.
1976 ‘“Si credere dignum est”: some expressions of disbelief in Euripides and
others’, PCPS 22, 60–89 [= Collected Papers on Greek Tragedy, Oxford 1990,
236–64].
Too, Y. L.
1998 The Idea of Ancient Literary Criticism, Oxford.
Trapp, M. B.
2004 ‘Images of Alexandria in the writings of the Second Sophistic’, in Hirst
and Silk 2004, 113–32.
Whitmarsh, T.
2001 Greek Literature and the Roman Empire, Oxford.
2004 Ancient Greek Literature, Cambridge.
Zuntz, G.
1959 ‘Aristeas studies II: Aristeas on the translation of the Torah’, Journal of
Semitic Studies 4, 109–26 [= Opuscula Selecta (Manchester 1972) 126–43].
60
PART II
Joseph Roisman
1. Introduction
The history of the events following Alexander’s death is in many respects
the history of the individual careers of his successors. This is the legacy of
our sources, which focus primarily on prominent men, as well as of the
scholars who are dependent on these sources. This chapter endeavours to
deal with the Macedonian masses rather than their elite in the post-
Alexander era. I have chosen the case of the Macedonian troops known as
the argyraspides, or Silver Shields, because, more than any other group, they
represented Macedonian identity, tradition, and military prowess for the
sources. The Silver Shields can also tell us much about the relationships
between the troops and their generals, and in particular about the
aspirations and expectations of the veterans of Alexander’s campaigns.1
Looking at the history of this period from the veterans’ perspective is
not an easy task. This is due to the historian of the era, Hieronymos of
Kardia, whose history is now lost but which has informed the best extant
sources on our subject, especially, Diodorus of Sicily, books 18–20, and
Plutarch’s biography of Eumenes. Hieronymos’ strengths and weaknesses
have been well analysed by a variety of scholars, and in particular by Jane
Hornblower in her book Hieronymus of Cardia. I wish here to highlight two
characteristics of his narrative, which have been paid too little attention, or
even ignored, and have an impact on my topic. One is Hieronymos’ elitist
approach to history. Like Thucydides, Hieronymos gathered information
from many informants, from simple soldiers to generals. But unlike his
61
Joseph Roisman
predecessor, who often discusses politics and power from the politai’s point
of view, Hieronymos was much more interested in what powerful men
did, said, and thought. Like Thucydides, however, Hieronymos is fond of
distinguishing between alleged and real reasons, as he discerned them,
normally reflecting the actors’ self-interest. Yet in spite of the allure of his
utilitarian approach to actions and interactions, there is no guarantee that
his identification of people’s underlying aims is accurate, given that motives
are hard to decipher in any period.2
Hieronymos is also responsible for the sources’ favourable portrait of
Eumenes, the man with whom the Silver Shields were mostly associated.
Both men were born to Greek families from Kardia, and Hieronymos
served under Eumenes and may even have been his relative. The story of
Eumenes can be described here only briefly. He had served Alexander as
chief secretary and occasionally as a military commander; in fact, he was the
only Greek in Alexander’s army to command a Macedonian unit. After
Alexander’s death, he threw in his lot with Perdikkas, which proved a poor
choice. While in Asia Minor, Eumenes defeated the anti-Perdikkan general
Neoptolemaios in 320, and then, to everyone’s surprise, the respected and
popular Macedonian marshal, Krateros. The death of the latter in battle
allowed Eumenes’ enemies to pass a decree in the royal army assembly that
condemned Eumenes to death and held him responsible for the death of
Krateros and presumably other Macedonians. In early 319, Antigonos
Monophthalmos, who had been given the task of eliminating the Perdikkan
forces, defeated Eumenes in battle, besieged him in the city of Nora, and
then let him go, probably after making Eumenes beholden to him.
Eumenes managed to collect a force of about 2,500 men, made up mostly
of local recruits, and then accepted the offer of the regent Polyperchon
and the Macedonian kings to become their chief commander in Asia
against Antigonos.3
I shall discuss the history of the Silver Shields before they joined
Eumenes with equal brevity. Scholars have persuasively shown that
originally they had been Alexander’s hypaspists – elite units of the
Macedonian phalanx – and at that time probably already numbered 3,000
men. They were given the name Silver Shields no later than Alexander’s
Indian campaign. The Silver Shields played an active role in the riots against
Antipater when he arrived at Triparadeisos in 320 to become the regent of
the kingdom. Antipater sent them with their commander Antigenes, and
presumably Teutamos as well, to bring money from the treasury in Susa to
the sea. Their history from then until they met Eumenes in Kilikia in the
summer of 318 and became a dominant force in his army is uncertain. They
are nowhere attested, as is commonly assumed, to have served as the
62
The silver shields, Eumenes and their historian
guardians of the royal treasury at Kyinda in Kilikia (which was well fortified
in any case) before they were instructed by Polyperchon to join Eumenes.
It is unknown, however, what they were doing in Kilikia at that time. Perhaps
their commanders were waiting for the right opportunity or employer.
They certainly became attractive to many generals once Eumenes got them.4
63
Joseph Roisman
battlefield. Judging by the way Eumenes planned his battles and their
ultimate results, the Silver Shields were neither capable of deciding or
winning a battle on their own nor expected to. From the time of Alexander,
it had been the cavalry that delivered the main blow to the enemy, and
Eumenes followed this battle plan. Prior to his meeting with the Silver
Shields, Eumenes relied chiefly on his cavalry both in defeat and victory,
and not because he trusted the loyalty of his infantry less. In the battle of
Orkynia in 319, which he had lost to Antigonos, Eumenes had 5,000
cavalry, as opposed to Antigonos’ 2,000, and 20,000 infantry, as opposed
to Antigonos’ 10,000. His infantrymen even included Macedonian veterans,
who fully supported him. Eumenes, however, pinned his hopes on the
cavalry, which deserted him during the battle.9 He continued to rely on
cavalry, as well as on elephants, after he had incorporated the Silver Shields
into his forces, probably because Antigonos enjoyed a significant numerical
advantage in infantry but less of an advantage in cavalry. This was especially
true of the battle of Paraitakene- , where Antigonos’ phalanx numbered
28,000 men, as opposed to Eumenes’ 17,000 (in addition to 18,000 light-
armed troops). The gap in cavalry was less pronounced: Antigonos had
8,500 horsemen and 65 elephants, as opposed to Eumenes’ 6,300
horsemen and 114 elephants (see below). Diodorus says that the right wing,
which Eumenes commanded, had the best of the cavalry, and that he
trusted these forces the most.10 Clearly, Eumenes’ expectations of his
phalanx, including the Silver Shields, were lower (Fig. 1).
At Paraitakene- , Eumenes’ phalanx won a convincing victory over
Antigonos’ phalanx, but his cavalry failed to destroy the opposing cavalry.
Nevertheless, Eumenes did not change his tactics. He continued to rely
on his cavalry and elephants to achieve victory, even though the sizes of
the opposing armies became more balanced. At the battle of Gabênê,
Antigonos’ phalanx had been reduced from 28,000 to 22,000, while
Eumenes presumably retained his phalanx of 17,000 and even increased his
light-armed force by about 1,700 men (totalling 36,700 troops). In cavalry,
Antigonos augmented his force from 8,500 to 9,000, as opposed to
Eumenes’ 6,000 (300 horsemen less than in Paraitakene-). The number of
their elephants remained unchanged. Yet neither general changed his plan
of deciding the battle with the cavalry, aided by the elephants. This is
especially telling in the case of Eumenes, because he had the best infantry
in the Macedonian world, who had proven their loyalty to him up to this
point. He also never led the Silver Shields into battle in person, but left it
to their commanders. Excellent as the Silver Shields were in fighting, and
as much as they caught the sources’ attention, neither they nor the entire
phalanx were supposed to decide the battle.11
64
The silver shields, Eumenes and their historian
65
Joseph Roisman
The place of the Silver Shields in the lines of battles is of interest too. In
both battles, Eumenes put his elephants and light-armed troops in the
front, and, like Alexander, his cavalry on his wings, with the infantry at the
centre. Antigonos arranged his troops similarly. In both battles, the cavalry
fought cavalry and the infantry, infantry, fairly independently from one
another. Finally, in both battles, Eumenes’ phalanx soundly defeated
Antigonos’ phalanx, with credit given solely to the Silver Shields. Thus
Diodorus reports that at Paraitakene-, the opposing phalanxes fought each
other for a long time, with many falling on both sides, but no one could
face the Silver Shields, who excelled in daring and skill due to their long
service. Even though there were only 3,000 of them, they became the edge,
or spearhead (στὸµα) of the entire army. In this battle, Antigonos lost 3,700
infantrymen, as opposed to Eumenes’ 540. These accolades deserve
scrutiny.12
At Paraitakene- , Eumenes arranged the phalanx from right to left, as
follows. Next to his stronger right wing, which he commanded himself,
he put over 3,000 hypaspists. Next to them were over 3,000 Silver Shields.
Both groups were led by Teutamos and Antigenes, probably respectively.
Next to the Silver Shields, Eumenes placed an ethnically mixed force of
5,000 troops, who had Macedonian equipment, and he completed the
phalanx’s line with more than 6,000 mercenaries, who stood next to his
weaker left wing, which was composed of cavalry.13 Generals placed their
best troops where they expected the brunt of the battle to be, which was
traditionally on the right of the phalanx. This was where the hypaspists
stood, but not the Silver Shields. Indeed, Eumenes followed Alexander
here, who had positioned the hypaspists on the right of the phalanx and
next to the cavalry in all of his major battles. I agree with scholars who
regard Eumenes’ hypaspists as his own creation. The information we have
on the composition of his forces up to this battle excludes the identification
of them, or of most of them, with Macedonian veterans.14
To ascertain which of Antigonos’ infantry the Silver Shields and the
hypaspists faced, it is best to reconstruct the opposing phalanxes from the
hills on Eumenes’ left, which can serve as an anchor point. Eumenes
arranged his left wing, made up of 3,300 horsemen, starting from high
ground in the hills. The mercenaries, the Macedonian-equipped troops,
the Silver Shields, and the hypaspists were stationed next to them, from left
to right. Antigonos drew up his lines after observing Eumenes’ battle order.
This meant that the right end of his right wing paralleled the left corner of
Eumenes’ left wing and did not extend beyond it to outflank Eumenes on
the right, since the hills acted as a barrier. Antigonos’ right had about 3,600
cavalry, which only slightly overlapped Eumenes’ 3,300 horsemen. We can
66
The silver shields, Eumenes and their historian
assume, thus, that the opposing phalanxes, which were arranged next to
their respective cavalry, stretched to the left from roughly parallel starting
lines. As shown in Figure 1, this meant that the Silver Shields faced
Antigonos’ 8,000 Macedonian-equipped troops, and the hypaspists faced
the same troops and 3,000 Lykians and Pamphylians.15
This picture would not change significantly even if Eumenes had
thinned and stretched his infantry lines. This is because Antigonos
advanced with his right and told the rest of his troops to form an oblique
line with him.16 His movement, then, put the forces facing the Silver Shields
and the hypaspists farther away and to the right. Richard Billow’s
suggestion that Eumenes compensated for his numerical inferiority by
placing many light-armed troops between the heavy infantry units and so
lengthened his lines is unattractive. The only attested light-armed troops in
this battle order were those who were placed alongside the elephants, and
filling gaps between various heavy infantry units with light-armed troops
would have weakened his front considerably. Indeed, forming a close line
provided protection against a numerically superior phalanx.17
If the above reconstruction is correct, it appears that the hypaspists
occupied the most dangerous position in the phalanx because they were
exposed to an attack from Antigonos’ 9,000 mercenaries and probably
from additional troops who overextended Eumenes’ phalanx. It required
that they either hold off the line or attack a much more numerous enemy,
with the danger of being outflanked. It was to the hypaspists’ credit that
Eumenes trusted them with such an important and vulnerable position,
reflecting the principle of using one’s better troops in (relative) proximity
to the general and where the hardest fighting was expected.
The same principle emerges from Antigonos’ line, where the
Macedonians were placed on the right side of his phalanx. Brian Bosworth
has argued that Antigonos deliberately avoided setting Macedonians against
Macedonians, both fearing that they might not fight each other and
because they were too precious to waste. But Macedonians had fought
Macedonians on previous occasions, and, by all indications, Paraitakene-
was supposed to be a decisive battle rather than a time to be sparing or
overly cautious. Antigonos’ dispositions were guided by the rule of putting
one’s strong units against the weaker units of the opposition. I think that
with the hypaspists at their side, it was easy for the Silver Shields to lead the
attack and play the ‘spearhead’ of the phalanx. Yet their charge cannot
have been devastating, because, by Diodorus’ own account, the opposing
phalanxes fought each other ‘for a long time’ (ἐφ’ ἱκανὸν µὲν χρόνον). In any
case, Eumenes seemed to have relied on the hypaspists, no less than on
the Silver Shields, to overcome or to repulse, Antigonos’ phalanx. Clearly,
67
Joseph Roisman
68
The silver shields, Eumenes and their historian
69
Joseph Roisman
they were excluded from the tent. Only the commanders took orders from
‘Alexander,’ sacrificed and made proskynesis to him, and sat in council in
‘his’ tent. Eumenes would use the same device later in Susiana, with similar
actors and audience, when other generals challenged his command.
Diodorus says that he called daily meetings of this council there, as if in a
democratic city.25 But since there was no popular assembly to discuss
its motions, the council’s purpose was to reach a consensus of the
kind practised in an oligarchy. Indeed, a story in Plutarch about the
Macedonians in Asia clamouring for the ailing Eumenes, and only
Eumenes, to lead them into battle, suggests their dissatisfaction with the
solution provided by the Alexander’s tent device, and that it was designed
to regulate Eumenes’ relationship with the elite.26
The veterans seem also to have been little troubled by Eumenes’ non-
Macedonian origin. Scholars have demonstrated that Eumenes’ problems
with the troops had mostly to do with obtaining funds and provisions,
rather than his Greek ethnicity.27 The ones said to resent, or make an issue
of, his non-Macedonian status were, most frequently, Eumenes’ rivals and
enemies, not the Macedonian troops. Later, after his loss to Antigonos at
Gabe-ne-, some Macedonian Silver Shields called him a ‘plague from the
Chersonese’. But taking this often-quoted abuse out of context does not
prove their bias against his Greek birth. Those who called him this were
echoing the propaganda of his enemies and seeking to justify handing him
over to Antigonos. Eumenes’ origins did not deter the veterans from
strongly supporting him, at least until the catastrophic loss of their goods
and families overwhelmed their loyalty (see below).28
The same can be said concerning the Macedonian resentment of
Eumenes for using Macedonians to kill Krateros and other fellow-
Macedonians in battle. The Macedonian troops’ reluctance to fight each
other was, at best, highly selective, and I do not know of a single veteran
who is recorded to have left his general because of the commander’s
violations of Macedonian solidarity. Indeed, the ones who charged
Eumenes with having Macedonian blood on his hands were his enemies
among the Macedonian commanders, not the troops. It were also the
generals, rather than the troops, who insisted that the latter should follow
their own decrees and respect the authority and power of their own
assembly, as in the case of Eumenes’ condemnation. The veterans who
fought with Eumenes before or after his meeting with the Silver Shields
repeatedly chose to ignore offers to kill him or desert his camp.29
This is not to say that the Silver Shields did not require persuasion to join
Eumenes (which shows again that the kings’ letters or the veterans’ respect
for Alexander and his house were insufficient to ensure obedience). Justin,
70
The silver shields, Eumenes and their historian
who fails to mention the story of Alexander’s tent, reports that Eumenes
overcame their reluctance to accept any commander but Alexander by
flattering and begging them. He praised them for their far-reaching
conquests and for making Alexander look so great.30 Undoubtedly, the
veterans had a high opinion of themselves and appreciated those who
confirmed it for them. In fact, their respect for Alexander’s memory was
to a significant degree an exercise in self-admiration. But I cannot share
the elitist presumption informing this story that has Eumenes easily
bamboozling the veterans with flattery and supplication.
71
Joseph Roisman
who put him under arrest. Antigonos first had some of Eumenes’ troops
executed, ordering Antigenes to be burned alive in a pit. Then, finally, after
consultations, he had Eumenes killed too. The Silver Shields got back their
baggage and joined Antigonos’ army. Later, however, Antigonos sent many
of them to serve with Sibyrtios, the satrap of Arachosia, and on various
garrison duties. According to Diodorus, he even instructed Sibyrtios to get
rid of them. Both Diodorus and other sources treat their new assignments
as retribution for their betrayal of Eumenes.32
I have omitted from this synopsis the many dramatic devices used by the
sources to highlight the despicable treachery of the Silver Shields.33 This
attitude dominates the ancient accounts and consequently much of the
scholarship. The way this story is told is also one of the most blatant
examples of an elitist approach to history.
Let us examine what happened. Eumenes’ cavalry and elephants had
been defeated. Although the Silver Shields had won a great victory over the
enemy phalanx, their loss of everything that was dear to them, namely,
their savings, their loved ones, and their other non-combatant dependents,
marginalized any other considerations such as the future of the Macedonian
empire or that of their general. The satraps proposed retreating east, which
meant leaving the baggage train behind in Antigonos’ hands and moving
farther away from it. Eumenes, whom the veterans probably held
responsible for their loss, called on them to fight Antigonos again, but he
was motivated by his own desperate need for victory, on which his
leadership depended, rather than by their plight. The history of the
Macedonian veterans shows a close relationship between their loyalty and
discipline, on the one hand, and the winning record of their general, on
the other. It also shows that set-piece battles were decided not by the
phalanx, however excellent, but by the cavalry – and there was no
guarantee that Eumenes would be able to call on the satraps’ cavalry in a
new battle. Moreover, the veterans were well aware that he had lost the
battle of Gabe- ne- even with the cavalry’s support. In any case, fighting
Antigonos again was in the interest of Eumenes and not that of the troops.
Eumenes’ fate probably ran a distant second to the Silver Shields’ concern
about their baggage, assuming they even gave it some thought. It is our
sources who focus on him.34
The Silver Shields offered Antigonos their services in exchange for their
baggage, Polyaenus tells us.35 In our sources, whenever troops act in their
own interests, rather than those of their generals, they are called mutinous,
undisciplined, and in this case, treacherous. Probably the most active
among the argyraspides were their commanders, because the Macedonian
veterans often depended on their leadership for initiative or
72
The silver shields, Eumenes and their historian
73
Joseph Roisman
of great generals and kings. Within this framework, the Silver Shields had
one major role to play, which justified his praises and giving them a
privileged status, namely, to fight for their general and serve his needs As
long as they fulfilled this function, they were given accolades and exclusive
credit for Alexander’s victories or those of Eumenes’ phalanx. But when
they looked after themselves rather than their commander, they became
petty-minded, selfish, even cowardly men, who traded victory and glory
for baggage.
Yet to what extent were the Macedonians responsible for Eumenes’
fate? Firstly, they were not the only ones who lost their baggage and wanted
it back. Nowhere is it said that Antigonos captured only the Macedonian
baggage, and, according to Polyaenus, Antigonos’ proclamation that he
would restore the soldiers’ possessions for free affected the satrap
Peukestas and his 10,000 Persians, who moved to his camp following the
Macedonians’ example.40 This is not to deny that the Silver Shields led the
movement over to Antigonos’ camp. After all, their possessions had been
accumulated since Alexander’s campaign, while others had less baggage or
no families at all (cf. Oros. 3.23.26). Yet it is clear that they did not have to
force their views on others. Eumenes’ arrest seems to have triggered no
protest, except for his own.
Secondly, there are indications in the sources that not all the
Macedonians were of one mind on this issue. According to Justin,
Eumenes tried to shame the Macedonians into fighting Antigonos again by
defining their loss as consisting merely of 2,000 women and a few children
and slaves.41 This implies that not all Silver Shields, about 3,000 in number,
had families, and hence a strong incentive to give Eumenes up. It is also
conceivable that not all the Macedonians cared to the same extent about
their possessions or dependants. Plutarch reports that before Eumenes
became Antigonos’ prisoner, some Macedonians lamented the loss of their
baggage, some told him not to lose heart, and some blamed other
commanders for the defeat. It is true that the biographer presents these
different reactions as a ploy to lull Eumenes into a false sense of security
so that they could capture him off guard. But if we ignore this attempt to
expose a hidden agenda, it could be that some of the veterans were surprised
by their comrades’ decision to give Eumenes up.42 Lastly, Diodorus says
that Antigonos sent the most troublesome Silver Shields away to Arachosia
– Polyaenus gives their number as 1,000 – and that they included those
who had betrayed Eumenes.43 This implies that not all of the Macedonians
were active in, or in agreement about, the surrender of Eumenes.
Thirdly, and more significant, there was no certainty that Eumenes
would be put to death. His pre-surrender warning to the Macedonians of
74
The silver shields, Eumenes and their historian
this fate is included among the rhetorical pieces that comprise his address
to the troops in our sources, and even if authentic, it was not a premonition
but designed to deter them from surrendering him. His execution was
certainly an option, but it should be remembered that, although Antigonos
had in the past called upon the Macedonians to kill Eumenes, he refrained
from doing so now. It is not unlikely that in the Silver Shields’ negotiations
with Antigonos, the general promised not kill Eumenes, or did not
discount the possibility that he might be imprisoned (as he had done with
Alketas’ generals), or of his offering Eumenes a position in his army, or
even a generous release.44 The sources indeed report on Antigonos’
hesitations about what to do with the captured Eumenes, his friendship
for him, his protecting him from lynching when he was brought to his
camp, the conflicting opinions in his council about what should be done
with Eumenes, and of Eumenes himself raising the possibility not only of
his death but of his release. Indeed, it would have been a coup for
Antigonos to have Eumenes, the royally appointed chief general of Asia,
at his side. In the end, however, and like many other single rulers,
Antigonos yielded to fear and distrust as well as to the pressures of his
oligarchy, that is, his friends, and his troops. In short, the sources’
condemnation of the deadly treachery of the Silver Shields was an effect of
hindsight.45
Hindsight seems also to have been responsible for the moralistic
interpretation of the Silver Shields’ later assignments as a just punishment
for their betrayal of Eumenes, a view that probably goes back to
Hieronymos.46 This historian, who often looked for a ‘real’, that is,
utilitarian, reason beneath the pretext of another, was probably also
responsible for the claim that Antigonos aimed to destroy them by sending
them to Arachosia.
It has been sensibly argued that the Silver Shields were too valuable to
waste and speculated that the satrap of Arachosia might have used them
against Chandragupta, who was expanding his realm in the Indus basin at
the time. Indeed, why would this satrap have been willing to admit alleged
troublemakers into his province or to serve as executioner for Antigonos?
It is likely, however, that Antigonos sought to rid himself of the Silver
Shields because they had several reasons to be discontented. Some were
perhaps upset about the killing of Antigenes, and many about the loss of
the power and prestige they had enjoyed under Eumenes. Their Argead
sympathies and their cohesive, independent solidarity were disconcerting
too. They also included elderly soldiers. So Antigonos broke them up into
smaller units and sent them away, just as Antipater had done in 320 when
he sent them from Triparadeisos to fetch money from Susa.47
75
Joseph Roisman
Acknowledgements
I am grateful to Lloyd Llewellyn-Jones, Andrew Erskine, Stephanie
Winder, and Douglas Cairns for inviting me to the Creating the Hellenistic
World conference and their most gracious hospitality. I am also grateful to
Mel Regnell from Colby College for her invaluable help with the
illustration. Lastly, I owe thanks to Brian Bosworth for his very useful
comments and clarifications. My different interpretation is no indication of
the excellence of his work.
Notes
1 This chapter is a product of a more extensive project on the history of Alexander’s
veterans. Due to space constraints, references to modern scholarship are often limited
to more recent publications. I have also adopted a thematic rather than chronological
approach. The chronology of the events under discussion is notoriously controversial.
I follow here Boiy’s 2007 attempt at a compromise between the so-called high and low
chronologies. All dates are BC.
2 Hieronymos’ sources: Rosen 1967; Hornblower 1981, 120–53. For his causation
and bias, see Roisman 2010a, cf. Brown 1947, 693; Hornblower 1981, esp. 152, 235.
Diodorus must have found Hieronymos’ account appealing, given his own interest in
great men, as well as in the theme of retribution, both of which Diodorus used to
educate his readers: cf. Sacks 1990, 23–36; Anson 2004, 12, 21. For our sources’ use
of Duris of Samos, see, e.g., Landucci Gatinoni 1997, 194–200; 2008, esp. XII–XXIV.
76
The silver shields, Eumenes and their historian
3 Hieronymos’ career: Hornblower 1981, 5–17, esp. p. 8. Eumenes under Alexander:
Heckel 1992, 346–7; his career after Alexander and up to his royal appointment:
Schäfer 2002, 53–122; Anson 2004, 51–145.
4 The Silver Shields’ origins and history: Anson 1981, 1988; Heckel 1982, 1992,
307–19. The Kilikian treasury: Simpson 1957; Bing 1973. Diodorus’ language and
timetable at 18.58.1–4 give little support to Bosworth’s suggestion (1992, 66–7) that
they moved to Kilikia only after receiving Polyperchon’s directive in 318, and see
Anson 2004, 144 n. 92. Diodorus on Polyperchon’s correspondence: 18.58.1–4.
Rosen’s (1967, 69–71) reconstruction of Polyperchon’s correspondence is too
speculative.
5 Diod. 19.41.1–2; Plut. Eumenes 16.6–7. Hieronymos as their sources: Bosworth
1992, 62; cf. Hornblower 1981, 193. Unless otherwise noted, all references to Plutarch
and Nepos are to their Eumenes.
6 Diod. 19.30.6; Plut. 18.2. Cf. Diod. 18.28.1: ‘invincible and because of their
1995, 18–19.
8 Diod. 18.33.5–34.5. Hammond 1994 [1978], 210, and Bosworth 2002, 81–4,
object for different reasons to their identification with Perdikkas’ hypaspists who
participated in this battle (Diod. 18.33.6, 34.2), but Bosworth agrees that Perdikkas
used them against Ptolemy, and see 2002, 87 n. 80. For the Egyptian campaign, see
Roisman 2010b.
9 Battle of Orkynia and the size of the armies: esp. Diod. 18.40.5–8; Engel 1971.
Billows (1990, 75–6) rightly adds Polyaen. 4.6.19 to the sources on this battle, but
Anson (2004, 129 n. 46) questions Polyaenus’ information. Eumenes’ choosing a plain
for a cavalry battle at Orkynia: Diod. 18.40.6. Eumenes and the veterans: Plut. 8.9–12.
10 Diod. 19.29.1.
11 The battle of Gabênê: Diod. 19.40.1–43.9, esp. 40.1–4. The data replicates
Diodorus’ totals of soldiers, but see below. See also Plut. 16.6–10; Polyaen. 4.6.13;
Devine 1985a; Bosworth 2002, 127–9, 142–57; Schäfer 2002, 155–64; Anson 2004,
184–8.
12 Diod. 19.30.5–6. For the expression ‘spearhead of the army’, see Hornblower
1981, 193; Bosworth 2002, 139 with n. 151. Losses: Diod. 19.31.5.
13 Diod. 19.27.2–6. See fig. 1, which focuses on the infantry in this battle. Diodorus’
totals of troops do not always tally with the figures he gives for the individual units.
I follow the latter.
14 Hypaspists in Alexander’s battles: Arr. Anab. 1.14.2 (Granikos); 2.8.3 (Issos);
3.11.9, 13.6 (Gaugamela); 5.13.4 (Hydaspes). Eumenes’ hypaspists: Anson 1988, 132;
Bosworth 2002, 83–4.
15 The battle lines: Diod. 19.27.1–29.1. The hills: Diod. 19.27.3; cf. Vezin 1907,
77
Joseph Roisman
16 Diod. 19.29.7.
17 Billows 1990, 96–7. Light-armed troops’ position: Diod. 19.28.2, cf. 30.4.
Compare Alexander’s close formation against a numerically superior enemy in
Gaugamela. Kahnes and Kromayer (1931, 412–13) speculate that Eumenes mixed
the depth of his infantry to prevent outflanking, but this is nowhere attested.
18 Bosworth 2002, 134. In a private correspondence Bosworth has modified his
reconstruction of the battle and has tentatively placed the Silver Shields against
Antigonos’ Lykians and Pamphylians and mercenaries. My reconstruction would place
the Silver Shields against Antigonos’ Macedonian-style troops. Macedonians fought
Macedonians in Babylon in 323, as well as in Antigonos’ campaigns against the
Perdikkans in 319. A long infantry battle: Diod. 19.30.5.
19 On the elephants in Paraitakene-, see Kahnes and Kromayer 1931, 418 with n. 1,
Krateros and Antipater, and possibly Ptolemy, and in 319 under Eumenes, Alketas and
his fellow commanders. Polyperchon’s instruction: Diod. 18.58.1. 20,000 talents:
Simpson 1957. Loyalty to generals: Briant 1982, esp. 41–81; Anson 2004, 118.
24 Diod. 18.60.1–61.3; Plut. 13.5–8; Nepos 7.1–3; Polyaen. 4.8.2.
25 Diod. 19.15.1–4; for different interpretations of this ‘democracy’, see Briant 1982,
18.60.6–61.2; Plut. 13.7–8; Nepos 7; cf. Polyaen. 4.8.2. For views that Eumenes’
stratagem instituted a military cult for the veterans and the army, see e.g. Launey 1950,
945–7, followed by Picard 1954, 4–7. I cannot share Schäfer’s hypothesis (2002, esp.
21–37) that Eumenes aimed to create an imperial cult common to Macedonians,
Greeks, and barbarians, and see Bosworth’s (2005, 685–6) criticism of it.
27 Briant 1982, 50–81; Schäfer 2002, 125–6; Anson 2004, 232–58; cf. Hornblower
1981, 156–7.
28 Resenting Eumenes’ ethnicity: Diod. 18.60.1–3; 19.13.1–2; Plut. 8.1–3; Nepos
7.1, but see also Diod. 18.62.7, and cf. Plut. 3.1. Eumenes himself stressed his alien
origin when he deemed it useful to play the inferior: Diod. 18.60.3. Chersonesan
plague: Plut. 18.2; Anson 1980, 56.
29 Charging Eumenes with killing Krateros: Diod. 18.37.1–2, 62.1–2; 19.12.1–3;
Arr. Succ. 1.30; Plut. 8.11–4, 18.2; Nepos 5.1; App. Syr. 53; cf. Arr. Succ. 1.40. The
Macedonians ignoring the charges: Diod. 18.59.4; as well offers to kill or desert him:
Diod. 18.62.1–63.5; 19.12.1–3, 25.2–4; Plut. 8.11–12; Just. 14.1.9–14; Anson 1980,
55. Those who were tempted to desert Eumenes in the battle of Orkynia were not
Macedonians: Diod. 18.40.5–8; Anson 2004, 128. Following this defeat, however,
many left him: Diod. 18.41.1.
30 Just. 14.2.5–12.
31 For Gabênê, see n. 11 above.
32 Diod. 19.43.1–44.3; Plut. 17.1–19.3; Nepos 10.1–12.4; Just. 3.1–4.21; Polyaen.
78
The silver shields, Eumenes and their historian
4.6.13. The Silver Shields’ later assignment: Diod. 19.48.3–4; Plut. 19.3; Just. 14.4.14;
and see Polyaen. 4.6.15.
33 Esp. Plut. 17.1–18.2; Nepos 10.2, 11.5, 13.1; Just. 3.11, 14.4.1–16, and see also
Diod. 19.43.8–9, 48.4, Heidelberg Epitome 3. Plutarch, however, also criticizes Eumenes
for not dying nobly: Comp. Eum. et Sert. 2.4; cf. 18.7–9; Nepos 11.3–5; Bosworth 1992,
60–1.
34 The Silver Shields’ losses: Diod. 19.43.7; Plut. 18.2; Just. 14.3.3, 6–8, 10; Polyaen.
4.6.13; cf. Launey 1950: 785–90; Billows 1990, 102 n. 26; Anson 2004, 253–5. Troops’
loyalty and winning record: cf. Briant 1982: 53–61. Troops, baggage and loyalty: Parke
1933, 207; Loman 2005.
35 Polyaen. 4.6.13; Diod. 19.43.8; Plut. 17.1–2.
36 Antigenes’ foiling Antigonos’ attempt: Diod. 18.62.4–7. Teutamos’ image: Diod.
18.62.5; Vezin 1907, 122 (‘the worst agitator’); Bosworth 1992, 70; Heckel 1992,
315–16; Schäfer 2002, 125; cf. Hadley 2001, 14.
37 Plut. 17.5–18.1; Just. 14.4.1–14; cf. Diod. 19.43.9. Bosworth 1992, 63–4 identifies
a common source behind Eumenes’ speeches in Plutarch and Justin; cf. Simpson
1959, 375.
38 The Silver Shields’ image: see above. Their relationship with Eumenes: e.g., Diod.
19.24.5; Plut. 14.1–9, and n. 29 above. Eumenes and Hieronymos: e.g., Hornblower
1981, esp. 5–11, 196–211.
39 Hieronymos on Peukestas: Hornblower 1981, 151; Schäfer 2002, 156; Anson
2004, 9.
40 Polyaen. 4.6.13.
41 Just. 14.3.6.
42 Plut. 17.3; cf. Heckel 1992, 315.
43 Diod. 19.48.3–4; Polyaen. 4.6.15.
44 Eumenes’ warnings: Plut. 17.8–11; Just. 14.4.5–6. Antigonos’ seeking Eumenes’
Nepos 10.3–11.2, 12.1–3; Jacoby 1913, 1541. Eumenes’ expecting death or release:
Plut. 18.4; Nepos 11.3. Brown (1947, 687) doubts Antigonos’ hesitations, and Billows
(1990, 104 n. 29) thinks that Hieronymos tried in this way to exonerate Antigonos of
Eumenes’ death. But both Diodorus 19.44.2 and Plut. 19.1 are clear about Antigonos’
responsibility for his death.
46 The Silver Shields’ assignments: See n. 32 above. Hieronymos as the source:
Engel 1972, 122; Hornblower 1981, 156, 192; Lane Fox in this volume.
47 Arachosia and Chandragupta: Schober 1981, 86, 93; Bosworth 2002, 164–5.
Bibliography
Anson, E. M.
1980 ‘Discrimination and Eumenes of Cardia’, AncW 3, 55–9.
1981 ‘Alexander’s Hypaspists and the Argyraspides’, Historia 30, 117–20.
79
Joseph Roisman
80
The silver shields, Eumenes and their historian
Loman, P.
2005 ‘Mercenaries, their women, and colonisation’, Klio 87.2, 346–65.
Parke, H.W.
1933 Greek Mercenary Soldiers from the Earliest Times to the Battle of Ipsus, Chicago.
Picard, C.
1954 ‘Le trône vide d’Alexandre dans la cérémonie de Cyinda et le culte du trône
vide à travers le monde gréco-romain’, Cahiers Archéologiques 7, 1–17.
Roisman, J.
2010a ‘Hieronymus of Cardia: causation and bias from Alexander to his
Successors’, in E. Carney and D. Ogden (eds) Philip II and Alexander the
Great: Father and Son, Lives and Afterlives, Oxford.
2010b ‘Perdikkas’ invasion of Egypt’, in H. Hauben and A. Meeus (eds), The Age
of the Successors (323–276 BC ) (Studia hellenistica), Leuven.
Rosen, K.
1967 ‘Political documents in Hieronymus of Cardia’, Acta Classica 10, 41–94.
Rzepka, J.
2005 ‘Koine Ekklesia in Diodorus Siculus and the general assemblies of the
Macedonians’, Tyche, 20, 119–42.
Sacks, K. S.
1990 Diodorus Siculus and the First Century, Princeton.
Schäfer, C.
2002 Eumenes von Kardia und der Kampf um die Macht im Alexanderreich, Frankfurt am
Main.
Schober, L.
1981 Untersuchungen zur Geschicht Babyloniens und der Oberen Satrapien von 323–303
v. Chr, Frankfurt am Main.
Simpson, R. H.
1957 ‘A note on Cyinda’, Historia 6, 503–4.
1959 ‘Abbreviation in Hieronymus in Diodorus’. AJP 80, 370–9.
Vezin, A.
1907 Eumenes von Kardia: Ein Beitrag zur Geschichte der Diadochenzeit, Münster.
81
5
Alan B. Lloyd
The purpose of this chapter is to track the process by which Egypt moved
from being a province of the Persian Empire to becoming one of the great
Successor kingdoms. This process was inevitably driven by several key
imperatives, above all by the attitudes and actions of the conquerors and
the reactions of the Egyptian population to their lords and masters.
I propose to define and evaluate the workings of these factors insofar as
the available evidence permits.
First, we need a brief historical synopsis: the reconquest of Egypt by
Artaxerxes III Ochus in 343/2 BC inaugurated the second period of Persian
domination in Egypt and brought to an end some sixty years of Egyptian
self-government.1 A good case can be made that Artaxerxes’ initial conquest
was short-lived and had to be repeated soon afterwards. I developed this
thesis some twenty years ago on the basis of an analysis of the fragments
of Ps-Manetho on the Thirty-first Dynasty (i.e. the second and last
Achaemenid dynasty in Egypt), arguing that this material allows us to locate
the successful, if brief, reign of the native king Khababash at the beginning
of the time-slot to which we assign these Persian rulers.2 Artaxerxes
regained control in 338, and the province remained under Persian rule for
the rest of his reign, through that of Arses, and for a short time under
Darius III Codomannus until Alexander occupied the country late in 332.
On Alexander’s death one of his senior generals and close associates
Ptolemy, son of Lagos,3 acquired the office of satrap of Egypt and its
associated territories. Technically, and nominally, Philip Arrhidaios and
Alexander’s posthumous son by Roxane, Alexander IV, functioned as
kings,4 but the conflict between the Successors to determine whether the
empire remained a unity or fragmented into its major geographical
subdivisions led after the Battle of Salamis in 306 to all the major players
declaring themselves kings. From 305 Ptolemy was Pharaoh to the
Egyptians and a Macedonian king to everyone else. This course of events
yields four major phases to consider: 1. The Second Persian Period; 2. The
83
Alan B. Lloyd
84
From satrapy to Hellenistic kingdom: the case of Egypt
agrees on his treatment of the Apis bull and has a modified version of the
donkey issue in that he claims that it was divinised by Ochus to cause the
Egyptians as much distress as possible. Whether any of this is true is very
much an open question, but the probability must be that there is a certain
amount of assimilation of Artaxerxes to Cambyses, Egypt’s first Persian
conqueror.7 That, however, matters little, as far as we are concerned,
because it is the Egyptian image of the king and Egyptian attitudes towards
him that matter for our purposes.
Although the Second Persian Period lasted for some ten years, as yet we
have no hieroglyphic monumental texts surviving from the period, except
for Khababash. There is a lid made of faience bearing the name of Arses
in hieroglyphs, but it is not certain that the inscription is genuine,8 and the
one hieroglyphic reference to Darius III dates to the reign of Alexander.9
This contrasts strongly with Alexander’s reign in Egypt which lasted about
the same length of time as the Second Persian Period and is represented by
a number of hieroglyphic texts (see below). This situation is highly
significant. Hieroglyphic texts could be expected to relate to public works
which would be attributed to the ruling kings. Nothing of the sort is
reported for the second domination, and this absence of material must
reflect the precarious position of the country at this stage, a circumstance
created by a lethal cocktail of Persian disdain for things Egyptian and the
unremitting hostility of the Egyptians to their Persian masters. The
invasion of the Macedonian renegade Amyntas is symptomatic. After Issos
in 333 we find him arriving with a force of 3000 mercenaries in Egypt
intending to take the country over (Diod. 17.48). We are informed that the
Egyptians were always at odds with their governors, that Persian rule was
characterized by harshness, lack of respect for the temples, greed, and
arrogance, and that this situation made Amyntas’ task all the easier,
enabling him to get control of Pelusium and foment an Egyptian rebellion
whose supporters promptly started wiping out the Persian garrisons. These
successes did not last; for, although Amyntas defeated the Persians in battle
and drove them into Memphis, he was subsequently killed in a Persian
counterattack in the course of which his force was wiped out.
Whatever the end result of their activities, there is clear evidence that
the Persians tried to operate on the same basis as they had done in the
much longer first domination, i.e. a Persian macrostructure was overlaid on
the traditional Egyptian ways of running things, and Egyptians were used
as and when it suited. Only one certain high-ranking case is available in
the form of Somtutefnakht.10 A member of a distinguished family of
Herakleopolis Magna, he found himself involved in the Battle of Issos and
provides a clear parallel to the earlier dignitary Udjahorresnet who had
85
Alan B. Lloyd
achieved high rank in the late Saite Period and maintained that status under
Cambyses and Darius.11 Somtutefnakht will not have been unique. During
the First Persian Period Egyptian military assets were used on some scale,12
and, although the evidence for our period in general is minuscule, it is
probable that Egyptian forces were present at Issos: Sabaces, the satrap of
Egypt, was killed there (Arr. Anab. 2.11.8), and we are told by Curtius
(3.11.9–10) that he had a large army which must surely have consisted of
a significant contingent of Egyptian troops.
On the economic front the beginnings of an Egyptian-generated coinage
which we already find in the XXXth Dynasty were continued since we find
coins of Artaxerxes with his name in demotic. These issues, which derive
from Memphis, clearly take their lead from Athenian coinage, and they are
supplemented by other issues made in the name of satraps whose names
are inscribed on the verso in Aramaic.13 Overall there is enough evidence
to make it clear that the Persian intention in Egypt was to apply their
standard approach to imperial possessions, i.e. to accept the local system,
if it worked, and impose an Achaemenid macrosystem of government on
top whose major function was the economic exploitation of the province.14
86
From satrapy to Hellenistic kingdom: the case of Egypt
because his chief concern was to get on with the war with Persia. There
were, however, two areas where control was kept firmly out of Egyptian
hands: first, Greek and Macedonian garrisons were located in the key
strategic cities of Memphis and Pelusium – and certainly elsewhere, though
we are not told that – and the overall military control of the province was
located firmly in Greek and Macedonian hands; secondly, the taxation of
both Egypt and Libya was placed under the control of Kleomenes of
Naukratis, a measure which reflects a determination to extract the
maximum return for the ruling power and, therefore, mirrors a key aspect
of Achaemenid policy – the satrapies were there as part of the Great King’s
estate, and they were to be exploited as such15 – and Alexander is presented
as being very conscious of the wealth of Egypt and revenues which it
generated (Arr. Anab. 7.9.8). The Egyptians soon had good reason to rue
this appointment because Kleomenes soon showed himself every bit as
rapacious as his Persian predecessors and probably a greater racketeer than
any of them. As for Doloaspis, he soon disappeared from the scene, and
we are informed in several sources that the disreputable Kleomenes was
then appointed satrap.16
The foundation of Alexandria, a key event of Alexander’s reign in Egypt,
is described by Arrian (Anab. 3.1.5–2.2) and Plutarch (Alexander 26. 3–10)
in colourful and somewhat fanciful terms,17 but they both emphasize the
economic advantages of the site, and there can be little doubt that these
were a large part of Alexander’s motivation, particularly in the light of his
recent destruction of the great Phoenician emporium of Tyre which
created the perfect context for the diversion of the trade of the Eastern
Mediterranean to the new Egyptian site. However, the Egyptian name,
‘The Fortress of the King of Upper and Lower Egypt Merikaamon-
setepuenre, son of Re, Alexander’, emphasizes its military dimensions, at
least as they were perceived by the Egyptians at the end of the fourth
century.18 Both perspectives are clearly correct, as far as they go, but they
miss the most important aspect of the foundation, i.e. that Alexandria was
a city established on the west coast of the Delta and never perceived by
Greeks or their Roman successors as lying in Egypt proper.19 Its location
is an unequivocal pointer to the future: for Alexander and the Ptolemaic
rulers who followed him the focus of attention was to be the traditional
centres of Greek and Macedonian political and military activity in the
Aegean and Eastern Mediterranean. Alexandria pointed north and north-
west, and it was in those areas where they wished to make their mark
politically, culturally, and militarily.
As far as the Egyptians were concerned, this new and benign ruler was
accepted without compunction as the most recent tenant of the throne of
87
Alan B. Lloyd
88
From satrapy to Hellenistic kingdom: the case of Egypt
and was probably not in any sense an initiator.29 The value of the texts lies
elsewhere. In the first place, it is highly significant that they exist at all since
they reflect the acceptance by at least a section of the priestly elite of
Alexander’s kingship in Egypt, a phenomenon which does not seem to be
paralleled at all during the Second Persian Period. Alexander is, therefore,
given a full royal titulary. There is, however, more to be said: they all appear
in some of the greatest temples in the land; the language and formulae are
in all respects traditional; the prenomen contains elements of that of
Ramesses II 30 and also echoes elements in names of recent Egyptian kings;
there is talk of involvement in restoration of shrines, a classic action of
Egyptian kings; this restoration brings Alexander into relationship with
two of the greatest Egyptian Pharaohs, Tuthmose III, the Napoleon of
Ancient Egypt, and Amenhotep III, the Louis XIV; it is the martial
prowess of the king which is particularly emphasized, but it should be
noted that Alexander is presented as an Egyptian king who attacks foreign
countries, not as a foreigner coming into Egypt, and by the same token he
is presented through his Horus name as ‘Protector of Egypt’, which again
presents him in a benign pose. Above all, these texts bear witness to a new
confidence in Egypt created by the presence of a new ruler with a
recognized commitment to things Egyptian, and, as always, that confidence
manifests itself in the resurgence of monumental building.
89
Alan B. Lloyd
90
From satrapy to Hellenistic kingdom: the case of Egypt
was probably less embarrassing to the Egyptian composers of the text than
it would have been to Ptolemy at this stage. There are, however, numerous
pointers to the future in this document: Ptolemy is described using a string
of epithets of a traditional type in which particular emphasis is placed on
martial prowess, though, intriguingly, his youth is also to the fore; he is
said to have brought back images and other sacred objects from Asia and
restored them to the temples,38 i.e. again we have the king as restorer of the
right order; his residence is stated to be Alexandria, a fact which brings
with it a major shift in the centre-of-gravity of the kingdom; there are
references to victories in Syria and Nubia which are historical events,39 but
it is worth remembering that campaigning in these areas was part of the
traditional agenda of the Egyptian king; he shows piety to Egyptian
temples, particularly to those of Buto, to which he restored rights taken
away by the Persians; and he takes account of the ‘grandees of Lower
Egypt’ who are brought into the decision-making process.
91
Alan B. Lloyd
inbuilt element of divinity. Not surprisingly, therefore, the right to rule was
in some measure conferred by blood, but this was not sufficient in itself
because no member of the royal bloodline could rule unless he had been
acclaimed king by the army. The Macedonian king, once appointed, had
three main functions: to command the army, to operate as a priest who
guaranteed the good will of the gods towards the kingdom, and to act as
judge.40 Another marked feature of the history of the Macedonian royal
house was the power wielded de facto by strong and ambitious women
which contributed not a little to endemic dynastic instability, and that
was aggravated by the practice of royal polygamy and promiscuous
relationships with concubines which inevitably generated multiple aspirants
and claimants to the throne.41 Ultimately, therefore, the critical factors in
determining who functioned as a Macedonian king were strength and
ability. The author of the Suda (s.v. Basileia (2)) aptly wrote of the harsh
realities of the Macedonian brand of kingship in the following terms:
It is neither descent nor legitimacy which gives monarchies to men, but the
ability to command an army and to handle affairs competently. Such was the
case with Philip and the Successors of Alexander.42
92
From satrapy to Hellenistic kingdom: the case of Egypt
without any qualms: ‘...majesty is a kind of imitation of a god, and can rouse
the wonder and awe of the multitude’.44 We can see the beginnings of this
process with Alexander’s demand for divine honours in 324 and even more
strikingly in the divine honours accorded to Antigonos Monophthalmos by
Skepsis in 31145 and those given by Athens to Antigonos and Demetrios
Poliorketes in 307 (Plut. Demetr. 10).46 We already find Ptolemy I being
accorded the epithet So-te-r, ‘Saviour’, a title applied to many Greek deities,
and Ptolemy II set the scene for the development of the classic Hellenistic
ruler cult when he consolidated the dynasty’s relationship with Alexander
by setting up a state cult of Alexander with an eponymous magistrate
practising Greek ritual. This was the first step in the development of the
Ptolemaic hiera oikia or ‘sacred household’, which eventually involved all
Ptolemaic rulers and their wives, living or dead.47 This body of concepts
even impacted on the Egyptian temples where we encounter the Ptolemies
as synnaoi theoi, ‘shrine-sharing deities’, a very Greek and most un-Egyptian
practice.48 This process brought with it the application to Ptolemaic kings
of further titles with religious overtones such as euergete-s, ‘benefactor’, and
epiphane-s, ‘manifest’. The upshot of this process was that the Ptolemies had
devised a validation for their power which was comprehensible and
acceptable to the Greek constituency within their empire, though we may
suspect that its claims were not infrequently met with the cynical
pragmatism attributed to the Spartans when they received Alexander’s
request to be treated as a god: ‘Since Alexander wishes to be a god, let him
be a god!’ (Ael. VH 2.19).
One novel feature of Ptolemaic kingship was the introduction by
Ptolemy II of full brother-sister marriage into the royal house. Though this
is frequently claimed to have an Egyptian origin, there seems to be no basis
for this assertion. However, there are precedents both in Greek and
Egyptian mythology, and they may well have served as prototypes for a
practice which fitted perfectly into the ethos of the ruler cult as well as
having the distinct political advantage of ensuring that a senior princess
could not marry someone else of dubious credentials and even more
dubious motivation, and in the murderous cut-and-thrust of Ptolemaic
dynastic politics that was no mean advantage. The practice could also serve
as a basis for claims that the royal blood was being kept pure.49
As indicated earlier, although the king was now based in Egypt, unlike
the Great King of Persia, the focus of royal attention lay firmly on
the traditional contexts of Greek and Macedonian activity, i.e. Greece,
the Balkans, the Aegean Sea and its coastal areas and the Eastern
Mediterranean, and the people the Ptolemies were concerned to impress
above all else were Macedonians and Greeks. To realise this aim three
93
Alan B. Lloyd
94
From satrapy to Hellenistic kingdom: the case of Egypt
of the cult of the god Serapis.53 This syncretistic deity, invented probably
for, if not by, Ptolemy I, was intended to function as a god who would be
acceptable to both Egyptian and non-Egyptian alike, but he sadly proved
a complete failure as an integrating mechanism, despite his enormous and
increasing success amongst the Greek-speaking population.54
The priests were not the only segment of the elite – indeed, given the
inveterate pluralism of the upper echelons of Egyptian society priestly
office would often be only one of a series of functions which an individual
might discharge. Here again the Ptolemies trod very carefully. There is
evidence to suggest that the eldest son of Nectanebo II, the last native king
of Egypt, held high rank in the early Ptolemaic Period,55 and we find
Senenshepsu and Usermaatre featuring as high-ranking figures with court
functions in the very early Ptolemaic Period.56 Furthermore, Egyptians
seem to be operating as nomarchs (provincial governors) in the mid-third
century BC.57 Here, of course, we are confronted simply with individuals
revealed to us by a very randomly preserved data-set which may well be
giving us a very limited picture of a much more typical phenomenon than
we are inclined to credit. We should never forget the clear evidence of the
operation of great and ambitious elite families from the last years of
Egyptian independence nor of the Satrap Stele’s reference to ‘the grandees
of Lower Egypt’.58 These groups or power blocks would not have
disappeared and must have continued to be a focus of power, if only at a
local level. Dedicated pragmatists like Ptolemy I and II would not have
failed to recognize that and will have turned the phenomenon very much
to their advantage.
There is, however, one group of the erstwhile Egyptian elite which did
not enjoy great prominence in the early Ptolemaic period, the military.
Alexander is known to have made use of Egyptian sailors in India (Arr.
Anab. 6.1.6), but there is no reference to his using Egyptian soldiers at any
point. There is some evidence of the existence of native Egyptian generals
from the early Ptolemaic period, but, although the Machimoi (‘Warrior’)
class continues to function and appears in a subordinate role at the Battle
of Gaza in 312, it did not form part of the elite of the army under the
earliest Ptolemies and did not acquire that status until the reign of Ptolemy
IV who was compelled to train them to operate as members of a
Macedonian phalanx which they did with conspicuous success at the Battle
of Raphia in 217.59 This development, of course, reveals the reason for this
temporary eclipse: as long as it was still possible to acquire Macedonian
and Greek troops trained to fight in the Macedonian manner, it was easier
and more convenient to employ them. Once that supply began to dry up,
the Ptolemies had to look elsewhere, and members of the Machimoi were
95
Alan B. Lloyd
trained up to fight in this modern fashion with which they had previously
been quite unfamiliar.
At this point it will be clear that the economic and administrative
structure of the country had been well orchestrated to provide the
resource-base for the early Ptolemies’ political and military ambitions, and
it comes as no great surprise to find the historian Appian, a native of
Alexandria, writing (History of Rome, Preface 10):
The kings of my country alone had an army consisting of 200,000 foot,
40,000 horse, 300 war elephants, and 2000 armed chariots, and arms in
reserve for 300,000 soldiers more. This was their force for land service. For
naval service they 2000 barges propelled by poles, and other smaller craft,
1500 galleys ranging from hemiolia to pentêrês,60 and galley furniture for twice
as many ships, 800 vessels provided with cabins, gilded on stem and stern
for the pomp of war, with which the kings themselves were wont to go to
naval combats; and money in their treasuries to the amount of 740,000
Egyptian talents. Such was the state of preparedness for war shown by the
royal accounts as recorded and left by the king of Egypt second in
succession after Alexander [i.e Ptolemy II Philadelphos], who was the most
formidable of these rulers in his preparations.61
Even allowing for some exaggeration,62 we can take these figures as an
indication of the enormous success that the early rulers of the dynasty
enjoyed in building up the power and wealth of their kingdom. Apart from
military muscle, all of this could, and did, contribute to the generation of
that most desirable of acquisitions lamprotês, ‘splendour’; the navy, in
particular, with its emphasis on large and powerful polyremes could be
used as a means of projecting an image of inexhaustible might and riches,
but the Ptolemies went well beyond that and exploited many different
devices. Alexandria itself was a tool of political and, above all, dynastic
propaganda, and enormous sums were expended on the creation of a city
which had no rival in the Hellenistic world so that Strabo (17.1.8), who
visited Alexandria shortly after the Roman conquest, leaves us in no doubt
of its capacity to dazzle the visitor or of the motivation of its creators:
The city has magnificent public precincts and the royal palaces, which cover
a fourth or even a third of the entire city area. For just as each of the kings
would from love of splendour add some ornament to the public
monuments, so he would provide himself at his own expense with a
residence in addition to those already standing, so that now, to quote
Homer, ‘there is building after building’.
Other major features such as the Lighthouse, the Royal Tombs including
that of Alexander, the splendid and conspicuous temple of Serapis which
could be seen from far out to sea, the Library, and the Museum, can all be
96
From satrapy to Hellenistic kingdom: the case of Egypt
5. Conclusions
At the beginning of this chapter I stated that I wanted to track the process
by which Egypt moved from being a satrapy of the Persian Empire to
become the kingdom of the Ptolemies, and that this would involve an
analysis of the attitudes and behaviour of the conquerors and the reactions
of their Egyptian subjects. The approach of the Persians admits of no
doubt. They were determined to bring a recalcitrant satrapy back under
control by any means necessary and were determined to extract the
maximum economic benefit from its resources. Whilst there is good
evidence of their use of locals for administrative purposes, it is clear that
their rule was harsh, arrogant, and repressive, and that they were
determined to teach the Egyptians a lesson which they would never forget
to ensure that they never left the Persian fold again. This policy backfired
on them in that it created such a degree of resentment that the province
remained unstable throughout the Second Persian Period and created a
climate of disaffection which made the conquest by Alexander nothing
more than a military promenade.
The reign of Alexander as Pharaoh and the satrapy of Ptolemy were very
much mediating phases in preparing Egypt for the Ptolemaic dynasty.
Alexander’s main concern was to deprive the Persians of the wealth and
military resources of Egypt and then to get on with the war as quickly as
possible. He, therefore, showed a marked respect for local traditions and
administrative practice and, in the main, followed Egyptian custom except
that the major military functions and supervision of taxation were kept
97
Alan B. Lloyd
Notes
1 For detailed discussions see Kienitz 1953, 99–111; Olmstead 1960, 437–41; Lloyd
98
From satrapy to Hellenistic kingdom: the case of Egypt
4 On the rather sad figure of Arrhidaios see Greenwalt 1984; he was murdered by
Alexander’s mother Olympias in 317 (Paus. 1.25). Alexander IV was murdered in 311
by Kassander, thus bringing an end to the legitimate Argead line (Diod. 19.105) and
clearing the way for his generals to develop their ambitions to the full
5 The Egyptian text will be found in Sethe 1904, 11–22; for an excellent modern
career both in ancient and modern times see Kroll 1926. The Greek text is translated
by Stoneman 1991. The Armenian version is sometimes a valuable supplement to the
Greek and is translated by Wolohojian 1969.
21 See above, n. 9.
22 Sethe 1904, 6 no. 2.
23 The name occurs also in the form Merykaamun.
24 Sethe 1904, 7 no. 3; Barguet 1962, 194–5.
25 The reading of the sign before kheperu is problematic. Legrain read sm3(w)
the index in Porter, Moss et al. 1927–. For a full discussion and analysis see Abd el-
Raziq 1984 and Winter 2005.
29 On the question of such royal attributions see Lloyd 2007.
30 Mery Amun is used as an epithet in Ramesses II’s nomen and setepuenre as part of
his prenomen.
31 Sethe 1904, 9 no. 6.
32 A variant of the more normal Meryamun comparable to the variant in
reverse order. There seems to be no sound epigraphic reason for this. We have to
99
Alan B. Lloyd
assume that Alexander and his half -brother used the same prenomen: cf. Quirke
1990, 75.
34 Sethe 1904, 9 no. 7.
35 Sethe 1904, 10 no. 8; Barguet 1962, 137.
36 It is written Ilksidrs, omitting the n.
37 Since Apries was a legitimate king deposed by a usurper, there may be a claim to
legitimacy lurking here. For Apries’ career see Lloyd 1988c, 169–82.
38 A recurrent motif in Ptolemaic texts: see Winnicki 1994.
39 See Hölbl 2001, 14–20; Ritner, in Simpson 2003, 393–4.
40 On Macedonian kingship and the state system see Granier 1931; Errington 1974;
Lock 1977; Greenwalt 1984; Adams 1986; Hatzopoulos 1987; Hammond 1989,
49–70, 382–95; Borza 1990, 231–52; Anson 1991; Ogden 1999, 3–40.
41 On these issues see the indispensable Ogden 1999.
42 See Austin 1981, 38.
43 See Fraser 1972, vol. 1, 222 ff; Stewart 1993; Erskine 2002. Note the prominence
kingship which shows itself clearly in the Great Procession. Through Alexander the
sacred family derived its ancestry from Zeus himself. The Zeus connection was also
asserted through the close association of the Ptolemaic royal family with Dionysos,
another son of the ubiquitous King of Gods and Men. In general see Koenen 1993;
Hölbl 2001, 77–123.
48 The Canopus Decree from the reign of Ptolemy III provides an excellent
example of the workings of this phenomenon: see Austin 1981, 366–8. On the nature
of Hellenistic kingship see Goodenough 1928; McEwan 1934; Schubart 1937;
Walbank 1984, 62–100; Davies 2002; Ma 2003; Chaniotis 2003.
49 Hölbl 2001, 36, 112. Carney’s discussion (1987) is still the most judicious.
50 See, in particular, Manning 2003.
51 Thompson 1988, 106–54, particularly 108, 110, 138–46.
52 For a key to Ptolemaic temple building see Wilkinson 2000, index, s.v. Ptolemy;
fast type of vessel which served much the same purposes as frigates in the eighteenth
and nineteenth centuries. Exactly how the oarage system was arranged has been much
100
From satrapy to Hellenistic kingdom: the case of Egypt
debated (e.g. Casson 1958). There is not enough evidence for a definitive solution, but
I incline to the view that it had two rows of oars per side with one of those rows using
half the crew of the other. The pentêrês, or ‘five’, was the equivalent of the 74-gun ship
in the Napoleonic era, i.e. it was the main line-of-battle ship in Hellenistic navies. It
had two rows of oars with five men per box, i.e., if we take the box to consist of the
crew rowing a unit of two oars one above the other, they might have been arranged
with three oarsmen to the lower oar and two to the oar immediately above (or vice
versa). On both types of ship see Casson 1971, index, s.v.
61 The translation is mainly that of Horace White, but I have modified the
renderings of the technical names for warships which are quite incorrect.
62 On this topic see Bouché-Leclercq 1903–7, vol. 1, 237–43.
63 The starting point on the city is inevitably Fraser, 1972, but the bibliography on
derived from Kallixeinos of Rhodes, should be read in its entirety. For a detailed
discussion see Rice, 1983.
65 Yet another conspicuous feature of the Great Procession of 270.
Bibliography
Abd el-Raziq, M.
1984 Die Darstellungen und Texte des Sanktuars Alexanders des Großen im Tempel von
Luxor, Deutsches Archäologisches Institut, Abteilung Kairo, Archäologische
Veröffentlichungen 16, Mainz am Rhein.
Adams, W. L.
1986 ‘Macedonian kingship and the rights of petition’, Ancient Macedonia 4, 43–52.
Anson, E. M.
1991 ‘The evolution of the Macedonian army assembly’, Historia 40, 230–47.
Austin, M. M.
1981 The Hellenistic World from Alexander to the Roman Conquest. A selection of ancient
sources in translation, Cambridge.
Baines, J.
1996 ‘On the composition and inscription of the Vatican statue of Udjahorresne’,
in P. der Manuelian (ed.) Studies in Honor of William Kelly Simpson, I, Boston,
183–92.
2004 ‘Egyptian élite self-presentation in the context of Ptolemaic rule’, in W. V.
Harris and G. Ruffini (eds) Ancient Alexandria between Egypt and Greece, Leiden
and Boston, 33–61.
Barguet, P.
1962 Le temple d’Amon-Rê à Karnak. Essai d’exégèse (Recherches d’archéologie, de philologie
et d’histoire 21), Cairo.
Borza, E. N.
1990 In the Shadow of Olympus. The Emergence of Macedon, Princeton.
Bouché-Leclercq, A.
1903–7 Histoire des Lagides, Paris.
101
Alan B. Lloyd
Carney, E.
1983 ‘Regicide in Macedonia’, Parola del Passato 38, 260–72.
1987 ‘The reappearance of royal sibling marriage in Ptolemaic Egypt’, Parola del
Passato 237, 420–39.
Casson, L.
1958 ‘Hemiolia and Triemiolia’, JHS 78, 14–18.
1971 Ships and Seamanship in the Ancient World, Princeton.
Chaniotis, A.
2003 ‘The divinity of Hellenistic rulers’, in Erskine 2003, 431–45.
Curtis, J., and N. Tallis.
2005 Forgotten Empire. The World of Ancient Persia, London.
Davies, J. K.
2002 ‘The interpenetration of Hellenistic sovereignties’, in D. Ogden (ed.) The
Hellenistic World. New Perspectives, London, 1–21.
Ellis, W. M.
1994 Ptolemy of Egypt, London.
Errington, R. M.
1974 ‘Macedonian “Royal Style” and its Historical Significance’, JHS 94, 20–37.
Erskine, A.
2002 ‘Life after death: Alexandria and the body of Alexander’, Greece & Rome 49,
163–79.
2003 (ed.) A Companion to the Hellenistic World, Oxford and Malden, Mass.
Fraser, P. M.
1972 Ptolemaic Alexandria, 3 vols, Oxford.
Gardner, J. F.
1974 Leadership and the Cult of the Personality, London and Toronto.
Goddio, F.
1998 Alexandria: The submerged royal quarters, London.
2000 Cleopatra’s Palace, London.
Goddio F. and Bernand, A.
2004 Sunken Egypt: Alexandria, London.
Goddio F. and Clauss, M.
2006 Egypt’s Sunken Treasures, Munich and London.
Goodenough, E.
1928 ‘The political philosophy of Hellenistic kingship’, Yale Classical Studies 1,
55–102.
Granier, F.
1931 Die makedonische Heeresversammlung, Munich.
Greenwalt, W.S.
1984 ‘The search for Arrhidaios’, AncW 10, 69–77.
1989 ‘Polygamy and succession in Argead Macedonia’, Arethusa 22.1, 19–45.
Grimm, G.
1998 Alexandria. Die erste Königstadt der hellenistischen Welt, Mainz am Rhein.
Hammond, N. G. L.
1989 The Macedonian State. The origins, institutions and history, Oxford.
Hatzopoulos, M. B.
1987 ‘Succession and regency in Classical Macedonia, Ancient Macedonia 4, 279–92.
102
From satrapy to Hellenistic kingdom: the case of Egypt
Hazzard, R. A.
2000 Imagination of a Monarchy: Studies in Ptolemaic propaganda (Phoenix Suppl. 37),
Toronto.
Helck, W., and Otto, E.
1972– Lexikon der Ägyptologie, 7 vols, Wiesbaden.
Hölbl, G.
2001 A History of the Ptolemaic Empire, London.
Huss, W.
1994 ‘Das Haus des Nektanebis und das Haus des Ptolemaios’, Ancient Society 25,
111–17.
2001 Ägypten in hellenistischer Zeit 332–30 v.Chr., Munich.
Kienitz, F.K.
1953 Die politische Geschichte Ägyptens vom 7. bis zum 4. Jahrhundert vor der Zeitwende,
Berlin.
Kloft, H.
1937 ‘Das hellenistische Königsideal nach Inschriften und Papyri’, APF 12, 1–26.
Koenen, L.
1993 ‘The Ptolemaic king as a religious figure’, in A. Bulloch et al. (eds) Images and
Ideologies. Self-definition in the Hellenistic world, Berkeley, 22–115.
Kroll, W.
1926 Historia Alexandri Magni (Pseudo-Callisthenes), Berlin.
Leahy, M. A.
1988 ‘The earliest dated monument of Amasis and the end of the reign of Amasis’,
JEA 74, 183–99.
Lichtheim, M.
1980 Ancient Egyptian Literature. III: The Late Period. Berkeley.
Lloyd, A B.
1982 ‘The Inscription of Udjahorresnet: A collaborator’s testament’, JEA 68,
166–80.
1983 ‘Egypt 664–323’, in B. Trigger et al., Ancient Egypt: A social history, Cambridge,
279–348, 359–364, 412–27.
1988a ‘Herodotus on Cambyses. Some thoughts on recent work’, in A. Kuhrt and
H. Sancisi-Weerdenburg (eds) Achaemenid History. III. Method and Theory
(Proceedings of the London 1985 Achaemenid History Workshop), Leiden,
55–66.
1988b ‘Manetho and the Thirty-first Dynasty’, in J. Baines et al. (eds) Pyramid Studies
and other Essays presented to I. E. S. Edwards (EES Occasional Publications 7),
London, 154–60.
1988c Herodotus Book II, Commentary 99–182, Leiden.
1990 ‘Herodotus on Egyptians and Libyans’ in O. Reverdin and B. Grange (eds)
Hérodote et les peuples non grecs (Entretiens sur l’antiquité classique 35), Geneva,
215–53.
1992 ‘Egypt, History of (Dyn. 27–31)’, in D. N. Freedman (ed.) The Anchor Bible
Dictionary, II. New York, 364–7.
1994a ‘Cambyses in late tradition’, in M. A. Leahy et al. (eds) The Unbroken Reed.
Studies in the culture and heritage of ancient Egypt in Honour of A.F. Shore, London,
195–204.
103
Alan B. Lloyd
104
From satrapy to Hellenistic kingdom: the case of Egypt
Urkunden aus den Zeiten der makedonischen Könige und der beiden ersten Ptolemäer,
Urkunden II, 1, Leipzig.
Shafer, B. (ed.)
2005 Temples of Ancient Egypt, London.
Simpson, W.K.
2003 The Literature of Ancient Egypt. An anthology of stories, instructions, stelae,
autobiographies, and poetry, 3rd edn, New Haven and London.
Stambaugh, J. E.
1972 Sarapis under the Early Ptolemies, Leiden.
Stewart, A.
1993 Faces of Power: Alexander’s image and Hellenistic politics, Berkeley.
Stoneman, R.
1991 The Greek Alexander Romance, Harmondsworth.
Thompson, D.J.
1988 Memphis under the Ptolemies, Princeton.
Tresson, P.
1931 ‘La stèle de Naples’, Bulletin de l’institut français d’archéologie orientale 30, 369–91.
Turner, E.
1984 ‘Ptolemaic Egypt, in CAH 2 VII.1, 118–74.
Vleeming, S. P.
2001 Some Coins of Artaxerxes and other Short Texts in the Demotic Script (Studia Demotica
5), Leuven.
Walbank, F. W.
1992 The Hellenistic World, rev. edn, London.
1984 ‘Monarchies and monarchic ideas’, in CAH 2 VII.1, 62–100.
Wilkinson, R. H.
2000 The Complete Temples of Ancient Egypt, New York.
Winnicki, J. K.
1994 ‘Carrying off and bringing home the statues of the gods. On an aspect of
the religious policy of the Ptolemies towards the Egyptians’, The Journal of
Juristic Papyrology 24, 149–90.
Winter, E.
2005 ‘Alexander der Große als Pharao in ägyptischen Tempeln’, in H. Beck, P. C.
Bol and M. Bückling (eds) Ägypten, Griechenland, Rom. Abwehr und Berührung,
Freiburg, 204–15.
Wolohojian, A. M.
1969 The Romance of Alexander the Great, New York.
105
6
Josef Wiesehöfer
This chapter deals with the least documented period of ancient Fars
(Persis), which extends from the age of Alexander the Great until the
arrival of the Parthians in south-western Iran. We shall see that it is the
time when the former Achaemenid heartland has become a province under
the Seleucids and then the Parthians, with a short period of independence
in between. Apart from some short literary and epigraphic information
and archaeological remains,1 the pre-Sasanian coins of Fars are our most
important source of knowledge. Here, the names and titles of the sub-
Seleucid dynasts and sub-Parthian kings of Persis are mentioned. Their
respective reigns and relationship with their Macedonian and Arsacid
overlords should give us new insight into the history of south-western Iran
from the third century BC to the third century AD.
II
In his small but, as usual, extremely important essay on ‘Alien Wisdom’, the
late Arnaldo Momigliano dealt with, inter alia, the Greek view of the
Persians after Alexander, saying that, ‘if the Persians of old lingered on in
the imagination of Hellenistic man, the contemporary Persians were almost
forgotten’.2 With this statement, Momigliano undoubtedly referred
especially to Persis, the Persians’ original province, the cradle of the
Achaemenid Kings of Kings. In fact, if one added up Greek and Latin
literary and epigraphical testimonies referring to Fars and its history
between 280 and 140 BC – the Iranians themselves were relying on an oral
‘historical’ tradition – there would be only twelve references, mostly
comments made in passing or short impressions rather than coherent
accounts. It is, therefore, not surprising that for a long time Ancient
107
Josef Wiesehöfer
108
Frataraka rule in early Seleucid Persis: A new appraisal
109
Josef Wiesehöfer
110
Frataraka rule in early Seleucid Persis: A new appraisal
been loyal to the Seleucids in the third century BC. In addition, the
archaeological evidence in the Persian Gulf region, presented by Jean-
François Salles and others,20 leaves no doubt about a clear, continuous and
assured military and trading presence of the Seleucids in this region until
the end of the reign of Antiochos III. A loss of Persis would have certainly
threatened their presence and goals. One should also reflect about the
central and important neighbouring provinces of Persis in the west,
Babylonia and Elymais/Susiane, which had remained in the safe possession
of the Seleucids up to the end of Antiochos’ reign.21 Coin hoards from the
area surrounding Persepolis, which contained coins of Seleukos I and the
frataraka-, and which were used to prove a loss of Persis in the third century,
do not necessarily point to an immediate succession of the first frataraka to
the first Seleucid king.22
Apart from the close stylistic and iconographic link between the frataraka-
coins and those of their sub-Parthian ‘successors’, the theory of a rebellious
or even independent Persis in the second century makes sense with regard
to the literary evidence. Thus, Livy does not mention any units from Persis
in the army of Antiochos III at Magnesia.23 Even if this could be plausibly
explained by factors other than unrest in Fars, such an explanation is not
possible for the comment found in Pliny the Elder’s Natural History.24 Here,
the Seleucid Eparch Numenios is described as being attacked by Persians,
presumably after 175 BC,25 on land and on water at the Straits of Hurmuz.
Also, Justin’s report that Demetrios II had had to turn to south-west
Iranian troops for support when fighting the Parthian king Mithradates I
in 140 BC 26 seems to indicate that Persis was independent. Besides, one
should consider the fact that there were attempts to break away from the
centre in other Iranian regions of the Seleucid realm at the same time as
well. According to the excavations on Bahrain and Failaka, the period after
150 BC was the time when the Seleucid presence in the Persian Gulf region
grew weaker and became more endangered. The final loss of Babylonia,
Susiane and Characene was not until the reign of Antiochos VII when
Seleucid rule in that area came to an irrevocable end.
During my studies on ‘the dark ages of Persis’ 27 I came to the conclusion
that of the frataraka- who minted tetradrachms, most probably only two
were rebellious or independent dynasts.28 Only Wahbarz and Wadfradad I
tried to break away from the Seleucid Empire. A remark by Strabo, which
has often been overlooked, points to this. According to him, the
contemporary Persians were ruled by kings who were subordinates of other
kings. In earlier times these were the kings of Macedonia, and, in Strabo’s
own day, the Parthian kings.29 Iconographic details of the coins, and,
furthermore, the historical comments of Polyaenus and Strabo suggest that
111
Josef Wiesehöfer
the first dynasts who minted coins, Ardakhshir and Wahbarz, did not rule
without the approval of the Seleucids, irrespective of the question of their
dating. The similarity of the images and certain symbols on the early
frataraka- coins to Achaemenid iconography has long been emphasised, and
it has been concluded that Baydad, who has until recently been considered
to be the first frataraka,30 must already have broken away from the
Seleucids. The images of ‘ruler on the throne’, or ‘ruler in devotional pose
in front of a fire altar’ on coins of Baydad (Figs 1 and 2) and his
predecessors were actually modelled after the so-called treasury-reliefs
from Persepolis and the funerary reliefs from Naqsh-i Rustam. Symbols,
such as the standard, the throne with arms, the sceptre and the pole are also
known from the Achaemenid period. Although such scenes and symbols
may indicate that the frataraka- saw themselves as custodians of the Persian
heritage of the Achaemenids, they are not necessarily signs of independent
Fig. 1. Baydad, Tetradrachma (Klose and Müseler 2008, type 2/2, plate 3)
Fig. 2. Baydad, Tetradrachma (Klose and Müseler 2008, type 2/3, plate 3)
112
Frataraka rule in early Seleucid Persis: A new appraisal
rule. These royal symbols and the royal ductus are only similar to, not
identical with, those of the Achaemenids; Ardakhshir and Baydad hold the
Seleucid, not the Achaemenid sceptre. Their coins use the same weight
standard as Seleucid coins, and both rulers adopt the title frataraka, which
is known as that of Achaemenid sub-satraps in Egypt.31 As we will see,
even Wadfradad I, who was an independent frataraka, is not totally devoted
to the Achaemenids’ symbolism and claim to power.
What evidence is there to suggest that Persis did not become independent
until after the reign of Baydad? The coins of Wadfradad I show some new
details on the reverse. For the first time, the Khvarnah-symbol appears in a
similar way to that used by the Achaemenid kings.32 This is a well-known
symbol of charisma and power, which is still occasionally interpreted as
Auramazda.33 In addition, another coin-type of this dynast shows the
wreathing of the ruler by Nike (Fig. 3). This gesture clearly imitates Seleucid
coins, but also suggests the ruler’s independence and his desire to
commemorate this achievement. This is not the celebration of a simple
military victory.34
Apparently, the second dynast Wahbarz, whom Polyaenus calls
Oborzus, had already given the impetus to the throwing-off of Seleucid
rule. The second-century AD author reports35 that Oborzus, as commander
of 3000 katoikoi, had organised the assassination of those military settlers.
That he was still a Seleucid representative at the time of the uprising is
suggested by the fact that non-Iranian troops would hardly have been
under arms in an already independent Persis. Accordingly, Oborzus’ deed
was probably an attempt to gain total autonomy through the elimination
of those potential troublemakers. It is clear from Strabo’s comment,
quoted above, that no period of independent dynasts was known to him.
Fig. 3. Wadfradad, Drachma (Klose and Müseler 2008, type 2/23, reverse, plate 6)
113
Josef Wiesehöfer
Fig. 4. Wahbarz, Drachma (Klose and Müseler 2008, type 2/16a, reverse, plate 6)
114
Frataraka rule in early Seleucid Persis: A new appraisal
115
Josef Wiesehöfer
III
116
Frataraka rule in early Seleucid Persis: A new appraisal
Acknowledgements
I would like to thank Dr. Dietrich Klose (Staatliche Münzsammlung
München) for providing me with images of the Frataraka coins mentioned
in the text.
Notes
1 See the excellent recent overview and commentary in Callieri 2007, especially pp.
115ff.
2 Momigliano 1975, 138.
3 Wiesehöfer 1994; 2001; 2004, 105–14; 2007.
4 The Achaemenid traits of Alexander’s ideology and actions were clearly brought
out by Briant 2002, 817–71; 2003; 2005; cf. Wiesehöfer 1994, 23–49.
5 Wiesehöfer 1995; forthcoming (a).
6 Diod. 19.22.2–3.
7 Wiesehöfer 1994, 53–4.
8 Wiesehöfer 1994, 72–3. Pictures of three of the inscriptions can be found in
117
Josef Wiesehöfer
12 Wiesehöfer 1994, 63.
13 Wiesehöfer 1994, 57ff.
14 For the older literature, see Wiesehöfer 1994, 115–17. The most recent titles are
Müseler 2005/6; Klose and Müseler 2008; Hoover 2008; Curtis, forthcoming. Klose
and Müseler date the beginning of the frataraka-coinage to the early third century BC,
‘noch zu Lebzeiten oder unmittelbar nach dem Tod Seleukos’ I. Nikator’ (p. 15). For
the Tall-i Takht, cf. Callieri 2004.
15 Cf. Alram 1986, 162–86; see, however, Klose and Müseler 2008, 33, who postulate
Wiesehöfer 2003.
34 Alram 1986, 169, pl. 18, no. 544f.
35 Polyaen. 7.40.
36 Wiesehöfer 1994, 129.
37 Shayegan, forthcoming.
38 First coin: Alram 1987a, pl. 20.7; second coin: Bivar 1998, fig. 26b; see also Klose
and Müseler 2008, 36 and pl. 6, type 2/16a and b. However, some numismatists doubt
their authenticity (M. Alram, personal communication March 2006), and the new
sequence of Persid rulers which has Wahbarz’s successor Baydad as a sub-Seleucid
dynast does nothing to reduce those doubts.
118
Frataraka rule in early Seleucid Persis: A new appraisal
39 If Shayegan’s dating of the Numenios-episode to 164 BC was right, this battle on
land and on water might illustrate either a second Persid attempt to break away from
the Seleucids or the beginnings of Wadfradad I’s independent rule. A third but less
convincing solution would be to connect it with the end of Wahbarz’s reign. This
would, however, imply an independent Persis in the late years of Antiochos III and
under Seleukos IV and Antiochos IV.
40 Wiesehöfer 1994, 68–78; see now Callieri 2007, passim.
41 Eddy 1961.
42 Wiesehöfer 1994, 129–36.
43 Cf. also Panaino 2003; Callieri 2007, 128–30.
44 Alram 1986, 165, pl. 17, no. 511–14.
45 Alram 1986, 165f., pl. 17f., no. 515ff.
46 Strabo 15.3.19.
47 For the syngeneis cf. Wiesehöfer, forthcoming (b).
48 Wiesehöfer 1994, 83f.
49 Wiesehöfer 1996.
Bibliography
Alram, M.
1986 Nomina Propria Iranica in Nummis (Iranisches Personennamenbuch IV),
Vienna.
1987a ‘Eine neue Drachme des Vahbarz (Oborzos) aus der Persis?’, Litterae
Numismaticae Vindobonenses 3, 147–55.
1987b ‘Die Vorbildwirkung der arsakidischen Münzprägung’, Litterae Numismaticae
Vindobonenses 3, 117–46.
Alram, M. and Gyselen, R.
2003 Sylloge Nummorum Sasanidarum Paris – Berlin – Wien, vol. I: Ardashir I – Shapur I,
Vienna.
Bivar, A. D. H.
1998 The Personalities of Mithra in Archaeology and Literature (Biennial Yarshater
Lecture Series, 1), New York.
Briant, P.
2002 From Cyrus to Alexander. A history of the Persian empire, Winona Lake.
2003 Darius dans l’ombre d’Alexandre, Paris.
2005 Alexandre le grand, 6th ed., Paris.
Callieri, P.
2004 ‘Again on the chronology of the Tall-e Takht at Pasargadae’, Parthica 6,
95–100.
2007 L’archéologie du Fars à l’époque hellénistique (Persika, 11), Paris.
Curtis, V. S.
forthcoming
‘Kings of Persis: bridging the gap between Achaemenid and Sasanian
Persia’, in J. Curtis et al. (eds), Proceedings of the Achaemenid Conference, London.
Eddy, S. K.
1961 The King is Dead. Studies in Near Eastern resistance to Hellenism (334–31 BC),
Lincoln.
119
Josef Wiesehöfer
Hoover, O. D.
2008 ‘Overstruck Seleucid coins’, in A. Houghton and C. Lorber, Seleucid Coins:
A comprehensive catalogue, vol. II/1, New York, 209–30.
Klose, D. O. A. and Müseler, W.
2008 Statthalter – Rebellen – Könige. Die Münzen aus Persepolis von Alexander dem
Großen zu den Sasaniden, Munich.
Momigliano, A.
1975 Alien Wisdom, Cambridge.
Müseler, W.
2005/6 ‘Die sogenannten dunklen Jahrhunderte der Persis. Anmerkungen zu
einem lange vernachlässigten Thema’, Jahrbuch für Numismatik und
Geldgeschichte 55/56, 75–103.
Panaino, A.
2003 ‘The ba a-n of the Fratarakas: Gods or “Divine” Kings?’, in C. G. Cereti,
M. Maggi and E. Provasi (eds) Religious Themes and Texts of Pre-Islamic Iran
and Central Asia. Studies in honour of Prof. Gherardo Gnoli on the occasion of his
65th birthday on 6th December 2002 (Beiträge zur Iranistik, 24), Wiesbaden,
265–88.
Potts, D. T.
1990 The Arabian Gulf in Antiquity, vol. 2, Oxford.
Rougemont, G.
1999 ‘Inscriptions grecques d’Iran’, in Empires perses d’Alexandre aux Sassanides
(Dossiers d’Archéologie, 243), Dijon, 6–7.
Sachs, A. J. and Hunger, H.
1989 Astronomical Diaries and Related Texts from Babylonia, vol. 2, Vienna.
Salles, J.-F.
1987 ‘The Arab-Persian Gulf under the Seleucids’, in A. Kuhrt and S. Sherwin-
White (eds) Hellenism in the East, London, 75–109.
1994a ‘Le Golfe arabo-persique entre Seleucides et Maurya’, Topoi 4.2, 597–610.
1994b ‘Fines Indiae, Ardh el-Hind: Recherches sur le devenir de la mer Erythrée’,
in E. Dabrowa (ed.), The Roman and Byzantine Army in the East, Kraków,
165–87.
1996 ‘Achaemenid and Hellenistic trade in the Indian Ocean’, in J. Reade (ed.),
The Indian Ocean in Antiquity, London, 251–67.
Shayegan, M. R.
forthcoming
Arsacids and Sasanians. Political ideology in Post-Hellenistic and Late Antique Persia
(Sasanidica, II), Los Angeles.
Wiesehöfer, J.
1994 Die ‘dunklen Jahrhunderte’ der Persis (Zetemata, 90), Munich.
1995 ‘Zum Nachleben von Achaimeniden und Alexander in Iran’, in H. Sancisi-
Weerdenburg, A. Kuhrt and M. C. Root (eds), Achaemenid History VIII:
Continuity and Change, Leiden, 389–97.
1996 ‘Discordia et Defectio – Dynamis kai Pithanourgia. Die frühen Seleukiden und
Iran’, in B. Funck (ed.) Hellenismus. Beiträge zur Erforschung von Akkulturation
und politischer Ordnung in den Staaten des hellenistischen Zeitalters, Tübingen,
29–56.
120
Frataraka rule in early Seleucid Persis: A new appraisal
121
PART III
THE POLIS
Hans-Ulrich Wiemer
1. Introduction
Independence and hegemony were to the Greeks closely related. This
relationship was at once antithetical and complementary. For those who
were subject to others, the struggle for independence of course meant
throwing off the hegemony of those to whom they were subject. For those,
however, who were able to maintain their independence, hegemony was an
aim worth striving for. Freedom was conceived as being at its maximum
if it included domination over others. Liberty was a relative and dynamic
concept, and therefore hegemony seemed to be the perfect realisation of
what independence really meant: a state in which the citizen-body was in
full, unlimited control of the conditions of its own existence. If illustration
were needed, the history of Classical Athens would supply it in abundance,
both in the fifth century when for some decades it really was a hegemonic
power on a grand scale, and in the fourth when it was haunted by what
Ernst Badian has aptly called the ghost of empire.1
The Hellenistic Age by contrast is often seen as a time when city states
were no longer able to pursue hegemonic aims, and there is clearly much
to be said for this view. The decades following the death of Alexander saw
the emergence of new kingdoms that held sway over huge stretches of land
and controlled enormous resources. These new kingdoms could raise large
armies of professional soldiers that were far superior in both numbers and
123
Hans-Ulrich Wiemer
skill to the troops that single city-states could muster and therefore attained
the status of super-powers dominating the structure and course of political
events.2 In these circumstances even powerful city-states that had up till
then played a leading role in Greek politics were forced drastically to reduce
the scale of their political ambitions. Athens was unable to rebuild
the glorious fleet it had lost in 322 and fell under the domination of
Macedon for much of the third century.3 Sparta, by now reduced to
Lakonia proper, was only a shadow of its former self, desperately trying to
reverse the losses of power and territory that it had suffered during the
fourth century.4
Rhodes would seem to be an exception in this new world of Greek city-
states that came to acquiesce in their subjection to superior powers, or at
least in no longer being able to play a leading role themselves.5 The island
of Rhodes formed the core of a state organized on the polis-model that is
assumed by many to have experienced a meteoric rise to economic
prosperity and political independence as soon as Alexander had died; this
interpretation sees Rhodes as continually striving for ‘the suppression of
piracy, the promotion of peace, and the preservation of a balance of power
among the great monarchies’, until the Rhodians had to yield their
independence under Roman pressure after the Third Macedonian War.6
These basic strategic objectives, so we are told, were determined by
mercantile interests that were of paramount importance to the Rhodian
state. If we leave aside the concept of a balance of powers which cannot
be translated into Greek and is, of course, more than slightly anachronistic
when applied to the Hellenistic world,7 most of the conceptual elements
contained in this rosy picture of a republic that consistently followed a
policy of promoting peace and fighting pirates can be traced back to
sources, both literary and epigraphic, that either are by their very nature
expressions of political ideology – this holds true for public inscriptions –
or can at least be shown to express a specifically Rhodian view of the
island’s role in Greek history and politics taken over from the sources they
were following – this, I believe, holds true for most of what Diodorus and
Polybius tell us about Rhodes.8 These programmatic statements should
therefore be taken for what they are worth: as political propaganda that as
such is quite interesting but cannot serve as a reliable guide to the aims and
principles of Rhodian policy. They have to be tested against the facts, as
our sources allow them to be reconstructed once we have freed ourselves
from the ‘mirage rhodien’.
In this chapter I intend to do two things: first, to look at how the
Rhodians managed to break free from foreign domination to which they
had been subject, with some short interruptions, throughout most of the
124
Early Hellenistic Rhodes: The struggle for independence and the dream of hegemony
fourth century, and, second, to examine what evidence there is for Rhodian
claims to political hegemony before the middle of the third century.
125
Hans-Ulrich Wiemer
spring of 320. Before that, however, the Rhodians had repelled a large army
led by Attalos alone that was attacking – so Photius’ Epitome of Arrian’s
‘History of the Successors’ tells us – Knidos, Kaunos and Rhodes.16
These successes, remarkable as they are, did not protect the Rhodians
from falling under the hegemony of a stronger power again. The sources
are silent as to the Rhodians’ stance during the first two wars fought
between the diadochs of Alexander, but during the Third Diadoch War
(315–311) we find them standing firmly on the side of Antigonos. They not
only allowed Antigonos to build warships in Rhodian docks, thus enabling
him to strengthen considerably his naval power. In 312, after Antigonos
had in a brilliant campaign driven his enemies from Karia,17 they even
entered into a formal alliance with him and subsequently provided ships for
an expedition led to Greece by Antigonos’ nephew Polemaios.18 Any
claims to being neutral were thus waived; the Rhodians had chosen to take
sides for Antigonos and against Kassander, Lysimachos, and last but not
least, Ptolemy.
These events would be completely unknown to us if Hieronymos of
Kardia had not thought fit to report them in his ‘History of the Successors’
which is the main source used by Diodorus in book 18–20 of his universal
history.19 The Rhodian source which lies behind Diodorus’ account of the
siege of Rhodes by Demetrios had no interest in handing down to posterity
details that were detract from the view that the Rhodians had always had
a special relationship with Egypt and the Ptolemies. This view, still
fashionable with many modern historians, goes back to a tradition that
only developed after the Rhodians had, with help from Ptolemy and others,
been able to withstand the Great Siege led by Antigonos’ son Demetrios;
on Rhodes itself it was enshrined in public rituals of commemoration
instituted soon after the events,20 and it also found its way into the patriotic
historiography which Polybius justly, if not without personal bias, accused
of sacrificing objectivity to the aim of glorifying Rhodes.21
When the Rhodians early in 306 were faced with the demand to
contribute ships for Antigonos’ expedition against Ptolemy’s bases on
Cyprus they knew nothing of this supposed special relationship which in
political terms was simply non-existent. But why then, one might ask, did
they refrain from participating in the war against Ptolemy, unlike the
Athenians, for example, who contributed no less than 30 ships to the fleet
of their ‘saviour and liberator’ Demetrios? 22 Two explanations that might
at first sight seem attractive do on inspection turn out to be inadequate:
first, the supposed economic symbiosis of Rhodes with Egypt and, second,
the alleged Rhodian concern for a balance of power. Now economic
interests can hardly have been the decisive factor when the assembled
126
Early Hellenistic Rhodes: The struggle for independence and the dream of hegemony
127
Hans-Ulrich Wiemer
end of the siege.26 But the Rhodians still were far from having reached
independence, since by virtue of this very treaty they became allies of
Antigonos again and even had to hand over to him 100 hostages selected
by Demetrios from among the political elite. Even if it were true, then,
that the obligation to give military help to Antigonos did not extend to
wars between Antigonos and Ptolemy, as the Rhodian tradition followed
by Diodorus maintains, the Rhodians’ freedom of action was still severely
restricted, as far as foreign affairs were concerned. If, however, the
restrictive clause reported by Diodorus did in fact only apply to wars of
aggression, as I am inclined to believe, the Rhodian hostages in Antigonid
hands clearly were a powerful argument, in case there should arise any
doubt as to who was the aggressor in a conflict between Antigonos and
Ptolemy.
We have no means of telling whether Rhodian troops really did
participate in the great battle of Ipsos which in 301 marked the end of
Antigonid power in Asia Minor. It is clear, however, that after this battle
Rhodian dependence on the Antigonids was a thing of the past. As the end
of the Great Siege in 304 had been due to political developments on the
Greek mainland in which the Rhodians had no part, so their final
breakthrough to full independence was in large measure the result of
military events that were out of their control, but worked to their
advantage.
No narrative account of Rhodian history has survived to continue where
the patriotic tale of the Great Siege told by Diodorus ends, and we have to
wait for Polybius to get once again something like a coherent picture of
events pertaining to the island. Accordingly, the 80 years or so of Rhodian
history between 304 and 220 are shrouded in an almost impenetrable
mystery. To be sure, there is one partial exception: Polybius’ famous
digression on the donations made by kings and cities after Rhodes had
been struck by an earthquake in 228 or 227.27 This account, however, does
not help very much when it comes to understanding the aims and means
of Rhodian policy in the period not covered by Polybius’ narrative, apart
from revealing the fact that in the last third of the third century the
Rhodians were courted by most of the great powers and not formally
bound to any of them. For the earlier part of the third century one has to
look at miscellaneous sources of a very heterogeneous nature, and to them
I shall now turn.
When the great siege ended, the island of Rhodes was thoroughly
devastated. Demetrios’ troops had been ravaging and plundering the
countryside for a whole year. The booty collected was sufficient for
Demetrios to make a generous donation to the gods that had watched over
128
Early Hellenistic Rhodes: The struggle for independence and the dream of hegemony
129
Hans-Ulrich Wiemer
ἤθελον Ἠέλιον Ῥόδιοι π[εριµάκε]α θεῖναι
δὶς τόσον, ἀλλὰ Χάρης Λίνδιο[ς] ὡρίσατο
µηθένα τεχνίταν ἔτι µείζονα [τ]οῦδε κ[ο]λοσσὸν
θήσειν· εἰ δὲ Μύρων εἰς τετράπ[ηχ]υν ὅ[ρον]
σεµνὸς ἐκεῖνος ἀνῆκε, Χάρης πρῶ[τος µ]ετὰ τέχνα[ς]
ζῶιον ἐχαλκούργει γᾶς µεγ[έθει παρ]ισ[ῶ]ν.
There is little doubt that this is exactly what the Rhodians wished to convey
by raising the Colossus. Unfortunately we still do not know exactly where
this statue of Helios was placed. Wolfram Hoepfner has recently re-argued
the case for placing the Colossus at the eastern end of the naval harbour
of Rhodes where today stands the fort of St. Nicholas.41 To this proposal,
Ursula Vedder has raised the objection that the Colossus would have been
dedicated in the sanctuary of Helios; according to her, the Colossus stood
on top of the acropolis where she locates the sanctuary of this god that
has still to be identified on the ground.42 In any case, from the magnitude
of the monument it seems clear that the Colossus was intended to serve as
a visual point-of-reference for everyone entering the city from abroad. The
statue of Helios rose to the staggering height of 70 cubits, which,
depending on the measure used, works out at 30 to 35 metres. It thus made
a powerful visual statement about the island’s status as an independent
player in Greek politics, serving as a symbol of its prosperity and might.
130
Early Hellenistic Rhodes: The struggle for independence and the dream of hegemony
But the Rhodians were not content with thus staking a symbolic claim
to being a powerful and independent state. They also had an epigram
incised on or near the Colossus that gave a more specific interpretation of
how they understood their political role among the Greeks. This epigram,
transmitted in the ‘Palatine Anthology’ (6.171), the ‘Anthology of Planudes’
(6.1) and the ‘Suda’ (s. v. Κολοσσαεύς), has by some been considered to be
a purely literary exercise that was composed much later than the
completion of the Colossus, and I must confess once to have adhered to
this view myself.43 In the ‘Palatine Anthology’ it comes in a group of
miscellaneous epigrams on dedications (6.158–178) that follows an
unbroken sequence taken from the ‘Garland’ of Meleagros of Gadara, the
first comprehensive anthology of epigrams known to us. His collection
was published not long after 100 BCE and had a profound influence on the
transmission of Hellenistic epigrams, being excerpted around 900 CE for
the common source of both the ‘Palatine’ and the ‘Planudean Anthology’.44
Before stating the reasons why I have come round to joining those who
believe that our epigram originally served as dedicatory inscription for the
Colossus45 before it came to be included either in the ‘Garland’ of
Meleagros or some later collection, it will be convenient to give text and
translation:
Αὐτῷ σοὶ πρὸς Ὄλυµπον ἐµακύναντο κολοσσὸν
τόνδε Ῥόδου ναέται ∆ωρίδος, Ἀέλιε,
χάλκεον, ἁνίκα κῦµα κατευνάσαντες Ἐνυοῦς
ἔστεψαν πάτραν δυσµενέων ἐνάροις.
οὐ γὰρ ὑπὲρ πελάγους µόνον ἄνθεσαν, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐν γᾷ
ἁβρὸν ἀδουλώτου φέγγος ἐλευθερίας·
τοῖς γὰρ ἀφ’ Ἡρακλῆος ἀεξηθεῖσι γενέθλας
πάτριος ἐν πόντῳ κἠν χθονὶ κοιρανία.
131
Hans-Ulrich Wiemer
132
Early Hellenistic Rhodes: The struggle for independence and the dream of hegemony
133
Hans-Ulrich Wiemer
Fig. 1. The Rhodian pillar in the sanctuary of Apollo at Delphi seen from the east:
hypothetical reconstruction ( Jacquemin and Laroche 1986: 305, © EfA/D. Laroche).
134
Early Hellenistic Rhodes: The struggle for independence and the dream of hegemony
4. Epilogue
If such were Rhodian pretensions in the first half of the third century,
reality lagged far behind their aspirations. The Rhodians were at this date
still preoccupied with establishing their hegemony in the immediate
neighbourhood of their island. Their possessions on the mainland opposite
Rhodes were for much of the third century confined to small habour towns
on the Karian Chersonesos proper; only when in about 240 by the grace
of Seleukos II they got hold of the city of Stratonikeia did they get access
to the interior of Karia.62 And it was not before the last quarter of the third
century that the small neighbouring islands of Telos and Nisyros became
part of the Rhodian state.63 Granted, Rhodian influence in the Cyclades
began slowly to rise when the Ptolemaic protectorate over the League of
the Islanders fell into abeyance after 250.64 But a new league of islanders
under Rhodian leadership only came into being some decades later, after
the Rhodians had in 201 decided to attack Philip V of Macedon, thus
starting what was to be become the Second Macedonian War of the Roman
Republic.65
It was in the brief period between the war of the Rhodians against
Philip V and the end of the Third Macedonian War waged by the Roman
Republic that the Rhodians came closest to realizing their long-held dream
of hegemony. From 200 to 168 they were in firm control over the Cyclades.
135
Hans-Ulrich Wiemer
Like Athens in the fifth century they stationed garrisons on islands such as
Tenos that were formally allied to them and served as naval bases for the
Rhodian fleet.66 When the allied city of Keos was suspected of disloyalty
against the people of Rhodes, Kean representatives were summoned to
answer these charges before the Rhodian assembly.67
Rhodian imperialism reached its height after Antiochos III had been
defeated by the Romans with the help of the Rhodian navy.68 Not long
afterwards the Rhodians had the famous Nike erected as a victory
monument in the sanctuary of the Great Gods on Samothrace where in
close proximity to donations and dedications made by Ptolemaic and
Antigonid kings it was to proclaim the greatness and might of the Rhodian
republic.69 The Roman senate showed its gratitude to the Rhodians by
assigning them part of the territories ceded by Antiochos in the treaty of
Apameia,70 and the Rhodians immediately set out to organize Karia and
Lykia as parts of a Rhodian zone of hegemony.71
To be sure, the Rhodians promised liberty to the cities of Karia and
Lykia, but it was liberty granted on Rhodian terms. These terms were
negotiable, but they did not exclude Rhodian interference in internal affairs
or the imposition of tribute; if necessary, they were enforced by Rhodian
arms. This is not the place to retell the sombre story of how the Rhodians
tried by force to impose their rule on Lykian cities unwilling to submit to
foreign domination, and how this attempt finally failed, after many years of
guerrilla warfare had caused enormous losses to Rhodian finances and
devastated parts of Lykia.72 I must also refrain from analysing Rhodian
attempts at gaining a hegemonial position in Karia by striking treaties of
alliance with many cities on the coast and by stationing garrisons in some
others like Stratonikeia and Kaunos.73
That this vast hegemonial zone comprising the whole Aegean plus Karia
and Lykia soon proved to be a house of cards is hardly cause for surprise
to us. Rhodian resources might have been sufficient to control the small
city-states of the Cyclades, but they were clearly vastly overstretched when
it came to controlling dozens of cities in Southwest Asia Minor many of
which were quite sizeable and had a large inland territory. Because of this,
Rhodian hegemony in Karia and Lykia was from the start dependent on its
being seen to be supported by the will of Rome. When, therefore, the
senate withdrew its favour after the crushing defeat of Perseus that
Rhodian diplomacy had tried to prevent, Rhodian rule in these regions
broke down quickly.74 Fearing Roman reprisals, the Rhodians now dropped
all pretensions to neutrality and submissively asked to be accepted as allies
of Rome. It took four long years of humiliation before in 164 the Rhodians
finally were deemed worthy of becoming allies of Rome, albeit on unequal
136
Early Hellenistic Rhodes: The struggle for independence and the dream of hegemony
terms.75 The dream of hegemony on a more than local scale was over now,
even if Rhodes continued to have allies of its own down into the first
century BC.76
Acknowledgements
I should like to thank Andrew Erskine for reading the manuscript and for
helpful suggestions to improve it in both form and substance. As this
chapter was completed in 2007 I have not been able to take full account of
the literature published since then.
Notes
1 Badian 1995.
2 As a political history of the Hellenistic world Will 1979/1982 remains unsurpassed;
in English there is now Errington 2008. For a recent synthesis on the hellenistic
monarchies see Virgilio 2003.
3 On early Hellenistic Athens see the magisterial treatment in Habicht 1995.
4 A recent account of Hellenistic Sparta by Paul Cartledge is to be found in
Gelder 1900, 178–88. The institutions are briefly surveyed in Gabrielsen 1997, 24–31;
the political decision-making process is analyzed in Wiemer 2002a, 21–2; Wiemer
2002b, 581–2; Grieb 2008, 263–353 (to be used with caution). For Archaic and
Classical Rhodes see Nielsen and Gabrielsen 2004 (with ample bibliography) and for
a fanciful account of Rhodian grandeur before the synoikismos Kowalzig 2007, 224–66.
6 Berthold 1984, 58.
7 The belief that Rhodian policy was aimed at preserving a balance of power for the
Hellenistic world generally is shared, inter alios, by Schmitt 1957, 55 and by Ager 1991,
10. On the history of the modern concept see Fenske 1975, 959–96 and Anderson
1993, 149–203.
8 A detailed analysis of the literary tradition is to be found in Wiemer 2001
Sic. 18.8.1.
11 Diod. Sic. 18.8.1.
12 On the settlement reached in Babylon after Alexander’s death see now the
384–92.
14 On Karia in the late 320s see the detailed study by Varinlioglu et al. 1990. I accept
Iust. 13.6.14; Diod. Sic. 18.39.6 (confirmation); Arr. Succ. F 1.41 = FGrH 156 F 11.42
137
Hans-Ulrich Wiemer
(defeat). Several inscriptions show Asandros to have been in control of inner Karia by
319/8: I.Stratonikeia 501 (323/2); I.Amyzon 2 (321/20); I.Mylasa 21 (319/8?); SEG
33.872 (319/8?); I.Stratonikeia 503 (319/8). But that does not necessarily apply to the
coastal cities; the stephanephorate of Asandros in Miletos (I.Milet 122, col. II, line
101) dates from 314/3 or 313/2.
16 Arr. Succ. F 1.39 = FGrH 156 F 11.39 (on this see Wiemer 2002a, 68–71).
17 On this see Billows 1990, 116–21.
18 On this see Hauben 1977 and Wiemer 2002a, 71–7.
19 For Hieronymos as the main source of Diodorus in Book 18–20 see the
convincing analysis in Hornblower 1981, 18–75. That the account of the siege of
Rhodes is drawn from a Rhodian source, presumably Zenon, has been argued by
Wiemer 2001, 222–50.
20 Cult of Ptolemy I: Diod. Sic. 20.100.3–4; Gorgon FGrH 519 F 19 = Ath.
15.696F. A priesthood of Ptolemy I is attested as late as c. 200 BC: Segre 1941, 30,
lines 16–17. The best analysis is still to be found in Habicht 1970, 109–10, cf. 257–8.
21 Polyb. 16.14–20, esp. 14.1–10; 17.8–11. I have commented on these passages in
1995, 76–88. Athenian ships in the sea-battle of Salamis: Diod. Sic. 20.50.3. The battle
is analysed in Seibert 1972, 190–206.
23 Polyaenus (4.6.16) reports that during the siege Rhodian seafarers were present
in harbours all over the Levant. People from Syria, Phoenicia and Asia Minor form the
majority of foreigners that are attested on Rhodian inscriptions: Morelli 1956, 135–6;
Sacco 1980. From the ‘Testament of Alexander’ that was forged on Rhodes and
became part of the ‘Alexander Romance’ it is clear that the Rhodians imported as
much corn from Asia Minor as they did from Egypt: Hist. Alex. 3.33.8; Epit. Mett.
108; cf. RC 3, lines 80–5.
24 Byzantine refusal to assist Antigonos in the Third Diadoch War: Diod. Sic.
19.77.7. Honorary statues for Antigonos and Demetrios raised in Olympia by the
Byzantines between 305/301: Syll.3 349–351.
25 I have analysed the literary tradition on the siege in Wiemer 2001, 238–50 and
tried to reconstruct the events and their causes in Wiemer 2002a, 84–91.
26 Diod. Sic. 20.99.3.
27 Polyb. 5.88–90 with ample commentary by Walbank 1957, 616–22. On Polybius’
sources of information and the political message they were aiming to convey see
Wiemer 2001, 33–9.
28 Attested in a well-known inscription (Syll.3 337) commented on by Holleaux 1938
138
Early Hellenistic Rhodes: The struggle for independence and the dream of hegemony
34 Sopatros stemmed from Paphos on Cyprus, but seems to have migrated to
Alexandria; according to Ath. 2.71a–b his life extended from the reign of Alexander
the Great down to that of Ptolemy Philadelphos. The testimonia on his life and the
25 fragments from his works (all from Athenaeus) are conveniently assembled in
Kassel and Austin 2001, 275–87.
35 Sopatros’ lines on the Colossus appear in a speech that Athenaeus (4.158D)
puts into the mouth of the Cynic Kynoulkos: ἀλλ’ ὑµεῖς γε, ἔφη, οἱ ἀπὸ τῆς καλῆς
Ἀλεξανδρείας, ὦ Πλούταρχε, σύντροφοί ἐστε τῷ φακίνῳ βρώµατι καὶ πᾶσα ὑµῶν ἡ πόλις
πλήρης ἐστὶ φακίνων· ὧν καὶ Σώπατρος ὁ Φάκιος παρῳδὸς µέµνηται ἐν δράµατι Βακχίδι
λέγων οὕτως· ‘οὐκ ἂν δυναίµην εἰσορῶν χαλκήλατον |µέγαν κολοσσὸν φάκινον ἄρτον
ἐσθίειν.’ What exactly the character in Sopatros’ play was meaning to say by this is
unclear, and commentators have suggested widely differing interpretations. Of the
two interpretations proposed in Kaibel 1909, 192 (‘sententia aut “ego Alexandrinus
Rhodii vivere nequeo” aut “Rhodiis cum licet, Alexandrinis panibus non vescor”’)
and repeated by Kassel and Austin 2001, 276 (who refer to F 9 = Ath. 3.109E where
Rhodian bread is mentioned) the first seems to fit the context much better since
Kynoulkos describes lentil-dishes as an Alexandrian speciality (thus Fraser 1972, II 875
n. 16: ‘The sense might be: ‘I would not be able to eat my lentil bread if I went to live
on Rhodes’). Perhaps, however, something more specific is meant: that the Colossus
was so breathtaking a sight that looking upon it took away completely the Alexandrians’
otherwise insatiable appetite for lentil-bread.
36 I quote text and translation from Austin and Bastianini 2002, 90–1 no. 68. There
is a short commentary in the editio princeps by Bastianini and Gallazzi 2001, 194–6.
37 See the contributions assembled in Gutzwiller 2005 and also Porter, this volume,
dedicated at the order of Ptolemy II: Austin and Bastianini 2002, 86–7 no. 63 with
Gutzwiller 2002, 46–8.
40 On this Fraser 1972, I 559–60 with II 796–7 n. 44–5 remains fundamental.
41 Hoepfner 2003, 53–64.
42 Vedder 2004, 1111–2. The complex of buildings located on the foot of the
acropolis where a series of honorary statues of priests of Helios and several other
inscriptions have been found (Kontorini 1989, 129–84) seems small to have served as
the sanctuary of the most important god of Rhodes: Hoepfner 2003, 43–9.
43 Theodor Bergk (1872) ascribed the epigram to Alkaios of Messene, Ulrich von
1967/1968, I 441–3 and Cameron 1993, 121–8. Gow and Page 1965 do not include
Anth. Pal. 6.171 among the anonymous epigrams they attribute to Meleagros’
‘Garland’, but Cameron 1993, 123 thinks that the whole group Anth. Pal. 6.158–178
comes ‘from Meleager, Philip, and Agathias combined’ which for Anth. Pal. 6.171 can
only mean Meleagros.
45 Thus, e. g., Hiller von Gaertringen 1931, 781 and Gow and Page 1965. II 588:
139
Hans-Ulrich Wiemer
‘This epigram was plainly inscribed on or near the statue, presumably soon after its
completion, and it may be assigned with some approval to the first quarter of the third
century BCE ’.
46 Anth. Pal. 6.171. My translation is based on that of William Paton in the Loeb
edition but with some alterations: In l. 3 I take χάλκεον to go with κολοσσὸν rather
than with κῦµα because there is a caesura after χάλκεον, and because there is no parallel
for expanding the Aeschylean metaphor ‘wave of war’ by adding the adjective ‘brazen’.
In l. 5 I prefer the Planudean reading ἄνθεσαν over the Palatine κάτθεσαν which in my
opinion must refer to an object αὐτόν which in this context it was unnecessary to
express.
47 According to the calculations of Gow 1958, 20–2 only 76 epigrams in Meleagros’
collection were unascribed. Anonymous epigrams form only a small fraction of the
total transmitted via the ‘Palatine’ and ‘Planudean’ Anthologies.
48 On earlier collections of epigrams and their limited scope see Cameron 1993,
5–13.
49 Anth. Pal. 9.518. Translation adapted from that of William Paton in the Loeb
edition.
50 Alkaios later turned against Philip (Anth. Pal. 9.519; 11.12) and praised Titus
Flamininus as liberator of Greece: Anth. Pal. 16.5; Plut. Flam. 9.2 (with Anth. Pal.
7.247). On the anonymous Anth. Pal. 16.6 see Walbank 1942.
51 Thus, rightly, Walbank 1942, 134–6.
52 The ‘Planudean Anthology’ (16.82) preserves a iambic two-liner describing
Chares as sculptor of the Colossus. Since it is already cited by Strabo 14.2.5, it may well
have stood on the Colossus as well (thus Gow and Page 1965, II 588–9), though the
first four words seem inappropriate for that purpose and may be a late intrusion into
the text replacing something like τόνδ’ Ἡλίου κολοσσόν (proposed by Cameron 1993,
294–5).
53 On his cult see Morelli 1959, 175–6; on his representation in Rhodian mythology
προξενίαν ἐν τὸ βουλεῖον κα[τὰ τὸν νόµον, τὸ δὲ ψάφισµα] ἐν τὰν βάσιν τοῦ χρυσέου
ἅρµατος τοῦ [ἀνατεθέντος τῶι θεῶι ὑπὸ] τοῦ δάµου τοῦ Ῥοδίων.
57 FD 3.378 = Syll.3 441: ὁ δᾶµος ὁ Ῥοδ[ί]ω[ν τῶι Ἀπόλλωνι τῶι Πυθί]ωι.
58 Daux 1943, 329–32.
59 Jacquemin and Laroche 1986, suggesting that the pillar was raised in
commemoration of the expulsion of Alexander’s garrison in 323. This suggestion,
however, does not account for the fact that at the time it was far from clear whether
the Rhodians would get through with their policy of independence. It had to be
defended first against Attalos and then against Antigonos before it was generally
respected.
60 In the same sense Rice 1993, 239–42.
61 The different possibilities are discussed in the editions of Luigi Moretti (ISE 40)
140
Early Hellenistic Rhodes: The struggle for independence and the dream of hegemony
62 The date when the Rhodians got hold of Stratonikeia has to be inferred from
Poly. 30.31.6 and is highly disputed; I have defended my position in Wiemer 2002a,
182–4. The complicated question of when and how Rhodian possessions on the
mainland opposite their island developed is the subject of Wiemer, forthcoming (b).
Among recent contributions to the debate are Gabrielsen 2000, Debord 2003 and
Bremen 2004a and Bremen 2004b.
63 Evidence and discussion in Wiemer 2002a, 196.
64 More on this in Wiemer 2002a, 192–8.
65 On the war of the Rhodians against Philip V see Wiemer 2002a, 198–227. To the
evidence there cited can now be added a decree of Eretria that has only recently been
found and is reported to honour two Rhodians for having saved Eretrians who had
been taken captives, presumably when L. Quinctius Flamininus conquered the city in
198: Knoepfler 2005, 303–4.
66 For Rhodian presence on Tenos see the evidence discussed in Wiemer 2002a,
273–4.
67 Keos: SEG 14.544 with my remarks in Wiemer 2002a, 219.
68 For Rhodian involvement in the war against Antiochos III see my discussion
Wiemer 2002a, 235–51, though Knoepfler 2005, 285–308 has recently demonstrated
that the decrees of Karthaia in honour of three officials of a king Antiochos which
others, including myself, once believed to date from the reign of Antiochos III (SEG
48.1130) should rather be dated to the reign of Antiochos II and do not supply
evidence for Seleukid control of the island of Keos.
69 Pending the final publication of the Nike monument by Ira Mark (for a
preliminary report see Mark 1998), one has to have recourse to books like Knell 1995
whose general interpretation I share for the reasons given in Wiemer 2001, 127–8.
70 On the settlement of Apameia see my analysis in Wiemer 2001, 128–49; Wiemer
Bresson 2003 and Wiemer, forthcoming (b). Rhodian garrisons in Kaunos and
Stratonikeia are attested in Polyb. 30.21.3. The whole subject will have to considered
anew in the light of an honorary decree passed by an anonymous city in honour of a
Rhodian ἡγεµὼν κατὰ Καρίαν τόπων that has recently been found in Aphrodisias, for
which see Chaniotis, forthcoming.
74 My views on Rhodian policy during the Third Macedonian War are set out in
Wiemer 2002a, 298–317. For different views see, e.g. Gruen 1975, 58–81; Berthold
1984, 195–212; Gabrielsen 1993.
75 On the Rhodian Treaty with Rome see my discussion in Wiemer 2002a, 325–8.
76 Maiuri 1925, no. 18, l. 29–30: τῶν συµµάχων πάντων τῶν τασσοµένων ὑπὸ τὸν
δᾶµον.
141
Hans-Ulrich Wiemer
Bibliography
Accame, S.
1947 ‘Alceo di Messene, Filippo V e Roma’, Rivista Italiana di Filologia Classica
n. s. 25, 94–105.
Adak, M.
2007 ‘Die rhodische Herrschaft in Lykien und die rechtliche Stellung der Städte
Xanthos, Phaselis und Melanippion’, Historia 56, 251–79.
Ager, S. L.
1991 ‘Rhodes: The rise and fall of a neutral diplomat’, Historia 40, 10–41.
1996 Interstate Arbitrations in the Greek World, 337–90 BC, Berkeley.
Anderson, M. S.
1993 The Rise of Modern Diplomacy 1450–1919, London and New York.
Austin, C. and Bastianini, G.
2002 Posidippi Pellaei quae supersunt omnia ediderunt, Milan.
Badian, E.
1995 ‘The ghost of empire. Reflections on Athenian foreign policy in the fourth
century BC ’, in W. Eder (ed.) Die athenische Demokratie im 4. Jahrhundert v.
Chr. Vollendung oder Verfall einer Verfassungsform, Stuttgart, 81–106.
Bastianini, G. and Gallazzi, C.
2001 Posidippo di Pella. Epigrammi (P.Mil.Vogl. VIII 309). Edizione a cura di G. B. e
C. G. con la collaborazione di C. Austin, Milan.
Beckby, H.
1967/68 Anthologia Graeca. Griechisch und Deutsch, 2nd edn, 4 Vols., Munich.
Bergk, T.
1873 ‘Ein Epigramm des Alkaios v. Messene’, Philologus 32, 678–81.
Berthold, R. M.
1984 Rhodes in the Hellenistic Age, Ithaca and London.
Billows, R. A.
1990 Antigonos the One-Eyed and the Creation of the Hellenistic State, Berkeley.
Boiy, T.
2007 Between High and Low. A chronology of the early Hellenistic period, Berlin.
Bosworth, A. B.
2002 The Legacy of Alexander: Politics, warfare, and propaganda under the Successors.
Oxford.
Bremen, R. van
2004a ‘Laodikeia in Karia’, Chiron 34, 367–99.
2004b ‘Leon the son of Chrysaor and the religious identity of Stratonikeia in
Caria’, in S. Colvin (ed.) The Greco-Roman East. Politics, culture and society, Yale
Classical Studies 31, Cambridge, 207–44.
Bresson, A.
1999 ‘Rhodes and Lycia in Hellenistic times’, in V. Gabrielsen et al. (eds)
Hellenistic Rhodes: Politics, culture, and society, Aarhus, 98–131.
2003 ‘Les intérêts rhodiens en Carie à l’époque hellénistique jusqu’en 167
av.J.-C.’ in F. Prost (ed.) L’Orient méditerranéen de la mort d’Alexandre aux
campagnes de Pompée. Cités et royaumes à l’époque hellénistique, Rennes, 169–92.
Bringmann, K. and Steuben, H. von
1995 Schenkungen hellenistischer Herrscher an griechische Städte und Heiligtümer, Teil I:
142
Early Hellenistic Rhodes: The struggle for independence and the dream of hegemony
143
Hans-Ulrich Wiemer
Gruen, E. S.
1975 ‘Rome and Rhodes in the second century BC: a historiographical Inquiry’,
CQ 25, 58–81.
Gutzwiller, K.
2002 ‘Posidippus on statuary’, in G. Bastianini and A. Casanova (eds), Il papiro
di Posidippo un anno dopo, Studi e testi di papirologia n. s. 4, Florence, 41–60.
2005 The New Posidippus. A Hellenistic poetry book, Oxford.
Habicht, C.
1970 Gottmenschentum und griechische Städte, 2nd edn, Munich.
1995 Athen. Die Geschichte der Stadt in hellenistischer Zeit, Munich.
Hauben, H.
1977 ‘Rhodes, Alexander, and the Diadochi from 333/332 to 304 BC ’, Historia
26, 307–39.
Hebert, B
1989 Schriftquellen zur hellenistischen Kunst. Plastik, Malerei und Kunsthandwerk der
Griechen vom vierten bis zum zweiten Jahrhundert, Graz.
Hiller von Gaertringen, F. von
1931 ‘Rhodos’, in: RE Suppl. V, 731–840.
Hoepfner, W.
2003 Der Koloß von Rhodos und die Bauten des Helios. Neue Forschungen zu einem der
sieben Weltwunder, Mainz.
Holleaux, M.
1938 ‘Sur une inscription de Thèbes’, in idem, Études d’épigraphie et d’histoire
grecques, Vol. I, Paris, 1–40.
Hornblower, J.
1981 Hieronymus of Cardia, Oxford.
Jacquemin, A. and Laroche, D.
1986. ‘Le char d’or consacré par le peuple rhodien’, BCH 110, 285–307.
Kaibel, G.
1909 Comicorum Graecorum fragmenta, Vol. I, 1: Doriensium comoedia, mimi, phlyaces,
Berlin.
Kassel, R. and Austin, C.
2001 Poetae Comici Graeci, Vol. I: Comoedia Dorica, Mimi. Phlyaces, Berlin and New
York.
Knell, H.
1995 Die Nike von Samothrake. Typus, Form, Bedeutung und Wirkungsgeschichte eines
rhodischen Sieges-Anathems im Kabirenheiligtum von Samothrake, Darmstadt.
Knoepfler, D.
2005 ‘La prétendue domination d’Antiochos III sur Kéôs: à propos de deux
décrets récemment publiés (SEG 48,1130)’, Chiron 35, 285–308.
Kontorini, V.
1989 Ἀνέκδοτες ἐπίγραφες Ῥόδου II. Inscriptions inédites de Rhodes II. Athens.
Kowalzig, B.
2007 Singing for the Gods: Performances of myth and ritual in Archaic and Classical Greece,
Oxford.
Maiuri, A.
1925 Nuova silloge epigrafica di Rodi e Cos, Florence.
144
Early Hellenistic Rhodes: The struggle for independence and the dream of hegemony
Mark, I. S.
1998. ‘The Victory of Samothrace’, in O. Panagia and W. Coulson (eds) Regional
Schools in Hellenistic Sculpture, Oxford, 157–65.
Migeotte, L.
1984 L’emprunt publique dans les cités grecques, Québec and Paris.
Momigliano, A.
1960 ‘Terra marique’, in idem, Secondo contributo alla storia degli studi classici e del mondo
antico, Rome, 431–46 (reprinted from Journal of Roman Studies 32, 1942,
53–64).
Morelli, D.
1956 ‘Gli stranieri in Rodi’, Studi Classici ed Orientali 5, 126–90.
1959 I culti in Rodi, Studi Classici ed Orientali 8, Pisa.
Nielsen, T. H. and Gabrielsen, V.
2004 ‘Rhodos’, in M. H. Hansen and T. H. Nielsen (eds) An Inventory of Archaic
and Classical Poleis, Oxford, 1196–210.
Reger, G.
1999 ‘The relations between Rhodes and Caria from 246 to 167 BC ’, in V.
Gabrielsen et al. (eds) Hellenistic Rhodes: Politics, culture, and society, Aarhus,
76–97.
Rice, E. E.
1993 ‘The Glorious Dead: Commemoration of the fallen and portrayal of
victory in the late classical and the hellenistic world’, in J. Rich and
G. Shipley (eds) War and Society in the Greek World, London, 224–57.
Sacco, G.
1980 ‘Su alcuni etnici di stranieri in Rodi’, Rendiconti dell’Accademia dei Lincei 35,
517–28.
Schmitt, H. H.
1957 Rom und Rhodos, Munich.
Segre, M.
1941 ‘Il culto rodio di Alessandro e dei Tolomei’, Bulletin de la Société Archéologique
d’Alexandrie 34, 29–39.
Seibert, J.
1972 Untersuchungen zur Geschichte Ptolemaios’ I, Munich.
Varinlioglu, E. et al.
1990 ‘Une inscription de Pladasa de Carie’, Revue des Études Anciennes 92, 59–78.
Vedder, U.
2000 ‘Der Koloß von Rhodos – Mythos und Wirklichkeit eines Weltwunders’,
Nürnberger Blätter zur Archäologie 16, 23–40.
2004 ‘Review of W. Hoepfner, Der Koloß von Rhodos und die Bauten des
Helios’, Göttinger Forum für die Altertumswissenschaft 7, 1103–13.
Virgilio, B.
2003 Lancia, diadema e porpora. Il re e la regalità ellenistica, 2nd edn, Pisa.
Walbank, F. W.
1942 ‘Alcaeus of Messene, Philip V, and Rome’, CQ 36, 134–45.
1957 A Historical Commentary on Polybius, Vol. I, Oxford.
Waltz, P.
1931 Anthologie Palatine. Texte établi et traduit, Tome III: Livre VI, Paris.
145
Hans-Ulrich Wiemer
Wiemer, H.-U.
2001 Rhodische Traditionen in der hellenistischen Historiographie, Frankfurt am Main.
2002a Krieg, Handel und Piraterie. Untersuchungen zur Geschichte des hellenistischen Rhodos,
Berlin.
2002b ‘Ökonomie und Politik im hellenistischen Rhodos’, Historische Zeitschrift
275, 561–91.
forthcoming
(a) ‘Zenon of Rhodes and the Rhodian view of history, in B. Gibson and
T. Harrison (eds) Polybius and his World: Essays in honour of F. W. Walbank,
Oxford.
forthcoming
(b) ‘Development and structure of the Rhodian Peraia: evidence and
models’, in R. van Bremen and J.-M. Carbon (eds) Hellenistic Caria,
Bordeaux.
Will, É.
1979/1982 Histoire politique du monde hellénistique, 2nd edn, 2 Vols., Nancy.
146
8
Shane Wallace
Since the publication in 1973 of the honorary decree for Glaukon, son of
Eteokles, of Athens, much attention has been placed not only on Glaukon
himself but also on certain other features of the text, namely Plataia and the
cult of Zeus Eleutherios and Homonoia of the Greeks.2 Plataia even alone
resonated powerfully in Greek history, all the more so when combined
with the concepts of freedom (eleutheria) and unity (homonoia). Much debate
has focused on the origins of the cult of Homonoia of the Greeks. Two
main schools of thought have developed: those who place its origin in the
late fourth century in connection with Philip and Alexander and those who
place it in the 260s, in connection with the political programme of the
Chremonidean War.3 Both dates are possible, but I will argue for the
former. A second point of debate is the origin of the Eleutheria Games,
first attested in the early third century. Possibly originating in the fifth
century, they were most likely re-organised in the late fourth century,
perhaps under Alexander.4 My aim in this chapter is to look at Plataia and
the cult of Zeus Eleutherios and Homonoia of the Greeks ensemble, from
the re-foundation of Plataia in 337 until the Glaukon decree which is to be
dated c.262–245.5 In this way, the evidence may be treated both
chronologically and in unison and new insights can perhaps be offered into
the history and importance of both site and cult.
I shall focus on Plataia at three points in time. All offer ‘Panhellenic’
contexts, that is calls to Greek unity or freedom usually against a foreign
power, and will be instructive for understanding the importance and
function of Plataia at such times. Firstly, the years 337–335 and the
re-foundation of Plataia under Philip and Alexander. Here I shall argue
that Plataia’s connection with Alexander and his presence in Boiotia in
Boedromion 335 offers a prime context for the (re-)foundation of the
Eleutheria Games and, perhaps, the joint cult of Zeus Eleutherios and
Homonoia of the Greeks. Secondly, the Hellenic (Lamian) War of 323/2.6
147
Shane Wallace
148
The significance of Plataia for Greek eleutheria in the early Hellenistic period
149
Shane Wallace
150
The significance of Plataia for Greek eleutheria in the early Hellenistic period
It is vital to note, as Bosworth has done, that the dogma harked back
directly to the Persian Wars, building authority from them.28 Justin tells us
that during Thebes’ trial before the synedrion the Oath (ius) of Plataia was
repeated and its call for the destruction of Thebes was reiterated.29 The
Oath is known to us from three similar fourth-century accounts, two
literary and one epigraphic. Largely a fabrication of the fourth century, the
Oath does however contain a kernel of truth.30 Its call for the destruction
of Thebes expands on the Oath taken by the Hellenes in late 481 to punish
medisers, and the similar decision taken after the battle of Plataia to besiege
Thebes until it handed over its leaders for judgement in Corinth.31 Clearly,
the League dogma of 335 drew a connection with the earlier resolutions of
481–79 and paralleled the League of Corinth and the invasion of the
Persian Empire with their ancestral counterparts. However, by building
upon the traditions of the fourth-century Oath, the League sought
historical validity through anachronistic elements of the Persian Wars
tradition; elaborating historical circumstances around a text itself elaborated
around historical circumstances.32 Historical fact was not definitive, it never
is; rather it was the belief in what that historical tradition represented that
was authoritative.
In fact, it was essential, for other reasons, that Alexander and the League
enforce their authority over the memory of the Persian Wars and Greek
eleutheria. When Alexander arrived at Thebes he gave the Thebans a chance
to capitulate and rejoin the peace. They refused. Instead, they called him
tyrant, asserted that the Macedonian garrison denied their freedom, and
called upon the Greeks to ally with them and the Great King, the true
defender of Greek eleutheria, and rid Greece of its Macedonian oppressor.33
With ‘every syllable a calculated insult,’ this jabbed at the exposed nerve of
Alexander’s Panhellenic pretensions.34 It challenged his role as he-gemo-n and
undermined his propaganda by promoting the King’s Peace over the
League of Corinth.35 It was therefore apt that Alexander used the League
to punish Thebes. The reference to the Oath of Plataia authorised the
destruction via the historical precedent of the Persian Wars, while the use
of the League erased Thebes’ claims to be defending Greek eleutheria and
displayed again Alexander’s validity as he-gemo-n.
At all stages Alexander countered threats by employing the League to
define its (and his) authority as a continuation of the authority exercised by
the Greeks during the Persian Wars. Although some have appreciated the
importance of Alexander’s use of a League dogma in Asia, it has not been
adequately stressed that this dogma on medism was originally sanctioned
by the synedrion of the League of Corinth at the time of the destruction of
Thebes. This dogma, continually cited, formed a key component in the
151
Shane Wallace
152
The significance of Plataia for Greek eleutheria in the early Hellenistic period
153
Shane Wallace
154
The significance of Plataia for Greek eleutheria in the early Hellenistic period
rebuilding the walls of Plataia. The League may plausibly have taken the
opportunity to (re-)found a Panhellenic festival in honour of Plataia’s role
in the Persian Wars. Alternatively, the impetus may lie with Alexander,
who perhaps celebrated games after the destruction of Thebes, as he was
to do with great frequency in Asia, commemorating victory and success
(over Thebes?), celebrating new foundations (Plataia?), or acting as a
prelude to a new campaign (invasion of Asia?).50 As a closer analogy, the
Nemean Games returned to Corinth and gained renewed prominence
through Macedonian patronage in the 330s.51 Ultimately, whether founded
directly by either Alexander or the League – and both are possible – the
new invasion of the Persian Empire and the historical and contemporary
importance of Plataia and Thebes in Boedromion 335 offer an ideal
context for the (re-)foundation of the Eleutheria as a remembrance of the
Wars of 480/79 and Greek eleutheria.
The events of Boedromion 335 may also provide the impetus for the
addition of the cult of Homonoia of the Greeks to that of Zeus
Eleutherios. Attested first in the Glaukon decree of c.262–245, the joint
cult of Zeus Eleutherios and Homonoia of the Greeks has been the focus
of some debate.52 The worship of Zeus Eleutherios probably reflects both
Pausanias’ sacrifices in the Plataian agora and the altar consecrated outside
Plataia by the Hellenes in 479.53 Homonoia of the Greeks must have been
added later. Étienne and Piérart suggested the mid third century in
connection with the Chremonidean War. This is possible, but the evidence
for the concept of Homonoia of the Greeks at that time is slim.54 The same
is to be said for Dreyer’s proposal of the Celtic invasion of 279. West has
proposed a much more likely date of the late fourth century, probably in
connection with the new war against Persia.55 He connects Homonoia of
the Greeks with Gorgias, Lysias, and Isocrates, who consistently called for
homonoia between the Greeks leading to a new war against Persia (e.g. Isoc.
Phil. 16: τῆς τε τῶν Ἑλλήνων ὁµονοίας καὶ τῆς ἐπὶ τοὺς βαρβάρους στρατείας).56
West’s argument has not been widely accepted but due to the vast amount
of literary evidence supporting it I find it quite plausible. It was in the
fourth century that Homonoia first became personified,57 simultaneously
with its continuous invocation as an aspect of a united Greek campaign
against Persia. With this in mind, Homonoia of the Greeks was most likely
added to Zeus Eleutherios at a time when calls for a Greek campaign
against Persia were strong. The League of Corinth and the invasion of
Persia is the perfect context, encapsulating as it does the ideals of Hellenic
unity, eleutheria, and revenge against Persia.
If this was the case, and one admits that it is speculative, then the joint
cult of Zeus Eleutherios and Homonoia of the Greeks could have served
155
Shane Wallace
a number of purposes. For Plataia, it asserted the city’s right to exist based
on its historical importance for eleutheria and the Persian Wars, something
already promoted by Alexander and the League; a cry for stability and
security in the wake of Plataia’s second re-foundation. For Alexander, the
cult asserted the two key components of his campaign: peace at home and
unity abroad.58 The joint cult gave to both these concepts ‘a solidity and
objectivity’ not previously possessed: Homonoia of the Greeks
personifying the civic and inter-polis stability sought by the League of
Corinth and Zeus Eleutherios personifying eleutheria, the war against Persia,
and the ideal of Hellenic unity that arose from both.59
It seems clear that during the 330s there was a tri-partite discourse taking
place around Plataia: Alexander, League synedrion, and the cult of Zeus
Eleutherios. As he-gemo-n of the League, Alexander stood behind the League-
sanctioned destruction of Thebes and patronage of Plataia. Nonetheless,
he remained careful to defer authority nominally to the League, showing
that the League played a key role in validating his actions through
Panhellenic authority and defining them via the precedent of the Persian
Wars and the Greek League of 481–479. The League itself, however, was
more than just a rubber stamp; it was an active partner in Alexander’s
ideology. Here it is important to remember the Boiotian make-up of the
synedrion in Boedromion 335, ensuring that local, including Plataian, voices
would have been heard. While the synedrion’s prosecution of Thebes and
patronage of Plataia did in part follow Alexander’s will, it was also a
manifestation of the inherent anti-Thebism of the synedrion at this time. As
evidence of the League’s active role, it continued to organise the Eleutheria
into the Imperial period. Again, the games reflected the will and
propaganda of both Alexander and the predominantly Boiotian synedrion.
Rather than a tool of the he-gemo-n, the synedrion was more a point of synergy,
working in unison with the he-gemo-n on a Panhellenic policy expanded from
the historical traditions of Plataia and the Persian Wars.
Of course, after her destruction by Thebes in 373, Plataia lay in ruins.
The recommencement of the worship of Zeus Eleutherios and the
sacrifices to the dead, as well as the rebuilding and patronage of Plataia in
337, emphasised a new beginning after Thebes’ previous crimes against
Plataia and against the very memory of the Persian Wars. By their
continued existence after the destruction of Plataia and the exile of its
citizens, monuments dating from the Persian Wars, such as the victory
trophy, and the tombs of the Greek dead, and perhaps the altar to Zeus
Eleutherios, underscored Plataia’s abiding significance for Greek eleutheria
and the memory of the Persian Wars. Vicariously, then, these monuments
testified to Thebes’ double destruction of Plataia, re-emphasised its
156
The significance of Plataia for Greek eleutheria in the early Hellenistic period
157
Shane Wallace
158
The significance of Plataia for Greek eleutheria in the early Hellenistic period
The enemy in 479, Hyperides now makes Thebes the victim in 323 and
thus an inspiration to Greek eleutheria. In this scheme the enemy now
becomes those who fought with Macedon, those who ‘parcelled out the
land among themselves’, the likes of Plataia, Thespiae, and Orchomenos,
who had been given Theban land by Philip and Alexander, had fought
during the siege, and had prosecuted the Thebans in 335.
In 323/2 Plataia, the site of the triumph of Greek eleutheria in 479, lay in
the hands of those who fought against Greek eleutheria. Conversely, Thebes,
the enemy of eleutheria in 479, stood as an inspiration to it in 323/2. The
roles were reversed and Plataia in 323/2 echoed Thebes in 479: a Greek
state siding with the barbarian against Greek freedom. This was particularly
difficult for Hyperides to assimilate into his speech. Athens and Plataia
had a close relationship extending back as far as the battle of Marathon,
when both stood alone against Persia (Hdt. 6.108–13). Their present
conflict was too sensitive and complicated for a funeral oration, and so
Hyperides ignored Plataia because it stood against Athens and her fight
for Greek eleutheria. Indeed, he even went so far as to alter the events of the
war to transpose the Athenian victory from Plataia to Thebes, thus
removing entirely the embarrassment of Plataia’s ‘medism’ and Athens’
necessary conflict with her. Simply put, the connection Hyperides sought
to draw between the Hellenic and Persian Wars would not have admitted
the fact that Athens fought the Plataians, at Plataia, for eleutheria.68
This cuts to the heart of the problem. Athens led the Hellenic War with
great pomp on behalf of the freedom of the Greeks. Athens’ interpretation
of freedom, however, was not the same as that of other Greeks, rather it
was concerned primarily with ensuring her own best interests and
hegemony. Therefore, when the Boiotians (including Plataia) and
Euboeans fought against Athens, Hyperides damned them as ‘the first
opponents of Greek freedom’.69 From a Boiotian (specifically Plataian)
perspective, however, eleutheria was best served under a Macedonian
enforced status-quo, where Theban hegemony ceased to exist and the land
distributions of 335 remained in force.70 The Athenian goal of restoring
Thebes (alleged in Diodorus, 18.11.3–4) did not appeal to the likes of
Plataia, Thespiae, and Orchomenos, so recently patronised and re-founded
by Macedon. The role of Plataia in the Hellenic War is a stark reminder
that the meaning of eleutheria was firmly in the eye of the employer, and
what Athens termed ‘the freedom of the Greeks’ was not necessarily in
the best interests of Plataian, Boiotian, or Euboean eleutheria.
So, because of Plataia’s loyalty to Macedon in 335 and 323/2 her
historical significance for Greek eleutheria was lost to Athenian propaganda
during the Hellenic War. Plataia’s connection with the Persian Wars and
159
Shane Wallace
Greek eleutheria had earlier been appropriated by both Philip and Alexander,
and this appears to have remained prominent for some time. It forced
Hyperides to ignore Plataia’s Persian War history and instead invert the
importance of Plataia and Thebes for Greek eleutheria. His silence helps
elucidate the key role Plataia played in developing the ideology of
Alexander’s new Persian War.71
160
The significance of Plataia for Greek eleutheria in the early Hellenistic period
161
Shane Wallace
162
The significance of Plataia for Greek eleutheria in the early Hellenistic period
163
Shane Wallace
This ideological interaction would be all the more significant if the two
cult deities had been integrated in the late fourth century in a strongly pro-
Macedonian context. If so, then the use of the cult and associated ideology
against Macedon would reveal yet another dynamic in the significance of
Plataia and the Persian Wars for Greek eleutheria: the site, traditions, and
cult that had previously been used to enforce Macedonian hegemony over
Greece were now used to inspire Greek freedom from Macedon. What we
may be seeing at Plataia is an example in cult form of the dynamic fluidity
of both the concept of eleutheria and the memory of the Persian Wars,
exemplified in dual by the site of Plataia and the cult of Zeus Eleutherios.
If so, then this was possible because the Persian Wars themselves were an
adaptive tradition that could be used against a foreign power, be it Persia,
Macedon, or even the Gauls. As such, they allowed Macedon to enforce
her own hegemony over Greece by turning attention to Persia, just as they
allowed the Greeks to condemn Macedon, in both the Hellenic and
Chremonidean Wars.
4. Conclusion
The site of Plataia encapsulated the dynamic malleability of eleutheria and
the memory of the Persian Wars in a way that possibly no other site could.
Its topography was a constant visible reminder of the battle of 479. The
tombs displayed to the viewer the sacrifice of the Greek heroes. Tombs of
numerous states revealed the site’s Panhellenism (if somewhat back
projected, as Herodotus (9.85) informs us) while the individual tombs of
Athens and Sparta similarly revealed the prominence of these two states.
The victory trophy displayed the ultimate success of the Greek struggle
and the validity of the sacrifice. The altar to Zeus Eleutherios defined the
divinely sanctioned victory as a discovery of eleutheria, as stated in
Simonides’ dedicatory epigram (Plut. Arist. 19; cf. Anth. Pal. 6.50). The
Eleutheria honoured the heroes and in its events integrated the monuments
into a continual, penteteric, celebration of eleutheria.
Throughout the early Hellenistic period the history and site of Plataia
were used by both Macedonian and Greek to enforce hegemony and
inspire unity, be it for the invasion of the Persian Empire or the
Chremonidean War. I have argued for the continued and dynamic
significance of Plataia as a space intrinsically connected with the twin
concepts of eleutheria and the Persian Wars. Tossed between Macedon and
Greece, Plataia remained perpetually important because, through her
physical monuments and historical context, she personified both these
concepts in microcosm. Her utilisation by both Macedon and Greece was
possible because the Persian Wars, as historical memory, developed in part
164
The significance of Plataia for Greek eleutheria in the early Hellenistic period
as a conceptual prototype for understanding any war and its goals. So, the
Persian Wars and Greek eleutheria could be used to promote war against
the Persian, just as they could against Macedon or the Gauls; all with equal
validity, if not success.90
However, Plataia’s role within the Persian War tradition worked on other
levels. I have also argued that the site itself influenced the ways in which
people viewed and employed it by providing a pre-existing ideological
environment, both conceptual and topographical. While this helped
develop the aims and significance of later events, it also restricted the ways
in which these events could be understood by providing a pre-determined
context into which the later event must conceptualise itself. I have argued
that this can be seen not only in the ideological nature and import of the
fourth- and third-century additions to the cult of Zeus Eleutherios, but
also in the physical integration of the Homonoia cult to Zeus Eleutherios
(being as they were theoi sumbo-moi ) and the Eleutheria into the existing
monuments. In a wider sense this is indicative of the memory of the
Persian Wars: a conceptual touchstone displaying the continued vitality of
the Persian War tradition, but similarly acting as a conceptual straitjacket
constricting and inhibiting the understanding of eleutheria just as it defines
and promotes it.
Acknowledgements
My sincere thanks go to Andrew Erskine and Lloyd Llewellyn-Jones who,
as editors, have read this chapter and improved it throughout and, as
supervisors, have shown the same generous care with my entire PhD.
Joseph Roisman and Anton Powell kindly read drafts of this chapter and
offered many useful insights. Versions of this chapter were presented at the
2009 Classical Association Conference in Glasgow and in Queen’s
University Belfast. My research was funded by the AHRC. All opinions
and errors remain my own.
Notes
1 Throughout this chapter, ‘homonoia’ and ‘eleutheria’ refer to concepts, but ‘Homonoia’
and ‘the Eleutheria’ refer to the cult of Homonoia and the Eleutheria Games at Plataia.
Unless indicated, all dates are BC.
2 Spyropoulos 1973 (editio princeps); Jones 1974; Roesch 1974; Étienne and Piérart
1975 (edition, photograph, and French translation); West 1977; Pouilloux 1978;
Buraselis 1982; Étienne 1985; Erskine 1990, 90–5; Schachter 1994, 125–44;
Thériault 1996a, 101–30; 1996b, 137–42; Austin 2006, no. 61 (English translation);
Stavrianopoulou 2002, 134–8; Jung 2006, 298–343.
3 Late 4th century: West 1977; cf. Austin 2006, no. 61. Mid-3rd century: Étienne and
165
Shane Wallace
Piérart 1975; Étienne 1985; Erskine 1990, 90-5; Stavrianopoulou 2002, 136–7;
Chaniotis 2005, 228–30; Jung 2006, 321–9. Fence-sitters: Thériault 1996a, 115; 1996b,
141–2. Dreyer (1999, 254–5) suggests that the incentive lay with the Celtic invasion
of 279 and Athens’ role in defending Thermopylae.
4 See section 1.
5 For a similar approach see Jung 2006 who explores the continuing significance of
Plataea (and Marathon) from the 5th century BC until the 4th century AD. For the dating
of the Glaukon Decree, see below n. 72.
6 On the evidence for the ‘Hellenic’ (epigraphic and late 4th century) rather than
‘Lamian’ War (literary and derivative), see Ashton 1984; Lehmann 1988, 143–4, 148–9.
7 Just. Epit. 9.4.7; Diod. 16.87.3, 17.8.3–7; Paus. 9.1.8, 6.5; Arr. Anab. 1.7.1; cf. Plut.
Reg. imp. apoph. 177d; Errington 1990, 85; Green 1970, 80; Lane Fox 1974, 86. Thebes
remained in control of the Boiotian League (Arr. Anab. 1.7.11; Brunt 1976, 35 n. 6).
8 Kirsten 1950, col. 2312.
9 Fredricksmeyer 2000, 137–8. The context of the Olympic Games is important.
Because the synedrion met at the Panhellenic games it would have been sitting when
Alexander’s letter was read out. Thus, Alexander’s announcement would have been
connected with the synedrion’s earlier promise to rebuild Plataia’s walls.
10 Thespiae: Dio Chrys. Or. 37.42; Plin. HN 34.66. Orchomenos: Arr. Anab. 1.9.10.
Allies at Thebes: Arr. Anab. 1.8.8; Diod. 17.13.5; Just. Epit. 11.3.8; Plut. Alex. 11.5.
Destruction of Plataia, Thespiae, and Orchomenos: Xen. Hell. 6.3.1; Isoc. Plat.; Diod.
15.46.6, 51.3, 57.1, 79.6; Paus. 9.14.2; Buckler 1980, 22, 182–4. Hellenic War: below
section 2.
11 Flower 2000, 96–7; Poddighe 2009, 107–9. Seibert (1998, 5–26) cautions against
using ideologically loaded terms like crusade (Kreuzzug), national war (Nationalkrieg),
panhellenic ( panhellenisch), and war of revenge (Rachekrieg) as they can precondition
one’s analysis of events.
12 P. Wallace 1982. Raaflaub (2004, 58–65) analyses the development of eleutheria
repeated by Alexander ( Just. Epit. 11.5.6; Diod. 17.24.1), see Flower 2000; Poddighe
2009, 105. The revenge motif appears frequently: Arr. Anab. 2.14, 3.18; Just. Epit.
11.12.5–6; Polyb. 3.6; Anth. Pal. 6.344; cf. Isoc. Paneg. 155, 183, 185. So too
eleutheria/autonomia: GHI 86b; SEG XIX 698; cf. I.Erythrai 31; Diod. 17.24.1; Arr.
Anab. 1.18.1–2; Theopompos FGrH 115 fr. 253; Plut. Adv. Col. 1126d; cf. Isoc. Paneg.
181, Phil. 124, Panath. 103, Epist. 9; Archid. 8-10. Polybius (3.6; analysis in Seibert 1998,
27–58) distinguishes three phases leading to war: cause (Xenophon and Agesilaos’
campaigns), pretext (war of revenge), and beginning (Alexander’s invasion). Brosius
(2003) argues that the enmity leading to war between Macedon and Persia was ‘created’
by Philip to keep Persia out of Greek affairs.
14 Fredricksmeyer 2000, 138; Poddighe 2009, 116.
15 Arr. Anab. 1.9.9–10. 3; Plut. Alex. 11.5; Just. Epit. 11.3.8–11.
16 Brunt 1976, 39 n. 1; Bosworth 1980, 88; 1988, 195; Yardley and Heckel 1997, 94.
Others contend that it was a League meeting: Wilcken 1967, 73–5; Hamilton 1969,
30–1; Green 1970, 145–7; Schachermeyer 1973, 117; Hammond and Walbank 1988,
63–6.
17 GHI 76, l. 21, 82, l. 4, 84a, ll. 14–5; Aeschin. In Ctes. 161.
166
The significance of Plataia for Greek eleutheria in the early Hellenistic period
18 In error, Justin transposes authority from the synedrion to its he-gemo-n (11.4.9:
interdictum regis).
19 Although Athens defied both the dogma and Alexander’s authority as he-gemo-n by
accepting landless Thebans (Paus. 9.23.5) and refusing to hand over her generals and
orators (Arr. Anab. 1.10.4–6; Bosworth 1980, 92–6), she was careful to obtain, through
Demades, Alexander’s acquiescence in both these matters (Diod. 17.15).
20 Diod. 17.14.3: ἐψηφίσαντο τὴν µὲν πόλιν κατασκάψαι͵ τοὺς δ΄ αἰχµαλώτους ἀποδόσθαι͵
τοὺς δὲ φυγάδας τῶν Θηβαίων ἀγωγίµους ὑπάρχειν ἐξ ἁπάσης τῆς Ἑλλάδος καὶ µηδένα τῶν
Ἑλλήνων ὑποδέχεσθαι Θηβαῖον. Translation adapted from Welles (1963). Justin (Epit.
11.3.8–11) preserves a similar account but mentions Thebes’ present support of Persia.
Droysen (1952/3, 94 with n. 23) sees the terms of destruction as perhaps based on the
terms of earlier Leagues, like the Second Athenian League (IG II 2 43, l. 51–61).
21 Arr. Anab. 1.16.6: παρὰ τὰ κοινῇ δόξαντα τοῖς Ἕλλησιν.
22 Paus 6.18.2–4: Λαµψακηνῶν τὰ βασιλέως τοῦ Περσῶν φρονησάντων; cf. Val. Max.
τοῖς βαρβάροις; cf. Bosworth 1980, 127–8. Michel RIG 530 may preserve reference to
a democratic revolution in Zeleia, which could have influenced Alexander’s decision.
The inscription dates c.334/3 (Rhodes with Lewis 1997, 421) and mentions the politai
capturing the acropolis. 531 deals with the sale of ‘the lands of the exiles’ (presumably
pro-Persian) and, along with 530, preserves the democratic enactment formula, ἔδοξεν
τῶι δήµωι.
24 GHI 84b.
25 Chios: GHI 84a, ll. 10–3: καὶ εἶναι ἀγωγίµους κατὰ τὸ δόγµα τὸ τῶν Ἑλλήνων ‘and
shall be liable to seizure in accordance with the resolution of the Greeks.’ Eresos:
GHI 83 §iv, ll. 25-8: καὶ | [ὧ]ν κατέγνω φυγὴν φε[υ|γ]έτωσαµ µέν, ἀγώγιµο[ι] | δὲ µὴ
ἔστωσαν ‘and those whom he (Alexander) condemned to exile shall be exiled but shall
not be liable to seizure.’
26 Arr. Anab. 3.23.8: παρὰ τὰ δόγµατα τῶν Ἑλλήνων; cf. 24.4–5 with Flower 2000, 117.
27 Cf. Poddighe 2009, 107–9.
28 Bosworth 1988, 189–90.
29 Just. Epit. 11.3.8–11; Yardley and Heckel 1997, 95–6.
30 Lycurg. Leoc. 81; Diod. 11.29.3; GHI 88; cf. Theopompos FGrH 115 fr. 153. On
the Oath’s authenticity see Habicht 1961; Kreutz 2001; GHI 88; Krentz 2007. Kernel
of Truth: Burn 1962, 512-15; Siewert 1972, 63–75; Barron 1988, 604. Theopompos
considered it an Athenian fabrication designed to dupe the rest of Greece, cf.
Shrimpton 1991, 80–2; Pownall 2008, 120–1.
31 Medisers: Hdt. 7.132, 138.1, 145, 148; cf. Diod. 11.3.2; Brunt 1953, 136–8, 142–3.
1.19–20.
34 Bosworth 1988, 195.
35 Welles 1963, 143 n. 1; Tenedos and Mytilene joined Memnon in 333 on the terms
Kassandreia. The Glaukon decree (c.262–245) confirms that games were established
167
Shane Wallace
by the mid 3rd century. For the Eleutheria, see Robert 1969; Pritchett 1979, 154–6,
178–83; Robertson 1986; Schachter 1994, 132–43; Boedeker 1998, 240–2; Chaniotis
2005, 228–30; Jung 2006, 331–40.
37 Vanderpool 1969; Amandry 1971, 612–26; Boedeker 1998, 240–2; cf. Jung 2006,
Pausanias 9.13.4.
39 Étienne and Piérart 1975, 52–3.
40 Étienne and Piérart 1975, 68; Schachter 1994, 125-32; Stavrianopoulou 2002,
136 with n. 54. Dogmata: see above (Philip and Alexander); Schmitt, SdA 446, l. 79;
CID IV 11 (Demetrios). Synedrion: see above (Philip and Alexander); Schmitt, SdA 446
passim; CID IV 11; Agora XVI 122; Plut. Demetr. 25.3 (Demetrios). Robertson (1986,
94 n. 25) suggests that the Eleutheria was founded by Athens and the Boiotian League
sometime after 287. Jung (2006, 331–40) suggests the Hellenic War (below section 2).
41 Plut. Cam. 19, De glor. Ath. 349f; cf. Pritchett 1957, 277. Graindor (1922) proposed
that a scribal error is responsible for Plutarch’s date of Boedromion 4th in his Aristides
(19.7). Pritchett (1985, 178–9 n. 90) discusses the difficulties in determining an
accurate Julian date for the battle.
42 Arr. Anab. 1.10.2; Plut. Alex. 13.1; cf. Cam. 19.10; Bosworth 1980, 92; 1988, 33;
Bosworth 1980, 96–97; Diod. 17.16). Although precise dates are difficult, the games
took place on the first days of the Macedonian month Dios, corresponding roughly
with the Attic month Pyanepsion. Alexander, therefore, spent the remainder of
Boedromion in Boiotia and on the march to Dion.
44 The Romance also says that Alexander avenged Plataia (ἤδη δὲ αὑτῷ ἐξεδίκησε
Πλαταίας).
45 Schachter 1994, 136, 141.
46 For an analysis of Plutarch’s account see Jung 2006, 271–81. Robertson (1986,
92–3) distinguishes two separate commemorations: the synedrion meeting and Plataian
sacrifice on Boedromion 3rd and the Plataian sacrifice to the Greek dead and Zeus
and Hermes Chthonios on Maimakterion 16th. These distinct events were conflated
by Pritchett (1979, 155–6, 178–9).
47 Robertson 1986, 88–93.
48 Incidental evidence suggests that this should be the case. Both Plutarch (Arist. 21.1)
and the Glaukon decree connect the Eleutheria with the synedrion and the sacrifice to
Zeus Eleutherios. In general, Hellenic synedria met during Panhellenic festivals (Philip
and Alexander: Curt. 4.5.11–12; Diod. 17.48.6; cf. Brunt 1976, 213 n. 2; Aeschin. In
Ctes. 254; Hammond and Griffith 1979, 634–5. Demetrios: Schmitt, SdA 446, l. 66–7,
72-3; CID IV 11; Plut. Demetr. 25.3). The meeting of the synedrion and the sacrifice to
Zeus Eleutherios would have marked the games’ climax (Pritchett 1979, 155–6).
49 Plut. Arist. 19 with n. 41 above; Pritchett 1957, 277.
50 I thank Prof. Erskine for bringing these parallels to my attention. Victories and
Successes: Arr. Anab. 2.5.8, 24.6, 3.6.1 (cf. Curt. 4.8.16), 16.9, 4.4.1, 5.8.3, 20.1, 6.28.3,
7.14.1; Indica 36.3, 42.6, 42.8; Diod. 17.46.6, 72.1; ISE 113; Curt. 3.7.2-5; Plut. Alex.
29.1, 67.4. New Foundations: Arr. Anab. 3.5.2, 5.20.1. Preludes: Arr. Anab. 1.11.1,
3.25.1, 5.8.3, 29.1–2; Indica 18.11–2, 21.2, 36.9; Diod. 17.16.3–4. See also, Arr. Anab.
168
The significance of Plataia for Greek eleutheria in the early Hellenistic period
1.18.2, 4.4.1, 7.14.10, 23.5; Plut. Alex. 4.5-6, 72.1; Curt. 6.2.1–5. Stavrianopoulou (2002,
136) places the impetus with Philip or Alexander.
51 Miller 1990, 22–3.
52 Bibliography in n. 2. The joint cult is unattested in literary sources. Plutarch,
however, mentions βωµοὶ παρὰ τοῖς θεοῖς (de Herod. malig. 43) even though the gods
share one altar in the Glaukon decree. Diodorus (11.29.2) and Aelius Aristeides
(13.148) speak of homonoia in connection with Zeus Eleutherios and Plataia, although
in the latter case this is probably a literary topos, see n. 56 below.
53 Thuc. 2.71.2; Plut. Arist. 19.7–20.4; Anth. Pal. 6.50 (Simonides’ dedicatory
epigram). Strabo 9.2.31 refers to the Greeks consecrating a temple ( ἱερόν). The
Glaukon decree reveals that a temple ( ἱερόν) to Zeus Eleutherios stood at Plataia by
the mid-3rd century, but was clearly distinct from the altar (βωµός). Schachter (1994,
125–32, 134–5) argues that the altar and cult of Zeus Eleutherios were founded under
Macedonian patronage in the late 4th century and that Pausanias’ sacrifice in 479 was
simply a one-off. Jung (2002, 265–7) feels that there is not enough evidence to decide
whether or not a formalised cult and altar were founded in 479. Cf. n. 62 below.
54 Above n. 3. The principal pieces of 3rd century evidence are the Chremonides
decree (IG II 2 686/7, l. 31-2: κοινῆς ὁµονοίας γενοµ|ένης τοῖς Ἕλλησι) and a fragment
of Alexis’ Hypobolimaios (Ath. 11.502b; Arnott 1996, 686-91; cf. West 1977, 315). One
could add the cult of Homonoia in Cilician Nagidos, a town with strong Ptolemaic
connections (SEG XXXIX 1426, l. 36–8; Habicht 2006, 253).
55 West 1977.
56 Gorgias: Philostr. VS 1.493; Plut. Con. prae. 144b–c. Lysias: 33.6; Dion. Hal. Lys.
28–29. Isocrates is incessant: Paneg. 3 (τε τοῦ πολέµου τοῦ πρὸς τοὺς βαρβάρους καὶ τῆς
ὁµονοίας τῆς πρὸς ἡµᾶς αὐτοὺς); Antid. 77 (τοὺς Ἕλληνας ἐπί τε τὴν τῶν βαρβάρων στρατείαν
παρακαλοῦντος καὶ περὶ τῆς πρὸς ἀλλήλους ὁµονοίας συµβουλεύοντος); Phil. 141; Panath.
13 (παρακαλούντων τοὺς Ἕλληνας ἐπί τε τὴν ὁµόνοιαν τὴν πρὸς ἀλλήλους καὶ τὴν
στρατείαν τὴν ἐπὶ τοὺς βαρβάρους), 42; Epist. 3.2 (εἰς ὁµόνοιαν καταστῆσαι τοὺς Ἕλληνας).
57 Evidence in Thériault 1996a. Roy (2008) now dates the Eleian inscription from
polis stability by outlawing the removal of the government in place at the time of a
polis’ entry to the League. Naturally, this was used to support pro-Macedonian regimes,
see [Dem.] 17 passim; Polyb. 18.14.3; Poddighe 2004; 2009, 113.
60 Altar: Simonides in Anth. Pal. 6.50; Plut. Arist. 19; Schachter 1994, 125–32, 134–5.
Trophy: Plato Menex. 245a; Isoc. Plat. 59; Eudoxos fr. 311 (Lasserre); Schachter 1994,
138–43. Tombs: Hdt. 9.85; Thuc. 3.58.4; Isoc. Plat. 60–61; Eudoxos fr. 311; Schachter
1994, 141–2; Flower and Marincola 2002, 254–6; Bremmer 2006.
61 Spyropoulos 1973.
62 Robert 1969; cf. 1948; Pritchett 1979, 182. If the altar was built in the late 4th
century, contemporary with the foundation of the Eleutheria and perhaps the cult of
Homonoia of the Greeks, as Schachter (1994, 125–32, 134–5) suggests, then the
integration of the games into the cultic landscape was both constructive and adaptive.
It constructed part of the landscape itself by consecrating an altar and dedicating a
Simonidean epigram; similarly it adapted the history by establishing both features
anachronistically within a Persian War topography.
169
Shane Wallace
63 Schmitt 1992, 76. Plutarch (Phoc. 23.4, 24.2–3) also mentions a battle against the
Boiotians. It would be fascinating to know how Leosthenes’ trophy integrated itself
into the Plataian landscape, particularly the Persian War monuments. Ma (2008), on
Chaeronea, is an excellent analysis of ideology through topography.
64 Although most scholars follow Diodorus’ account (Oikonomides 1982;
Worthington 1984; 1987; Schmitt 1992, 74–6), some favour Hyperides’ narrative
(Williams 1982, 40–1; Habicht 1997, 38). Hyperides is constantly trying to parallel
the Hellenic War with the Persian Wars. Therefore, his depiction of Leosthenes
leading Athenian troops from Athens, through Boiotia, and past Thermopylae,
though historically false, is designed to simulate the repulse of Mardonios’ troops
in 479.
65 S. Wallace, forthcoming section 1.
66 See n. 30.
67 Epit. 7.9–13: ‘Eώρων γὰ[ρ τὴν µὲν π]όλιν τῶν Θηβαίων οἰκτ[ρῶς ἠφα]νισµένην ἐξ
established the synedrion over it during the Hellenic War. Although there is no evidence
for this, it is not impossible. Jung does not mention it, but an allied synedrion was
based around Leosthenes and the army (IG II2 467; ISE 10 with Oliver 2009) and may
have been at Plataia in Autumn 323.
72 Étienne and Piérart 1975; Étienne 1985. Buraselis 1982, Stavrianopoulou 2002,
134–8, and Jung 2006, 302–6 plausibly argue for a date c.251–245, but an earlier one
cannot be discounted.
73 Jung 2006, 313–15. On the dating of the Chremonidean War see Osborne 2004;
Oliver 2007, 127–31. O’Neil 2008 provides a thorough overview of the evidence for
the Chremonidean War. One should add, however, the brief note of an unpublished
inscription from Rhamnous dating to 267/6 (Petrakos 2003 [2004], 15–16).
74 Τὸν | ἀγῶνα ὃν τιθέασιν οἱ Ἕλληνες ἐπὶ | τοῖς ἀνδράσιν τοῖς ἀγαθοῖς καὶ ἀγω|νισαµένοις
πρὸς τοὺς βαρβάρους | ὑπὲρ τῆς τῶν Ἑλλήνων ἐλευθερίας (l. 20–4). Trans. Austin 2006,
no. 63.
75 Editions: Syll.3 434/5; Schmitt, SdA 476. English translation: Austin 2006, no.
61. Analysis: Heinen 1972, 117-42. A copy of the alliance between Sparta and Ptolemy
Philadelphos has recently come to light during works on the island of Schoinoussa. We
await publication of this very important document. I thank Prof. Kostas Buraselis for
bringing this to my attention.
76 LGPN 2 s.v. Γλαυκών (12); Pros. Ptol. VI 14596; Habicht 1970, 32 n. 20; Pouilloux
1978.
77 Ambassador: ISE 53; IG II2 686/7, l. 24, 39. Synedros: Habicht 1997, 144. General:
SEG XXV 186. Statue: Syll.3 462 with Criscuolo 2003, 320–2. Buraselis (1982, 153–6;
170
The significance of Plataia for Greek eleutheria in the early Hellenistic period
SEG XXXII 415) identified the king as Ptolemy Euergetes and dated the statue
posthumously, cf. Pouilloux 1978, 379; Jung 2006, 303.
78 IG II2 686/7, l. 16–35. Commanded by Patroklos (Paus. 1.1.1, 3.6.4–6; I.Rhamnous
Rhodes, possibly in 258 (Polyaenus, Strat. 5.18; Huss 2001, 283), while Glaukon
became eponymous priest of Alexander and the brother and sister deities in 255/4
(P. Cairo Zenon II 59173; Ijsewijn 1961, 70-71 no. 31; Fraser 1972, 222). Their sister,
Pheidostrate, was priestess of Aglauros and is known from IG II2 3458–9, cf. Lambert
1999, 115 no. XX.
80 Jung 2006, 341–3. O’Neil (2008, 72–3) argues that the Glaukon decree shows
that Athens was active beyond her borders during the war.
81 Stavrianopoulou 2002; SEG LII 447; Jung 2006, 304-11, 315-19. The honours are
combattant contra les barbares pour la liberté des Grecs.’ For the epitaphic sense of
ἐπὶ + dative, see Étienne and Piérart 1975, 55. A parallel appears in a late 2nd century
Athenian ἀγὼν ἐπιτάφιος hoplite race (IG II2 1006, l. 22).
84 All we know of the integration of the Eleutheria into the memorial topography
is that the hoplite race took place between the trophy, some 15 stades from the city, and
the altar of Zeus Eleutherios, which was apparently not far (Paus. 9.2.5: οὐ πόρρω δὲ
ἀπό) from the common tomb of the Greeks.
85 Hdt 9.85; Paus. 9.2.5; Schachter 1994, 141–2; Flower and Marincola 2002, 254–6;
Bremmer 2006. The nature of the sacrifices to the dead also changed (Schachter 1994,
126 n. 8).
86 I thank Dr. Julia Shear for raising this point with me. Heroes: Simonides in Diod.
11.11.6; Isoc. Paneg. 82; Eudoxos fr. 311; Marcus Antonios Polemon Declamationes
1.5–6; Plut. Arist. 18.2, 19.4–5, Cim. 13.2; cf. Them. 7.4. Civic Ideal: Loraux 1986,
99–118. In 427 Athens naturalised the surviving Plataians (Kapparis 1995).
87 The development was also conceptual. From at least the late 2nd century onwards,
a dialogos between Athens and Sparta alone decided which state was to lead the
procession at the Eleutheria (Robertson, 1986).
88 West 1977; above section 1.
89 Above n. 56.
90 Both Étienne (1985, 260) and Thériault (1996b, 141–2) argued that Macedon
could not have employed the ‘mythe platéen’ because it would have highlighted their
own absence in 479 (cf. Brosius 2003, 230) and was only later used by the Greeks in
the mid-3rd century. This, I hope to have shown, is to fundamentally constrain the
importance and malleability of the ‘mythe platéen.’
171
Shane Wallace
Bibliography
Amandry, P.
1971 ‘Collection Paul Canellopoulos (I)’, BCH 95, 585–626.
Arnott, W. G.
1996 Alexis: The Fragments. A commentary, Cambridge.
Ashton, N. G.
1984 ‘The Lamian war-stat magni nominis umbra’, JHS 104, 152–7.
Austin, M. M.
2006 The Hellenistic World from Alexander to the Roman Conquest. A selection of ancient
sources in translation, 2nd ed., Cambridge.
Barron, J. P.
1988 ‘The liberation of Greece’, in CAH 2 IV, 592–622.
Boedeker, D.
1998 ‘The new Simonides and heroization at Plataia’, in N. Fisher and H. van
Wees (eds) Archaic Greece: New approaches and new evidence, Swansea,
231–49.
Bosworth, A. B.
1980 A Historical Commentary on Arrian’s History of Alexander, vol. 1, Oxford.
1988 Conquest and Empire: The reign of Alexander the Great, Cambridge.
Bremmer, J.
2006 ‘The rise of the hero cult and the new Simonides’, ZPE 158, 15–26.
Brosius, M.
2003 ‘Why Persia became the enemy of Macedon’, in W. Henkelman and
A. Kuhrt (eds) A Persian Perspective. Essays in memory of Heleen Sancisi-Weerdenburg,
Achaemenid History XIII, Leiden.
Brunt, P. A.
1953 ‘The Hellenic League against Persia’, Historia 2, 135–63.
1976 Arrian, Loeb Classical Library, vol. 1, London.
Buckler, J.
1980 The Theban Hegemony, 371–362 BC, Harvard.
Buraselis, K.
1982 ‘Γλαύκων Ἐτεοκλέους Ἀθηναῖος Μετηλλαχὼς’, Ἀρχ. Ἐφ. 121, 136–59.
Burn, A. R.
1962 Persia and the Greeks: The defence of the West, c.546–478 BC, London.
Chaniotis, A.
2005 War in the Hellenistic World. The ancient world at war, Oxford.
Criscuolo, L.
2003 ‘Agoni e politica alla corte di Alessandria. Riflessioni su alcuni epigrammi
di Posidippo’, Chiron 33, 311–33.
Dreyer, B.
1999 Untersuchungen zur Geschichte des spätklassischen Athen (322–ca. 230 v. Chr.),
Historia Einzelschriften 137, Stuttgart.
Droysen, J. G.
1952–53 Geschichte des Hellenismus, Edited by E. Bayer, 3 vols., Tübingen.
Errington, M.
1990 A History of Macedonia, translated by C. Errington, Berkeley.
172
The significance of Plataia for Greek eleutheria in the early Hellenistic period
Erskine, A.
1990 The Hellenistic Stoa: Political thought and action, London.
Étienne, R.
1985 ‘Le Koinon des Hellènes à Platées et Glaucon, fils d’Étéoclès’, in
P. Roesch, and G. Argoud (eds) La Béotia antique, Actes de Colloque
International, 16–20 May 1983, Paris, 259–63.
Étienne, R. and Piérart, M.
1975 ‘Un décret du koinon des Hellènes à Platées en l’honneur de Glaucon, fils
d’Étéoclès, d’Athènes’, BCH 99, 51–75.
Flower, M.
2000 ‘Alexander the Great and panhellenism’, in A. B. Bosworth & E. J.
Baynham (eds) Alexander the Great in Fact and Fiction, Oxford, 96–135.
Flower, M. and Marincola, J.
2002 Herodotus Histories Book IX, Cambridge.
Fraser, P.
1972 Ptolemaic Alexandria, 3 vols., Oxford.
Fredricksmeyer, E.
2000 ‘Alexander and the kingship of Asia’, in A. B. Bosworth and E. J. Baynham
(eds) Alexander the Great in Fact and Fiction, Oxford, 136–66.
Graindor, P.
1922 ‘Chronologie des archontes athéniennes’, Memoires Acad. Royal Belgique 8,
169–71.
Green, P.
1970 Alexander the Great, London.
Habicht, C.
1961 ‘Falsche Urkunden zur Geschichte Athens im Zeitalter der Perserkriege’,
Hermes 89, 1–35.
1970 Gottmenschentum und griechische Städte 2, Munich.
1997 Athens from Alexander to Anthony, translated by D. L. Schneider, Harvard.
2006 ‘A Hellenistic inscription from Arsinoe in Cilicia’, in C. Habicht, Hellenistic
Monarchies: Collected papers, Michigan, 243–74.
Hamilton, J. R.
1969 Plutarch’s Alexander: A commentary, Oxford.
Hammond, N. G. L. and Griffith, G. T.
1979 A History of Macedonia, vol. 2, Oxford.
Hammond, N. G. L. and Walbank, F. W.
1988 A History of Macedonia, vol. 3, Oxford.
Heinen, H.
1972 Untersuchungen zur hellenistischen Geschichte des 3. Jahrhunderts v. Chr. Zur
Geschichte der Zeit des Ptolemaios Keraunos und zum Chremonideischen Kriege,
Historia Einzelschriften 20, Wiesbaden.
Huss, W.
2001 Äegypten in hellenistischer Zeit 332–30 BC, Munich.
Ijsewijn, J.
1961 De sacerdotibus sacerditiisque Alexandri Magni et Lagidarum eponymis, Brussels.
Jones, C. P.
1974 ‘A note on the decree for Glaucon son of Eteocles’, ZPE 15, 179.
173
Shane Wallace
Jung, M.
2006 Marathon und Plataiai. Zwei Perserschlachten als “lieux de mémoire” im antiken
Griechenland, Göttingen.
Kapparis, K.
1995 ‘The Athenian decree for the naturalisation of the Plataeans’, GRBS 36,
359–78.
Kirsten, E.
1950 ‘Plataiai’, RE 20, cols. 2255–2332.
Krentz, P. M.
2007 ‘The oath of Marathon, not Plataia?’, Hesperia 76, 731–42.
Kreutz, N.
2001 ‘Der Eid von Plataeae und der frühklassische Tempelbau’, Thetis 8, 57–67.
Lambert, S. D.
1999 ‘IG II2 2345, Thiasoi of Herakles and the Salaminioi’, ZPE 125, 93–130.
Lane Fox, R.
1974 Alexander the Great, London.
Lehmann, G. A.
1988 ‘Der ‘lamische Krieg’ und die ‘Freiheit der Hellenen’: Uberlegungen zur
hieronymianischen Tradition.’ ZPE 73, 121–49.
Loraux, N.
1986 The Invention of Athens. The funeral oration in the classical city, translated by
A. Sheridan, Harvard.
Ma, J.
2008 ‘Chaironea 338: topographies of commemoration’, JHS 128, 72–91.
Mattingly, H. B.
1981 ‘The Themistokles decree from Troezen: transmission and status’, in G. S.
Shrimpton and D. J. McCargar (eds) Classical Contributions. Studies in honour
of Malcolm Francis McGregor, New York, 79–87.
Miller, S. G.
1990 (ed.) Nemea: A Guide to the Site and Museum, Berkeley.
O’Neil, J. L.
2008 ‘A re-examination of the Chremonidean war’, in P. McKechnie and
P. Guillaume (eds) Ptolemy II Philadelphus and his World, Mnemosyne
Supplement 300, Leiden, 65–89.
Oikonomides, A. N.
1982 ‘Athens and the Phokians at the outbreak of the Lamian war’, AncW 5,
123–8.
Oliver, G. J.
2003 ‘(Re-)locating Athenian decrees in the Agora: IG II2 448’, in D. Jordan and
J. Traill (eds) Lettered Attica. A day of Attic epigraphy, Athens.
2007 War, Food, and Politics in Early Hellenistic Athens, Oxford.
2009 ‘Honours for a public slave at Athens (IG II2 502 + Ag. I 1947; 302/1 BC)’,
in A. A. Themos and N. Papazarkadas (eds) Ἀττικαὶ Ἐπιγραφαί. Μελέτες
πρὸς τιµὴν τοῦ Christian Habicht, Athens, 111–24.
Osborne, M. J.
2004 ‘The archons of IG II2 1273’, in A. P. Matthaiou (ed.) Ἀττικαὶ Ἐπιγραφαί,
Πρακτικά Συµποσίου εἰς Μνήµην Adolf Wilhelm, Athens, 199–211.
174
The significance of Plataia for Greek eleutheria in the early Hellenistic period
Petrakos, B.
2003 [2004] ‘Anaskaphes: Rhamnous’, Ἔργον 50, 13–16.
Poddighe, E.
2004 ‘Una possibile identificazione del paidotriba di Sicione: Ps. Dem. XVII, 16’, Quaderni
di Storia 59, 183–96.
2009 ‘Alexander and the Greeks: the Corinthian League’, in W. Heckel and
L. Tritle (eds) Alexander the Great. A new history, London, 99–120.
Pouilloux, J.
1978 ‘Glaucon, fils de Étéoclès d’Athènes’, in J. Bingen, G. Cambier and
G. Nachtergael (eds) Le monde grec. pensée, littérature, histoire documents:
hommages à Claire Préaux, Paris, 376–82.
Pownall, F.
2008 ‘Theopompos and the public documentation of Athens’, in C. Cooper (ed.)
Epigraphy and the Greek Historian, Toronto, 119–28.
Pritchett, W. K.
1957 ‘Calendars of Athens again’, BCH 81, 269–301.
1979 The Greek State at War III: Religion, Berkeley.
1985 The Greek State at War IV, Berkeley.
Raaflaub, K. A.
2004 The Discovery of Freedom in Ancient Greece 2, translated by R. Franciscono,
Chicago.
Rhodes, P. J., with Lewis, D. M.
1997 The Decrees of the Greek States, Oxford.
Robert, L.
1948 ‘Un athlète milésien’, Hellenica 6, 117–25.
1969 ‘Recherches épigraphiques’, Opera Minora Selecta 2, Amsterdam, 758–67.
Robertson, N.
1982 ‘The decree of Themistocles in its contemporary setting’, Phoenix 36, 1–44.
1986 ‘A point of precedence at Plataia: the dispute between Athens and Sparta
over leading the procession’, Hesperia 55, 88–102.
Roesch, P.
1974 ‘Note sur le décret des Hellènes en l’honneur de Glaucon’, ZPE 15, 180–2.
Rosen, K.
1967 ‘Political documents in Hieronymus of Cardia (323–302 BC)’, Acta Classica
10, 41–94.
Roy, J.
2008 ‘Homonoia in Inschriften von Olympia 260: the problem of dating Concord
in Elis’, ZPE 167, 67–72.
Schachermeyer, F.
1973 Alexander der Große: das problem seiner Persönlichkeit und seines Wirkens,
Sitzungberichte der österreichischen Akademie der Wissenschaften, phil.-
hist. Klasse 285, Austria.
Schachter A.
1994 Cults of Boiotia, Vol. 3: Potnia to Zeus, Institute of Classical Studies Bulletin
Supplement 38.3, London.
Schmitt, O.
1992 Der Lamische Krieg, diss. University of Bonn.
175
Shane Wallace
Seibert, J.
1998 ‘“Panhellenischer” Kreuzzug, Nationalkrieg, Rachefeldzug oder
makedonischer Eroberungskrieg? Überlegungen zu den Ursachen des
Krieges gegen Persien’, in W. Will (ed.) Alexander der Grosse, eine Welteroberung.
Vorträge des Internationalen Bonner Alexanderkolloquiums, Bonn, 5–58.
Shrimpton, G. S.
1991 Theopompus the Historian, Buffalo.
Siewert, P.
1972 Der Eid von Plataiai, Vestigia 16, Munich.
Spyropoulos, T.
1973 ‘Εἰδήσεις ἐκ Βοιωτίας’, Ἀρχαιολογικὰ ἀνάλεκτα ἐξ Ἀθηνῶν 6, 375–7.
Stavrianopoulou, E.
2002 ‘Die Familienexedra von Eudamos und Lydiadas in Megalopolis’, Tekmeria
7, 116–56.
Thériault, G.
1996a Le culte d’Homonoia dans les cités grecques, Lyon-Quebec.
1996b ‘L’apparition du culte d’Homonoia’, Les Études Classiques 64, 127–50.
Vanderpool, E.
1969 ‘Three prize vases’, Archaiologikon Deltion 24, 1–5.
Walbank, M. B.
2002 ‘Notes on Attic decrees’, ZPE 139, 61–5.
Wallace, P. W.
1982 ‘The final battle at Plataia’, Studies in Attic Epigraphy, History and Topography
Presented to Eugene Vanderpool, Hesperia Supplement 19, 183–92.
Wallace, S.
forthcoming
‘History and hindsight. The importance of Euphron of Sikyon for the
Athenian democracy in 318/7’, in H. Hauben and A. Meeus (eds), The Age
of the Successors (323–276 BC ), Leuven.
Welles, C. B.
1963 Diodorus Siculus, Loeb Classical Library, vol. 8, London.
West, W. C.
1977 ‘Hellenic homonoia and the new decree from Plataea’, GRBS 18, 307–19.
Wilcken, U.
1967 Alexander the Great, translated by G. C. Richards, New York.
Williams, J. M.
1982 Athens without Democracy: The oligarchy of Phocion and the tyranny of Demetrius of
Phalerum, 322–307, diss. Yale University.
Worthington, I.
1984 ‘IG II 2 370 and the date of the Athenian alliance with Aetolia’, ZPE 57,
139–44.
1987 ‘The early career of Leosthenes and IG II 2 1631’, Historia 36, 489–91.
Yardley, J. C. and Heckel, W.
1997 Justin: Epitome of the Philippic History of Pompeius Trogus I: Books 11–12,
Alexander the Great, Oxford.
176
PART IV
THE COURT
Andrew Erskine
1. A Hellenistic man
Sometime in the 270s the Stoic philosopher Persaios of Kition headed
north from Athens to the Macedonian court at Pella.1 The same journey
had been made a hundred and thirty or so years previously by the Athenian
tragedian Euripides, who is reported to have spent time at the court of the
Macedonian king Archelaos.2 But whereas Euripides was leaving an
imperial city to travel to the margins of the Greek world, Persaios was
going to one of its centres of power. In Persaios’ day intellectuals were as
likely to be found at the royal courts as in the meeting places of the polis.
These courts and their kings were one of the distinctive features of the
Hellenistic age, perhaps even the distinctive feature as Robin Lane Fox
suggests in the opening chapter of this volume.
Nor did this escape contemporary thinkers. Philosophers in particular
took note of the changes that had taken place in the political landscape
and of the power that was now held by kings. As a result the early
Hellenistic period saw a glut of kingship treatises produced by the various
philosophical schools, usually entitled On Kingship (Περὶ βασιλείας) and all
now lost. Treatises are attributed to the Peripatetics Theophrastus and
Straton, to the Stoics Kleanthes, Persaios himself and Sphairos and to the
father of Epicureanism Epicurus. Their approaches may have been very
different but they all shared an awareness that this was a new and
significant phenomenon and one that needed to be addressed. While some
177
Andrew Erskine
178
Between philosophy and the court: The life of Persaios of Kition
choice of the court life and his adherence to Stoicism. He appears as a man
stranded uncomfortably between the two, a limbo status perhaps symbolised
in the story that he was a gift to Zeno from King Antigonos, a man who
thus owed his allegiance to both philosophy and the court. Yet the claim
put forward by the Epicurean Philodemus that Persaios chose a court life
in preference to a philosophic one is too stark;7 it is likely to be underpinned
by the Epicurean belief that the court and philosophy were fundamentally
incompatible. Persaios did the two things that we know Epicurus objected
to: he accompanied a king and he was a participant in royal symposia.
Persaios, however, was more complicated than this simplified picture
suggests. He was well aware of the challenge that the philosopher at court
faced and of his own difficulties in balancing these two modes of life. The
next two sections will consider each of these in turn, first Persaios as a
philosopher and then his place at the court of Antigonos. Finally, in Section
Four, I look at the tension between these roles for a man whom W. W.
Tarn described as wanting to be ‘all things to all men’.8
Persaios is in many ways a very Hellenistic man. He is leading a life that
it is shaped by the changes that Alexander and the successors have brought
about. It is striking how mobile he is, moving from his home in Cyprus,
studying in Athens, staying at the court in Macedon, being in the king’s
service in the Peloponnese. This is a life largely lived beyond the confines
of the polis, even if replacing them with the rather different limitations of
the court. Nor is this experience unique to him.
179
Andrew Erskine
180
Between philosophy and the court: The life of Persaios of Kition
3. Persaios at court
Explanations for Persaios’ arrival at the Antigonid court are, as one might
expect, various. According to one account he was a substitute for Zeno
who had declined an invitation from Antigonos and so sent his pupil
instead, according to another he himself was invited directly.16 That he
should have chosen to spend time with Antigonos at all may have been a
consequence of Stoic thinking about political action. Chrysippos of Soloi,
the head of the Stoa later in the third century, in contrast to Epicurus is
known to have approved of the wise man advising a king and living with
him, and even accompanying him on campaign, although the best situation
would be for the wise man himself to be king. If he did live with a king,
then it would be preferable for the king to be one ‘who demonstrated a
good disposition and readiness to learn’.17 A qualification, however, is
necessary; the wise man was an ideal to be aspired to, a role model, and no
Stoic claimed to be such a person.18 But even without being wise men
Stoics could take part in the affairs of the state if it was appropriate, so
philosophical arguments could have been adduced to support Persaios’
presence at the Macedonian court. W. W. Tarn even goes so far as to
describe Persaios as Antigonos’ ‘philosophic director’, albeit a rather
unsatisfactory one.19 Nevertheless, Persaios was not the only person to
accept such invitations and its appeal may have derived not so much from
the opportunity of putting philosophy into practice as the allure of the
royal court.
Antigonid power and patronage brought many intellectuals and literary
figures to Macedon. Apart from Persaios philosophers included the cynic-
inspired Bion of Borysthenes and Menedemos of Eretria who had set up
his own school in his home town on Euboea before exile had forced him
to Macedon; to both men we will return later in this section. Of the several
Lives that survive of the poet Aratus the third lists a number of literary
figures who were present at the court of Antigonos. In addition to Aratus
himself whose Phaenomena was said to have been written at the request of
Antigonos, there were others, now relatively obscure, such as Alexander of
Pleuron, tragedian and poet, and Antagoras of Rhodes.20 Antagoras has
come down in tradition not only as the author of an epic Thebais but also
as the subject of a cooking anecdote, recorded, as might be expected, by
Athenaeus. When Antigonos finds Antagoras cooking conger eels he asks
him whether Homer would ever have written the Iliad celebrating
Agamemnon if he had spent all his time cooking conger eels. Antagoras
replied that Agamemnon would never have done his famous deeds if he
had spent his time nosing around to see who was cooking conger eels in
his camp.21 The story adds an extra dimension to our understanding of
181
Andrew Erskine
182
Between philosophy and the court: The life of Persaios of Kition
was such that he was able to secure many favours for his home city. The
relationship between the two men worked in both directions; in Athens
Philippides is known to have criticised the divine honours voted by the
city to Demetrios Poliorketes, the rival of Lysimachos. In 283/82 the
Athenians honoured Philippides with a bronze statue in the theatre, but as
the decree proposing the honours makes clear this decision was motivated
as much by his influence with the king as by any of his achievements as a
dramatist.31 Whether Persaios ever used his position in a similar way to
confer benefits on cities associated with himself, such as Kition or Athens,
is not known. There is, however, anecdotal evidence for a bronze statue of
Persaios erected somewhere during his lifetime, an honour which is most
likely to be a consequence of his connection with Antigonos.32
Whatever power and influence an individual might gain through their
proximity to the king, status in a Hellenistic court was fragile. Once in
Macedon Persaios was faced with and party to all the competition and
intrigues that have been features of so many courts, ancient and more
recent.33 The predicament of someone at a Hellenistic court is well captured
by Polybius, writing of Macedon under Philip V later in the third century:
So brief a space of time suffices to exalt and abase men all over the world
and especially those in the courts of kings, for those are in truth exactly like
counters on a reckoning board. For these at the will of the reckoner are now
worth a copper and now worth a talent, and courtiers at the nod of the king
are at one moment universally envied and at the next universally pitied.34
183
Andrew Erskine
about the statue of Persaios mentioned above, a joke which is in fact our
only reason for believing that a statue of Persaios existed at all. Bion said
that he had seen a statue of Persaios inscribed ‘Περσαῖον Ζήνωνος Κιτιᾶ’,
most plausibly translated as ‘Persaios of Kition, pupil of Zeno’, but, joked
Bion, this was an engraver’s error and it should have read ‘Περσαῖον Ζήνωνος
οἰκετιᾶ’, ‘Persaios, slave of Zeno’.39 This joke may be the origin of the story
that Persaios had been a slave of Zeno, but whatever the origin of that
story it is apparent that both Persaios and Bion accused each other of low
birth. This enclosed world of gossip and philosophical malice might be a
suitable intellectual context for the anti-Cynic writings of Persaios’
Amphipolitan pupil Hermagoras, a text so vividly entitled Dog-hater,
another hit at Bion perhaps.40
More vicious appears to have been the conflict between Persaios and
another philosophical rival at the court, Menedemos of Eretria, in which
Persaios went to even greater lengths to protect his position. Damning was
Menedemos’ subsequent verdict on Persaios, delivered, as so often was
the case, at a Macedonian drinking party and providing confirmation of
Epicurus’ belief that it was best to keep intellectuals away from such places.
Of Persaios he said, ‘Philosopher he may well be, but he is the worst of
men who live or have ever lived’. The root of this quarrel is to be found in
the two men’s relations with Antigonos. When it looked as if Antigonos
was prepared to restore democracy for the Eretrians as a favour to
Menedemos, Persaios interceded with the king and prevented it.41 Whatever
the truth of the story, it rests on a perception of Persaios as a man of great
influence with the king who was prepared to assert himself in the face of
others he perceived to be his rivals. This in-fighting was a product of a
court culture in which the rewards in terms of wealth and influence were
immense.42 The quantity of alcohol drunk at the Macedonian court probably
did not help to calm tempers either.43
184
Between philosophy and the court: The life of Persaios of Kition
185
Andrew Erskine
186
Between philosophy and the court: The life of Persaios of Kition
but also in other writers such as Diogenes Laertius. The most likely
explanation for the proliferation of such anecdotes is that they originate
from the one work that is known to discuss both symposia and Zeno, the
Symposium Memoirs of Persaios.56 In this context Zeno comes across as a
man who, unlike his fellow-guests, is not led astray by the attractions of the
drinking party, although he is quite prepared to point out to his
companions their deficiencies, for example their rudeness and their
gluttony. Nor is he one to get drunk. In all this his response is very different
from the Arcadian embassy to Antigonos reported in the Symposium
Memoirs. The combination of alcohol and scantily-clad Thessalian dancing-
girls caused the ambassadors to lose all sense of decorum.57
The evidence for the Symposium Memoirs suggests that Persaios himself
was sensitive to the dilemma that court life placed him in, at once attracted
by its temptations while conscious that philosophy should be leading him
in a different direction. This would be all the more likely if Persaios created
an image of Zeno in contrast to the life led by those who surrounded
Antigonos. Persaios’ awareness of this tension is evident in a story he
himself told of a drunken philosopher. The context is a drinking party at
the Macedonian court in which an unnamed philosopher was a participant.
When a flute girl sought to sit beside the philosopher, he resolutely refused
to let her do so, but as more alcohol was consumed so his philosophical
resolution gave way. When the flute girl was put up for auction, the
philosopher, by this stage fairly drunk, began bidding vigorously, only to
lose out in the end because of what he considered to be an incompetent
auctioneer. The result was a drunken brawl over a flute girl he had himself
earlier snubbed when he was sober. Athenaeus suggests, surely wrongly,
that this philosopher may have been Persaios himself; it is more likely that
Persaios is here engaging in the familiar bitchiness of the court.58 His
listeners would know the name of the unfortunate philosopher and at any
reading of Persaios’ work would get a good laugh at his expense.
Nevertheless, although the drunken philosopher probably was not
Persaios, the story reveals Persaios’ perception of the problems of court-
life. Essentially it was an environment in which it was all too easy for
philosophical convictions to be swept away. The contrast with the
disciplined and abstemious Zeno could not be clearer. Was it Persaios who
was responsible for the story of Zeno slipping inconspicuously away from
one of Antigonos Gonatas’ rowdy parties in Athens? 59
In the end Persaios comes across as a man who could neither keep a
grip on his philosophical convictions nor on Antigonos’ prized fortress on
the Acrocorinth. His own perspective on his situation is hard to recover in
the light of the loss of his writings. As we have seen, only fragments remain.
187
Andrew Erskine
Acknowledgements
This chapter began as a paper presented at a very stimulating conference
on Hellenism in Cyprus in 2005, organised by Ioannis Taifakos, and a
shorter version is due to appear in the proceedings; it was also given at a
Hellenistic workshop in Edinburgh. Shane Wallace read a draft of the
chapter and I am very grateful to him for his comments.
Notes
1 Jacoby 1902, 368–9 for arguments on the date, suggesting a range of 276 to 270.
2 Hammond and Griffith 1979, 149, Borza 1990, 168, 172–3, though note Scullion
2003’s scepticism. Scullion may be right that Euripides did not die in Macedon but it
is very likely that he visited it; certainly stories that placed him there were already
current at the time of Aristotle (Pol. 1311b30–4).
3 On kingship treatises, Murray 2007 and Bertelli 2002; for Epicurus, see Plut. Mor.
Veterum Fragmenta (= SVF; 4 vols., Leipzig, 1905–24), vol. 1, nos. 435–62. This
contains much of the material cited in this chapter, but some updating is needed,
especially in the light of Dorandi 1994, which gives the text of Philodemus’ history of
the Stoics (P.Herc. 1018 = Philod. Stoa here) together with a translation and
commentary. The fragments of his more historical works are also collected by Jacoby,
FGrH 584. Among the more recent examinations of Persaios and aspects of his career
are Bollansee 2000 (with full bibliography), Scholz 1998, 318–25, 368–70, Sonnabend
1996, 243–7, Dorandi 1994, 10–13, Steinmetz 1994, 555–7, Erskine 1990, 80–3.
5 Diogenes Laertius (= D. L.) 7.36 (SVF I.435), Aul. Gell. NA 2.18.8 (SVF I.438),
Athen. 4.162d-e (SVF I.452), Philod. Stoa 12 with Dorandi’s commentary. Stories of
a servile origin may have stemmed from a cutting witticism of Bion of Borysthenes,
see section 3 below and Dorandi 1994, 11–12. The suggestion that Persaios was given
to Antigonos would evaporate if the text of D. L. 7.36 were amended, see Bollansee
2000, 17 n. 4 with 27–8 and Susemihl 1891, 69 n. 263.
6 Paus. 2.8.4, 7.8.3, Plut. Arat. 18–23, Polyaen. Strat. 6.5 (SVF I.442–4), Philod. Stoa
15; the competing traditions are lucidly analysed by Bollansee 2000. Somehow the
idea that Persaios committed suicide after the loss of the Acrocorinth has crept into
some of the standard modern reference works (e.g. OCD 3, sv Persaeus, and CAH 2
7.1, 69, 229, 251); as Bollansee 2000, 20, n. 13, points out, there is no ancient authority
for this.
7 Philod. Stoa, 13.
8 Tarn 1913, 232.
9 D. L. 7.14.
188
Between philosophy and the court: The life of Persaios of Kition
10 D. L. 7.6 (SVF I.439), 7.36 (SVF I.435), Philod. Stoa 12 (Dorandi). ‘γνώριµος’ can
also mean ‘pupil’ (cf. LSJ), but its use in opposition to ‘οἰκέτης’ at D. L. 7.36 suggests
that something more along the lines of ‘friend’ is intended.
11 Bibliographical list at D. L. 7.36 (SVF I. 435), cf. 7.178 (SVF I.620) for Sphairos.
12 Philod. On Piety 9, Cic. Nat. D. 1.38, Min. Fel. 21.3 (collected together as SVF
I.448), on which Henrichs 1974, Algra 2003, esp. 158–9, Dyck 2003, 110; Persaios’
argument may even have been addressed obliquely by Lucretius (5.13–21), see
Harrison 1990; note also the citation of his work on the Spartan constitution, Athen.
4.140e-f (SVF I.454).
13 On Ariston, see Ioppolo 1980.
14 Aratus of Soloi: Vita Arati 20 (ed. J. Martin) (SVF I.440); Hermagoras: Suda sv
Ἑρµαγόρας (SVF I.462); Halkyoneus: D. L. 7.36 (SVF I.435); on the latter, see
Ogden, this volume, section 6.
15 For Persaios and other pupils of Zeno, D. L. 7.36–8.
16 D. L. 7.6–9, Vita Arati 20 (Martin) (SVF I.439–440).
17 On Stoic views on political participation, Erskine 1990: 64–70; Stobaeus, Ecl.
2002 argues in detail against the idea that any Stoic with the possible exception of
Ariston considered himself to be a wise man.
19 Tarn 1913, 232.
20 Vita Arati 15 (Martin), Weber 1995.
21 Athen. 8.340f.
22 For studies of particular Hellenistic courts and their titles, note on the Antigonid:
Le Bohec 1987; on the Ptolemaic: Mooren 1975 and 1976; on the Seleucid: Bikerman
1938, 31–50 and Capdetrey 2007, 278–80, 384–8; and with a focus on Asia Minor
rather than a particular monarch, Savalli-Lestrade 1998 (largely Seleucid and Attalid).
For Hellenistic court society in general see Herman 1997, Weber 1997 (with extensive
bibliography) and at greater length the 2007 doctoral dissertation of Rolf Strootman,
which is now the fullest account of the subject (a revised version is in preparation).
23 Hetairos: Athen. 6.251c.
24 Athen. 6.251c
25 Plut. Arat. 18, 23, Polyaen. 6.5; Tarn 1913, 374 n. 15, preferring a civilian role
subordinate to the military, Gabbert 1997, 36 and O’Neil 2003, 513 putting him in
overall charge while Bollansee 2000, 17–18, who provides full references and
bibliography, writes of ‘sharing responsibility’.
26 Paus. 1.9.8, Plut. Dem. 39.4, O’Neil 2003, 512, Billows 1990, 390–2, Hornblower
1981.
27 The material is surveyed in Strootman 2010.
28 Erskine 1995.
29 Straton: D. L. 5.58; on literary patronage: Fraser 1972, vol. 1, esp. 305–36,
Stephens 2010.
30 D. L. 7.177, 185; Erskine 1990, 97–9.
31 Plut. Dem. 12, Syll.3 374. Paschides 2008 treats the whole subject of such Friends
189
Andrew Erskine
33 Cf., with differing approaches, Elias 1983 [1969]’s influential treatment, focussing
on the court of Louis XIV, and Duindam 2003, esp 249–54, treating both Versailles
and the Habsburg court in Vienna.
34 Polyb. 5.26.12–13 (trans. Paton); on the intrigues and dangers of Hellenistic court
Loeb translation. Kindstrand collects examples to show that the genitive could be
used to indicate a master-pupil relationship, but the anecdote is still puzzling as any
such inscription would seem to be most readily interpreted by an observer unfamiliar
with Persaios as meaning ‘Persaios, son of Zeno’.
40 See above n. 14.
41 D. L. 2.143–4; Menedemos’ comment may well be deliberately echoing Antisthenes
on Socrates’ wife, Xanthippe, Xen. Symp. 2.10, so Tarn 1913, 233, n. 38. For Menedemos’
earlier political activity in Eritris, see Haake 2007, 177–81.
42 Herman 1997, 216–18.
43 Murray 1996.
44 Cf. D. L. 7.104–7; for a review of Stoic ethics, Schofield 2003.
45 See n. 18 above.
46 D. L. 7.36 (SVF I.435), Themistius Or. 32.358 (SVF I.449).
47 Sphairos: D. L. 7.177 (SVF 1.625, the story is told with wax birds instead of
34B (Dorandi).
53 For citations of the Symposium Memoirs, Athen. 4.162b–c, 13.607a–e, D. L. 7.1
(= SVF I.451–3); recent scholarship on Athenaeus has stressed that his method of
citation is far more artful than previously realised so, however valuable he is, he needs
to be approached carefully, Gorman 2007, Pelling 2000.
54 Dinner invitations: D. L. 7.1 (SVF I.453), Philod. Stoa 3 (Dorandi); frugality:
8.344a for a similar story told of Bion of Borysthenes, suggesting it circulated at the
Macedonian court; lupins: Athen. 2.55f, D. L. 7.26, Galen, de anim. mor. 3, Eustathius
on Hom. Od. 21.293, p. 1910.42 (collected together at SVF I.285).
56 Argued in greater detail in Erskine 1990, 80–2.
190
Between philosophy and the court: The life of Persaios of Kition
57Athen. 13.607c–d (SVF I.451).
58Athen. 13.607d–e (SVF I.451); Athenaeus unconvincingly quotes a passage of
Antigonos of Karystos (frag. 34A Dorandi) in support of his suggestion, cf. the
remarks of Jacoby (Persaios FGrHist 584 F4). Cf. Erskine 1990, 81.
59 D. L. 7.13, cf. Athen. 13.603d-e, together as Antigonos of Karystos, frags 35A
Bibliography
Algra, K.
2003 ‘Stoic theology’, in B. Inwood (ed.) The Cambridge Companion to the Stoics,
Cambridge, 153–79.
Bertelli, L.
2002 ‘Peri Basileias: I trattati sulla regalità dal IV secolo A.c. agli apocrifi
pitagorici’, in P. Bettiolo and G. Filorama (eds) Il dio mortale. Teologie politiche
tra antico e contemporaneo, Brescia, 17–61.
Bikerman, E.
1938 Institutions des Séleucides, Paris
Billows, R.
1990 Antigonos the One-Eyed and the Creation of the Hellenistic State, Berkeley.
Bing, P.
2010 ‘Hermeias of Kourion (Athenaios 13.563d–e = Powell, Coll. Alex. p. 237)’,
in S. L. Ager and R. A. Faber (eds) Belonging and Isolation in the Hellenistic
World, Toronto.
Bollansee, J.
2000 ‘Persaios of Kition, or the failure of the wise man as general’, in L. Mooren
(ed.) Politics, Administration and Society in the Hellenistic and Roman World,
Leuven, 15–28.
Borza, E.
1981 ‘Anaxarchus and Callisthenes: academic intrigue at Alexander’s Court”, in
H. J. Dell (ed.) Ancient Macedonian Studies in Honour of Charles F. Edson,
Thessaloniki, 73–86.
1990 In the Shadow of Olympus: The emergence of Macedon, Princeton.
Brouwer, R.
2002 ‘Sagehood and the Stoics’, in D. Sedley (ed.), Oxford Studies in Ancient
Philosophy 23, 181–224.
Capdetrey, L.
2007 Le pouvoir séleucide: territoire, administration, finances d’un royaume hellénistique
(312–129 avant J-C), Rennes.
Dorandi, T.
1994 Filodemo: Storia dei Filosofi: La Stoà da Zenone a Panezio (PHerc. 1018), Leiden.
1999 Antigone de Caryste: fragments, Paris.
Duindam, J.
2003 Vienna and Versailles: The courts of Europe’s dynastic rivals, 1550–1780,
Cambridge.
Dyck, A.
2003 Cicero: De Natura Deorum, Cambridge.
191
Andrew Erskine
Elias, N.
1983 The Court Society, Oxford (first published as Die höfische Gesellschaft, Neuwied
and Berlin 1969).
Erskine, A.
1990 The Hellenistic Stoa: Political thought and action, London.
1995 ‘Culture and power in Ptolemaic Egypt: the Museum and Library of
Alexandria’, Greece & Rome 42, 38–48.
Fraser, P. M.
1972 Ptolemaic Alexandria, 3 vols, Oxford.
Gabbert, J. J.
1997 Antigonus II Gonatas: a political biography, London.
Gorman, R. and V.
2007 ‘The tryphe of the Sybarites: a historiographical problem in Athenaeus’, JHS
127, 38–60
Gutzwiller, K.
2007 A Guide to Hellenistic Literature, Oxford.
Haake, M.
2007 Der Philosoph in der Stadt: Untersuchungen zur öffentlichen Rede über Philosophen und
Philosophie in den hellenistischen Poleis, Munich.
Hammond, N. G. L. and Griffith, G. T.
1979 A History of Macedonia, Vol. 2, Oxford.
Harrison, S. J.
1990 ‘Lucretius, Euripides and the philosophers, De Rerum Natura 5.13–21’, CQ
40, 195–8.
Henrichs, A.
1974 ‘Die Kritik der stoischen Theologie im PHerc. 1428’, Cronache Ercolanesi 4,
5–32.
Herman, G.
1997 ‘The court society of the Hellenistic Age’, in P. Cartledge, P. Garnsey and
E. Gruen (eds) Hellenistic Constructs: Essays in culture, history and historiography,
Berkeley, 199–224.
Hornblower, J.
1981 Hieronymus of Cardia, Oxford.
Ioppolo, A.-M.
1980 Aristone di Chio e lo stoicismo antico, Naples.
Jacoby, F.
1902 Apollodors Chronik: eine Sammlung der Fragmente, Philologische Untersuchungen
16, Berlin.
Kindstrand, J. F.
1976 Bion of Borysthenes: A collection of the fragments with introduction and commentary,
Uppsala.
Knoepfler, D.
1991 La vie de Ménédème d’Éretrie de Diogène Laërce, Basel.
Le Bohec, S.
1987 ‘L’entourage royal à la cour des Antigonides’, in E. Lévy (ed.) Le système
palatial en orient, en Grèce et à Rome, Strasbourg, 314–26.
192
Between philosophy and the court: The life of Persaios of Kition
Mooren, L.
1975 The Aulic Titulature in Ptolemaic Egypt, Brussels.
1976 La hiérarchie de cour ptolémaique, Leuven.
Murray, O.
1996 ‘Hellenistic royal symposia’, in P. Bilde et al. (eds) Aspects of Hellenistic
Kingship, Aarhus, 15–27.
2007 ‘Philosophy and monarchy in the Hellenistic world’, in T. Rajak et al. (eds),
Jewish Perspectives on Hellenistic Rulers, Berkeley, 13–28.
O’Neil, J. L.
2003 ‘The ethnic origins of the friends of the Antigonid kings of Macedon’, CQ
53, 510–22.
Paschides, P.
2008 Between City and King: Prosopographical studies on the intermediaries between the cities
of the Greek mainland and the Aegean and the royal courts in the Hellenistic period
(322–190 BC), Meletemata 59, Athens.
Pelling, C.
2000 ‘Fun with fragments: Athenaeus and the Historians’, in D. Braund and J.
Wilkins (eds) Athenaeus and his World: Reading Greek culture in the Roman
Empire, Exeter, 171–90.
Savalli-Lestrade, I.
1998 Les philoi royaux dans l’Asie hellénistique, Geneva.
Schofield, M.
2003 ‘Stoic ethics’, in B. Inwood (ed.), The Cambridge Companion to the Stoics,
Cambridge, 233–56.
Scholz, P.
1998 Der Philosoph und die Politik. Die Ausbildung der philosophischen Lebensform und
die Entwicklung des Verhältnisses von Philosophie und Politik im 4. und 3. Jh. v.
Chr., Stuttgart.
Scullion, S.
2003 ‘Euripides and Macedon, or the silence of the Frogs’, CQ 53, 389–400.
Sonnabend, H.
1996 Die Freundschaften der Gelehrten und die zwischenstaatliche Politik im klassischen und
hellenistischen Griechenland, Hildesheim.
Steinmetz, P.
1994 ‘Die Stoa’, in H. Flashar (ed.) Gundriss der Geschichte der Philosophie. Die
Philosophie der Antike 4: Die hellenistische Philosophie, Basel. 495–716.
Stephens, S.
2010 ‘Ptolemaic Alexandria’, in J. J. Clauss and M. Cuypers (ed.) A Companion to
Hellenistic Literature, Oxford, 46–61.
Strootman, R.
2007 The Hellenistic royal court. Court culture, ceremonial and ideology in
Greece, Egypt and the Near East, 336–30 BCE, Dissertation, University of
Utrecht (http://igitur-archive.library.uu.nl/dissertations/2007–0725–
201108/UUindex.html)
2010 ‘Literature and the kings’, in J. J. Clauss and M. Cuypers (ed.) A Companion
to Hellenistic Literature, Oxford, 30–45.
193
Andrew Erskine
Susemihl, F.
1891 Geschichte der griechischen Litteratur in der Alexandrinerzeit, vol. 1, Leipzig.
Tarn, W. W.
1913 Antigonos Gonatas, Oxford.
Weber, G.
1995 ‘Herrscher, Hof und Dichter. Aspekte der Legitimierung und Repräsentation
hellenistischer Könige am Beispiel der ersten drei Antigoniden’, Historia
44, 283–316.
1997 ‘Interaktion, Repräsentation und Herrschaft. Der Königshof im
Hellenismus’, A. Winterling (ed.) Zwischen ‘Haus’ und ‘Staat’: antike Höfe im
Vergleich, Munich, 27–72.
1998–9 ‘The Hellenistic rulers and their poets. Silencing dangerous critics?’, Ancient
Society 29, 147–74.
194
10
Elizabeth D. Carney
195
Elizabeth D. Carney
One should not simply assume, however, that each kingdom treated royal
women in the same way;5 even when a practice developed in one dynasty
begins to be implemented by another, it is important to notice the date
and motivation for borrowing the practice of another ruling family.
Many scholars would give primacy to one explanation for these
similarities: the similar nature of Hellenistic monarchy in general, across
all dynasties. While I would not want to deny that the institution had many
shared features in each dynasty, I am less inclined than some to stress
them.6 Analysis of ‘Hellenistic Monarchy’ tends to scant change over time
(though the late third or early second century seems, if unstated, the basis
for generalization) and consequently to de-emphasize the development of
these features.7 In terms of Macedonian history, the assumption (implicit
or explicit) that if the Macedonians ever did something, they always did it,
has limited our understanding of the evolution of their political system.8
Discussions of ‘Hellenistic monarchy’ necessarily entail making many
exceptions for the Ptolemies in some areas and for the Antigonids in
others. The Seleucids (along with the smaller dynasties that eventually
appeared in Asia Minor) therefore become the de facto norm. One must
question this presumed norm, particularly because the Antigonids were
both the first of the ruling families to develop many practices that would
be accepted by other Hellenistic dynasties and the last of the great dynasties
to establish secure regional roots.
Over-generalization about the role of women in Hellenistic monarchy
is particularly dubious because, as we shall see, situations and events could
so dramatically affect a position much less clearly defined than that of male
rulers. Nonetheless, although several general discussions of women and
Hellenistic monarchy exist,9 presently there are no lengthy general studies
of the role of women in each dynasty.10 Moreover, in my view, there should
be no dynastic studies until more research has appeared about individual
women and groups of women. When generalizations appear before
particulars, we risk imposing our expectations on the evidence. Circumstance
– most notably the absence of an adult male ruler – could change the
situation of women in a royal dynasty quickly.
Although this chapter will discuss commonalities at some length, its
focus will be on change and on the continuing singularities of the role of
women in each ruling family and on the first two generations of Hellenistic
monarchy (roughly 323–250 BC). In this period these dynasties developed
a public presentation and, to some degree, established a pattern for royal
women in their families.
Let me begin with commonalities, many of which have to do with a
shared past. The role of royal women in Homer affected women in the
196
Being royal and female in the early Hellenistic period
197
Elizabeth D. Carney
198
Being royal and female in the early Hellenistic period
199
Elizabeth D. Carney
200
Being royal and female in the early Hellenistic period
201
Elizabeth D. Carney
The critical event in the evolution of the role of Hellenistic royal women
is the appearance of a female title, basilissa. Argead women had not
employed a title; they appeared in inscriptions with a patronymic alone.
This circumstance is unsurprising, granted that Argead kings before
Alexander had not themselves utilized a title; even Alexander did not do so
on all occasions. Antigonos and his son, Demetrios Poliorketes, were the
first of the Successors to employ a title (and wear a diadem), a step they
took in 306, several years after the death of the last Argead king, in the
context of a great military victory. The earliest evidence for the use of a
female title again involves Phila, wife of Demetrios Poliorketes, and dates
to about 305. Thus the appearance of the female title was apparently
directly related to the adoption of the male title and indeed may have
happened at the same time.55
Parallelism between the development of male and female titles is,
however, limited. As we have seen, the male title had late Argead
precedents but the female title did not. We know that basileus means ‘male
ruler,’ but the meaning of basilissa is unclear, ambiguous. It is best translated
as ‘royal woman’ because the term can refer to a royal wife, a royal
daughter, a female regent, and to a female king. Instead of defining any
sort of office or position, basilissa related to royal status, acquired by birth
or marriage or both.56 The timing of its first use implies that it too was a
legitimizing device, a tool in the establishment of dynastic power. It may
convey the sense that men and women of a ruling family shared similar
qualities, although not to the same degree. Conceivably the appearance of
a female title may also reflect the temporary importance royal and elite
women acquired as the Argead dynasty was disappearing and the new
dynasties forming. The title institutionalized the public role of royal women
to a greater degree than previously, but left the nature of that role undefined
and extremely variable across dynasties and even individual reigns. Thus
while the usage of basilissa became the rule in all the dynasties, its functional
significance, at least within the kingdoms, may have differed dramatically
from one monarchy to another, from one period to another.
Soon after titles began to be applied to royal women, the precedents
established by Thessalonike and Phila began to be followed by many other
women. After 301, about the same time the dynasties of the Successors
began to intermarry, many cities were named after dynastic women. Clearly
the agenda was dynastic legitimacy, the elevation of the wives and mothers
of kings, with implications about the king’s and the dynasty’s superhuman
nature.57 Similarly, cults connecting royal wives and mistresses now become
common.
One should, however, be cautious about assuming extensive similarity
202
Being royal and female in the early Hellenistic period
203
Elizabeth D. Carney
204
Being royal and female in the early Hellenistic period
205
Elizabeth D. Carney
206
Being royal and female in the early Hellenistic period
207
Elizabeth D. Carney
This is not to say that the marriage occasioned no hostility but rather
that it was not a major issue.98 Doubtless Greeks in Egypt and elsewhere
found the idea of sibling marriage nasty, whatever the Egyptian view.
Clearly Ptolemy’s courtiers acted in various ways to create a positive Greek
public image for the marriage, suggesting that the king felt there was a need
for such action.99 Hellenistic royalty, however, indulged in all sorts of nasty
actions condemned in the behavior of ordinary people. Their subjects not
only put up with their bad acts, but must, to some degree, have come to
expect them. Indeed, up to a point, extreme behavior may have seemed...
well, kingly. Unlike Ager,100 I doubt that sophrosyne- had much to do with
either Macedonian or Hellenistic monarchy.101 Indeed, the dynastic image
of the Ptolemies in effect stressed excess in terms of truphe- (luxury), with
its implicit connection to benefaction, and Arsinoe II epitomized this
image.102
Once invented, apart from other benefits of the marriage often
discussed103 (most importantly, replication of the behavior of gods, Zeus
and Hera, Osiris and Isis), it made possible those interlocking epithets,
cults, and images so characteristic of the dynasty. It is not so much that
incest was the ‘dynastic signature’ of the Ptolemies, but rather it was
incestuousness. The literal and figurative incest of the dynasty gave a
prominence to royal women that tended to empower them and helped to
generate the developing pattern of female co-rule. Pairing in cult and in
marriage led ultimately to pairing in rule.104
Let me conclude by offering some general observations for those
examining the role of women in all these monarchies. We should not
underestimate the agency of women in marriage alliances: the presumption
that they were always or usually genetic tokens needs to be questioned. We
need to recognize them as dynastic go-betweens with enduring ties to the
oikos of their birth. Similarly, we have scanted royal women’s role in
diplomacy via euergetism. Here we have not only underestimated female
agency but we also need more focus on why rulers felt it necessary to
encourage euergetism by their wives and daughters. In all these
considerations, while avoiding the kind of wishful thinking that had
Arsinoe II determining the domestic and foreign policy of Egypt or
instigating the First Syrian War,105 we also need to steer clear of the kind
of thinking which exaggerates the significance of the paucity of evidence
about royal women and their acts or which denies that the influence
Arsinoe demonstrably possessed was a kind of power.106
208
Being royal and female in the early Hellenistic period
Notes
1 14.6.11.
2 Ant. 85.4.
3 Ant. 86.4.
4 For varying interpretations of this phenomenon, see Carney 2000a, 37 and Mirón-
Pérez 2000.
5 For instance, a formal proclamation, after her wedding, that she had the title
basilissa is attested for Laodike, daughter of Mithridates and wife of Antiochos III
(Polyb. 5.43.4). Savalli-Lestrade assumes (2003, 62) that such a proclamation was
common practice, but we do not know that it was, without exception. Justin (24.2.9–
3.3) describes what appears to be a similar situation for the ill-fated marriage of
Arsinoe to Ptolemy Keraunos, but his testimony is possibly anachronistic and, even
if it is correct, could reflect the odd and special circumstance of this particular
marriage. One could, of course, hypothesize that what began as exceptional behavior
became tradition, but I am not aware of Antigonid evidence for the practice.
6 This view is increasingly common. For instance, Erskine 2003 includes separate
chapters on each dynasty and then Ma’s discussion, significantly titled, ‘Kings’ rather
than ‘Kingship’ or ‘Hellenistic Monarchy.’ Indeed, Ma (2003, 179) stresses the ‘diverse
nature of Hellenistic kingship,’ explicitly rejecting many old generalizations. The
diversity he discusses, however, relates primarily to ethnicity and culture, less to
variation from one generation to another or differing dynastic images.
7 Walbank 1984 is a classic example, although he does concede some change over
time (1984, 65) by noting that the monarchies grew more similar as time passed.
8 Hammond’s scholarship (exemplified by Hammond 2000), despite its clear merits,
suffers from this presumption. One consequence of the tendency to assume that a
practice is old and traditional is that there tends to be no discussion of when and why
it was first implemented. I do not mean to deny that considerable continuity existed
in Macedonian government over centuries but rather to note that, particularly in a
society that experienced such dramatic change in the second half of the fourth century
and the early third, the absence of any significant change in governmental practice is
extremely unlikely. See further Carney 2000a, 199–202.
9 See Savalli-Lestrade 1994; Roy 1998; Savalli-Lestrade 2003. Pomeroy 1984, 3–40
contains some general material but focuses on the Ptolemies. Similarly, Carney 2000a,
203–33 addresses the emerging role of royal women in the Hellenistic period, but
centers on Macedonia.
10 Carney 2000a, 179–202 does contain a discussion of the role of women in the
Antigonid dynasty, but the discussion is part of analysis of the role of women in
Macedonian monarchy over several dynasties and many centuries. Le Bohec 1993 also
deals with the women of both the later Argead and the Antigonid dynasties. As a
consequence, both discussions are less focused on the distinctive role of women in this
specific dynasty, although each addresses the issue. Hazzard 2000 does deal with
Ptolemaic royal women, but its treatment, scholarship, and information are so narrowly
conceived as to make it largely irrelevant.
11 For Homeric influence on Argead women in general, see Carney 2000a, 13–14;
for Olympias in particular, see Carney 2006, 17–18. Foster 2006 discusses the
influence of Homeric women on the image of Arsinoe II.
12 See Carney 2005 for discussion and references.
209
Elizabeth D. Carney
13 On women in Persian monarchy, see Brosius 1996. For possible Persian
influence on Argead monarchy, see Carney 1993. See Robins 1993, 21–55 for a
discussion of the role of women in pharaonic monarchy and Quaegebeur 1978 for
pharaonic influence on Ptolemaic royal women.
14 Here I differ in part from Pomeroy 1984, 11 (followed by O’Neil 1999, 2) who
concludes that ‘...queenship was not a public office and therefore cannot be defined
except as a private role.’ Queenship was not an office, but royal women certainly acted
in public events and Philip and Alexander, at least, involved them in the public
presentation of the monarchy. I have argued that, in the Argead period, office-holding
was not generally the way in which power was understood and allotted in Macedonia.
See further Carney 1995.
15 Savalli-Lestrade 2003, 66–7, speaking about the Hellenistic period; in fact, this
royal women, but it appears in Argead times and, judging by Phila’s career, before the
Successors had taken royal titles. Both Eurydike’s Eukleia cult and the dedication on
behalf of women citizens suggest this role of the royal wife-cum-mother as protector
and sponsor of women, as did many of the cults in which a woman was somehow
identified with Aphrodite (see below).
23 See Schultz 2007 and 2009 and Carney 2007 for discussion, analysis and
references on the Philippeion and its influence. See Kosmetatou 2004a for discussion
and references on the imagery of family groups more generally. Schmitt 1991, 78–9
points to Hellenistic stress on family unity, continuity over generations, often at odds
with reality. See Palagia 2010 for an argument that the Eurydike in the Philippeion
was Philip’s last wife, not his mother.
24 On Philip’s marriage alliances (his own and those he arranged for other family
members) and his polygamy, that of the Successors, and its subsequent decline, see
below and Carney 2000a, 52–79, 228–32. See also Ogden 1999, 3–214.
25 Carney 2000a, 203–07.
26 Carney 2000a, 93–7.
27 Diod. 20.37.3–6.
28 Syll.3 252N, 5–8, with n. 3.
29 SEG IX.2; Lycurg. Leoc 26.
30 See discussion and references in Carney 2006, 50–2.
31 On Olympias’ role in Macedonia, Molossia and the Greek peninsula during
Alexander’s absence, see Blackwell 1999, 81–132; Carney 2006, 49–59. Kleopatra
210
Being royal and female in the early Hellenistic period
as intercessor: see FGrH 434, F 4.37. Kleopatra and courtiers: Paus. 1.44.6; Diod.
20.37.5.
32 See discussion in Carney 2006, 101–3. Only Curtius (9.6.26; 10.5.30) reports that
Alexander planned a posthumous cult for her. Plutarch (Alex. 3.2) preserves reports
both that Olympias did originate Alexander’s claim to be the son of a god and that she
did not.
33 The evidence for Harpalos and the courtesans is a fragment of Theopompos and
Carney 2000a, 69–70, 129–31; 132–7; 75–6, 89–90, 123–8. Olympias killed Adea
Eurydike but the others died at the hands of male Successors.
35 Perdikkas, for instance, was interested in marriage to Kleopatra, despite her fairly
independent career; his faction killed off her half-sister because she was a threat, not
because she was a woman. Similarly, Antipater’s confrontations with Olympias and the
others derived from what had become a feud between his clan and the Aeakids (in the
case of Olympias and Kleopatra) and from his determination to control political
events (Kynnane) and Philip Arrhidaios (Adea Eurydike).
36 Our sources preserve two famous ‘quotations’ about the rule of women whose
authenticity some historians have accepted without question and read uncritically (e.g.
O’Neil 1999), even if one accepts them as genuine accounts of what was said. Plutarch
(Alex. 68.3) claims that Olympias and her daughter raised a faction against Antipater
and that they divided rule between them, with Olympias taking Molossia and Kleopatra
Macedonia. Alexander, supposedly commenting with comparative indifference on
these events, comments that his mother has made the better choice because the
Macedonians will not tolerate being ruled by a woman. The passage clearly reflects
gender bias, but whether it reflect the bias of Plutarch’s era, or a Greek or Macedonian
bias contemporary with Alexander is uncertain. The historicity of the entire passage
is debatable, though likely to contain some truth (see Carney 2006, 53 for further
discussion and references). In the unlikely event that Antipater’s supposed death-bed
warning (Diod. 19.11.5) that the Macedonians should never allow a woman to be first
in the kingdom is historical (see Carney 2006, 78–9), it is clearly a partisan statement
directed at Olympias, his enemy, reflecting his belief that he, not she, was ‘first’.
Antipater’s willingness to take his own daughter’s advice (see below) suggests that he
did not so much oppose female political action as the political action of his female
enemies.
37 Although many of the Successors considered marriage to Alexander’s sister, in
the end none of them married her and all of Alexander’s sisters were murdered,
including Thessalonike, the widow of Kassander. See further Carney 1988b.
38 See Carney 2004 for references and discussion.
39 AB 36.
40 See discussion in Stephens 2004,163–76. Stephens 2004,168 wonders if the image
may refer to a specific armed cult statue of Arsinoe. On the military role of royal
Macedonian women see Carney 2004 and Stephens 2005, 240–1.
211
Elizabeth D. Carney
41 Polyb. 5.83.3.
42 For Phila see Diod. 19.59.4. See Sherwin-White and Kuhrt 1993, 26–7 for
references and discussion of a 299 BC inscription from Miletos that honors Apamea
for her ‘goodwill and support’ to Milesians campaigning with King Seleukos. The
Milesians in question were apparently mercenaries who took part in Seleukos’
conquest of Bactria-Sogdiana (c. 307–05), Apamea’s homeland. Nourse 2002, 252
suggests that Stratonike, wife of Seleukos and later Antiochos I, was important
because of continuing Antigonid loyalty, particularly to Stratonike’s mother Phila,
among Greek mercenaries and Macedonian soldiers in his territory. Also (2002,
258–9; see below) she sees Stratonike’s diplomatic negotiation as part of military
involvement.
43 After Chaeroneia: Philip married Kleopatra, ward of Attalos; Attalos married a
daughter of Parmenio as did Koinos. It is likely that other marriages happened then
too. After Alexander’s death, Perdikkas married a daughter of Antipater, as did
Krateros and Ptolemy. Kleopatra tried to marry first Leonnatos and then Perdikkas
and Kynnane tried to arrange her daughter’s marriage to Philip Arrhidaios (see Heckel
2006 passim for references).
44 While, for instance, Philip’s marriage to the daughter of a Molossian king is
or the current marital status of the woman referred to. Stratonike, however, daughter
of Phila and Demetrios Poliorketes and wife (at different times) of both Seleukos I and
Antiochos I, seems to be an example of a married dedicator continuing to focus on
the interests of her birth family, though not necessarily to the exclusion of the interests
of her spouses’ dynasty. See further Carney 2000a, 171–2, 226–8.
50 See Gruen 1985 for discussion of the date at which each Successor began to
founded Thessaloniki soon after he took control of Macedonia. See Carney 1988,
135–9.
52 Walbank 1984, 91 argues that an eponymous festival honoring them and dating
the cults of Demetrius’ mistresses were slightly later in date; for Demetrios’ mistresses,
see Ogden (this volume). Wheatley 2003, 33 suggests that, at least in Athens, Demetrius
treated Lamia, his favorite hetaira like a royal woman; he cites the parallel of Harpalos’
212
Being royal and female in the early Hellenistic period
similar actions (see above). Kosmetatou 2004b argues that a hetaira of Ptolemy II’s
(Bilistiche) was, in effect, a substitute queen after the death of Arsinoe Philadelphos.
See Ogden 2008 for a different view.
55 For references and discussion, see Carney 2000a, 225–8. It is possible, though
hardly certain, that wearing a diadem was connected to the acquisition of the title
basilissa. See further Carney 2000a, 232–3.
56 Though Savalli-Lestrade 1994, 417–18 and others assume that only in the
Ptolemaic dynasty (direct evidence; see below) did basilissa refer to unmarried king’s
daughters, a number of scholars, including myself, believe that some other dynasties,
possibly all, did so as well (see references in Carney 2000a, 326, n. 122). The problem
is the lack of clear evidence, granted the problem noted above with dating and
inscriptions dealing with royal women. See Carney 2000a, 226–7, especially ns.
123–5. I also disagree with the view that repudiation meant automatic loss of title.
57 See Carney 2000a, 207–9 for the possibility that eponymous women may have
women to Aphrodite and the unification of the private role of king’s wife with the
public one as patron of her subjects.
59 See Savalli-Lestrade 1994, 423ff. who points out that this involves not only the
basilissa’s personal influence and access with and to the king, but also that of her
courtiers.
60 Carney 2000a, 228–32. Ogden 1999, 67–214 sees a greater incidence of
continuation of the practice. Savalli-Lestrade 2003, 62 and Roy 1998, 118, on the other
hand, believe that the practice was entirely abandoned.
61 Savalli-Lestrade 2003, 61 describes their situation as ‘semi-private, semi public’
and rightly (2003, 65–6) notes how ‘ambivalent’ a royal wife’s status remained.
62 Roy 1998, 117–19 argues that the image of the king’s masculinity was defined by
that of his queen. This is an interesting suggestion, but does not seem as applicable to
Antigonid rulers, at least not on the basis of extant sources.
63 Schmitt 1991. Schmitt stresses (1991, 85) the paradoxical need to make the royal
family seem both distant and near, like and different from ordinary people, and the
ways in which dynasties used their private lives (as represented) to increase their
power.
64 See Carney 2000a, 179–80 for references to general treatments of the Antigonid
agree.
66 Edson 1934.
67 Carney 2000a, 181, 197–202 contra Hatzopoulos 1990, 144–7, followed by Le
Bohec 1993, 229–45, who cite the inscriptions discussed below as evidence that the
role of women was not more limited.
68 Hatzopoulos 1990, 144–5 (see also Le Bohec 1993, 244–5) discusses two
inscriptions from the reign of Antigonos Gonatas. One is new, from Kassandreia,
and honors a man who apparently is a go-between for Phila (Savalli-Lestrade 2003, 430
wonders if this courtier had followed Phila from her Seleucid homeland) and the city
in matters public and private. The other inscription, from Veroea, is a manumission
213
Elizabeth D. Carney
that mentions the king and queen conjointly and some others as guarantors of the
person’s freedom. As noted, Hatzopoulos and Le Bohec do not interpret these
inscriptions as I do. See further Carney 2000a, 197–202.
69 Edson 1934, 218, who also notes that progonoi usually refers only to male
ancestors, followed by Carney 2000b, 26, n. 27 contra Le Bohec 1993, 239. See further
discussion and references in Carney 2007.
70 The women were Stratonike, daughter of Antiochos I and wife of Demetrios II
(see Carney 2000a, 184–7) and Laodike, daughter of Seleukos IV and wife of Perseus
(see Carney 2000a, 195–7).
71 See Meyer 1992–1993. She notes (1992–1993, 107) that no representation of
female members of the dynasty survives from the 3rd century, but some do for the
second.
72 Nourse 2002, 228.
73 Nourse 2002, 230, e.g. a slave freed ‘on behalf’ of Antiochos I, Stratonike, and
their children.
74 Nourse 2002: 228. As Sherwin-White and Kuhrt 1993, 128 point out queens
point out that Seleukos made his heir co-king a full decade before Ptolemy I. Hazzard
2000, 46, n. 92 comments that Ptolemy I treated both sides of the family fairly evenly
until at least 298.
88 Ager 2005, 15–16 points out that modern studies link incest to family strife and
suggests that some of the same psychological forces that created murder within family
may have created incest within the family.
89 On Arsinoe’s career before her return to Egypt, see Lund 1992 passim and Carney
1994.
214
Being royal and female in the early Hellenistic period
90 Hazzard 2000, 84 sees it as Keraunos’ way of sealing a pact with Ptolemy II.
91 Hazzard 2000, 85 implies this when he notes that both had been involved in fear
and in murder.
92 On the peculiarities of scholarly tradition about Arsinoe, see Carney 1987,
1972, 117–18; Carney 1987, 428–9. See also Weber 1998/1999, 162–5. Ager 2005, 27.
94 Ager 2005, 27 characterizes the evidence as sparse. Plut. Mor. 11A, 736 E-F;
Athen. 620f–21a. The second century AD author, Pausanias (1.7.1) begins a list of
Ptolemy II’s crimes with the sibling marriage and then mentions his murders of
Argaeus and his brother. Hazzard 2000, 88 concludes that this order means that
Pausanias considered the marriage the king’s worst action. Hazzard also believes
(2000, 40) that, since ‘no one had any motive to denigrate the king after his death,
these late authors probably preserved or built on hostile tradition dating from
Ptolemy’s own reign.’ Obviously, Pausanias’ views could be his own and reflect the
values of the Second Sophistic, not those of any source. Moreover, any enemy of the
Ptolemies in the Hellenistic period had reason to portray brother-sister marriage in a
negative way.
95 18.356.
96 Hazzard 2000, 39 sees this as evidence that the marriage was condemned in
Athens. Plutarch’s passive verb could refer to opinion in Ptolemy II’s day or could be
more general but is not obviously related to Athens. The conversation is set in Athens
but not the reference.
97 Carney 1987, 428; Ager 2005, 27 are skeptical about the seriousness of his remark.
Weber 1998/99, 162–5 doubts that Sotades’ death can be directly connected to the
sibling marriage, on chronological grounds among other factors, and suggests that
Sotades’ death probably related to a number of incidents. (See also Fraser 1972,
117–18.) Weber denies that there is evidence Sotades spoke for a larger group. He
points out (1998/99; 173) that artists killed by kings were all ‘notorious grousers,’
mavericks, not voices of people.
98 Ager 2005, 26, while noting the association between sexual license and tyranny
in Graeco-Roman tradition, also observes that ancients were less bothered specifically
by incest as opposed to sexual license in general.
99 Kosmetatou 2004b, 24 concludes that the ‘court spin doctors’ thought that
something needed to be done and cites as examples not only Theocritus (Id. 17.128–30)
but also statues of the royal siblings erected by Kallikrates at Olympia, facing the
temples of the divine sibling spouses, Zeus and Hera.
100 Ager 2005, 2, 23.
101 See, however Ager 2005, 21–2 for incest as statement of power and relationship
43 notes that she is the first Ptolemaic queen to be shown with the double cornucopia,
a symbol of abundance and luxury.
103 See Ager 2005 for discussion; she rightly concludes (2005, 16) that causation is
complex and not limited to a single factor and notes that the reasons for the initiation
of the practice are not necessarily the reasons for the continuation.
104 As we have noted, it is certain that Ptolemaic daughters had the title basilissa
215
Elizabeth D. Carney
even if unmarried and that the practice had begun in the lifetime of Ptolemy I’s
unmarried daughter Philotera (OGIS 35). This suggests that even early on, the
Ptolemies understood the women of their dynasty as sharing in some aspects of
monarchy. Savalli-Lestrade 2003, 62 points out that only this dynasty (with one
exception) refers to royal couples as basileis.
105 See Burstein 1982, 204–5 for references; Macurdy 1932, 118–21 is typical.
minimalist approach and insists that there is no evidence that she was powerful or
popular, that this is just a mistaken point of view based on taking propaganda seriously.
Bibliography
Acosta-Hughes, B., Kosmetatou, E. and Baumbach, M.
2004 (eds) Labored in Papyrus Leaves: Perspectives on an Epigram collection attributed to
Posidippus (P. Mil. Vogl. VIII 309), Washington DC.
Ager, S. L.
2005 ‘Familiarity breeds: incest and the Ptolemaic dynasty,’ JHS 125, 1–34.
Bielman Sánchez, A.
2003 ‘Régner au féminine. Réflexions sur les reines attalides et séleucides’, in
F. Prost (ed.) L’Orient mediterranéen de la mort d’Alexandre aux campagnes de
Pompée: cités et royaumes à l’ époque hellénistique, Rennes, 41–64.
Le Bohec-Bouhet, S.
2006 ‘Réflexions sur la place de la femme dans la Macédoine antique’, in Suimier-
Sorbets, M. B. Hatzopoulos and Y. Morizot (eds) Rois, cités, necropoles:
institutions, rites et monuments en macédoine, Meletemata 45, Athens, 187–98.
Bringmann, K.
1997 ‘Die Rolle der Königinnen, Prinzen under Vermittler’, Actes du Xe Congrès
International d’Épigraphie grecque et latine, Nîmes, 4–9 octobre 1992, Paris, 169–73.
Brosius, M.
1996 Women in Ancient Persia (559–331 BC), Oxford.
Burstein, S. M.
1982 ‘Arsinoe II Philadelphos: a revisionist view,’ in W. L. Adams and E. N.
Borza (eds) Philip II, Alexander the Great and the Macedonian Heritage,
Washington D.C., 197–212.
Carney, E. D.
1987 ‘The reappearance of royal sibling marriage in Ptolemaic Egypt,’ Parola del
Passato 237, 420–39.
1988a ‘Eponymous women: royal women and city names,’ AHB 2.6, 134–42.
1988b ‘The sisters of Alexander the Great: royal relicts,’ Historia 37: 385–404.
1991 ‘‘‘What’s in a name?” The emergence of a title for royal women in the
Hellenistic period’ in S. B. Pomeroy (ed.) Women’s History and Ancient
History, Chapel Hill, 154–72.
1993 ‘Foreign influence and the changing role of royal women in Macedonia,’
Ancient Macedonia 5,1, 313–23.
216
Being royal and female in the early Hellenistic period
217
Elizabeth D. Carney
Klapisch-Zuber, C.
2002 ‘‘Kin, friends, and neighbors’: the urban territory of a merchant family in
1400’, in P. Findlen (ed.) The Italian Renaissance: The essential readings, Oxford,
97–123.
Kosmetatou, E.
2004a ‘Constructing legitimacy: the Ptolemaic Familiengruppe as a means of self-
definition in Posidippus’ Hippika’ in Acosta-Hughes et al. 2004, 225–46.
2004b ‘Bilistiche and the quasi-institutional status of the Ptolemaic royal mistress,’
APF 50, 18–36.
Kron, U.
1996 ‘Priesthoods, dedications and euergetism. What part did religion play in
the political and social status of Greek women?’, in P. Hellström and
B. Alroth (eds) Religion and Power in the Ancient Greek World, Proceedings of the
Uppsala Symposium, Uppsala, 139–82.
Lund, H.
1992 Lysimachus: A study in early Hellenistic kingship, London and New York.
Ma, J.
2003 ‘Kings’, in Erskine 2003, 177–95.
Macurdy, G. H.
1932 Hellenistic Queens, Baltimore.
Meyer, M.
1992/1993 ‘Mutter, Ehefrau und Herrscherin. Darstellungen der Königin auf
Seleukidischen Münzen,’ Hephaistos 11–12, 107–32.
Mirón-Pérez, M. D.
1997 ‘Olimpia, Euridice y el origen del culto en la Grecia helenistica,’ Florentia
Iliberritana 9, 215–35.
2000 ‘Transmitters and representatives of power: royal women in ancient
Macedonia,’ Ancient Society 30, 35–52.
Müller, S.
2005 ‘Die Geschwisterehe Arsinoës II und Ptolemaios II im Spiegel der
Forschung von 1895 bis 1932: Ein Verstoss gegen das normative
Paarmodell,’ Ariadne 48, 41–9.
2006 ‘Alexander, Harpalos und die Ehren für Pythionike und Glykera:
Überlegungen zu den Repräsentationsformen des Schatzmeisters in
Babylon und Tarsos,’ in V. Lica (ed.), Studia in honorem G. Wirth octogenario,
Galati, 71–106.
Nourse, K.
2002 Women and the Early Development of Royal Power in the Hellenistic East,
Unpublished Dissertation, University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia.
Ogden, D.
1999 Polygamy, Prostitutes and Death. The Hellenistic dynasties, London and Swansea.
2008 ‘Bilistiche and the prominence of courtesans in the Ptolemaic tradition’, in
P. McKechnie and P. Guillaume (eds) Ptolemy Philadelphus and His World,
Leiden, 353–85.
O’Neil, J. L.
1999 ‘Olympias: “The Macedonians will never let themselves be ruled by a
woman”’, Prudentia 31.1, 1–14.
218
Being royal and female in the early Hellenistic period
2000 ‘The creation of the new dynasties after the death of Alexander the Great’,
Prudentia 32.2, 118–37.
Palagia, O.
2010 ‘Philip’s Eurydice in the Philippeum at Olympia’, in E. Carney and
D. Ogden (eds) Philip II and Alexander the Great: Father and son, lives and
afterlives, New York.
Pomeroy, S. B.
1984 Women in Hellenistic Egypt from Alexander to Cleopatra, New York.
Quaegebeur, J.
1978 ‘Reines ptolémaïques et traditions égyptiennes,’ in H. von Maehler and
V. M. Strocka (eds) Das ptolemäische Ägypten, Mainz, 245–62.
Robins, G.
1993 Women in Ancient Egypt, London.
Roy, J.
1998 ‘The masculinity of the Hellenistic king,’ in L. Foxhall and J. Salmon (eds)
When Men were Men: Masculinity, power and identity in classical antiquity, London
and New York, 11–35.
Savalli-Lestrade, I.
1994 ‘Il ruolo pubblico delle regine ellenistiche’ in S. Allessandrì, Historie. Studie
offerti dagli Allievi Giuseppe Nenci in occasione del suo settantesimo compleanno.
415–32.
2003 ‘La place des reines à la cour et dans le royaume à l’époque hellénistique,’
Les femmes antiques entre sphère privée et sphère publiques: actes du diplôme d’études
avancées, Universités de Lausanne et Neuchâtel, Bern, 59–76.
Schmitt, H. H.
1989 ‘Zur Inszenierung des Privatslebens des Hellenistischen Herrschers,’ in J.
Seibert (ed.) Hellenistische Studien. Gedenkschrift für H. Bengston, Münchener
Arbeiten zur Alten Geschichte 5, Munich, 77–86.
Schultz, P.
2007 ‘Leochares’ Argead portraits in the Philippeion,’ in R. von den Hoff and
P. Schultz (eds) Early Hellenistic Portraiture: image, style, context, Cambridge,
205–33.
2009 ‘Divine images and royal ideology in the Philippeion at Olympia,’ in
J. Jensen, G. Hinge, P. Schultz and B. Wickkiser (eds) Aspects of Ancient
Greek Cult: Ritual, context, iconography, Aarhus Studies in Mediterranean
Antiquity 8. Aarhus, 123–92.
Sherwin-White, S. and Kuhrt, A.
1993 From Samarkhand to Sardis: A new approach to the Seleucid Empire, Berkeley.
Stephens, S.
2004 ‘For you, Arsinoe,’ in Acosta-Hughes et al. 2004, 161–76.
Thompson, D. J.
2005 ‘Posidippus, poet of the Ptolemies,’ in Gutzwiller 2005, 269–86.
Walbank F. W.
1984 ‘Monarchies and monarchic ideas,’ CAH 2 7.1, 62–100.
1996 ‘Two Hellenistic processions: a matter of self-definition,’ Scripta Classica
Israelica 15, 119–30.
219
Elizabeth D. Carney
Weber, G.
1998/99 ‘Hellenistic rulers and their poets: silencing dangerous critics?’ Ancient
Society 29, 147–74.
1997 ‘Interaktion, Repräsentation und Herrschaft. Der Königshof im
Hellenismus’, in A. Winterling (ed.) Zwischen ‘Haus’ und ‘Staat’, Antike Höfe
im Vergleich, Historische Zeitschrift 23, Munich, 27–71.
Wehrli, C.
1964 ‘Phila, fille d’Antipater et épouse de Démétrius, roi des Macédoniens’,
Historia 13, 140–6.
220
11
Daniel Ogden
221
Daniel Ogden
For Plutarch Philinna was ‘without repute and common’, ἀδόξου καὶ κοινῆς,
and her son illegitimate.6 For Justin she was a Larissan dancing-girl
(saltatrix) and a Larissan whore (scortum).7 But a careful and deservedly
famous fragment of Satyros, explicitly devoted to the marriages of Philip,
which is also preserved by Athenaeus, makes it clear that Philinna was a
wife amongst wives. Satyros, or Athenaeus commenting on the implications
thereof, also suggests that this marriage, like Philip’s others, had a
diplomatic purpose, and this obliges us to assume that Philinna was a scion
of Larissa’s ruling Aleuads.8 The courtesan-characterisation of Philinna is
accordingly best understood, opprobrious as it is in Plutarch and Justin at
any rate, as generated in the contexts of succession competitions between
Philip’s polygamously-held wives and their respective children. They result
from the propaganda of rival aspirant wings of the kings’ families. We can
point to obvious culprits: Olympias and her son Alexander. Alexander’s
direct competition with this lad is twice graphically documented in
Plutarch’s Life of Alexander. Olympias supposedly poisoned Arrhidaios to
turn him into the idiot he was subsequently reputed to be.9 And Alexander
was panicked when he perceived that Arrhidaios might gain some
advantage for the succession in marrying the daughter of the satrap
Pixodaros, and branded him a bastard, νόθος.10 Olympias’ hatred of
Arrhidaios, furthermore, endured long after Alexander’s death, until she
finally had him killed in 317, whilst at the same time forcing his wife Adea-
Eurydike to hang herself with her own girdle.11
The Philinna case offers us a ready model for the interpretation of the
vaguer data bearing upon Perdikkas II (ruled 454–413). Plato, Aelian and
a scholiast to Aristides seemingly allude to different aspects of a single
tradition. This (to combine the information) held that Archelaos was the
bastard son of Perdikkas by a slavewoman owned by Perdikkas’ brother
Alketas, and that she was called Simiche.12 Simiche is a typical name for
slavewomen in New Comedy, for what that is worth, if not actually for
courtesans. The finger points similarly at Archelaos’ rivals for the
succession, Perdikkas’ wife Kleopatra and her family. She was the mother
of a son to Perdikkas called (probably) Aeropos, whom Archelaos took
222
How to marry a courtesan in the Macedonian courts
223
Daniel Ogden
and Philip abetted her in this, for they were wary lest/taking precautions
lest he might/should be a gynnis. Olympias frequently begged her to have sex
with Alexander.
Athenaeus Deipnosophistae 435a, incorporating Hieronymos of Rhodes F38
Wehrli and Theophrastus F578 Fortenbaugh
The deployment of the relatively obscure term gynnis seems to have saluted
Alexander’s supposed effeminacy, his venture into the world of eunuchs,
his Persianising and his Dionysiac associations.19 Credible or otherwise, it
is noteworthy that this tale too was developed very soon after Alexander’s
death, with Theophrastus writing in the late fourth century or very early
third.20 If the tale does have anything of value to offer us for the subject of
marriage in association with courtesans at the Macedonian court, this may
lie in its assumed premise: the pressure upon kings to secure heirs. Aelian
tells that the artist Apelles, a highly romanticised figure,21 ‘loved the
concubine (παλλακή) of Alexander, whose name was Pankaste, and she was
Larissan by birth. They say that she was the first woman Alexander had
sex with.’ 22 Pankaste looks rather like a doublet of Kallixeina: both hail
from Thessaly; both have a courtesan-like designation; and both are,
ostensibly, the first woman with whom Alexander has sex.23 (It may be
noteworthy that we have already now encountered the term ‘Thessalian’
three times, in connection with Philinna, Kallixeina and Pankaste. Despite
the highly, albeit variously, fictive nature of the data bearing upon the three
women, we may wonder whether there was in fact some sort of historical
tradition of Thessalian courtesans in the Argead court.)
The nature of Alexander’s first tangible relationship, that with Barsine,
daughter of Artabazus, which endured four or five years from 332 before
producing a son, Herakles, remains obscure to us. Plutarch seems not to
have regarded it as a marriage: he employs the curious word ἅψασθαι of
Alexander’s acquisition of Barsine, and asserts that before marrying
(sc. Roxane) Alexander knew no other woman than Barsine.24 But Barsine,
married or otherwise, is nowhere represented as a courtesan in the source
tradition, and so for this reason falls outside the framework of our
investigation.25
3. Harpalos
Before we pass on to the Antigonid dynasty, it will be worthwhile to
consider the traditions relating to Alexander’s rogue treasurer Harpalos,
who to some extent seems to have projected himself as a king.26 The rich
extant Athens-based traditions relating to his Attic courtesans Pythionike
and Glykera and his lavish treatment of them appear to anticipate many
aspects of the Athens-based traditions relating to Demetrios Poliorketes
224
How to marry a courtesan in the Macedonian courts
225
Daniel Ogden
second century AD. Indeed, its foundations survive still.32 When was it
actually built? During Harpalos’ brief residence in Athens, shortly before
his death? Or did he already build it at long distance when still in Asia,
through the agency of Charikles, and was it therefore part of his campaign
to soften up Athens in advance of seeking refuge there? 33 It is conceivable
that this extravagant memorial could have generated – for its audience in
Athens – the notion that Harpalos had also built a tomb or a temple (or
both) for Pythionike in Babylon. This notion is found in Theopompos
who is at this point writing from an Athenocentric perspective,34 and in
the Agen. There the concise description of Pythionike’s temple in its
proximity to the underworld entrance of the ἄορνος is intriguing, given
Dikaiarchos’ association of Pythionike’s tomb with Eleusis, and that too in
a work On the descent into Trophonios’ cave, another underworld hole.35 The
implication of this correspondence, if it is significant, is that the Agen was
not produced for Alexander and his troops (let alone written by the king)
at some Dionysia on some unidentifiable Hydaspes,36 but rather written
for an Athenian audience, as one might normally expect a satyr play to
have been. The preserved scraps of it would certainly suit an Athenian
audience, discussing as they do Harpalos’ grain supplies to that very city,
and his citizenship there. We may choose to believe, with Sutton, that the
soubriquet applied to Harpalos, Pallides, declares him to be a ‘son of
Athene’.37 The play’s words of scene-establishment are reminiscent, for us,
of the prologue of Menander’s Dyskolos.38 Its themes carry more than a
whiff of the Old-Comic stock-in-trade: the great man’s hetaira as the cause
of city-rocking mischief (cf. the Aspasia of Aristophanes’ Acharnians) and
evocation of the dead (cf. Socrates and Chairephon in Aristophanes’
Birds).39 The request for news from Attica in an oriental setting reminds us
of Aeschylus’ Persians in its entirety. The opening of Sophocles’ Electra is
parodied at lies 2–3 of the fragment.40 And the notion of a desperately
bereaved lover calling up the ghost of their lost beloved would resonate
strongly for an audience familiar with Euripides’ Protesilaus or Alcestis.41 All
this surely suggests that the play was written for an Athenian audience, not
for the Macedonian Herresversammlung and assorted rabble. Whilst querying
the pedigree of this text, we may also note the curious coincidence between
Pythionike’s name and that of its supposed, but quite mysterious,
alternative author, Python; Pythionike is herself actually named Pythonike
by Diodorus and Plutarch.42 Both Theopompos and the Agen-author may,
therefore, be writing on the basis of Athenian fantasies spun around the
relationship between Harpalos and Pythionike, and have little to tell us of
what actually passed between them.
The one detail, fantastic as it is, that gives pause for thought in the
226
How to marry a courtesan in the Macedonian courts
The cult can only be dated by the terminus ante of Philadelphos’ death:
i.e., it must have been instituted prior to 246 BC.45 While this may in itself
make a cult of Pythionike Aphrodite more plausible, it could be that
Philadelphos and the Athenian rumour-mongers alike drew on traditions
of courtesan-Aphrodites that are now lost to us.
The notion of marriage is explicitly associated only with Pythionike (by
Pausanias), whereas the notion of treatment as queen, which might or
might not be thought also to entail marriage, or the projection of marriage,
is predominantly associated rather with Glykera (by Theopompos).
However, the Philemon fragment does imply that Pythionike also received
queenly treatment: ‘You will be queen (βασίλισσα) of Babylon, if this is what
happens. You know about Pythionike and Harpalos.’ Whereas the
Athenians can have had little idea about life at court with Harpalos and
Pythionike, they may have imagined that they had some idea about his life
with Glykera: she was initially installed closer to home, at Tarsos, rather
than Babylon. It is possible, just, that the reference to her supplying Athens
with grain on Harpalos’ behalf grew out of some sort of continuing
relationship between the courtesan and the city. And it may be that
Harpalos brought her back to Athens with him during his brief and
unfortunate sojourn there. So it remains doubtful whether we can take the
suggestion that Harpalos married Glykera seriously. And whether he did so
or not, the notion is clearly used by Theopompos as an indicator of excess
on Harpalos’ part.
4. Demetrios Poliorketes
And so to the Antigonids. There is little to say of Antigonos I
Monophthalmos. The only courtesan we find associated with him in
amatory mode is Deomo, the courtesan of his son Demetrios Poliorketes;
227
Daniel Ogden
228
How to marry a courtesan in the Macedonian courts
229
Daniel Ogden
230
How to marry a courtesan in the Macedonian courts
6. Middle Antigonids
We are told that Antigonos Gonatas displayed Thessalian (NB) girls
dancing only in loin-cloths (διαζώστραι) at his court.82 But only one named
courtesan, however, is associated with him, and that too vestigially, but the
association is an important one in the context of the other dynastic
arrangements under consideration, for all that the tradition makes no
mention of marriage. Athenaeus quotes a list of royal courtesans from
Ptolemy of Megalopolis in which the name of Demo is attached to
Gonatas (hence all of the first three Antigonids are apparently associated
with a courtesan of this name),83 with the bald fact that she bore him his
son Halkyoneus,84 and it is in this that her significance lies. For, until
Gonatas was at least 43, and he himself was a young adult, Halkyoneus
remained his only son, and he was clearly being groomed as a crown prince.
231
Daniel Ogden
232
How to marry a courtesan in the Macedonian courts
betrothed Chryseis to him. He did not rear the children that were born to
him from Chryseis, so that he might preserve the kingship for Philip without
treachery. And indeed he delivered Philip to the kingship, and himself died.
Porphyry FGrH 260 F3.13–14 = Eusebius Chronicles i 237–8 Schöne88
Porphyry and Syncellus say that Chryseis was a Thessalian war-captive
(αἰχµάλωτος). The name Chryseis well suits a woman that is a war-captive
and a concubine: the famous Chryseis of the Iliad was such.89 This
consideration of course suggests that the name of Chryseis was only given
to the woman after her capture. Porphyry may be conscious of the Iliad
parallel, for he makes Chryseis’ child Philip V the ‘cause of troubles’ for the
Macedonians, as one may argue that Chryseis had been for the Greeks at
Troy.90 Chryseis was also a common name for hetairai (cf. Chrysis, the
courtesan of Demetrios Poliorketes).91 Despite all this Porphyry explicitly
says that Demetrios married Chryseis. The union must have commenced
before 238, when Philip V was born.92 An indication that Philip had a
mother of at any rate disputable marital status may be found in Polybius’
description of Philip as Demetrios II’s ‘natural’ (κατὰ φύσιν) son, which
could be read in implicit contrast to ‘legitimate’ (κατὰ νόµον). However, the
phrase is more easily read in implicit contrast to ‘adoptive’ (κατὰ θέσιν), for
Philip was after all the adoptive son of Antigonos III Doson.93
It is difficult to interpret the data on Chryseis. Are we to see her as
another Lamia, a practicing courtesan captured in war and either invited or
compelled to take up with her captor? Or are we to see Demetrios as
effectively contracting a marriage alliance with Thessalian nobility ‘in the
context of war’ as Satyros presents Philip II’s marriage to Philinna of
Larissa to have been? In which case, Chryseis’ representation as a courtesan
is likely to owe its origin to competition within the royal family, the most
obvious candidate being Phthia and her circle, although she is not known
to have produced any rival children of her own. But the tone of Porphyry’s
narrative does not invite this line of thought: there is no atmosphere of
invective or moral reproach about it. So perhaps it is best to take
Porphyry’s account at face value. If we are to suppose that the name
Chryseis was acquired by the woman within her new Macedonian context,
then it seems that, whatever her original status in life, she was being openly
projected as a courtesan by the throne.
Since Demetrios is not known to have had any other children, the
succession of Philip, so far as he himself will have been concerned, will
have been his only serious option. But the boy’s actual succession marks
the logical conclusion of a process traceable from Demetrios I onwards.
Demetrios permitted his courtesan Lamia to rear a child, admittedly a
relatively unthreatening girl, but the child was nonetheless given a name
233
Daniel Ogden
most honorific within the family. His son Antigonos II not only reared a
son from his hetaira Demo but bestowed public honour upon him and was
apparently grooming him for the sucession, or at least as a candidate for the
succession. This question was left unresolved by the boy’s early death. But
now in the generation of Antigonos’ son, Demetrios II, we appear to see
the son of a courtesan, or of a woman ostensibly presented as a courtesan,
completing the journey to the throne. And this was done, we may note,
with the blessing of the Macedonian establishment which organised a most
scrupulous regency for him.
Antigonos III Doson too, as is even more emphatically clear from
Porphyry (and other sources),94 married Chryseis in turn. In so doing he
was continuing an old Macedonian practice of legitimating his rule by
taking on one of his predecessor’s wives.
234
How to marry a courtesan in the Macedonian courts
Conclusion
In general, claims that Macedonian kings married courtesans can be
attributed to several broad origins:
• The competitive discourse generated by succession disputes between
sons of rival wives: so Perdikkas II’s Simiche (probably), Philip II’s
Philinna and Philip V’s Polykrateia/Gnathainion.
• Contemporary or retrospective moralising attempts to attribute the kings
with immoderate behaviour: Harpalos’ (Pythionike and) Glykera,
Demetrios I’s Lamia (perhaps).
• The propaganda of those who sought to enhance their own position
through a suitably obscure connection to a king: Alexander’s Thais,
Perseus’ courtesan, supposedly the mother of Andriskos, possibly to be
identified with Kallippa.
• And, indeed, although moderns may find the notion quaint, the historical
fact of such marriages between kings and courtesans: Demetrios I’s
Lamia, perhaps; Demetrios II’s and Antigonos III’s Chryseis (and cf.
Ptolemy I’s Thais).
235
Daniel Ogden
The case of Lamia perhaps satisfies two categories: she may have married
Demetrios at least in the context of a ‘sacred marriage’, but she may also
have been avidly seized upon by the tradition as a mechanism for
illustrating Demetrios’ immoderate behaviour.
As a rider to our study, let us briefly consider what we know of the
ethnicities of the courtesans associated with the Macedonian kings.
Demetrios Poliorketes’ Myrrhine is said to have been Samian,104 and
Philip V’s Polykrateia/Gnathaina, if relevant here, which is doubtful, we
have seen to have been Argive. All the other courtesans associated with
the Macedonian kings, where any ethnicity is attributed to them, are
Thessalian or Attic: Thessalian are Philip II’s Philinna, Alexander’s
Kallixeina and Thais, Antigonos Gonatas’ unnamed courtesans and
Demetrios II’s and Antigonos Doson’s Chryseis. Attic are: Harpalos’
Pythionike and Glykera, Demetrios Poliorketes’ Lamia, Leaina and Mania.
We have seen that in the cases of Harpalos and Demetrios Poliorketes the
source-tradition is heavily Athenocentric, and this may well account for
apparent prominence of Attic courtesans in the biographies of these men.
This perhaps makes the Thessalian ethnicity attributed to the rest all the
more significant, and we may tentatively suggest that the Macedonian kings
had a tendency to favour courtesans from the land to their south.
Notes
1 Isaeus 3.17.
2 Menander Samia 129–36; cf. Ogden 1996, 102 and 161.
3 For the notion that the Antigonids behaved in a more ‘constitutional’ fashion
context of the Argead and Hellenistic courts are considerable: Ogden 1999, 215–29.
This is not the place to rehearse them, and so, whilst bearing them in mind, I will
plunge in medias res. On the role of women in Hellenistic monarchies, see also Carney,
this volume.
5 Athen. 11.508e.
6 Plut. Alex. 10 and 77.
7 Justin 9.8.2 and 13.2.11.
8 Satyros F21 Kumaniecki at Athen. 13.557b-e; cf. Beloch 1912–27:iii.2, 69, Berve
1926 no. 781 n.4, Prestianni Giallombardo 1976/7 esp. 91, Hammond and Griffith
1979, 225, Heckel 1981, 51, Greenwalt 1984, 69–72, Tronson 1984, Ogden 1999, 17–
20, Carney 2001a, 61–2 and Heckel 2006 s.v. Philine. Bosworth 1971a, 128 gives some
credence to these sources in defining Arrhidaios as ‘possibly illegitimate’. Hammond
1983, 90–3 and 1994, 198 n. 3 implausibly argues that the origin of the abusive
representation of Philinna lay in the democratic opposition in Larissa, and was relayed
by Kleitarchos.
9 Plut. Alex. 77; cf. Ogden 1999, 25–6. For discussion of Arrhidaios’ condition, see
236
How to marry a courtesan in the Macedonian courts
Greenwalt 1984, 72–6, Green 1990, 6 (epilepsy) Heckel 1992, 144–5, Carney 1992, 172
and 2001b (mental retardation). See also Ogden 2007b.
10 Plut. Alex. 10; cf. Arr. Anab. 1.23.8 and Strabo C675. See Badian 1963, 245–6,
Hamilton 1969 ad loc., Heckel 1981, 57, Hatzopoulos 1982, Greenwalt 1984, 76,
French and Dixon 1986a and 1986b, Bosworth 1988, 21–2, O’Brien 1992, 31–3 and
Hammond 1994, 174. Alexander and Olympias themselves suffered similar
‘bastardising’ treatment at the hands of Philip’s final wife Kleopatra and her family,
in the form of her uncle (?) Attalos, as we learn from Satyros F21 Kumaniecki and
Plut. Alex. 9; cf. Ogden 1999, 20–5.
11 Diodorus 19.11.1–7, Justin 14.5.8–10 and Aelian Varia historia 13.36; cf. Carney
1987a, 59, 1987b, 500, 1991, 19–20, 1993b and 2001a, 136–7, Green 1990, 19–20 and
Ogden 1999, 25–6.
12 Plato Gorg. 471a-d (son of slavewoman), Ael. VH 12.43 (son of slavewoman
Simiche) and Aristides 46.120.2 with Scholiast (son of Perdikkas by slavewoman). For
discussion see Dodds 1959, 241–2, Hammond and Griffith 1979, 133–7, Borza 1990,
161–2, Ogden 1999, 7–8 and Carney 2001a, 17.
13 Plato Gorg. 471a-d and Scholiast Aristides 45.55 and 46.120, with Ogden 1999,
7–8.
14 Cf. Ogden 1999, 42 and Reames-Zimmerman 1999, 89–90.
15 Curtius 6.6.8 and Justin 12.3.10.
16 Athen. 12.539a (incorporating Polykleitos of Larissa FGrH 128 F1) and Curtius
6.2.5.
17 Athen. 13.576de (including Kleitarchos FGrH 137 F11), Plut. Alex. 38, Diod.
17.72 and Curtius 5.7.2–11; cf. Berve 1926 no. 359, Peremans and Van’t Dack
1950–81 no. 14723, Ogden 1999 index s.v. and 2008, McClure 2003, 157–8 and Heckel
2006 s.v. Thais.
18 There is no mention of Thais’ involvement in the burning of the palace at Arr.
Anab. 3.18.11. If her role in it had been a historical one, then it is possible that Ptolemy
himself passed over it in silence in the history of which Arrian made so much use.
Tarn 1948, ii, 47–8, 82–3 and 324 argues that Alexander had no relationship with
Thais.
19 See Ogden 2007a.
20 Athen. 10.435a, incorporating Hieronymos of Rhodes F38 Wehrli and
incorrectly as 7.34).
23 We find a version of this same story also at Pliny HN 35.86, where the
concubine’s name is given rather as Campaspe. Here we are not explicitly told that
Campaspe was Alexander’s first love, but we are told that she was his favourite. In an
act of magnanimity, Alexander handed her over to Apelles.
24 Plut. Alex. 21.4 = Aristobulus FGrH 139 F11; cf. also Diod. 20.20.2, Curtius
10.6.10–12 and Plut. Eum. 1. Further relevant sources at Berve 1926 nos. 152 and 206
and Heckel 2006 s.v. ‘Artabazus’ and ‘Barsine’. Brosius 1996, 78 regards the union as
a marriage, but the overwhelming tendency of scholarship denies this: Brunt 1975,
33, Tarn 1948, ii 336, Greenwalt 1984, 70 and 1989, 22, Bosworth 1988, 64, Green
1990, 6–7 and 28, Heckel 1992, 146 and 203, O’Brien 1992, 58–9, Carney 1993a, 319
237
Daniel Ogden
and 2001, 101–5 and 149–50, Ellis 1994, 25 and Whitehorne 1994, 71. I expressed
ambivalence at Ogden 1999, 4–3.
25 There is no suggestion either of courtesan status or of marriage in the context of
F23 K-A), 13.586c–d (incorporating Theopompos Chian Letter, FGrH 115 F254a,
Kleitarchos FGrH 137 F30 and Python Agen TGrF 91 F1), 13.594d–96b (incorporating
Poseidonios FGrH 87 F14, Dikaiarchos On the Descent into Trophonius’ cave F21 Wehrli,
Theopompos Letter to Alexander, FGH 115 F253 and Chian Letter, FGrH 115 F254b,
Philemon Babylonian F15 K-A, Alexis Lyciscus F143 K-A, and again Python Agen TGrF
91 F1), and 605d (incorporating Klearchos F23 Wehrli), Diod. 17.108.5–6, Paus.
1.37.5 and Plut. Phoc. 22. For Pythionike see Berve 1926 no. 676 (Πυθιονίκη), Heckel
1992, 218–20 and 2006 s.v. Pythionike, Davidson 1997, 106–7, Ogden 1999 and 2001
indices s.v., Carney 2001a, 217–18, McClure 2003 esp. 137–8, 144–8, 153. For the
Agen, see Snell 1964, 99–138 (with earlier references), Lloyd-Jones 1966, Sutton 1980a
and 1980b, 75–81, Jaschinski 1981, 23–44 (esp. 36–9), Worthington 1986 and Flower
1997, 258–62. For Glykera see Berve 1926 no. 231 (Γλυκέρα), McClure 2003 index s.v.
‘Glycera, hetaera and eromene of Harpalus’ (but beware that many of the entries here
misleadingly direct one to other Glyceras than Harpalos’, including that of Menander’s
Perikeiromene) and Heckel 2006 s.v. Glycera. For Harpalos more generally see Berve
1926 no. 143 (Harpalos), Badian 1961, Jaschinski 1981, Bosworth 1988 esp. 149–50,
212, 215–20, and Heckel 1992, 213–27 and 2006 s.v. Harpalus.
28 Note that Pythionike is strongly associated with fish at Athen. 9.338ef
(incorporating Antiphanes Halieuomene F27 K-A, dated by K-A ad loc. to ‘shortly after
345’) and 339d (incorporating Timokles Ikarioi F16 K-A). In the latter Pythionike’s
lovers are compared to fish. Cf. Davidson 1997, 10.
29 Snell 1964, 106–8 argues that the magi would have been played by the satyrs on
the ground that the satyr chorus is the only plural entity in a satyr play. Perhaps, but
there is no certainty from the fragment that the magi appeared on stage. He also notes,
interestingly, that satyrs would suit the role of necromancers of Pythionike well,
238
How to marry a courtesan in the Macedonian courts
because of their traditional role in bringing females out of the ground (although he
oddly fails to mention Pandora in this connection, for whom see Ogden 1998, 218).
30 It is not clear at which point he was given citizenship by the city. For the
significance here of βασίλισσα, see Carney 1991, 8 and her chapter in this volume.
31 E.g. Heckel 1992, 218–20, Flower 1997 esp. 89, 258–62 (taking Theopompos’
Snell 1964, 112–17, Sutton 1980b, 78–81, Bosworth 1988, 149–50 and Heckel 1992,
219–20 n.31 and 2006 s.v. Python [1]. Most accept without question that the play was
indeed written and performed for Alexander’s men in Asia: e.g. Snell 1964, 100, Sutton
1980b, 77, Flower 1994, 260.
37 So Sutton 1980a. Pall-ides of course plays on Har-pal-os. I am less immediately
convinced by attempts to derive the name from φαλλός, as Snell 1964, 104 n.9, with
earlier literature.
38 As noted by Sutton 1980b, 77. For the likelihood that the Agen fragments derive
The ostensibly Old-Comic, Aristophanic tone is noted by Snell 1964, 137 and Sutton
1980b, 76 and 81.
40 Parodying Soph. El. 7–8; cf. Snell 1964, 105.
41 On these plays, see Ogden 2001, 186–7.
42 Cf. Heckel 1992, 218. We know nothing else of Python’s supposed involvement
with Alexander: Berve 1924 no. 688 (Πύθων).For the practice of drawing hetaira names
from festivals and games, see McClure 2003, 62.
43 Athen. 6.252f–253b, incorporating Demochares FGrH 75 F3 and Polemon F13
Preller; cf. Reinsberg 1993, 161. For Lamia’s own supposed celebration of the
Aphrodisia festival, cf. Alciphron 4.16.
44 Cf. Wheatley 2003, 34.
45 See Ogden 2008.
46 Athen. 13.578ab incorporating Herakleides Lembos FHG iii 168.
47 Athen. 14.614f, incorporating Phylarchos FGrH 81 F12 (where his name is given
Cameron 1990 (with care) and now Kosmetatou 2004 and Ogden 2008, with further
bibliography.
239
Daniel Ogden
52 There is also a reference to an unnamed courtesan at Plut. Demetr. 19. For
Demetrios and his courtesans in general, see Ogden 1999, 215–72 passim.
53 Plut. Demetr. 24.
54 Plut. Demetr. 24.
55 Plut. Demetr. 24, Athen. 13.578ab (including Ptolemy of Megalopolis FGrH
161 F4 and Herakleides Lembos FHG iii 168 F4), and Lucian Icaromenippus
15. 27.
56 Athen. 13.578a-579d (including Ptolemy of Megalopolis FGrH 161 F4, Machon
FGrH 161 F4, Machon F14–15 Gow and quoting Diphilos [not K-A]).
58 Alciphron 4.16.2 (upon which the connection to Demetrios depends), Athen.
Preller) and 13.577d–f (incorporating Machon F12 Gow and Ptolemy of Megalopolis
FGrH 161 F4).
60 Athen. 13.593a (incorporating Nicolaus of Damascus FGrH 90 F90).
61 Sources: Plut. Demetr. 10, 16, 19 and 23–7 (incorporating Philippides F25 K-A
and adespota F698 K-A and quoting Lynkeus of Samos and Demochares of
Soli), Athen. 3.101e (quoting Lynkeus), 4.128b (quoting Lynkeus), 6.252f–253b
(incorporating Demochares FGH 75 F1 and Polemon F13 Preller), 13.577c–f
(incorporating Polemon F45–6 Preller and Machon F12–13 Gow) and 14.614ef
(incorporating Phylarchos FGrH 81 F12), Clem. Protr. 4.48, Alciphron 4.16 and 17,
Ael. VH 12.17 and 13.8–9, D. L. 5.76 (incorporating Favorinus of Arelate F37
Mensching = FHG iii 578 F8), Demetrios of Phaleron F39 Wehrli = Diogenianus
Choeroboscus Orthographia at Cramer Anecdota Graeca Oxoniensia ii p. 239. See Ogden
1999 esp. 173–7, 219–68 passim, McClure 2003 index s.v. ‘Lamia’ and especially
Wheatley 2003, a most meticulous study.
62 See Ogden 1999, 223–5.
63 I had assumed it to be Plutarch’s implication that Lamia had been Ptolemy’s
courtesan until Salamis, Ogden 1999, 241–2 and 275; Wheatley 2003, 31 n.11
scrupulously maintains that Plutarch does not explicitly declare this.
64 Note the prominence of Athens in all the Lamia material at Plut. Demetr. 23–7;
Machon’s Chreiai (even if written in Alexandria: Gow 1965, 5) focus on the smart-set
dinner parties of early Hellenistic Athens, and at these Lamia is a witty guest alongside
other courtesans; Athenian references also at Athen. 14.614ef (incorporating
Phylarchos FGrH 81 F12), Athen. 6.252f–253b (incorporating Demochares FGrH
75 F3) and Alciphron 4.16, Clem. Protr. 4.48. Lamia is also associated with the cities
of Sikyon/Demetrias (Athen. 13.577c–f, incorporating Polemon F45–6 Preller),
Thebes (Athen. 6.252f–253b, incorporating Polemon F13 Preller) and, perhaps, with
Thessaly (Plut. Demetr. 27). As to the last, Plutarch asserts that the memorable soap
tale he prefers to set in Athens was also told of Thessaly. Was this in fact the tale’s
usual home, with Plutarch transferring it to Athens for the sake of coherence? Or did
240
How to marry a courtesan in the Macedonian courts
the tale rather become associated with Thessaly because so many of the royal
Macedonian courtesans – actual or alleged – hailed from Thessaly?
65 As helpfully and perceptively concluded by Wheatley 2003, 34.
66 Plut. Demetr. 24 and 26 (incorporating Philippides F25 K-A).
67 Clem. Protr. 4.48.
68 Burkert 1985, 132–4.
69 Hdt. 1.60 and Ath. Pol. 14, with Gernet 1953, 52, Berve 1967, 545, Boardman
1972, and Connor 1987, 42–3. Phye did then marry, not Peisistratos himself, but his
son Hipparchos: Athen. 13.609cd (incorporating Kleidemos FGrH 323 F15).
70 Athen. 14.614ef (incorporating Phylarchos FGrH 81 F12) and Plut. Demetr. 25.
71 Wheatley 2003, 36 n. 42.
72 D. L. 5.76 (incorporating Favorinus of Arelate F37 Mensching = FHG iii
578 F8).
73 Thus [Dem.] 59.16 and Isaeus 6.64–5; cf. Ogden 1996, 79–81, 83, 141.
74 See, for example, Diogenes Laertius 5.76 (incorporating Favorinus of Arelate
F37 Mensching = FHG iii 578 F8); cf. Ogden 1999, 232 and Wheatley 2003, 31 n. 9,
with further examples of this sort of confusion.
75 Macrobius Saturnalia 1.17.15.
76 Plut. Demetr. 19. Let us not forget that Lamia’s own name in its original form
may easily be read as a reference to the child-devouring monster of that name; cf.
Ogden 1999, 249 and Wheatley 2003, 30–1 (offering ‘Vampire’).
77 Athen. 6.255c and 13.577c; cf. Geyer 1925, 547 and Wehrli 1964, 141–2.
78 The person is mentioned at P.Haunienses 6 lines 1–13. The case was first framed
Megalopolis FGrH 161 F4 and Herakleides Lembos FHG iii 168 F4).
81 Athen. 13.593a (incorporating Nicolaus of Damascus FGrH 90 F90).
82 Athen. 13.607c–f (incorporating Persaios of Kition Sympotika hypomnemata, SVF
and Ferguson 1911, 232–3, 248, 301, Macurdy 1932, 70 and Dow and Edson 1937,
162, Gabbert 1997, 15, Ogden 1999, 178–9 and 232–3 and Carney 2001a, 181–2.
86 Justin 28.1.1–4. The best discussion of Phthia and Chryseis, and of the question
as to whether the two should be identified, is that of Dow and Edson 1937; cf. also
Seibert 1967, 38–9, Will 1979–82, i 360, le Bohec 1981, 35–6 and 1993, 143–9, Ogden
1999, 179–82, Carney 2001a, 190–3; pace Tarn 1924 and 1940, Fine 1934, Walbank
1940, 9, Hammond 1967, 601 and Green 1990, 252 and 795 n. 26, all of whom believe
that Phthia was the mother of Philip V.
87 Tarn 1940, 491 (with reference to Tarn 1909, 265–6) and le Bohec 1981, 39–40
and 44 argue unpersuasively that Justin identifies Philip V’s mother, and that he
identifies her as Phthia. The basis for this is the contention that Justin picks up his
18.1.1–4 reference to Phthia with a reference at 28.3.9, an entire two chapters later, to
the ‘mother’ (matre) of Philip V as a soubriquet.
241
Daniel Ogden
88 Cf. Syncellus 535.19 Dindorf and Etymologicum Magnum s.v. ∆ώσων. For discussion
of some of the difficulties with the Porphyry passage, see Dow and Edson 1937,
150–2 and 161, le Bohec 1981, 36–9 and 1993, 37 and 147 and Ogden 1999, 180.
89 Hom. Il. 1.111, etc.
90 At Hom. Il. 1.113–5 Agamemnon contrasts his war-captive concubine Chryseis
with a wedded wife; cf. Dow and Edson 1937, 154–6; see also Beloch 1912–27, iv.2
138, Tarn 1940, 494–8 and Seibert 1967, 38–9.
91 Cf. Dow and Edson 1937, 153–4 for parallels. Chrysis: Plutarch Demetrius 24.
92 Polyb. 4.5.3, with Walbank 1957–79 ad loc.; cf. Will 1979–82, i 360 and le Bohec
1981, 42.
93 Polyb. 4.2.5, with Walbank 1957–79 ad loc.; cf. Tarn 1924, 21.
94 Porphyry FGrH 260 F3.14, in the German translation of the Armenian offered
by Jacoby: machten ihn zum könig und trauten ihm als gattin ‘die güldene’. und jener tat die söhne,
die <ihm> geboren wurden aus der ‘güldenen’. Nicht ernähren, damit er die herrschaft ohne untreu
dem Philippos aufbewahrte... Etymologicum Magnum s.v. ∆ώσων: ἔγηµε Χρυσηΐδα τὴν µητέρα
Φιλίππου. Plutarch Aemilius Paulus 8: συνοικίσαντες αὐτῷ τὴν µητέρα τοῦ Φιλίππου. Cf.
Syncellus 535.19 Dindorf = 340.23–4 Φίλιππος υἱὸς ∆ηµητρίου...ἐκ Χρυσηΐδος τῆς
αἰχµαλώτου.
95 Livy 40.5–16, 40.20–4 and 40.54–7, Polyb. 23.10–11, Plut. Aem. 8.6–7, Arat. 54.7
and Demetr. 3, Diod. 29.25 and Justin 32.2–3 and Zonaras 9.22.
96 Livy 39.53 and 40.9.2. For further suggestions that Perseus’ birth was inferior to
that of Demetrios, see Polyb. 23.7, Diod. 29.25, Livy 41.23.10 and Ael. VH 12.43.
97 Plut. Arat. 49.2 and 51.2 and Cleom. 16.5, Livy 27.31.3 (supplying the name
Polykrateia), 32.21 and 32.24 and Ael. VH 12.42; cf. Beloch 1901 and 1912–27, iv.2
139–41, Macurdy 1932, 72–3, Dow and Edson 1937, 130, Edson 1935, 191–6,
Walbank 1940, 78, 241, 246–7, Meloni 1953, 10–15, Seibert 1967, 39, Gruen 1974, Will
1979–82, ii 255, Adams 1982, 243–4 and Ogden 1999, 183–7, Carney 2001a, 193–4.
98 Plut. Aem. 8.7 and Arat. 54.3; the allegation that Perseus was supposititious is
referred to also at Livy 40.9.2, and the allegation that his mother was Argive but ἄδοξος
at Ael. VH 12.43.
99 Athen. 13.581a–582c (incorporating Machon F17 Gow), 583e and 585a (quoting
Lynkeus of Samos); cf. Gow 1965, 7–10, Ogden 1999, 220, 227 n.28, and McClure
2003 index s.vv. Gnathaena and Gnathaenion.
100 Polyb. 36.10.3–4; cf. Livy 42.53 (unfortunately corrupt) for Philip, son of
Philip V.
101 Diod. 32.15, Livy Epitome 49, Paus. 7.13.1, Porphyry FGrH 260 F3.19 =
Bibliography
Adams, W. L.
1982 ‘Perseus and the Third Macedonian War’, in W. L. Adams and E. N. Borza
(eds) Philip II, Alexander the Great and the Macedonian Heritage, Washington,
237–56
242
How to marry a courtesan in the Macedonian courts
Badian, E.
1961 ‘Harpalus’, JHS 81, 16–43.
1963 ‘The death of Philip II’, Phoenix 17, 244–50.
Beloch, K.J.
1901 ‘La Madre di Perseo’, Rivista Storica dell’Antichità ns 6.1, 1–8.
1912–27Griechische Geschichte, 2nd ed., 4 vols., 8 parts, Strassburg, Berlin and Leipzig.
Berve, H.
1926 Das Alexanderreich auf prosopographischer Grundlage, 2 vols., (catalogue in
vol. 2), Munich.
1967 Die Tyrannis bei den Griechen, Munich.
Boardman, J.
1972 ‘Herakles, Peisistratos and sons’ Revue Archéologique, 57–72.
Borza, E. N.
1990 In the Shadow of Olympus: The emergence of Macedon, Princeton.
Bosworth, A. B.
1971a ‘The death of Alexander the Great: rumour and propaganda’, CQ 21,
112–36.
1988 Conquest and Empire: The reign of Alexander the Great, Cambridge.
Brosius, M.
1996 Women in Ancient Persia, Oxford.
Brunt, P. A.
1975 ‘Alexander, Barsine and Heracles’, Rivista di filologia e di istruzione classica 103,
22–35.
Buraselis, K.
1982 Das hellenistische Makedonien und die Ägais, Munich.
Burkert, W.
1985 Greek Religion. Archaic and Classical, Oxford (first published in German,
Stuttgart 1977).
Cameron, A.
1990 ‘Two mistresses of Ptolemy Philadelphus’ GRBS 31, 287–311.
Carney, E.
1987a ‘Olympias’, Ancient Society 18, 35–62.
1987b ‘The career of Adea-Eurydice’, Historia 36, 496–502.
1991 ‘ “What’s in a name?” The emergence of a title for royal women in the
Hellenistic period’, in S. B. Pomeroy (ed.) Women’s History and Ancient
History, Chapel Hill, 154–72.
1992 ‘The politics of polygamy’, Historia 41, 169–89.
1993a ‘Foreign influence and the changing role of royal Macedonian women’,
Ancient Macedonia 5, 313–23.
1993b ‘Olympias and the image of the royal virago’, Phoenix 47, 29–56.
2001a Women and Monarchy in Macedonia, Norman.
2001b ‘The trouble with Philip Arrhidaeus’, AHB 15.2, 63–89.
Connor, W. R.
1987 ‘Tribes, festivals and processions; civic ceremonial and political manipulation
in archaic Greece’, JHS 107, 40–50.
Davidson, J. N.
1997 Courtesans and Fishcakes: The consuming passions in Classical Athens, London.
243
Daniel Ogden
Dodds, E. R.
1959 Plato Gorgias edited with an introduction and commentary, Oxford.
Dow, S., and Edson, C. F.
1937 ‘Chryseis’, HSCP 48, 127–80.
Edson, C. F.
1935 ‘Perseus and Demetrius’, HSCP 46, 191–202.
Ellis, W. M.
1994 Ptolemy of Egypt, London.
Ferguson, W. S.
1911 Hellenistic Athens, Oxford.
Fine, J. V. A.
1934 ‘The mother of Philip V of Macedon’, CQ 28, 99–104.
Flower, M. A.
1997 Theopompus of Chios, Oxford.
French, V. and Dixon, P.
1986a ‘The Pixodaros affair: another view’, AncW 13, 73–86.
1986b ‘The source traditions for the Pixodaros affair’, AncW 14, 25–40.
Gabbert, J. J.
1997 Antigonus Gonatas. A political biography, London.
Gernet, L.
1953 ‘Mariages des tyrans’, in Eventail de l’histoire vivante, Homage à L. Febvre ii,
Paris, 41–53. Reprinted in L. Gernet, Anthropologie de la Grèce antique, Paris
1968, 344–59.
Geyer, F.
1925 ‘Lamia 5’, RE xii, 546–7.
Gow, A. S. F.
1965 Machon, Cambridge.
Green, P.
1990 Alexander to Actium: The Hellenistic age, London.
Greenwalt, W. S.
1984 ‘The search for Arrhidaeus’, AncW 10, 69–77.
1989 ‘Polygamy and succession in Argead Macedonia’, Arethusa 22.1, 19–45.
Gruen, E.
1974 ‘The last years of Philip V’, GRBS 15, 21–46.
Hamilton, J. R.
1969 Plutarch, Alexander: A commentary, Oxford.
Hammond, N. G. L.
1967 Epirus, Oxford.
1983 Three Historians of Alexander the Great: The so-called vulgate authors, Diodorus,
Justin and Curtius, Cambridge.
1994 Philip of Macedon, Baltimore.
Hammond, N. G. L. and Griffith, G. T.
1979 A History of Macedon, vol. II, Oxford.
Hatzopoulos, M. B.
1982 ‘A reconsideration of the Pixodarus affair’, Studies in the History of Art 10,
Washington DC, 59–66.
244
How to marry a courtesan in the Macedonian courts
Heckel, W.
1981b ‘Philip and Olympias 337/6 BC ’, in G. S. Shrimpton et al. (eds) Classical
Contributions. Studies in honour of M. F. McGregor, Locust Valley, NY, 251–7.
1992 The Marshals of Alexander’s Empire, London.
2006 Who’s Who in the Age of Alexander the Great, Oxford.
Jaschinksi, S.
1981 Alexander und Griechenland unter dem Eindruck der Flucht des Harpalos, Bonn.
Kosmetatou, E.
2004 ‘Bilistiche and the quasi-institutional status of Ptolemaic royal mistress’,
AfP 50, 18–36.
le Bohec, S.
1981 ‘Phthia, mère de Philippe V: examen critique des sources’, REG 94, 34–46.
1993 Antigone Dosone roi de Macédoine, Nancy.
Lloyd-Jones, H.
1966 Review of Snell 1964, Gnomon 38, 12–17.
McClure, L. K.
2003 Courtesans at Table. Gender and Greek literary culture in Athenaeus, London.
Macurdy, G. H.
1932 Hellenistic Queens, Baltimore.
Meloni, P.
1953 Perseo e la fine della monarchia Macedone, Rome.
O’Brien, J. M.
1992 Alexander the Great: The invisible enemy, London.
Ogden, D.
1996 Greek Bastardy in the Classical and Hellenistic Periods, Oxford.
1998 ‘What was in Pandora’s box?’ in N. Fisher and H. Van Wees (eds) Archaic
Greece. New approaches and new evidence, London and Swansea, 213–30.
1999 Prostitutes, Polygamy and Death: The Hellenistic dynasties, London and Swansea.
2001 Greek and Roman Necromancy, Princeton.
2007a ‘Two studies in the reception and representation of Alexander’s sexuality’,
in W. Heckel, L. Tritle and P. Wheatley (eds) Alexander’s Empire: Formulation
to decay. Claremont, CA, 75–108.
2007b ‘A war of witches at the court of Philip II?’, Ancient Macedonia 7, 357–69.
2008 ‘Bilistiche and the prominence of courtesans in the Ptolemaic tradition’, in
P. McKechnie and P. Guillaume (eds) Ptolemy Philadelphus and His World,
Leiden, 353–85.
2009 ‘Courtesans and the sacred in the early Hellenistic courts’ in T. S. Scheer
and M. Lindner (eds) Tempelprostitution im Altertum. Fakten und Fiktionen,
Oikumene 6, Berlin, 344–76.
Peremans, W. and Van’t Dack, E.
1950–81 Prosopographia Ptolemaica, 9 vols., Louvain.
Prestianni Giallombardo, A.-M.
1976/7 ‘Diritto matrimoniale, ereditario e dinastico nella Macedonia di Filippo II’,
Rivista Storica dell’Antichità 6–7, 81–110.
Reames-Zimmermann, J.
1999 ‘An atypical affair? Alexander the Great, Hephaistion Amyntoros and the
nature of their relationship’, AHB 13, 81–96.
245
Daniel Ogden
Reinsberg, C.
1993 Ehe, Hetärentum und Knabenliebe im antiken Griechenland, Munich.
Scholl, A.
1994 ‘Πολυτάλαντα µνηµεῖα. Zur literarischen und monumentale Überlieferung
aufwendiger Grabmäler im spätklassischen Athen’, Jahrbuch des deutschen
archäologischen Instituts 109, 239–71.
Seibert, J.
1967 Historische Beitrage zu den dynastischen Verbindungen in hellenistischer Zeit, Historia
Einzelschriften 10, Wiesbaden.
Snell, B.
1964 Scenes from Greek Drama, Berkeley.
Sutton, D. F.
1980a ‘Harpalus as Pallides’, Rheinisches Museum 123, 96.
1980b The Greek Satyr-Play, Meisenheim am Glan.
Tarn, W. W.
1909 ‘The battles of Andros and Cos’, JHS 29, 264–85.
1913 Antigonos Gonatas, Oxford.
1924 ‘Philip V and Phthia’, CQ 18, 17–23.
1940 ‘Phthia-Chryseis’, HSCP supplement vol. 1, Ferguson, W.S., hon. 483–501.
1948 Alexander the Great, 2 vols, Cambridge.
Travlos, J.
1988 Bildlexikon zur Topographie des antiken Attika, Tübingen.
Tronson, A.
1984 ‘Satyrus, the Peripatetic and the marriages of Philip II’, JHS 104, 116–26.
Walbank, F. W.
1940 Philip V of Macedon, Cambridge.
1957–79 A Historical Commentary on Polybius, 3 vols, Oxford.
Wehrli, C.
1964 ‘Phila, fille d’Antipater et épouse de Demetrius, roi des Macédoniens’
Historia 13, 140–6.
Wheatley, P.
2003 ‘Lamia and the Besieger: an Athenian hetaera and a Macedonian king’, in
O. Palagia and S. V. Tracy (eds) The Macedonians in Athens 322–229 BC,
Oxford, 30–6.
Whitehorne, J.
1994 Cleopatras, London.
Will, E.
1979–82 Histoire politique du monde hellénistique. 2nd ed., 2 vols, Nancy.
Worthington, I.
1986 ‘The chronology of the Harpalus affair’, Symbolae Osloenses 61, 63–76.
246
12
2. Berenike in Cyrene
This investigation has its roots in a well-known piece of poetry, the wryly
imaginative biography of Berenike’s lock of hair by Callimachus, the Coma
Berenices. The methodological approach adopted here, however, is concerned
with the historical Berenike’s biography and is essentially grounded in
historical questions about Ptolemaic self-perception and self-promotion. It
is necessary, therefore, to clarify the early events of the queen’s life, prior
to the period of the lock’s adventures, since they play a formative role in
her subsequent career management. Taking into account the events in the
young Berenike’s life which led up to the Egyptian marriage, a picture
emerges of a desperately unstable family relationship (or dynamic) which,
in turn, produced tensions at court and, as a consequence, a conflicted
247
Lloyd Llewellyn-Jones and Stephanie Winder
248
A key to Berenike’s lock?
249
Lloyd Llewellyn-Jones and Stephanie Winder
marriage. The parthenos state was perilous for any normal girl, but it was
especially so when the girl happened to be the ruler of a nation which was
also in a similar state of limbo.
The political turmoil of Cyrenaica highlights Berenike’s single-minded
policy, but it cannot account for the length of time she remained unwed.
The glaring question, then, is why didn’t prince Ptolemy come to his
betrothed’s rescue, marry her and release her from her parthenos state, fulfil
his father’s wishes, and secure Egypt’s hold over North Africa? The answer
would appear to lie in an emerging Ptolemaic royal practice whereby a king
took a wife only upon his accession to the throne, that is to say, in this
case, not until Ptolemy Philadelphos was dead. In the late nineteenth
century, Mahaffy perceptively observed that, ‘it was not the practice of
Ptolemaic crown princes to get married before they ascended the throne...
though the reigning Ptolemies marry as soon as possible’.9 It should be
emphasized, however, that this is not a Pharaonic tradition per se, but an
innovation enthusiastically practised by every Ptolemy, with the exception
of the rulers of the last generation of the royal house. For instance, while
Ptolemy Philadelphos did have a wife, Arsinoe I (the mother of all his
known children), he repudiated her in favour of his own sister, Arsinoe II,
whom he married, in imitation of a incompletely understood Pharaonic
tradition,10 around 276 BC, approximately seven years after becoming king.
Ogden suggests that Arsinoe I was not so much repudiated as ‘retired’.11
If this is so, and the demotic evidence for this is good, argues Ogden,
Philadelphos’ decision to marry his own sister was used to create a new
authorized line of heirs; effectively, his reign might be said to start afresh
with his marriage to Arsinoe II. Ptolemy III did indeed honour the
betrothal and follow his father’s practice by marrying as soon as he had
taken the double crown (246 BC).
250
A key to Berenike’s lock?
251
Lloyd Llewellyn-Jones and Stephanie Winder
252
A key to Berenike’s lock?
253
Lloyd Llewellyn-Jones and Stephanie Winder
254
A key to Berenike’s lock?
Isis for Egyptian ones.28 But this does an injustice to (and certainly
underplays) Berenike’s acumen and individuality in developing an image
that draws on, yet stands apart from, that of Arsinoe II. It is Callimachus’
poem, the Coma Berenices, which points the way to understanding Berenike’s
innovations. In her study of the romantic dynamics of this poem, Gutzwiller
has convincingly advanced the notion that while all three early Ptolemaic
queens either promote or benefit from an identification with Aphrodite,
the reasons for doing so are varied:
while the Soteres had emphasized the legitimacy of children born to loving
spouses and the Philadelphoi had emphasized the bond of affection
between siblings, the third dynastic couple chose to stress the passionate
attraction of the young bride and groom.29
255
Lloyd Llewellyn-Jones and Stephanie Winder
5. Hathor
Of the many goddesses in the Egyptian pantheon, Hathor is one of the
most easily recognizable, and yet mysterious, of deities.33 Hathor existed for
the entire history of Egyptian culture as a powerful and influential goddess.
She is the daughter of Re, the sun god, and is often seen as the eye of the
god. As the great cosmic goddess she is ‘the mother of her father’ and ‘the
daughter of her son’.34 She is one goddess and many goddesses, and was
representative of all goddesses. Thus, she can be Hathor-Isis, Hathor-Mut,
Hathor-Nekhbet, and so on. Iconographically, the goddess is usually
represented as a beautiful woman, or as a cow-headed woman, or in purely
bovine form, wearing a headdress of the sun-disk surmounted between
two elongated cow-horns. In Egyptian, she is called Hwt-Hr, which is
usually translated as ‘House of Horus’, referring to the elder Horus. In
hieroglyphs, her name is represented as a large enclosure with a falcon
within. From this, it is to be surmised that Hathor is seen as the great sky
itself, holding Horus within her womb, which is poetically referred
to as ‘house’. In this form, Hathor is both a solar sky-goddess and a
personification of the night-time sky too. Selden has stressed the Ptolemies’
close affiliation with Horus, who represents the living king.35 In fact, in the
temple of Philae the identification is made categorically: ‘The king of Upper
and Lower Egypt, Ptolemy – He is Horus.’ 36 Hathor, therefore, is the
protectress of the living king.
But she is more, as a hymn from Denderah makes plain:
The One, the sister without equal,
The most beautiful of all,
She resembles the rising morning star,
At the beginning of a happy year.
Shining bright, fair of skin,
Lovely the look of her eyes,
Sweet the speech of her lips...
True lapis-lazuli her hair,
Her arms surpassing gold...37
256
A key to Berenike’s lock?
6. Berenike-Hathor
There is in fact abundant evidence, as yet unnoticed, for Berenike’s
identification with Hathor. The queen’s titles alone demonstrate this aptly.
Berenike’s titulary is found at Philae, Dakka, Edfu, Karnak and in the
famous Canopic Decree; it is elaborate if somewhat repetitive. The fullest
and most dramatic titulature is found on the base of a now-missing statue
in Cairo. It reads:
The Female Horus, daughter of the ruler, made [out] of the ruler, ornament
of Khnum, she who ascends up to the sublime and beautiful Goddesses, the
heiress of the two lands, the female Wazir, daughter of Thoth, Great of Power,
Protectress of the miserable which are given to her, the mistress [i.e. Two
Ladies] of all lands [lit. the rekhty-people], Her bravery and her strength is
that of Neith, mistress of Sais, her excellence is that of Bastet, Mut, and
Hathor in her beauty of the w3hy [Festival]-forecourt. Mistress of the Two
Lands, Berenike, sister-wife of the son of Re, Ptolemy, the Beneficent Gods.40
Here, the identification with Hathor as a distinct entity is promoted, even
though she is linked to other goddesses too. In an inscription from Philae,
however, Berenike is likened to Hathor alone, ‘in her great love’.41 It is
important to realize that these titles which directly connect Berenike to
Hathor are not made for any other Ptolemaic queen – even though the
Philae title was later appropriated for Arsinoe III. It is particularly
surprising, given the repetitive nature of royal female titles, that even in
Arsinoe II’s rich panoply of titulature, there are no Hathoric connections.
257
Lloyd Llewellyn-Jones and Stephanie Winder
Fig. 3. Ptolemy III and Berenike II (first couple facing left on the left hand side),
followed by Thoth, Seshat, Ptolemy II, Arsinoe II, Ptolemy I and Berenike I face a
procession of gods. Carved relief from the lunette of the Kom el-Hisn Stela, containing
the Canopic Decree. Redrawn from Bianchi 1989 by Lloyd Llewellyn-Jones.
Iconography stresses the relationship too: the carved relief on the Kom
el-Hisn Stela (Fig. 3), which heads the Canopic Decree of 238 BC, shows
Ptolemy III and Berenike II in the company of a number of gods, including
the first two generations of the royal dynasty.42 The king stands opposite
the personification of the third Egyptian nome, whose principal deity was
Hathor, while Berenike balances the composition and stands behind her
husband in exactly the same place occupied by Hathor in the opposite line-
up. It should also be noted that Berenike is the only queen to wear the šwty
plumes, horns and sun disk of Hathor.
In 237 BC, Ptolemy III began the construction of the temple of Horus
at Edfu. A relief in Chapel 9 (Fig. 4) shows him offering to Horus, Hathor
Fig. 4. Ptolemy IV (or possibly VI) offers to a line of gods and deified monarchs:
Horus, Hathor, Harpokrates, Ptolemy I, Berenike I, Ptolemy II, Arsinoe II; Ptolemy
III and Berenike II bring up the rear of the procession. Edfu temple, chapel 9.
Redrawn from Baum 2007 by Lloyd Llewellyn-Jones.
258
A key to Berenike’s lock?
and Harpokrates (the youthful aspect of Horus), together with his royal
forebears and images of himself and his queen, and once more shows
Berenike in the Hathor headdress. While the relief carvings on the chapels
surrounding the naos of Horus date predominantly to the reign of Ptolemy
IV, nonetheless his divine parents figure prominently on the decorative
scheme. Ptolemy III and Berenike II are depicted in the sanctuary,
passageways, the hall of offerings, the west staircase, and the hypostyle.
They are particularly honoured by being depicted in the pronaos and on the
east face of the naos itself.43
Images of Berenike on Ptolemy’s most notable freestanding structure,
the Euergetes Gate at Karnak, also show her wearing the headdress of
Hathor (Fig. 5; Fig. 6). In one scene (Fig. 7), Berenike offers lotus garlands,
while Ptolemy gives nu jars, to a seated Khonsu accompanied by Het Heret,
an aspect of Hathor specifically referring to her role as a sky or astral
goddess associated with fertility and bounty. Married women would go to
the temples of Het Heret for fertility rites that would hopefully lead to a
successful pregnancy. Hathor receives particular honours on the Euergetes
Gate, appearing more times than any other goddess and frequently bearing
Fig. 5. Ptolemy III and Berenike II receive their royal titles and symbols of perpetual
rule, all carefully recorded by the god Khonsu. The pharaoh wears the double crown
while the queen wears the distinctive Hathor headdress of sun disk, horns, and plumes.
Relief from the Euergetes Gate, temple of Karnak. Photograph: Lloyd Llewellyn-
Jones.
259
Lloyd Llewellyn-Jones and Stephanie Winder
Fig. 7. Ptolemy gives nu jars and Berenike II offers lotus garlands to the god Khonsu,
accompanied behind the throne by Het Heret, a fertility aspect of Hathor. Relief from
the Euergetes Gate, temple of Karnak. Photograph: Lloyd Llewellyn-Jones.
Fig. 6. Berenike II (face mutilated probably in the early Christian period) wears the
distinctive crown of the goddess Hathor. Detail of a relief from the Euergetes Gate,
temple of Karnak. Photograph: Lloyd Llewellyn-Jones.
260
A key to Berenike’s lock?
the epithet (wrt) Hrt-ib bnbn ‘(great one) who resides at the benben’. Her role
is that of consort of the god, a fact which again makes her connection to
Berenike important. Even in the early years of Ptolemy IV’s reign, Berenike
continues to be linked with Hathor. An opaque red and turquoise glass
foundation plaque has been found in the Hathor temple at Cusae, written
in cursive hieroglyphs and Greek uncials.44 Here Ptolemy IV records cult
honours given to his royal parents as well as to ‘Hathor who is in Heaven’.
It is clear that in the Egyptian cultural vocabulary, throughout the reign of
Ptolemy III and beyond, Berenike is assimilated to the royal fertility
goddess Hathor. But can this Hathoric imagery translate into the Greek
cultural sphere? It is useful to remember that there is no specific Greek
equivalent for Hathor. Since the Hathoric element is so important to
Berenike’s Egyptian-style self-promotion, and since it is the one aspect
which is unique to her amongst the Ptolemaic women, it is reasonable to
conclude that it was within an Egyptian frame of reference that she found
her image first, and then attempted to construct it into a Greek framework,
and not vice versa.
Thus, as Lady of Byblos,45 Hathor was seen by her Egyptian adorants as
the mistress of their empire in Asia, an image which Berenike herself would
have been keen to appropriate, especially as she made the sea voyage north
by ship to join her husband in his reclamation of Antioch and other
Seleucid territories. Was she not Hathor journeying to her Horus, in the
mode of the annual Festival of the Beautiful Embrace, celebrated at Edfu?
This important ritual was a spectacular celebration of the god’s love for
his goddess when Hathor was taken by ship from her temple at Denderah
down the Nile to reside with him for two weeks at his home in Edfu.46 For
his part, Horus came part way up the Nile to greet his consort and escort
her back to his temple. The citizens of Edfu and devotees of Hathor who
travelled from far afield to commemorate the great reunion celebrated with
feasting and music, but there was another purpose to the ritual: on the
second day of the feast there was a change of emphasis as statues of the
two gods were carried across the desert to the site of Behdet, the sacred
burial ground of the primeval gods of Edfu. Here priests enacted a
prophylactic ritual in which wax hippopotami and fish, inscribed with the
names of the king’s enemies, were symbolically destroyed.47 So the purpose
of the Festival was two-fold: to celebrate the sexual reunion of the gods and
therefore stimulate Egypt’s fertility, and the power of that sexual union
manifested in crushing and dissolving the nation’s enemies.
Ptolemy’s building of the Edfu temple can be viewed partly as a
commemoration of that important event when Berenike travelled to Syria
for a reunion with her husband at the moment was Ptolemy was engaged
261
Lloyd Llewellyn-Jones and Stephanie Winder
262
A key to Berenike’s lock?
that she brought the Egyptian elements to the forefront, cutting off a long
spiral of hair which would have framed her face and offering that as her
dedication.
263
Lloyd Llewellyn-Jones and Stephanie Winder
Acknowledgements
The authors are grateful to the Carnegie trust of Scotland for their support
in providing funding for a research trip to Egypt to study primary artefacts
in Alexandria, Cairo, and Luxor. The authors are also grateful to Andrew
Erskine for his patience and perseverance.
This chapter is dedicated to the memory of our Egyptian friend and
brother Eltaher Marey – known to all as Refaat – who died unexpectedly
and before his time in 2009.
Notes
1 Throughout, Berenike II, the wife and queen of Ptolemy III Euergetes, is referred
provided by Bevan 1927, 74–5, 194–216; Macurdy 1932, 130–6; Ogden 1999, 80–1,
127–32 and Hölbl 2001, 45–51, 105.
3 Justin 26.3.2. See also Hölbl 2001, 45.
4 See Porphyry FGrH 260 F43 (= Jerome In Danielum 11.6a). This text suggests
of Callimachus’ poem does not survive in the Greek original. It must be conceded
that the political situation in Cyrene throughout this period is difficult to track, and that
any reconstruction is necessarily highly speculative; for the problems of the period
264
A key to Berenike’s lock?
see Laronde 1987, 380–1. Whatever the reality of the situation in Cyrene, the focus
here is on the emergence of Berenike as a political contender in the post-Megas period.
6 Plu. Phil. 1.4; Polyb. 10.22.3. Two legislative reformers, Ekdelos and Demophanes,
reportedly took over the direction of the country to preserve the ‘freedom of Cyrene’.
7 Occasional attempts have been made to argue away this problematic gap in time
by placing the marriage at a date closer to 249 BC (see Criscuolo 2003) but there is
almost no evidence for this.
8 Tarn 1913, 449–51.
9 Mahaffy 1895, 491.
10 The Egyptian use of the word ‘sister’ (snt) to denote several of a range of females
with close family ties, including wife, still poses problems for determining the kinship,
if any, between a Pharaoh and his wife and may well have misled the Ptolemies into
believing that brother-sister marriage was a Pharaonic tradition. For an excellent
overview of the royal practice, with full citations and bibliography see Ager 2005 and
2006.
11 Ogden 1999, 73–80.
12 White 1898, 254–5. She sees the expectation that the Egyptian heir will marry a
the outbreak of the Third Syrian War see West 1985, Hauben 1990, Odgen 1999,
80–1, 127–32 and Hölbl 2001, 48.
16 Callimachus, fr.110 Pf., Hyginus, Astron, 2.24; Schol.Arat. 146.
17 Gutzwiller 1992, 361. See also Gelzer 1982, 13–30; Hauben 1983, 120; Köenen
and Arsinoe II in particular is extensive, but see especially Witt 1971, Thompson 1973,
Heyob 1975, Pomeroy 1984, 28–40, Carney 1991, 219–24 Gutzwiller, 1992.
265
Lloyd Llewellyn-Jones and Stephanie Winder
31 See Hazzard 2000, 115.
32 Selden 1998, 326–51.
33 For a general discussion of the nature of the goddess, see Lesko 1999, 81–129.
For more specific aspects of the goddess, see Allam 1963, Pinch 1993, Roberts 1995.
For a detailed discussion of the multiple manifestations of Egyptian gods, see
especially Hornung 1982.
34 On these titles and others, see Troy 1986, 53–72.
35 Selden 1998 passim. Selden’s excellent collection of Egyptian texts has much
relevance for the Ptolemies’ crosscultural ideological programme. They are eloquent
testimony to the wide range of Egyptian cultural narratives upon which Callimachus
and the Ptolemies drew.
36 See Selden 1998, 387.
37 Roberts 1995, 16.
38 On the sexual aspect of Hathor see Antelme and Rossini 1999.
39 Troy 1986, 53–72, 126–30; Robins 1993, 23–5. For the goddess’s crowns and
headgear, and their relationship to the human queen, see Green 1992.
40 Cairo CG 22186
41 Bernard 1969, I 116.
42 Bianchi 1989, 52.
43 For a thorough examination of the iconography and religious interpretation of
1998.
47 On the ritual see Baum 2007, with figs. 61–9.
48 For hair and wigs in Egyptian culture, see especially Fletcher 1994, Fletcher 1995,
Bibliography
Ager, S.
2005 ‘Familiarity breeds: incest and the Ptolemaic dynasty’, JHS 125, 1–34.
2006 ‘The power of excess: royal incest and the Ptolemaic dynasty’, Anthropologica:
the Journal of the Canadian Anthropology Society 48, 165–86.
Allam, S.
1963 Beiträge zum Hathorkultbis zum Ende des Mittlern Reich, Berlin.
Antelme, R. S. and Rossini, S.
1999 Sacred Sexuality in Ancient Egypt, Rochester.
266
A key to Berenike’s lock?
Ashton, S-A.
2003 The Last Queens of Egypt, Harlow.
Austin, M.
1981 The Hellenistic World from Alexander to the Roman Conquest, Cambridge.
Baum, N.
2007 Le Temple d’Edfou. A la découverte du Grand Siège de Rê-Harakhty, Paris.
Bernard, A.
1969 Les inscriptions grecques de Philae, 2 vols, Paris.
Bevan, E. R.
1902 The House of Seleucus, 2 vols, London.
1927 The House of Ptolemy. A History of Egypt under the Ptolemaic Dynasty, London.
Bianchi, R. S.
1988 Cleopatra’s Egypt. The age of the Ptolemies, Brooklyn.
Bingen J.
2007 Hellenistic Egypt: Monarchy, society, economy, culture, Berkeley.
Carney, E. D.
1991 ‘What’s in a name? The emergence of a title for royal women in the
Hellenistic period’, in S. B. Pomeroy (ed.) Women’s History and Ancient
History, Chapel Hill, 154–72.
1992 ‘The politics of polygyny’, Historia 41, 169–89.
2000 Women and monarchy in Macedonia, Norman.
Criscuolo, L.
2003 ‘Agoni e politica alia corte di Alessandria. Riflessioni su alcuni epigrammi
di Posidippo’, Chiron 33, 311–33.
Davis, N. and Kraay, C. M.
1973 The Hellenistic Kingdoms. Portrait coins and history, London.
Fletcher, J.
1994 ‘A tale of wigs, hair and lice’, Egyptian Archaeology 5, 31–3.
1995 Ancient Egyptian hair: A study in style, form and function, unpublished
PhD thesis, Manchester University.
2005 ‘The decorated body in ancient Egypt: Hairstyles, cosmetics and tattoos’,
in L. Cleland, M. Harlow and L. Llewellyn-Jones (eds) The Clothed Body in
the Ancient World, Oxford, 3–13.
Gelzer, T.
1982 ‘Kallimachos und das Zeremoniell des Ptolemaischen Konigshauses’, in
J. Stagl (ed.) Aspekte der Kultursoziologie. Aufsatze M. Rassem, Berlin, 13–30.
Green, L.
1992 ‘Queen as goddess. The religious role of royal women in the late Eighteenth
Dynasty’, in Amarna Letters. Essays on ancient Egypt, vol.2., 28–41.
Gutzwiller, K.
1992 ‘Callimachus’ Lock of Berenice: fantasy, romance, and propaganda’, AJP 113,
359–85.
Hauben, H.
1983 ‘Arsinoe II et la politique extérieure de l’Egypte’, in E. Van’t Dack et al.
(eds) Egypt and the Hellenistic World, Louvain, 99–127.
1990 ‘L’expédition de Ptolemée III en Orient et la sédition domestique de 235
av. J.-C.’, APF 36, 29–37.
267
Lloyd Llewellyn-Jones and Stephanie Winder
Hazzard, R. A.
2000 Imagination of a Monarchy. Studies in Ptolemaic propaganda, Toronto.
Heyob, S. K.
1975 The Cult of Isis among Women in the Greco-Roman World, Leiden.
Hölbl, G.
2000 A History of the Ptolemaic Empire, London.
Hollis, S. T.
2008 The Ancient Egyptian Tale of Two Brothers, 2nd edn, Oakville.
Hornung, H.
1982 Conceptions of God in Ancient Egypt. The One and the Many, Ithaca.
Köenen, L.
1993 ‘The Ptolemaic king as a religious figure’, in A. W. Bulloch et al. (eds) Images
and Ideologies: Self-definition in the Hellenistic World, Berkeley, 25–115.
Laronde, A.
1987 Cyrène et la Libye hellénistique, Paris
Lesko, B. S.
1999 The Great Goddesses of Egypt, Norman
Lichtheim, M.
1976 Ancient Egyptian Literature: Volume III. The Late Period, Berkeley
Llewellyn-Jones, L.
2003 Aphrodite’s Tortoise: The veiled woman of ancient Greece, Swansea.
Macurdy, G. H.
1932 Hellenistic Queens, Baltimore.
Mahaffy, J. P.
1895 The Empire of the Ptolemies, New York.
Marinone, N.
1984 Berenike, da Callimaco a Catullo, Bologna.
Ogden, D.
1999 Polygamy, Prostitutes and Death. The Hellenistic dynasties, London and Swansea.
Pinch, G.
1993 Votive Offerings to Hathor, Oxford.
Pomeroy, S. B.
1984 Women in Hellenistic Egypt, Detroit.
Posener, G.
1986 ‘La légende de la tresse d’Hathor’, in L. H. Lesko (ed.) Egyptological Studies
in Honor of Richard A. Parker, Hanover, 11–17.
Roberts. A.
1995 Hathor Rising, Trowbridge.
Robins, G.
1993 Women in Ancient Egypt, London.
1999 ‘Hair and the construction of identity in ancient Egypt c. 1480–1350 BC’,
Journal of the American Research Centre in Egypt 36, 55–69.
Rowlandson, J.
1988 Women and Society in Greek and Roman Egypt. A sourcebook, Cambridge.
Scheil, V.
1894 ‘Tombeaux thébains’, Mémoires de la Mission archéologique française du Caire 11,
541–656.
268
A key to Berenike’s lock?
Seibert, J.
1967 Historische Beiträge zu den dynastischen Verbindungen in hellenistischer Zeit, Historia
Einzelschriften 10, Wiesbaden.
Selden, D.
1998 ‘Alibis’, Classical Antiquity 17, 289–420.
Sherwin-White S. and Kuhrt, A.
1993 From Samarkhand to Sardis: A New Approach to the Seleucid Empire, Berkeley.
Stephens, S.
2003 Seeing Double: Intercultural poetics in Ptolemaic Alexandria, Berkeley.
Tarn, W. W.
1913 Antigonas Gonatas, Oxford
Thompson, D. B
1973 Ptolemaic Oinochoai and Portraits in Faience: Aspects of the ruler cult, Oxford.
Troy, L.
1986 Patterns of Queenship in Ancient Egyptian Myth and History, Uppsala.
Walker, S. and Higgs, P. (eds)
2001 Cleopatra of Egypt. From history to myth, London.
Watterson, B.
1998 The House of Horus at Edfu: Ritual in an Egyptian Temple, Stroud.
West, S.
1985 ‘Venus Observed? A note on Callimachus, Fr. 10’, CQ 35, 61–6.
White, R. E.
1898 ‘Women in Ptolemaic Egypt’, JHS 18, 238–66.
Witt, R. E.
1971 Isis in the Graeco-Roman World, London
269
PART V
CHANGING AESTHETICS
13
AGAINST ΛΕΠΤΟΤΗΣ :
RETHINKING HELLENISTIC AESTHETICS
James L. Porter
271
James L. Porter
which was multi-stranded and far more attentive to the material dimensions
of art and art’s experiences than has previously been acknowledged. One
aim of my general approach, then, is corrective. ‘Aesthetics’ as a term and
in its root meanings points us to the sensuous experience of art. The
advantage of adopting a sensualist and non-formalist approach is that it
can help us see how the various realms of ancient art were unified through
the commonalities of experience (and not only vocabularies) which those
arts can be shown to have shared.There will be more to say about such
commonalities below.
So much for the headier concepts. My particular aim in the present
chapter is to begin rethinking the Hellenistic world of aesthetics, in part by
aligning it with the root meaning of the term aisthe-sis (sensation, perception,
feeling) and in part by putting some pressure on what has been taken to be
the period’s hallmark concept, at least in poetry and poetics: leptote-s –
provisionally, ‘refinement’. Hellenistic poetry, I wish to suggest, is frequently
object-oriented, even object-obsessed: it is drawn to things in the material
world, even if at times those things exist only, or ambiguously, in the mind’s
eye. Aesthetic materialism is a natural consequence of such a focus. Given
that this is so, if the Hellenistic poets sought to declare their generational
difference from their classical predecessors, a question to ask is whether
they did so by asserting a new kind of literary aesthetics, one we might call
materialist (though of a particular cast), taking our cue from such object-
oriented poetry as we find in Posidippus, but also in Callimachus and
elsewhere, notably in their neoteric Roman offspring. I believe they did.
But if this is right, then the presumed centrality of leptote-s to Hellenistic
aesthetics will have to have to undergo some closer scrutiny.
Accordingly, towards the end of this chapter I will attempt a brief but
more general recharacterization of Hellenistic literary aesthetics in a way
that takes advantage of this first redescription, only now in a slightly more
heterodox manner, by moving away from the exclusive aesthetics of leptote-
s, or the conjunction of the refined with the poetics of the detail and the
small-scale, which is the usual way of classifying this material – though I
have to confess that the logic of leptote-s is becoming less and less obvious
to me the more I ponder it.2 Consequently, my approach will mark a
revision in the current critical ideology, which unthinkingly, even
cheerfully, labels Hellenistic poetry miniaturist, pointillist, and precious,
with very few exceptions (Gerhard Lohse and Gregory Hutchinson stand
out as the contrarians). But a further bit of background will first be needed
in order to establish the tradition in which the Hellenistic aesthetic, revised
as I wish to see it, deserves to be framed.
One of the more intriguing crossovers among the realms of art in
272
Against λεπτότης: Rethinking Hellenistic aesthetics
antiquity takes place between the language of poetry and the language of
physical objects, large and small alike. Two kinds of issue come into view
here: questions about the thing-like quality of language (its capacity to
mimic material objects, to take on material features, or simply to have a
share in appearances); and questions about size and scale (bigness, as in
monuments, and smallness, as in epigrams, cups, gems, and the like).
Consider the case of poetry and monumental architecture. These enjoy a
close, but still not closely enough examined, relationship in ancient
thought. Poets and literary critics frequently describe literary works as a
kind of monument, and architects repay the complement by describing,
whether through words or stone, what is in essence a kind of visual poetry.
We might call this the la parole et le marbre theme, following Jesper Svenbro’s
seminal and still unsurpassed work of the same title, though his book has
spawned a small industry of scholarship on the theme, one sub-genre of
which is known as ecphrastic ‘speaking objects’, or oggetti parlanti.3 These
connections highlight what Svenbro calls ‘the “materiality” of the poetic
word’. One way of putting this epigraphic tradition is to say that it
conceived of texts as objects inscribed with writing rather than as writing inscribed
on objects. Another way of characterizing this tradition is to say that it was
interested in how monuments sound.
The most obvious extension of the thematics of song and stone after the
archaic and classical periods in Greek literature is to be found in the
Hellenistic epigram, which consciously harks back to the earlier epigraphic
tradition and aestheticizes it anew. As Peter Bing has observed about this
genre, ‘the boundaries between stone and scroll are quite permeable, and
migration across them is easy’, so much so that the distinction between
inscription and quasi-inscription (or pseudo-inscription), that is, between
real and fictional occasion, is impossible to determine.4 Of course, that
boundary was already breached as early as the quasi-inscriptions that are
found in Homer in statements of the form, ‘Somebody will say someday,
“So-and-so once fought here and died”,’ sometimes using the overt
formulas of τόδε σῆµα (‘this grave marker’), and sometimes not.5
But the Hellenistic epigrams are a genre unto themselves, free-floating,
and very like actual burial inscriptions. Real or not, the premise
of the literary epigram is one of a physicality and immediacy that is being
revived whenever the poem is being re-experienced by a reader. In
presenting themselves as inscriptions on monuments, Hellenistic literary
epigrams do not merely evoke materiality: they embody it – inscribe it –
in their very substance. Hellenistic poets were fond of exploiting
these ambiguities. In doing so, they were playing with the materialities of
poetry.
273
James L. Porter
But this was not the only way in which materiality flourished in
Hellenistic poetics, and if anything the recrudescence of the inscriptional
epigram is but a symptom of a larger tendency. In order to bring out this
larger trend and the object-oriented character of Hellenistic aesthetics, its
intense capacity to ‘think through things’, I want to turn now to another,
broader way in which materiality made itself felt in Hellenistic poetry, a
fact that, happily, is slowly dawning on contemporary scholarship – finally,
after a hiatus of several millennia, ever since the Hellenistic era itself. For,
coming into fashion among Hellenistic literary critics of today is – willy-
nilly – an aesthetics of things or objects, what we might call a newfound
aesthetic materialism, which I believe is peculiarly well suited to Hellenistic
poetic production.
There are good and obvious reasons for this refocusing of attention, the
most recent being the discovery and subsequent publication in 2001 of the
poetry book attributed with reasonable certainty to Posidippus of Pella,
the Macedonian epigrammatist and contemporary of Callimachus. It is
astonishing to see the terms aesthetics, objects, and occasionally materiality and
material, cropping up with such frequency in Kathryn Gutzwiller’s recent
collection on Posidippus.6 Within that collection, isolated pages and even
whole chapters deal with inter-arts questions quite intensely across a wide
range of art forms, from literature to sculpture to gem collections. And
then there is the 2003 article by G. O. Hutchinson, inspired by the same
ancient Posidippan collection, entitled, ‘The Catullan corpus, Greek
epigram, and the poetry of objects,’ in addition to other items in a slowly
growing bibliography.7 This new turn bodes well for interdisciplinary
studies in Hellenistic studies, which continue to remain underexploited,
inexplicably for a field so rich in potential, given the then flourishing fields
of literature, philosophy, art, urban design, religion, and sciences of the age
– all the more so since these fields were still in ways pre-disciplinary, or
emergently disciplinary: they fruitfully intersected with one another.
Aesthetics would surely be one way of producing something like a unified
field theory for the Hellenistic era. But, as I said, my interest here is in
detailing a particular tendency of Hellenistic aesthetics: its materialist urges.
The table of contents of Posidippus’ work tells us almost all we need to
know about the object-oriented nature of the criticism it has elicited:
I. Stones(?) (λιθι]κά); II. Omens; III. Dedications (ἀναθεµατικά); IV.
[Epitaphs (ἐπιτύµβια)]; V. The Making of Statues (ἀνδριαντοποιικά); VI.
Equestrian Poems; VII. Shipwrecks; VIII. Cures; IX. Turns (Characters?).8
Prior to this discovery it would have been hard to imagine an entire set of
poems devoted to kinds of stones, even if treatises on stones and minerals
are known to have existed at least since Theophrastus’ On Stones.9 One
274
Against λεπτότης: Rethinking Hellenistic aesthetics
might have thought one would have to wait until the middle of the
twentieth century before one could hit upon a literary fascination with such
simple objects, as in Francis Ponge’s collection Le parti pris des choses (Siding
with Things [1941]), which has its fair share of sensuous accounts of stones
and pebbles. Consider one poem from that collection, ‘The Pebble’, which
begins:
It isn’t easy to define a pebble.
If you’re satisfied with a simple description you can start out by saying that
it’s a form or state of stone halfway between rocks and gravel.
But this already implies a concept of stone that must be validated. So don’t
blame me for going back even further than the flood.10
Of course, Ponge’s prose-poem is hardly concerned with the mere
simplicity of pebbles, and neither is Posidippus’ Lithika, an example of
which is AB 15 (20 G-P):11
It was not a river resounding on its banks, but the head
of a bearded snake that once held this gem,
thickly streaked with white. And the chariot on it
was engraved by the sharp eye of Lynceus,
like the mark on a nail: the chariot is seen incised
but on the surface you could not notice any protrusions.
And that’s why the work causes such a great marvel: how did the pupils
of the engraver’s eyes not suffer as he gazed so intently.12
ιοὐ ποταµ ὸς κελάδων ἐπὶ χείλεσιν, ἀλλὰ δράκοντος
εἶχέ ποτ’ εὐπώγων τόνδε λίθον κεφαλὴ
πυκνὰ φαληριόωντα· τὸ δὲ γλυφὲν ἅρµα κατ’ αὐτ ο ῦ
τοῦθ’ ὑπὸ Λυγκείου βλέµµατος ἐγλύφετο
ψεύδεϊ χειρὸς ὅµοιον· ἀποπλασθὲν γὰρ ὁρᾶται 5
ἅρµα, κατὰ πλάτεος δ’ οὐκ ἂν ἴδοις προβόλους·
ἧι καὶ θαῦµα πέλει µόχθου µέγα, πῶς ὁ λιθουργὸς
τὰς ἀτενιζούσας οὐκ ἐµόγησε κόρας.
We will revisit this poem later on. For now, I simply want to get back to
my original point about the critical turns I mentioned, the turns to both
aesthetics and a newfound materialism. Thinking in things, the rediscovery
of matter and experience, and the aesthetic turn, are all long overdue within
classical studies, and I believe they can help to illuminate neglected aspects
of ancient ways of thinking about art and poetry. Of course, if we go this
route we will have to ignore the usual suspects, such as Plato and Aristotle,
who are decidedly formalist and not materialist in their leanings, and who
have colored (if not altogether distorted) all subsequent perspectives on the
ancient attainments. But then, what could be more characteristically
Hellenistic than this inversion of the classical canon?
275
James L. Porter
My goals in this chapter are two. First, I hope to take a few tentative
steps towards synthesizing a view of Hellenistic materialism in art and
aesthetics, focusing for the most part on poetry and poetics. Towards the
end of this chapter, I will attempt a brief but more general re-
characterization of Hellenistic literary aesthetics by moving away from the
exclusive aesthetics of leptote-s. Such a move will mark a revision of the
current ideology, which almost unthinkingly labels Hellenistic poetry
miniaturist, pointillist, and precious. Just when this tendency first came
into currency would be a problem worth investigating. But we can be
certain of one thing: it is of relatively recent date. One possibility points to
1960 and 1964, the dates of Walter Wimmel’s Kallimachos in Rom and of
Wendell Clausen’s essay, ‘Callimachus and Latin poetry,’ respectively.13
Another is the insertion of the phrase αἱ κατὰ λεπτόν into the reading of the
papyrus preserving Callimachus’ prologue to the Aitia (fr. 1.11 Pfeiffer),
which appeared to make leptote-s the explicit programmatic core of
Callimachus’ great self-reflexive work from his ripest years. The reading
was shockingly invalidated by Bastianini in 1996, as it will be again in
Lehnus’ forthcoming edition of Callimachus, which reads α. ἱ...αλ(αι) [
(Lehnus speculates that the line may in fact have contrasted two kinds of
largeness, i.e., reading αἱ µεγάλαι).14 The source of the error was a creative
supplement by Rostagni from 1928. Rostagni never laid eyes on the
papyrus, but he found the conjecture aesthetically attractive, and his
solution won immediate acceptance.15 Wilamowitz and his pupils,
especially Reitzenstein and later Pfeiffer, and Couat in France, doubtless
paved the way, very likely on the coat-tails of eighteenth-century views
(especially those of C. G. Heyne), which in turn were filtering later Roman
but not necessarily Hellenistic views about the Callimachean aesthetic.16
As it turns out, a more reliable guide to Hellenistic aesthetics may be found
in that period’s greatest historian, J. G. Droysen, who coined the term
Hellenismus in connection with the Alexandrian empire in all its vastness.
Unfortunately, Droysen is not remembered for the implicit aesthetics of his
history, though he ought to be, even if he did not have much to offer in the
way of explicit commentary on the aesthetic production of the age. We
will want to come back to him below.
My point of departure will instead be another branch of Hellenistic
aesthetic materialism, namely the best attested but also the most radical
exponents of Hellenistic literary criticism, the euphonist critics known
somewhat mysteriously from Philodemus as οἱ ὀνοµαζόµενοι κριτικοί, ‘those
who are called “critics”.’ 17 I say mysteriously, because that is how they are
introduced at one point, and there is a question whether they called
themselves kritikoi or not (that is, whether Philodemus dubbed them with
276
Against λεπτότης: Rethinking Hellenistic aesthetics
this label as a convenience) – and if so, why they did so, and in any case
what the etiquette means. But also, there is the very strange fact that we
know about them in this capacity only from Philodemus.
Why this should be so is unclear. Euphonism – the exclusive attention
to the sound patterns of texts at the expense of their meaning – lives on in
critics of the Roman era (Dionysius of Halicarnassus and Longinus both
know this approach, as do Cicero, Quintilian, Plutarch, and others), and it
is also a staple of much mainstream criticism after Aristotle.18 What is more,
the theory and practice of euphonism have a heritage that reaches back
into the earlier musical tradition, then into the classical era with its strong
oral component and (what is less well documented) its own tradition of
poetic sunthesis, and finally back to Pindar and Lasos.19 This long tradition,
stretching across prose and poetic authors and grouped around the imagery
of monuments, whether sculptural or architectural (ancient critics think of
poems or paragraphs as sound sculptures or as exhibiting a verbal
architecture), is a tradition that exploits the ambiguities of ‘la parole et le
marbre,’ or what may also be referred to as ‘sublime monuments’. I might
add that monuments need not be whole or complete in order to evoke
sublimity. And though I know of no one who has noted this before, we can
be quite certain that the Hellenistic euphonists were aware of this
continuity, which I believe they advertised through the metaphors,
analogies, and images in which the theory is couched and through which
significant aspects of that theory are conveyed. (One of the later preserved
mentions, and utilizations, of Lasos in fact comes from a Philodemean
context).20
Let me venture a first thesis, which I won’t argue for now: in this
tradition of criticism, euphony stands not for the proposition that all poetry
is reducible to the way it sounds, as it is commonly imagined to do, but
rather for the fact that poetry cannot be grasped unless it is appreciated as
it is sensed and experienced, which is to say, as a felt phenomenon. ‘Euphony’ –
εὐφωνία – stands for a kind of sensualism in art. In a way, the euphonists
merely crystallize a tendency of all Greek literature, its aesthetic capacities
as heard, whenever it is spoken or read aloud, which is almost always was.
And though the language of the euphonists is philosophically tinged, it
refuses to slot into ready-made schools and labels, despite the widespread
myth that they were Stoics.21
2. Sound sculpture
A restored text from Philodemus’ On Poems (square brackets indicating
restorations) will serve as a good entrée to the later euphonists’ theory, as it
happens to act like a billboard for their views:
277
James L. Porter
The language is indeed idiosyncratic. Let’s try to translate it back into plain
English.
What Philodemus is saying, or rather restating, is nothing less than the
significant core of the euphonist poetic program. The value of poetry for
these critics lies not in what poetry means but in the way it sounds – its
‘musicality’: they are euphonists, but with a vengeance. Poems on this way
of thinking are aggregates of sound – whence their favored term, sunthesis,
which has to be taken literally: it stands for a sunthesis of the stoicheia, the
elements or letter-sounds that make up, like building blocks, the sullabai
(syllables) of the lexeis or words (or, at times, rhythmical ‘times’ or
‘durations’, chronoi). Poems so conceived are indeed no more than sound-
effects arising (in their own striking terms) ‘epiphenomenally’ or ‘on the
surface’ of poetic compositions,23 thanks to the technical artistry (the technê
or exergasia) of the poet, while the sounds are themselves ephemeral and,
logically, specific to each audition (or reading): that is what is meant by
being idion. In this way, these critics, unconventional by any standard, arrive
at a theory about what might be called the absolutism of the poetic particular.
A poem’s specificity, which is elusively of the moment and punctual, is
grounded in its material coordinates: this sound here.
Now, at stake in the present passage is nothing less than the value of
the idion, which displaces the semantic aspects of poems (meaning, moral
effects, but also a poem’s generic classification): these are sacrificed to the
poem’s material surfaces and to the way these appear to an auditor (whence
ἐπιφαινοµένη), which is to say, to their acoustic appearance (their sound).
The sole preoccupation of poets, according to these euphonist critics, lies,
accordingly, in what is idion to their poetic productions, not in what is
common to all other poems or what can be found ‘outside’ their art –
whence the phrase we find elsewhere in their teachings, ἔξω τῆς τέχνης.24
This is their aesthetic matter – their kath’ hauto, as they put it, in a conscious
inversion of Aristotle, who located the poetic essence in the poetic form:
the euphonists locate poetic essence in matter (this is their καθ’ αὑτό) and in
sensation and appearance (αἴσθησις).25 Poetic idia, on this materialist and
phenomenalist view, are deeply a part of the poetic ‘matter,’ the true ὕλη:26
278
Against λεπτότης: Rethinking Hellenistic aesthetics
they are phenomena peculiar to their embedded context in a poem
analyzed as a collection of sounds. In the sample from Posidippus quoted
above, these would include a range of effects, from word-order to the role
of pitches and accents to rhythms and meters, none of which would occur
‘naturally’ in Greek prose, nor would they occur identically – that is, as a
koinon – in any other poem either (except through quotation or plagiarism).
The various meanings that the sounds can be said to express (or can be said
to reduce to) could, however, be found in any number of settings, from
mineralogical handbooks to art catalogues to the simple gushing of a naïve
onlooker, as the last verse implies: ‘How did its sculptor not blur his
eyesight on the job!’ 27 Hence, meaning is not idion: it is not rooted in the
particular contingencies of this matter here at this moment of audition.
It is common (koinon).
In an immediately preceding column from Philodemus, the idion is
claimed to reside not in the production of likenesses (for these are
common, koinon, just by virtue of being ‘alike’, e.g., to painters and
sculptors), but rather in the actual carving in metal and stone, which is
specific to an instance of a given art (here, plastic art).28 The opponent
committed a fallacy, Philodemus claims:
because, as I said, he adduced crafts that are different but have their goal in
common. For just as it is not the peculiar function (idion)29 of the ring
engraver to make a likeness – for this is common to the sculptor and painter
– but [to make a likeness] in iron and gem stones through engraving (διὰ τῆς
ἐγ[γ]λυφῆς), though the good does not lie in this [sc., in the engraving qua
engraving] but in making a similarity, which is common to all, in like manner
it is claimed that the poet [wants] his peculiar function (idion) [to lie] in the
composition (sunthesis) [sc., of the sounds],30 but hunts out the good in the
common sphere, in meaning and diction – a good which this <critic> says
does simply no [moral] benefit or harm at all, just as he concluded from his
examples, but not the opposite; therefore, poets ( he claims) derive what is
common from others [and make it their own (idion) their by adding their
own suntheseis].31
The analogies in this text make the same point as in its sequel, only now in
a graphic way: if you fashion an image of a chariot in a gemstone and then
reproduce the same image in bronze or paint, you will have produced
something in common, a koinon; but what you will have lost in the
translation is precisely the idion, the specific effect of the materiality of the
likeness in this or that medium.32 For the same reason, the most obvious
thing that gets lost in translation from one language to another is the sound
of the original. The euphonists are making just this point. Only, they are
doing so in an especially emphatic way. For the truly radical thrust of their
279
James L. Porter
280
Against λεπτότης: Rethinking Hellenistic aesthetics
The verb διαµένουσιν above has an echo in the passage quoted earlier,
which I doubt is accidental: ‘and it stands as [engraved] in [stone] (ὡς ἐν.
[στήλ]ηι µέ[ν]ε.ι) for all the kritikoi.’ The opinions of the euphonists stand as
if written on stone (if the conjecture is right). Did they initiate, or at least
suggest, the metaphor themselves? Even if they did not, and Philodemus
was merely mocking them with the image, there would still be more to say
about their possible connection to the epigraphical tradition. A kind
of verbal architecture is in play here on either possibility, whereby
composition is felt to create sublime (verbal) monuments. Thus, Dionysius
of Halicarnassus can describe how builders pay ‘close attention to
the following three questions’: what materials (ὑλήν) will be put together
(συντίθησι);36 ‘next how each of the materials should be fitted ’ (πῶς τῶν
ἁρµοζοµένων ἕκαστον ἑδράσαι), whether ‘stones, timber, tiling, or all the rest ’; ‘and
thirdly, if anything is seated badly (εἴ τι δύσεδρόν ἐστιν), how that very piece
can be pared down and trimmed and made to fit well (εὔεδρον ποιῆσαι).’ And
so ‘those who are going to put the parts of speech together effectively (εὖ
συνθήσειν τὰ τοῦ λόγου µόρια) should proceed in a similar way.’ 37 The author
of On Style, probably Hellenistic in date,38 likewise develops the same
analogies:
The members (τὰ κῶλα) in a periodic style may, in fact, be compared to the
stones (τοῖς λίθοις) which support (ἀντερείδουσι) and hold together
(συνέχουσι) a vaulted roof (τὰς περιφερεῖς στέγας). The members of the
disconnected style resemble stones which are simply flung carelessly together
(διερριµµένοις λίθοις) and not built into a structure (οὐ συγκειµένοις).
Consequently the older style of writing has something of the sharp, clean
lines (περιεξεσµένον ἔχει τι καὶ εὐσταλές) of early statues (τὰ ἀρχαῖα
ἀγάλµατα), where the skill was thought to lie in their succinctness and severe
simplicity. The style of later writers is like the sculpture (τοῖς ἔργοις) of
Pheidias, since it already exhibits in some degree the union of elevation and
finish (ἔχουσά τι καὶ µεγαλεῖον καὶ ἀκριβές ἅµα).39
And finally, the radical euphonists from the Hellenistic era contribute to
this tradition in their own way, as a passage from the second book of
Philodemus’ On Poems illustrates (the view reported is that of a certain
Pausimachos, who is otherwise unknown):
For just as a kind of glue (κόλλα τις) or a bolt (γόµφος.) or some such thing
is used for joining wooden things (π[ρὸ]ς. τὴν τῶν ξυλίν[ω]ν σύν[θ]εσιν), so
is the soundless element of language [viz., the consonant or mute, τὸ
ἄφωνον], when it is aptly employed, used for binding the diction (πρὸς τὴν
τῆς λεξέως σύµπηξιν) [...] Indeed, just as in solid bodies the compact (τὸ
εὐπαγές) comes about when the whole body (τ.ὸ. ὅλον σῶµα) has all its parts
arranged well, viz., when they are in agreement with the lengths and with the
massive constituents (τοῖς ὄγκοις) and are symmetrical...40
281
James L. Porter
These two facets – material and sound – are closely connected, and they
add more evidence of the kinds of connections between objects, stones,
matter, and voice that we have been tracing so far. What is more, the
tradition is an ancient one, reaching back at least to the archaic lyric poets.
One such poet, possibly Simonides or Pindar, could write, ‘I sculpt a
measure ([µέ]τρον δ.(ια)γλύφω)’.41 (A precise parallel is to be found later in
Aristophanes Thesm. 986: τόρευε πᾶσαν ᾠδήν, ‘Drill [or ‘emboss’] all [parts]
of your ode.’)42 And Pindar had famously boasted, ‘A gold foundation has
been wrought for holy songs. | Come, let us now construct an elaborate |
adornment that speaks words (κεκρότηται χρυσέα κρηπὶς ἱεραῖσιν ἀοιδαῖς· | εἶα
τειχίζωµεν ἤδη ποικίλον | κόσµον αὐδάεντα λόγων)’.43 The final tag is an allusion
to the tradition of oggetti parlanti, or speaking objects. As a rubric, it is not
a bad way to account for the entire phenomenon of ecphrastic things,
whether poems or stones, early and late.44 Euphony is what happens to
language when it is reduced to an object that is then made to speak – or
better yet, to sing.
That the euphonists were attuned to the materialities of inscription is
plain from their use of the engraver analogy, which serves their views well.
It brings out the felt specificities of poetry. One has to imagine the phonic
equivalent of a cut or scrape, unique to a given chiseled stone, and proper
to its delectation as such. Such is the materialist aesthetic purveyed by the
euphonist critics. Roland Barthes’ theory of the ‘grain of the voice’ is a
contemporary version of the same sensibility.45 Recent thinking on
sculptural aesthetics in the postclassical period suggests that this kind of
attending to sensuous detail – to material, tactile contingency, including
facture (a term that takes in quality of artistry, workmanship, finish, and
surface attributes all at once; in Greek: ἀπεργασία) – was one of the
distinctive features of the early ‘Hellenistic Baroque’, if not of the
Hellenistic aesthetic as a whole.46 If so, then the euphonists are at the very
least entitled to an equally ‘baroque’ theory of aesthetic contemplation.
3. Posidippus revisited
Before moving on, we need to glance back briefly at Posidippus. The
connection between Posidippus AB 15 and the Philodemean text about
carving and gems has been noticed by Marco Fantuzzi, who is right to
develop the observation by Elizabeth Asmis that the Philodemean text
reflects ‘the practice of Hellenistic poets.’ 47 This is an important point (and
one could adduce other epigrams, such as AB 5, which contains an even
closer verbal echo: ἔγλυψε; the terms γλύφω and γλύµµα appear elsewhere in
the same collection).48 Plainly, the euphonist critics were not working in a
total vacuum. What both Fantuzzi and Asmis see here is a convergence
282
Against λεπτότης: Rethinking Hellenistic aesthetics
around the aesthetics of the refined detail (leptote-s), of self-conscious
reflection upon artistry that is focused intently on a small and indeed a
minute scale. In Asmis’s words, ‘the poet is viewed primarily as someone
who does fine, exquisite work, not as someone who presents grand,
monumental subjects. [This is the poetry of the] “slender Muse”.’49 One
might add another significant feature of gemstones: their uniquely
individuated character: each is an idion.50 And though there is admittedly
something miniaturist and pointillist about the euphonist theory of sound,
I want to suggest that commonplaces of Hellenistic poetics and aesthetics
like these get things only half right. But also, if we take this line, if the
euphonists do supply us with a representative insight into Hellenistic literary
aesthetics, then that aesthetics will have a very different look and feel from
the way it is traditionally viewed.
Consider the Lithika of Posidippus once again. My question is, to what
extent do these epigrams reflect a poetics of the small-scale, of the λεπτός,
and a rejection of the monumental, the epic, and the grand? I believe the
problem with the usual view of Hellenistic aesthetics lies in its one-
sidedness, and my suggestion will be that all of what is asserted about this
aesthetics is correct, but only half-so: the other half of the picture needs to
be brought back into view to complete the picture. In the case of the
Lithika, this could be shown by appealing to any number of factors, which
I will have to run through quickly. Let’s start with v. 7 of the Posidippus
poem we began from, the ‘great marvel’ (θαῦµα µέγα) caused by this little
piece of workmanship on the stone, whatever kind of gemstone it may be
(it is usually called a sandstone by commentators in English, but its
properties more properly match those of a white moonstone, both here
and in Pliny HN 37.134–5, draconitis sive dracontias).51 Plainly, the poem
leaves us with an impression of magnitude, and not, or not only, of
diminutiveness. Or rather, we should say that the stone object creates an
impression of magnitude for all its smallness of scale. Aesthetically, it is
the contrast of the two scales that is significant.
Now consider the rest of the stones. They follow the same pattern.
Individually small and precious objects (at least some of them), they
simultaneously involve large-scale themes, while their dimensions swell as
the poems progress (especially from AB 16 to the end of the book). They
come from the far-flung corners or limits of the inhabited – and explicitly
Ptolemaic – oikoumenê, and are as it were vomited forth from the bowels of
the earth or from rugged geographies. They come from India (‘Indian
Hydaspes’), Persia, Nabataea, Arabia (‘rolling yellow [rubble] from the
Arabian [mountains]’).52 And they come from these exotic places with
force and violence: ‘an Arabian stream rolls [a stone] along to the shore /
283
James L. Porter
of the sea, as it constantly tears it (αἰεὶ σπῶν) from the mountains, / a lump in vast
quantities’; ‘do [not ] calculate] how many waves have [cast] out [this] great
[rock] far from the raging sea ([µὴ] λόγισαι µεγάλην τ.[αύτη]ν. λᾶαν) ... Polyphemos
could not have lifted it.’ 53 One stone is nearly propelled by ‘a gigantic hurricane,’
another ‘uprooted (ἀνερρίζωσεν) by Mysian Olympos.’ 54 Moreover, the
stones sport immodest physical and aesthetic features to match their
provenance. They are frequently described according to their bulk and
mass (ὄγκος [‘bulk’] appears thrice, possibly four times; βῶλος [‘mass’] and
πάχος [‘thickness’], once each) or with dimensional terms such as πλατύς
[‘wide’] and [τρίσ]πιθαµον περίµετρον [‘three spans in circumference’]), or
else through reference to their hollow inner surfaces (κύτος, γλύµµα). While
the stones are occasionally colossal, many of their features are cosmic. ‘An
engraved chariot is spread out to the length of a span... It defeats the rubies of
India / when put to the test, with radiant beams of equal strength... And
this too is a marvel (τέρας).’ 55 ‘A light spreads over the whole surface
(ὀγκους), ...[a beguiling] marvel (θαῦµα), ...as it reaches for the beautiful
sun.’ 56 ‘Bellerophon crashed into the...plain / while his colt went up into
the deep-blue sky’, and so the stone that depicts the colt is said to be
‘aetherial’ (αἰθερίωι τῶιδε λίθωι).57 There is nothing leptos here. Quite the
contrary. Indeed, as Kathryn Gutzwiller puts it well, ‘the result...is a
thematizing of nothing less than the physical nature of the universe’ in all
its parts.58 But when she goes on to claim that all this is executed in the
name of ‘a new aesthetic of the small-scale and realistic’ in the end, I can
no longer understand this judgment except as a reflex of contemporary
criticism. Hellenistic poetry must be leptos – not only refined, but small and
pretty, never grand and sublime.59
I disagree. One could say, for instance, that Posidippus is invoking ogkos
(massiveness, tumescence, grandeur) as a foil to his own aesthetic of
elegance and miniaturization.60 The obvious counter-argument would be
to say that he is smuggling in the qualities of the magnificent and the grand
on the back of the small and the diminutive in order to have his cake and
eat it too. But this won’t do either. It’s not a matter of creating foils or
smuggling things in. It may be that the frequent evocations of the large-
scale have the effect of bringing bigness to mind despite the apparent focus
on the small, with the result that Hellenistic poetry nevertheless produces
an effect of the big for all its apparent obsessive focus on the minute.
But even this formulation misses what is distinctive about this play with
scale that we have begun to notice. AB 15 is again our best guide: what
Posidippus is after is not an exclusivity of effects, not this effect and then
that one, which would be a way of adding or juxtaposing two different
aesthetics in a series, nor is he seeking to collapse these effects into one in
284
Against λεπτότης: Rethinking Hellenistic aesthetics
the end, namely that of the small. What he is seeking to produce is the
astonishing, indeed paradoxical, contrast of the two combined into a single,
organized aesthetic of contrastive opposites – the ‘great marvel’ (θαῦµα µέγα)
caused by this little piece of workmanship on the snakestone. We are being
asked to view them together. It is their combined effect that is the true
source of astonishment and wonder in this poem and in his entire
collection. And leptos in the sense of small, polished, and refined simply
fails to capture this complex interplay.61
The poems are literally structured by contrastive opposites, whereby the
large and the small coincide in the description of each single object,
whether in the form of jewelry evoking heavenly bodies (a bracelet ‘shining
like the moon,’ AB 4; a shell that ‘flashes as it reaches for the beautiful
sun,’ AB 13) or else surface attributes that are shown to be playing with
their own appearances or with their own depths, as in AB 11, which
concerns a Persian shell:
In its engraved cavity it has
Agla[ia’s] shapeliness [resembling topaz].
The mass ( ὄγκος) [now] spreads [out to view by means] of the wax
which keeps [the light] over the hollow engraving (γλύµµα).
(AB 11; trans. C. Austin)
Ogkos, a key term in the Lithika, is an importantly ambivalent term: it
denotes bulk, but bulk of any dimension. (Ancient atoms are called ogkoi.)62
Elsewhere, Austin astutely chooses to render ogkos with surface (not given
in LSJ), and the rendering captures something that mass lacks: it picks out
the perceptual or, more broadly, aesthetic dimension of Posidippus’ poems
on stones. For the stones are surface screens on which aesthetic effects
appear and disappear, fleetingly, and then reappear. This play of
appearances is a play of material surfaces. It occurs on and within the massy
outer and inner dimensions of the poet’s chosen objects, which is to say
their ogkoi, which are both large and small, aesthetically speaking. The net
effect of this interplay is one of thauma, or marvel, as AB 13 illustrates again:
This stone is [deceptive] (κ.[ερδα]λ.έη): when it is anointed,
[a light] spreads over the whole surface (ὅλους ὄγκους), [a beguiling]
marvel (θαῦ[µ’ ἀπάτη]ς.).
But when [the surface] (ὄ.[γκων]) is dry, all at once an [engraved] Persian [lion]
flashes as it reaches for the beautiful sun.
(AB 13; trans. C. Austin)
Viewed in this light, Posidippus’ genre of writing is a form of paradox-
ography, a genre that Callimachus either inaugurated or redefined.63 In fact,
Posidippus is working somewhat within the genre of conventional
285
James L. Porter
286
Against λεπτότης: Rethinking Hellenistic aesthetics
monuments.65 Fine ware decorates gigantosymposia.66 Scholar-poets revel in
details culled from across the face of the newly expanding and ever more
exoticized oikoumenê, collaborating in the imperial project of collection,
gaudy display, the procession of objects, and spectacle.67 They revel in
details culled from their massive card catalogues ( pinakes), which serve the
same imperious project at the level of knowledge: control over local detail,
local knowledge, local traditions and antiquities, the minutiae of which all
verify the reach of the knowing subject, thus participating in what Rebecca
Flemming has called ‘empires of knowledge’ and Susan Stephens has called
‘geopoetics’.68 J. G. Droysen’s umbrella term for this, a century and a half
ago, was Hellenismus. Droysen unabashedly associated Hellenism (which is
to say, the Hellenistic era) with gigantism, one instance being Deinokrates’
colossal plan (Riesenplan) to fashion a statue of Alexander from Mt. Athos.69
Lesky takes this a step further and speaks of ‘the divergence of powerful
contradictions’, ‘antinomies’, and ‘antipodes’ in his description of the
‘general characteristics’ of the age (which he called ‘megalomaniacal’).70
But let’s go on with our own account of the logic of contrastive scales.
Lemmata, quotations used as a basis for textual commentary and the
prime matter of the grammatikos, could be assimilated to the Hellenistic
aesthetic of the detail, if they haven’t been already. But as their name
implies, lemmata are mere extracts of a whole.71 And as anyone who has
ploughed through Erbse’s Homeric scholia to the Iliad in five heavy
volumes knows, in their collective totality scholia both represent and are a
mountain of learning, as massive as anything transmitted from antiquity.
Or consider hapax legomena. Typically taken as proof of learned and choice
elegance on the part of the poets who deploy them, they are in fact proof
of a monstrous display of knowledge: to recognize the solitary occurrence
of a word one has to have first scanned an entire corpus. And the
recognition, incidentally, is a game played by poets and readers alike. Could
leptote-s be a collective and collusive ruse, a cover for a different sort of
enterprise? If so, there is no further reason for us to be taken in too.72 In
fact, I am coming to be convinced that the term leptote-s has no more
singular meaning or internal coherence than (say) the avant-garde label
‘form’ had among the modern Russian Formalists, the formalists in art
criticism (such as Clement Greenberg), or the New Critics, for whom form
meant sensuous material: in all these cases, form is being asked to stand in
for quite different, and often incompatible, things.73 A later parallel might
be ‘cool’, as in cool jazz, which is likewise more associative than denotative
(and could often be hot).74 Leptote-s, I suspect, played a similar, under-
determined, and contradictory function among the Hellenistic literary
avant-garde.
287
James L. Porter
288
Against λεπτότης: Rethinking Hellenistic aesthetics
Fig. 1. Miniature bronze statuette of Herakles, seated against a rock with a wine cup
in one hand and his characteristic club in the other. Found near Pompeii.
Museo Archeologico Nazionale di Napoli. Inv. 2828. H: 0.75 m. Photo courtesy of
the Soprintendenza speziali per i Beni Archeologici di Napoli e Pompei.
289
James L. Porter
Fig. 2. Colossal marble statue of Herakles, seated and holding a wine cup and his club.
Found at Alba Fucens. Museo Archeologico Nazionale di Chieti. Inv. 6029. H: 2.40 m.
Photo courtesy of the Soprintendenza per i Beni Archeologici dell’ Abruzzo – Chieti.
290
Against λεπτότης: Rethinking Hellenistic aesthetics
poetry book amply confirms.82 And the very same questions can be shown
to apply to the dynamics of the Hellenistic verse form. Tremendous
grandeur was felt at the lowest levels of the sentence, the clause, the
individual metron and the individual stoicheion of sound, which could produce
sublime rapture in the mind of a euphonist critic, and, presumably, a poet
as well. The grandeur is an effect of magnification. It occurs whenever one
inspects the material of poetry from up close and that material suddenly
fills, and overfills, one’s field of vision – or soundscape (things ‘appear
greater and more beautiful.’).83
Any object is perhaps capable of provoking such sensations. Matter
viewed in its brute materiality is particularly apt to do this, and the
Hellenistic artists and beholders were particularly prone to look for such
effects at the level of the material detail.84 In his researches into Homer,
Krates somehow managed to discover the incongruity of two infinities
brought into collision: the miniature of the shield of Achilles and the
universe it reached out to embrace; the paradox of a Hephaestus now
creating the cosmos, now falling more or less victim to it (as he is thrown
down from Olympos onto Lemnos in an experiment in physics). The two
infinities, already figured by text and cosmos, could converge dramatically
in a single verse: ‘Homer measured (ἐµέτρησε) the spherical shape of the
cosmos (τὸ σφαιρικὸν τοῦ κόσµου σχῆµα) for us through a single line (δι’ ἑνὸς
στίχου),’ namely Iliad 8.16 (a description of Eris, or Strife): ‘as far (τόσσον)
beneath the house of Hades as from (ὅσον) earth the sky (ouranos) lies.’85
Longinus would label this verse and its effect sublime (probably in Krates’
wake).86 Somewhat earlier in the same tradition, there is Aratus, who
famously wove a double acrostic into his Phaenomena with the word λεπτή 87
and is known from Strabo to have written a collection, τὰ κατὰ λεπτόν
(nothing else is known about this work beyond its title).88 The Phaenomena,
Hesiodic in manner, is devoted to the signs in the heavens and, as
Hutchinson rightly notes, is remarkable for its ‘general grandeur’ – a fact
that remains a source of ongoing puzzlement to upholders of Hellenistic
leptotês.89 His poem, a mere eleven-hundred-fifty-some lines long (but still
longer than either the Theogony or the Works and Days), was correctly praised
as an ἔργον µέγα by Leonidas of Tarentum (Anth. Pal. 9.25 = 101 G-P): the
praise alludes to the content and not only to the form of Aratus’ poem,
which frequently invokes visual grandeur (ta megala: καλός τε µέγας τε, a
Homericism, is one of Aratus’ stock formulas).90 In the same poem,
Leonidas also praises Aratus for his refined intellect, as did others,
including Callimachus (Anth. Pal. 9.507 = 56 G-P).91 I would simply add
that it is the contrastive urge for grandeur arising from and amidst refinement
that stamps Aratus’ poem and marks it as specifically Hellenistic; and it
291
James L. Porter
was this very feature of contrasting scales that his contemporaries were
registering (even if Longinus found him singularly unimpressive; Subl. 10.6).
Much the same could be said of Theocritus’ Encomium of Ptolemy
Philadelphos (Id. 17), a mere 137 lines long, and yet brimming over with
imperial pretensions and hyperbole, as in the political portion of the poem:
Within [Egypt] are built three hundred cities, and three thousand, and
another ten thousand three times over, and three twice, and after them
thrice nine: over all of these is lordly Ptolemy king. He takes slices of
Phoenicia and Arabia and Syria and Libya and the dark-skinned Ethiopians;
all the Pamphylians and the warriors of Cilicia he commands, and the
Lycians and the Carians, who delight in war, and the islands of the Cyclades,
for his are the finest ships sailing the ocean. All the sea and the land and the
crashing rivers [of the world] are subject to Ptolemy... (82–92; trans.
R. Hunter)92
Towards the end of the tradition, or else reflecting it now in a Roman form,
are the extraordinary but little studied Tabulae Iliacae, twenty-two marble
tablets dating from around the late first century BC to the early first
century AD, mostly depicting scenes from Homer or the Epic Cycle,93 all
diminutive in scale, all luxury objects, all sporting Alexandrian erudition
or pseudo-erudition, and all displaying more information than the eye can
readily absorb.94 One tablet, the so-called Tabula Iliaca Capitolina, manages
to pack all twenty-four books of the Iliad, in epitomized form, around a
central image of the fall of Troy, in addition to depicting other cyclical
epics besides. The texts are microscopic (‘easily legible with a magnifying
glass’)95 and, in their zeal for totality, obsessed with a gigantism that
competes with their physical form. One clue to the works’ aesthetic
principles is their inscribed signatures. Six of the works are proudly
attributed, not to a certain ‘Theodoros’, as has been universally assumed in
the past, but rather to a certain ‘Theodorean’ kind of artistry, as in the
following tags:
2NY: [ Ἰλι]ὰς ῾Οµήρου Θεοδώρηος ἡ{ι} τέχνη 96
5O: [ἀσπὶς] ᾿Αχίλλειος Θεοδώρηος ἡ τ[έχνη]
The formulas seem calculated to emphasize the contrast between the two
parts of the expressions, assuming they add up to whole expressions. The
problem does not lie in the visual presentation of the letters alone. Some
of the tags appear in ‘magic square’ patterns which all but defy decryption.
In other cases, they appear in a straightforward linear sequence, but lacking
verbs and other particles which might guide the reader through the sense.
Theoretically, the expressions could also be taken as subject labels, as if
naming the contents of the respective works like titles or headings,
292
Against λεπτότης: Rethinking Hellenistic aesthetics
followed by authorial attributions, and that is roughly how they have been
understood in the past. But on a different reading, their gist arguably comes
down to this:
The Iliad is Homer’s, but the art is all Theodorean.
The shield is Achillean, but the art is all Theodorean.97
The contrast is not merely one of genre (epic poetry versus ecphrastic
objects), but also one of scale: Homer’s epic may be sprawling and
grandiose, but the Theodorean art of miniaturization is even greater...
The unusual and persistent use of the adjective ‘Theodorean’ in place of
the proper name98 prompts a speculation, one that I have never seen
ventured until now: are we having to do not with the name of the artist or
artists who produced the tablets, but with an allusion, that is, with a style?
If so, the one (and probably only) artist who fills the bill is none other than
Theodoros of Samos, the famed Greek architect and miniaturist from the
sixth century known to Posidippus (as discussed earlier) and to Pliny (HN
34.83), among others, and mentioned above in connection with his
hallmark style.99 The reference in ‘Theodorean’, in other words, could be
a learned allusion by a self-effacing Hellenistic artist or series of artists,100
and one that is all the more layered, given that the Iliad is itself toying with
scale. Concerning itself with a mere 50-odd days of a ten-year-long war, the
vast epic both compresses and distends time, while whoever produced the
tablets, invoking the Theodorean style, signaled this telescoping by way of
an (epic) reductionism of their own on a scale hitherto unseen in the visual
arts, and all but illegibly so – a ‘great marvel’ indeed, though very much in
the literary tradition of Metrodoros, Aratus, and Krates.101 As unique as
this particular contrast in scales may be, with its juxtaposition of learned
visual and verbal allusions, it does nevertheless serve as a signature element
of Hellenistic aesthetics. But this element or gesture is hardly contained by
the qualifier leptos, as that term is understood today. The tablets are, in
contrast, rather baroque, a term that should be understood not pejoratively
but generously – both in the sense that has been conferred on the formally
complex and daring works from Pergamon and elsewhere,102 and in the
sense that was been assigned to the early modern German Trauerspiel by
Walter Benjamin, according to which ‘the baroque signifier displays a
dialectical structure in which sound and script “confront each other in a
tense polarity”, forcing a division within discourse that impels the gaze
into its very depths’.103
Consider a further example of Hellenistic contrastive scales. Recently,
Gyburg Radke has argued that a salient feature of Hellenistic poetry lay in
its resort to myths of childhood, which (she claims) were intentionally
293
James L. Porter
294
Against λεπτότης: Rethinking Hellenistic aesthetics
could be found in other art forms, as I have already suggested with my
mention of the Hellenistic Baroque. Finally, it is crucial to note that
attention to detail is not an automatic confirmation of an aesthetic of the
detail. Aristotle makes a memorable point in his Poetics, though it is one
that his Hellenistic successors would ultimately reject:
Beauty consists in amplitude as well as in order (ἐν µεγέθει καὶ τάξει), which
is why a very small (πάµµικρον) creature could not be beautiful, since our
view (ἡ θεωρία) loses all distinctness (συγχεῖται) when it comes near to taking
no perceptible time, and an enormously ample one (παµµέγεθες) could not
be beautiful either, since our view of it is not simultaneous, so that we lose
the sense of its unity and wholeness as we look it over; imagine, for instance,
an animal a thousand miles long! 110
While Aristotle is arguing for a compromise between conflicting scales, his
argument inadvertently sheds light on another point that can be made
for him. For just as an overwhelming mass of size can defeat aesthetic
perception (as Longinus knows well, though he would argue this gives rise
to another perception – the sublime), so too details can actually help to
reinforce the greatest possible quantity of an aesthetic perception. Details,
in other words, can collaborate with large magnitudes of perception; they do
not have to negate them. Think again of any large, indeed any immense
object. Now think of the details that decorate it. It is these that draw the
eye to the object and cause it to linger there, even in cases when the eye
might otherwise risk being overwhelmed by the same object. ( Trajan’s
column is a good case in point, but only one of many available).
To summarize and to conclude, then: The exponents of Hellenistic
culture had an urge for leptote-s, but they also knew the opposite urge: an
urge for grandeur, for the spectacular, for cosmic aspiration (Eratosthenes,
Aratus, Krates); whence too the urge, elsewhere visible, for the peculiar, the
monstrous, and the baroque;111 for systems, collections, libraries, large-
scale unities (Euclid, Eristratus, Aristarchos of Samos and Aristarchos of
Samothrace both); for empire, for Ptolemaic Egypt, Macedonia, Greek
classical heritage, and the rest. What is remarkable in this period is not
that they held both urges, but the way we find both urges inextricably
combined – which makes of the Hellenistic poets, critics, and writers
paradoxographers in the truest sense of the word.112
295
James L. Porter
Notes
1 Porter 2010b; id. (forthcoming); id. (in progress).
2 Though see also Lohse 1973.
3 See Day 1989; Scodel 1992; Steiner 1993; Carson 1999.
4 Bing 1998, 34.
5 The epitaphic character of such statements was recognized already in antiquity
(e.g., [Plut.] Vit. Hom. 135; schol. T Il. 6.459–60). On this phenomenon, see most
recently Scodel 1992.
6 Gutzwiller (ed.) 2005. See also Männlein-Robert 2007, ch. 4; and Prioux 2007.
7 Hutchinson 2008, ch. 5; ibid., 104. Cf. Gutzwiller 2002a on ‘art objects’ and ibid.,
pp. 94–5 on ‘aesthetic objects.’ Even Callimachus was interested in material remains:
Fantuzzi and Hunter 2004, 46. See further the essays collected in Rouveret et al. 2006,
some of which draw on Posidippus.
8 From Nisetich’s translation of the poems in Gutzwiller (ed.) 2005, 17–41. The
and the mineralogist Sotakos (late 4th-early 3rd C. BC ) also wrote treatises on precious
stones, as Pliny and others record. Zenothemis may have penned his treatise in the
form of an elegiac didactic poem.
10 ‘The Pebble’ (‘Le Galet’), in Ponge 1994, 91.
11 On the other hand, the fascination with pebbles and their aesthetic properties
is as old as human time itself. See the ongoing excavations into the Bronze Age
patterned pebble beds in East Devon directed by archaeologist C. Tilley
(http://www.pebblebedsproject.org.uk/poetics-of-pebbles.html). See further Tilley
2004.
12 Posidipp. AB 15 (trans. C. Austin); AB refers to the edition of Austin and
Bastianini (2002).
13 Wimmel 1960; Clausen 1964; see Schiesaro 1998 on both.
14 Call. Aet. fr. 1.11–12 Lehnus (forthcoming):
296
Against λεπτότης: Rethinking Hellenistic aesthetics
Callimachus wrote. Bastianini [i.e., Bastianini 1996] has independently though partially
confirmed Bell!’ (Lehnus, per litt.) See next note.
15 Rostagni 1956, 269–70 (reprinting the earlier article); Bastianini 1996; see
Benedetto 1990 and Lehnus 2006 for detailed histories of the conjectures.
16 Wilamowitz-Moellendorff 1943 [1882]; id. 1924; Reitzenstein 1970 [1893]; id.
1931; Couat 1882; Pfeiffer 1955. For the same point, see Cameron 1995, 327, who,
however, ultimately rejects it. On C. G. Heyne’s association of Hellenistic poetry with
the genus tenue, a genre incapable of grandeur, and its roots in Roman antiquity, see
Kassel 1987, 11–12 and esp. Heyne 1785 [1763], e.g., 80 (tenue et subtile, ...nihil in iis
celsum, generosum et sublime, nulla audacia, etc.), 81 (neque nobili argumento, nec magnis sententiis,
etc., following ps.-Longinus’ condemnations of the Alexandrians), 92, 93 n. (λεπτότης),
94, 96, etc.
17 Phld. De mus. 4 col. 22.25–26 Neubecker = col. 136.25–26 Delattre. See Porter
1995. I find it increasingly unlikely that Philodemus should have awarded them this
label ( pace Delattre 2007, 2: 434, who misconstrues my article on this point), and I
doubt that ὀνοµαζόµενοι, as opposed to καλούµενοι, can bear the pejorative meaning
of ‘so-called’ in this context.
18 A case in point is Plut. Mor. 30D, where three kinds of literary attention are
named: ‘in the reading of poetry one person culls the flowers of the story, another
rivets his attention upon the beauty of the diction and the arrangement of the words
(ὁ δ’ ἐµφύεται τῷ κάλλει καὶ τῇ κατασκευῇ τῶν ὀνοµάτων), ...but as for those who are
concerned with what is said as being useful for character (and it is to these that our
present discourse directed)...’
19 Porter 2001; id. 2010, ch. 5.
20 P. Herc. 994 col. 37.9–13; see Porter 2007, 15 at n. 86.
21 E.g., Fantuzzi and Hunter 2004, 451; contra, Atherton 1989; Porter 1989,
150–1 n. 8. See, e.g., Dion. Hal. Comp. 4: ‘When I decided to write a treatise on this
subject [the σύνθεσις-doctrine], I tried to discover whether my predecessors had said
anything about it, especially the philosophers from the Stoa, since I knew that these men paid
considerable attention to the subject of language: one must give them their due. But
nowhere did I see any contribution, great or small, to the subject of my choice, by any author of repute’
(trans. Usher). The Stoics took not a rhetorical (and a fortiori, aesthetic), but only a
dialectical view of language: Chrysippos’ writings are said to be οὐ ῥητορικὴν θεωρίαν
ἐχούσας ἀλλὰ διαλεκτικήν (Dion. Hal., ibid., 22.13 U.–R.).
22 [σιν µόνην ἰδίαν] | ἐργάζεσ[θαι, καὶ τὸ ‘τὴν µὲν | [ἐπιφαι]νοµένην [ε]ὐφωνί|αν ἴδιον
.
[εἶ]ν.αι, τὰ δὲ νοή|µατα καὶ τὰς λέξεις ἐκτὸς | εἶναι καὶ κοινὰ συνάγεσ|θαι δεῖ[ν,’ πα]ρὰ πᾶσι
µὲν ὡς | ἐν. [στήλ]ηι µέ[ν]ε. ι τοῖς κρι|τικοῖ[ς], βλεποµένην δ’ ἔ|χει τὴ[ν ε]ὐηθί[α]ν ἐκ τῶν |
εἰρηµένων (P. Herc. 1676 col. 6.1–11; text after Janko 2000, 125 n. 1).
23 Cf. the same expression: τὴν ἐπιφαινοµένην | [α]ὐ[τῆι] [sc., τῆι συνθέσει] φωνὴν
αὐτὸ καθ’ αὑτὸ κρῖναι, not πρὸς τὰ θέατρα; ibid. 7.1451a6–7: whatever is πρὸς τοὺς
ἀγῶνας καὶ τὴν αἴσθησιν οὐ τῆς τέχνης ἐστίν; Phld. De poem. 5 col. 25.30: the ‘poem qua
poem’ (τὸ πόηµα καθὸ πόηµα) is privileged; ibid., P. Herc. 1676 col. 7.7–17 N = col. 18
Sbordone 1976, refuting the euphonist claim that ‘the composition in and of itself
produces psuchagôgia’ through the sound that the composition yields): ‘α[ὐ]τὴν
297
James L. Porter
ψυ[χα]γωγ[ε]ῖν σύνθεσιν κ[αθ’ α]ὑτήν, ἕτερο[ν] οὐδὲν ε[ἰσφ]εροµέν[η]ν ἀγαθόν’, [ἀ]πίθανόν
ἐστι. The resemblance in terminologies is striking and can hardly be haphazard.
I suspect it points to a conscious hearkening back to Aristotle. But it could just point
to a high level of awareness of philosophical language in its aesthetic uses on the part
of the euphonist critics, perhaps as such language was found in Peripatetic circles
(though no intermediary texts after Aristotle’s writings spring to mind). There may be
a further reminiscence (and inversion) in ἔξω τῆς τέχνης of Aristotle’s key idiom in the
Poetics, ἔξω τοῦ µύθου (‘outside the plot’).
26 My designation. ὕλη is reserved by the euphonists for its customary, presumably
Peripatetically derived usage, standing for plot, subject matter (hupothesis), and all that
goes with this (meaning, lexeis, etc.). See Phld. De poem. 1 col. 74.8 Janko; P. Herc. 1081
col. 9.24; col. 13; P. Herc. 1676 col. 4.5–9 N = col. 15 Sbordone.
27 Trans. Nisetich (slightly adapted) in Gutzwiller (ed.) 2005, 20.
28 P. Herc. 1676 col. 5.
29 This is a different sense of idion than the one just discussed.
30 Cf. two columns prior: ‘according to the sunthesis of the rhythms and the diction’
(P. Herc. 1676 col. 3.1–3 N = col. 14 Sbordone); and the subsequent column, which
was quoted just above.
31 δ..ιότι, καθάπερ ε.[ἶ]|πον, δια]φερούσα[ς µὲν τέ]|χνας, ἐν δὲ τῶ‹ι› κοινῶι τὸ|τέ[λο]ς
ἐχούσας παρατέθη|κ.εν.. ὡ[ς] γὰρ [δ]ακτυλιογλύ|φ[ο]ς ἴδ.ιον ἔχων οὐ τὸ ποι|εῖν ὅµο[ι]ον –
κοινὸν γὰρ ἦν| καὶ πλ.[ά]σ.του καὶ ζωγ. ρ[ά|φου – |[τὸ δ’] ἐν σιδήρω‹ι› καὶ λι|θαρίωι διὰ τῆς
ἐγ[γ]λυφῆς,| τἀγ[αθὸ]ν. οὐκ ἐν τούτωι κεί[µε]νον, ἀλλ] ἐν τῶι ποι|εῖν ὅ.µ.[ο]ιον, ὃ πάντ.ω.ν
κοι|νὸν, ἔχει, παραπλησί|ως ἀξιοῦτα[ι] καὶ [ὁ] ποητὴς | τὸ µὲ[ν ἴδι]ον ἐν [τῆι συ]ν|θέσει
β[ούλε]σθαι, τὸ δ’ ἀγα|θὸν δι[αν]οία[ι καὶ] λέ[ξει] κοι|νῶ[ς] θηρεύειν, ὅ φησιν οὗ|τος ἁπλῶς
µηδὲ ἓν ὠφε|λεῖν ἢ βλάπτειν, ὥσπερ ἐκ τῶν παρατεθέντων| συνῆχε[ν, ἀ]λλ’ οὐ τοὐν|αντίον·
[τὸ] τοίνυν τοὺς πο.ητὰς τὸ [κοιν]ὸν† παρ’ ἑτέ|ρων λα.βόντας (P. Herc. 1676 col. 5.3–28 N
= col. 16 Sbordone (rev. and trans. Asmis 1995, 160–61; trans. adapted; final
supplement mine, based on the subsequent column).
32 By the way, we shouldn’t be thrown off track by Philodemus, who seems to have
introduced a second sense of idion into the discussion, viz., that of proper function,
which is not part of the euphonists’ vocabulary (idion, for them, means, practically,
‘original’ to the artist and his product), though it is found in, say, Aristotle. Philodemus
is taking a quality of the object, or the artist’s contribution to the object, and making
it into a function of the artist. But while we’re at it, we might as well notice how the
euphonists’ point is rather different from Aristotle’s, for instance when he states (Poet.
13.1452b33) that the idion of the poet is to mimeisthai (imitate or represent). For
Aristotle, there is no real hint that the imitation is colored by the particularity of the
medium, whereas for the euphonists the imitation is made distinctive by the medium
in which it is made – indeed, its aesthetic value seems to lie not in imitation per se, but
in this distinctive, material difference.
33 οἱ ἀγαθοὶ ποηταὶ παρ’ οὐδὲν ἄλλο πρωτεύουσίν τε καὶ µόνοι διαµένουσιν ἢ παρὰ τοὺς
ἤχους (Phld. De poem. 1, col. 83.11–14 Janko); cf. ibid., col. 84.7, 84.12, 89.11–12: αὐτὸς
ὁ ἦχος; ἡ ἐπιφαινοµένη φωνή ἡ τῇ συνθέσει (De poem. 5, col. 23.38 Mangoni).
34 Porter 2006.
35 ὠφέλιµα κρίνειν αὐτὰ ἀρκούντως ἕξει. κτῆµά τε ἐς αἰεὶ µᾶλλον ἢ
Thuc. 1.22.4:
ἀγώνισµα ἐς τὸ παραχρῆµα ἀκούειν ξύγκειται. Cf. Subl. 7.3, which echoes the passage: true
sublimity does not ‘endure only for the moment of hearing (µέχρι µόνης τῆς ἀκοῆς
298
Against λεπτότης: Rethinking Hellenistic aesthetics
σῳζόµενον)’; on the contrary, it ‘makes a strong and ineffaceable [viz., lasting]
impression on the memory (ἰσχυρὰ δὲ ἡ µνήµη καὶ δυσεξάλειπτος).’
36 This kind of language is ancient. Cf. Arist. EN 10.4.1174a23: ἡ τῶν λίθων σύνθεσις.
37 Dion. Hal. Comp. 6 (28.5–16 U.-R.).
38 Chiron 2001, esp. 15–33.
39 Demetr. Eloc. 13–14; trans. Roberts and Innes, adapted.
40 ὥσπερ κόλλα τις ἢ γόµφος ἢ εἴ τι τοιοῦτο π[ρὸ]ς τὴν τῶν ξυλίν[ω]ν σύν[θ]εσιν, οὕτως
ἔχει κα[ὶ τ]ὸ ἄφωνον πρὸς τὴν τῆς λέξεως σύµπηξιν εὐκαίρως λαµβανόµενον. ...οἷον γοῦν ἐπὶ
τῶν σωµάτων τὸ εὐπαγὲς .γείνετ[αι] ὅταν τ.ὸ. ὅλον σῶµα ὑφ’ αὑτὸ . εὖ
. . δι.[α]κείµενα
. τὰ µέρη
ἔ.χη<ι>, τοῖς τε µήκεσι καὶ τοῖς ὄγκοις ὁµολογο[ύ]µενά τ.ε. κα.ὶ σύµµετρα ὄντα, κτλ. (Phld.
P. Herc. 994 col. 34.4–11 and 18–25; text after Janko 2000, 299 n. 8 and Sbordone).
41 Simonides(?) or Pindar(?) ap. P. Berol. 9571v col. 2.55 Schubart.
42 Austin and Olson 2004 suggest (ad loc.) ‘make elaborate’ for τόρευε (and refer the
expression to the accompanying dance rather than to the song) but recognize that the
metaphor is drawn from metal-work (toreutike-).
43 Pind. fr. 194 Maehler-Snell; trans. Race.
44 Longinus writes about ‘the choice of correct and magnificent words,’ a feature
that needs to be ‘cultivated intensely’: ‘it makes grandeur, beauty (κάλλος), old-world
charm (εὐπίνεαν), weight, force, strength, and a kind of lustre bloom upon our words
as upon beautiful statues; it gives things life (ψυχήν) and makes them speak (φωνητικήν)’
(Subl. 30.1; trans. Russell).
45 Barthes 1975, 66–7; and Barthes 1977.
46 Stewart 1993; id. 2006, 171–2 (‘often regarded as the most characteristic and
even the most important artistic innovation of the Hellenistic period’); for a
re-thinking of Hellenistic baroque, see Schulz, this volume.
47 Fantuzzi and Hunter 2004, 453–4; more generally, van Groningen 1953.
48 ἔγλυψε, AB 7.4; γλυφθέν, AB 8.4; ἔγλυφε, ΑΒ 14.2; γλύ[µµα, ΑΒ 11.6; 12.6; γλύµµατι,
ΑΒ 11.3.
49 Asmis 1995, 162.
50 See Petrain 2005, 335.
51 Thanks to Jeffrey Feland for suggesting the moonstone.
52 AB 1; 2; 3; 4; 5; 7; 10; 11; 13; 16.It can hardly be a coincidence that the Lithika is
framed by two prominent geographical and ideological markers. The first two words
of the first poem in the collection are Ἰνδος ῾Υδάσπης.[ . Alexander famously conquered
the inhabitants of the region around the Hydaspes river (present-day Jhelum river in
Pakistan) in 326 BC before returning to Alexandria (see Strab. 15.1.25, etc., Plut. Alex.
344B, Arr. Anab. 5.3.6.; 5.9.1; 5.14.5; etc.) He was thereby establishing his dominion
at the conventional outer limits of the Greek oikoumenê (Arist. Mete. 2.5.362b27–30).
And the final two verses of AB 20, which also happen to close the Lithika, make
explicit the geopolitical pretensions of the book, if not of the entire collection, and
their nominal patron: ‘Now, Lord of Geraestus, along with the islands, keep free from
earthquakes Ptolemy’s land and shores’.
53 AB 16; 19. Cf. Callimachus on the cost of Pheidias’ huge statue of Zeus at
299
James L. Porter
54 AB 20; 17.
55 AB 8.
56 AB 13
57 AB 14.
58 Gutzwiller 2005, 302; cf. ibid., 303.
59 Ibid., 314. Similarly, and more recently, id. 2007, 29–43 (the standard view of
‘as big as the earth’, is compared with Myron’s largest production, which ‘reach[ed] the
limit of four cubits’, but the latter is still a life-scale production, not a miniature; for
the epigram and its Rhodian context, see Wiemer, this volume, section 3. Modern
commentators attempt to present this comparison as biased in favor of Myron (e.g.,
Kosmetatou 2004, 203), but there is no evidence for this in the poem or in the book
that contains it that I can see. Invoking its predecessor (AB 67), a poem about a
miniature sculpture by the archaic sculptor Theodoros, only reinforces my point about
contrastive opposites. The choice of an archaic sculptor, incidentally, is interesting by
itself: it shows (a) that the practice of miniaturization had precedents (cf. the allegory
of Homer by Metrodoros of Lampsakos [DK 61A2–4]); and (b) that to draw a
periodizing line using this criterion alone is to draw a line in the sand, whereas playful,
contrastive uses of the conceit might give us a better purchase on the later period, if
we only knew more about the earlier instances. See the ironies of the Ischia Cup from
the eighth century BC (CEG 1.454) as read by Bing 1998, 33 n. 38, following Hansen
1976: diminutive in size (10.3 cm. = 4“ in height x 15.1 cm. = 6“ in diameter at the
mouth), it projects itself ‘as the huge, gold-decorated chalice of Nestor’ from Il. 11
‘which only that great hero can lift with ease’ and in abbreviated, epigrammatic form
at that. In other words, the playful contrasts of scale appears to be an old game indeed,
albeit possibly a rarer one (or a simply less well attested one?). For further
considerations on Posidippus’ use of Theodoros, see also Gutzwiller 2002b, 55–60,
to which we can add another, namely its learned imitation of contemporary historical
handbooks, and hence its mimicking the larger imperial project of Ptolemaic
encyclopedism and all-encompassing knowledge (here, in miniature). On Theodoros
and his contemporary Kallikrates (Pliny HN 36.43), and the genre of sculptural
miniatures generally, see Bartman 1992, 170 and passim; also, below.
61 My use of ‘contrastive scales’ is differently conceived from the usual idea of a
λεπτότερον for true causes (DK B11). Was Democritus (or his reception) somehow a
precursor to the Hellenistic aesthetic? If so, he will not have been this on the current
understanding of the Hellenistic λεπτός, but only on a materialist and sensualist
understanding of this aesthetic, one that would incorporate contrastive scales
(differently, Reitzenstein 1931, 27–9).
63 See Callim. frr. 407–11 Pf.; Bing 2005, 134–35; Krevans 2005, 89–92.
See further Susemihl 1891, 1. 463–91. Prioux 2007, 110 and 123 notes the
compatibility of two opposing styles in Posidippus, semnote-s and leptote-s, but stages a
(rather speculatively assumed) polemic between Callimachus and Posidippus around
300
Against λεπτότης: Rethinking Hellenistic aesthetics
this licensing of opposite styles, whereby Callimachus appears as an upholder of
leptote-s pure and simple.
64 Fantuzzi and Hunter 2004, 43, 50; Acosta-Hughes and Stephens 2002, 249
(‘sublime moment’); Kuttner 2005, 149 (‘colossal’, ‘monstrous’); cf. 162 (‘colossal’);
Hutchinson 1988, 61 (‘completely wild’, ‘extravagant’), 83 (‘grandeur’, ‘grandiose’).
65 Posidippus was known in antiquity as epigrammatopoios, a maker of epigrams,
gem encyclopedias, all of which the Lithika mimics. Ben Acosta-Hughes suggests
( privatim) a parallel with Fabergé eggs, which ‘work’ aesthetically as delicate miniatures
(the majority standing at around 4 high) and as literal thaumata (each contains a
surprise within), and also as emblems of imperial taste: gaudy and over-elaborate, they
not only imply but also advertise the enormous scale of wealth, outlay, consumption,
and display that sustains them.
68 Flemming 2003; Stephens 2004b, 170–3. Nicely summarized in Fantuzzi and
Hunter 2004, 50, where this tendency is contextualized as ‘part of the great
systematization of knowledge which so characterizes the Hellenistic and Roman
periods’. See now also Fuqua 2007, which I discovered only at copy-editing stage, but
which I welcome as confirming my point about the ideological and political thrust of
the Lithika.
69 Droysen 1998 [1836–43], passim, but, e.g., 3: 20: ‘[Alexandrian] scholarship, too,
did its part to help Greece develop well beyond its local boundaries into a universal
power that encompassed the world as a whole’. Droysen’s work is a study in gigantism
on all levels. See further id. 1833, 236 (‘the great division of the world [by Alexander]
into East and West’; 546 (Deinokrates [even if Alexander rejected the plan in the
end]), 567–8 (Alexander’s portentous entry into the colossal city [Riesenstadt ] of
Babylon); id. 1998 [1836–43], 3:11: postclassical political entities tend towards ‘larger,
increasingly more comprehensive universalities (Allgemeinheiten)’; 3: 169–70: the
‘elegance [and] sheer abundance of life’ that underlay Hellenistic art and culture, which
Droysen characterizes as being ‘secure in its foundations, casting its gaze far and wide’,
‘majestic, capacious, rich, multifarious’, and so on (ibid. and 3:413–14); Ptolemy
Philadelphos assembled at his court ‘every art, every science – the former to lend
dignity to the luxury that he loved, the latter...to lend it substance and value’; ‘never
before was life more delicately adorned, more brilliantly savored or more finely
blandished than in this court’ (3:169). On the other hand, poetry for Droysen was
apparently exempt from gigantism (id. 1833, 546–7). Bravo may be right that Droysen
had little understanding or knowledge of Hellenistic poetry, but neither did Droysen
seek to cover poetry in his study of political formations (3:413). However see
Bernhardy 1836, 371: ‘A vigorous impulse for massive reading and writing, polymathy
301
James L. Porter
and polygraphy, were the levers of the world founded by Alexander’ (also quoted in
Droysen’s review of Bernhardy in Droysen 1893–94, 2:70, and then again in the 1843
preface to Geschichte des Hellenismus, where the statement is claimed to have been one
of the mainsprings of Droysen’s own historical researches on the period [id. 1998
[1836–43], 3: x]). Heyne 1785 [1763], esp. 79–80 and 98–134, is a predecessor of
Droysen. On Droysen, see further Porter 2009, 9–11; and on Hellenistic gigantism,
see further Préaux 1978, 329; Bugh 2006; Stewart 2006 (on truphe-, the colossal, and the
baroque).
70 Lesky 1971, 784–6, followed up nicely, if narrowly (with reference to Callimachus
only), by Lohse 1973. This is not to deny predecessors, or even certain continuities
(Aristophanes’ Frogs is a case in point (Reitzenstein 1931), as is the aesthetics of the
stoicheion (Porter 2010b). Nevertheless, one can still affirm that the Hellenistic poets
and critics latch onto the motif of contrastive scales with a new and distinctive energy.
71 See Hutchinson 2008, ch. 3, id. 2006, esp. 10667: ‘Different scales of form quickly
begin to interact. The Hellenistic period...both pondered the large issues of structure
which the Homeric poems exemplified and investigated the Homeric text in extremely
close detail’.
72 See G. O. Hutchinson’s well-taken but little-heeded point (Hutchinson 1988,
83–4: ‘This simple opposition [of the grand and the small] obscures the importance
in his work of grandeur and the grandiose, and the complexity and variety with which
they are exploited’; also 76–7; and all of the first chapter on Callimachus).
73 E.g., Shklovsky 1962 [1923], id. 1965 [1917]; Greenberg 1986–93 [1940]; Ransom
1941.
74 Cf. Lohse 1973, esp. 41, rightly noting how the leptos-motif is ‘consciously vague’
and self-‘obscuring’.
75 See Visscher 1962.
76 Pollitt 1999, 194. Cf. Stewart 1990, 1: 292–3. Cf. Feuerbach 1855, 259–60: ‘small
to behold, the picture was felt to be large’; ‘so powerful a deception of art was
contained in the smallest amount of space’; ‘the narrow vessel of a little image filled
with infinite content’, etc. These comments are all echoing Statius (ibid.), who is in
turn echoing, it seems, the language (or rhetoric) of Posidippus, or else that of
Hellenistic paradoxography: ‘So great is the deception of that tiny form. What precision
of touch, what enterprise in the skilled artist, at the same time to fashion by his pains a
table ornament and to revolve in his mind a great colossus!’ (tam magna breui mendacia
formae. / quis modus, quanta experientia docti / artificis, curis pariter gestamina mensae / fingere
et ingentis animo versare colossos!; 44–6; trans. Coleman; emphasis added).
77 Cf. Bartman 1992, 150.
78 The allusion is also noticed by Newlands 2002, 78.
79 For the readings, see Schneider 2001, 700–1. Cf. Sen. Ep. 53.11: ‘At mehercules
magni artificis est clusisse totum in exiguo’ (thanks to Gregory Hutchinson for this parallel).
80 These are conveniently reproduced in Bartman 1992.
81 Viz., in Callimachus’ treatment of the conduct of the Cretan Theodaisia at
Haliartos in Boeotia in fr. 43.84–7 Pf.; Fantuzzi and Hunter 2004, 60. Further
examples would include the Lock of Berenices (fr. 110.1; 110.93–4 Pf.); the ektheo-sis
of Arsinoe (fr. 228 Pf.; cf. esp. 12: µέγας γαµέτας and 15: λεπτὸν ὕδωρ, etc.); small
epigrams on big tragedies (P. Petrie II, 49b = SSH 985; see Hutchinson 2008, 5–6) and
colossal statues (such as the archaic cult image of Apollo on Delos, fr. 114 Pf.; see
302
Against λεπτότης: Rethinking Hellenistic aesthetics
Pfeiffer 1952, 22–3); ‘the unwoundable Nemean Lion...parodied by Molorcus’
problem in dealing with the mice’ (Hutchinson 2008, 50, on SH 259 = fr. 177 Pf.). And
the list goes on.
82 AB 62, 65, 70; Kosmetatou 2004; Stewart 2005; Prioux 2007, 123.
83 Pausimachus(?) ap. Phld. De poem. 1 col. 43.9–12 Janko: ‘When Homer’s verses
are read out (ἀναγινώϲ|[κητ]α. .ι). they all appear greater and more beautiful (πάντα µ[ε]ίζω |
[καὶ κα]λ. λίω φ[αίνε]ται).’ Cf. Subl. 17.2: ‘[And so,] emotional and sublime features seem
closer to the mind’s eye, both because of a certain natural kinship and because of their
brilliance (περιλαµπθεῖσα).’
84 Two modern works that excel in the aesthetics and poetics of the detail and plays
of scale are Stewart 1993 and Schor 1987. Cf. also Clark 1999 (a reference I owe to
Alex Purves).
85 [Heracl.] Quaest. Hom. 36.4; cf. 46.7, 47.1–6.
86 Subl. 9.4.
87 Jacques 1960. Because Aratus seems to have been the first to make the term
remains a παχὺ γράµµα καὶ οὐ τορόν [“a fat and inelegant writing” (Callim. 398 Pf.,
originally with reference to Antimachus’ Lyde)] just the same, and Callimachus will
not have failed to recognize this’. And nonetheless, Aratus’ poem met with
unparalleled success upon its arrival in Alexandria (ibid.). See below.
90 καλός τε µέγας τε (Arat. 1.43; 1.244; 1.397 = Il. 21.108 = Od. 6.276, all final); καλοὶ
καὶ µεγάλοι (Arat.1.210); pace van Groningen 1953, 253–6. See Hutchinson 1988, 217
for the general point. If word-counts mean anything at all, µεγ- words appear forty-
four times in the Phainomena (not negated), while the formula καλός τε µέγας τε appears
three times and καλοὶ καὶ µεγάλοι appears once. λεπτ- words appear only four times.
There are words for ‘small’, but see id. 1988, ch. 5 on the ‘general grandeur’ of the
poem. Leonidas may have been fond of such contrasts. Cf. Leon. Anth. Pal. 9.51 = 21
G-P, which begins: εἰ καὶ µικρὸς ἰδεῖν καὶ ἐπ’ οὔδενος... and ends, τοῦτ’ δ’ ἐφ’ ἡµῖν /
τὠλίγον ὤρθωσεν σᾶµα πολυστροφίης.
91 Leon. Anth. Pal. 9.25; Callim. Ep. 29; Strab. 10.5.3; Ptolemaeus [Philadelphus]
hyperbolic scale.
93 The one intruder is Stesichoros’ Sack of Troy.
94 See now Valenzuela Montenegro 2004, and the fine, close analysis in Squire
forthcoming (2010).
95 Horsfall 1979, 33, though Michael Squire assures me that this is an overstatement,
as the texts are barely legible even with the aid of a magnifying glass – but what ancient
would have possessed such a device? (The evidence is controversial. The possibility
is affirmed in Forbes 1955, 190–91, but emphatically denied by Plantzos 1997). See
further Bienkowski 1891, 202: ‘scritti con lettere piccolissime quasi invisibili all’ occhio
nudo.’
96 Cf. 3C: Ἰλιὰς ῾Ο[µήρου] Θεοδώρηος ἡ{ι} τέχνη; 4N: ἀσπὶς ᾿Αχιλλῆος Θεοδώρηος καθ’
Ὅµηρον.
303
James L. Porter
97 Achillean, presumably because the object is itself shaped in the form of a shield
and is reminiscent, in its ecphrastic character, of the ecphrasis in Homer from which
it is derived. Cf. the bolder programmatic statement from another tablet (1A), in the
light of which this and the remaining tablets can be seen at the very least to complete
Homer and to give him his full measure: ‘learn the Theodorean art so that, by grasping
the order of Homer [whether this is Homer’s own narrative or the same as
reassembled on the tablets], you may have the [full] measure of all wisdom’ ([τέχνην
τὴν Θεοδ]ώρηον µάθε τάξιν ῾Οµήρου / ὄφρα δαεὶς πάσης µέτρον ἔχῃς σοφίας). There are
difficulties, to be sure. The layout is a problem on any reading. And the meaning of
τέχνη is disputed: is it art (viz., artistry) or individual artwork? See Sadurska 1964, 39
and Kazansky 1997, 57 who opt for the first choice; contrast Horsfall 1979 and
Valenzuela Montenegro 2004, 355, who opt for the second. The scholastic
connotation of “handbook”, vel sim. is unlikely; see Horsfall 1979, 27; 31; “epitome”
seems equally unlikely (pace Horsfall, ibid.). An intriguing parallel which could be
brought into play here is Callim. fr. 196.1 Pf.: [Ἀλ]εῖος ὁ Ζε[ύς], ἁ τέχνα δὲ Φειδία.) But
even if one were to follow the view that the expressions on the tablets stand for titles
and signatures, and if one were to take τέχνη in the sense of ‘artwork’, the same
meaning as I am proposing here could result: ‘Homer’s Iliad: an artwork à la
Theodoros’. Thanks to Gregory Hutchinson for helpful skeptical challenges on this
point.
98 Cf. Sadurska 1964, 9: ‘Cette façon de signer, étrange et exceptionelle...’; and ibid.,
p. 10 (cf. p. 39 and passim), noting how in the tablet inscriptions the noun τέχνη is
always qualified by the adjective Θεοδώρηος. Further, the puzzlement of Kazansky
1997, 57. What follows is an attempt at an explanation.
99 See n. 60 above. Theodoros was, to be sure, much more than a miniaturist, but
he was fondly remembered for this quality in later times. The archaizing character of
the Capitoline inscription (n. 96 above) has been observed by Valenzuela Montenegro
2004, 352 and by Squire forthcoming (2010), 000, n. 36. The single best parallel,
however, is Stesichoros S 89.7–8, from The Sack of Troy: δαεὶς σεµν[ᾶς ᾿Αθάνας] | µ.έ.τ[ρα]
τε καὶ σοφίαν του[ ; see Lehnus 1972, 54–5, who discovered the parallel, though an
echo with a papyrus fragment from Eudoxos of Knidos is undeniable (Pack2: 369; see
Bua 1971, 19–20; Horsfall 1979, 31) , as is a hitherto unnoticed parallel, an inscription
dating from ca. 450–425 BC (CEG 82.3 = IG I3 1506): [ἄκ]ρως µὲν σοφίας µέτρο[ν
ἐπι]στάµενος. (Cf. also AEMÖ 4 [1880] 59, I; 4th c.) However, see also Thgn. 876:
µέτρον ἔχων σοφίης. For a use of µέτρον similar to that translated in n. 97 above, viz.,
as taken in an agonistic and metapoetical sense, whereby Homeric poetics is again the
rival, see Hes. Op. 648–9: ‘I shall show you the measures (µέτρα) of the much-roaring
sea (πολυφλοίσβοιο θαλάσσης), I who have no expertise (σεσοφισµένος) at all in sea-
faring or boats’ (trans. Most), with Rosen 1990. The phraseology appears to be wholly
formulaic and archaic or classical, indeed.
100 See Valenzuela Montenegro 2004, 298–304, arguing for multiple hands and
signatories, against the assumption of a singular artist (held by Sadurska 1964, 10–15,
among others). If this is right, then my thesis that ‘Theodorean’ picks out a style
(modeled on the archaic artist) and not a single contemporary artist or his works ought
to have even greater plausibility. The dating is likewise thought to be various (but
harder to pin down). Two further considerations should be borne in mind. First,
Theodoros of Samos was remembered the way he remembered himself, as the
304
Against λεπτότης: Rethinking Hellenistic aesthetics
quintessential artist and technician of contrasting scales. In the account of his
miniature chariot by Pliny, we learn that Theodoros cast himself in a (probably life-
size) bronze statue (ipse se ex aere fudit) holding the marvelous miniature object in his
hand: ‘Besides its remarkable celebrity as a likeness, [the statue] is famous for its very
minute workmanship ( praeter similitudinis mirabilem famam magne suptilitate celebratur)’.
Already, in other words, we are confronted with a contrast of scales, one that Pliny’s
language mirrors (magne suptilitate). ‘The right hand holds a file, and three fingers of the
left hand originally held a little model of a chariot and four, but this has been taken
away to Palestrina as a marvel of smallness’ (HN, 34.83; trans. Rackham). So the
allusion to the technite-s Theodoros, or rather to the Theodorean techne-, seems absolutely
warranted. Secondly, a further precedent is found once again in Posidippus, who in
his own account of the same chariot resorts to the adjectival form of the artist’s proper
name: ‘...of the chariot, observe from up close / how great is the labor of the
Theodorean hand (τῆς Θεοδωρείης χειρὸς ὅσος κάµατος)’ (AB 67). Was Theodoros’
work already identified with a style in the time of Posidippus? Or did Posidippus’ use
of the adjective simply form an ingredient in the chain of coincidences that led to the
identification of the style of the tablets with Theodoros’ miniaturizing labors some six
centuries earlier? (But note again the contrast, ‘great labor / diminutive scale.’) Finally,
was the act of producing the tablets a typically Hellenistic act, aesthetically speaking,
or did it signal a harking back to an earlier aesthetic style? Surely, the attempt at a
‘reduced Homer’ is a gesture typical of a later, postclassical age, though there are some
earlier anticipations: the Cup of Nestor, Pigres EGF 65 (480 BCE), Metrodoros of
Lampsakos, etc. Most likely, what is needed is an expansion of our view of the
Hellenistic aesthetic to make provision for such continuities, rather than ruptures,
with the past. My suggestion about the allusions to Theodoros of Samos in ‘the
Theodorean art’ named in the Roman tablets has already been adopted and developed
in Squire, forthcoming,an excellent introduction to these ancient curiosities.
101 One of the tablets (8E) is exercised by this very question, still aflame from the
Alexandrian era. It begins, ‘...by Zenodotos,’ possibly referring to a study he may have
composed on the number of days in the Iliad. See Valenzuela Montenegro 2004, 204–
206 for the text and a translation.
102 See n. 46 above (where, however, the emphasis has usually been on emotional
literary-historical thesis, tends to emphasize the historical evolutions that are built into
these retellings of myth. I am drawing attention to the simultaneity of factors and their
shock value. To be sure, the divine childhood motif is borrowed from the Homeric
hymns, and is found elsewhere as well (see Grant 1929). But as both Grant and
Radke (and also Onians 1979, 126–8) observe, its use in the Hellenistic period
is both widespread and insistent, and hence arguably a literary and art-historical
signature.
106 Callim. Aet. fr. 1fr. 1.29–30 Pf.; cf. Aet. fr. 43.16–17 Pf. See Acosta-Hughes and
Stephens 2002 for an analysis of the sound dynamics of the poem, which is anticipated
by Reitzenstein 1931 (a neglected aspect of his argument); Krevans 1993; Ambühl
1995, on Callimachus’ adoption of the slender and sweet sounding style (the λιγὺς
305
James L. Porter
ἦχος) of the cicada over against the swollen noisy style (the ὄγκος) of the braying ass
(Callim. Aet. fr. 1.29–32; ; 31: ὀγκήσαιτο; see Hopkinson 1988, 96, ad loc., on the pun).
Further, Pendergraft 1995 on Aratus, who argues (in the wake of van Groningen 1953,
255) that leptos stands, in fact, for ‘pleasing aural qualities’. Clearly, there is more work
to be done on Callimachus’ poetics of sound.
107 See Porter 2010a.
108 Dion. Hal. Comp. 22 (110.8–9 U. R.): ἐῶντα τὴν ἀκρόασιν ἑνὸς κώλου συνεχοῦς
λαβεῖν φαντασίαν; cf. Aristox., Harm. 8: κατὰ τὴν τῆς αἰσθήσεως φαντασίαν.
109 See Porter 2010b.
110 Arist. Poet. 7.1450b34–51a6; trans. Hubbard, adapted.
111 The Hellenistic epigrammatic tradition ranges over everything from volcanic
Bibliography
Acosta-Hughes, B., and Stephens, S. A.
2002 ‘Rereading Callimachus’ Aetia Fragment 1’, CP 97, 238–55.
Ambühl, A.
1995 ‘Callimachus and the Arcadian asses: the Aitia Prologue and a lemma in the
London Scholion’, ZPE 105, 209–13.
Asmis, E.
1995 ‘Philodemus on censorship, moral utility, and formalism in poetry’, in
D. Obbink (ed.) Philodemus and Poetry: Poetic theory and practice in Lucretius,
Philodemus, and Horace, New York, 148–77.
Atherton, C.
1989 ‘Hand over fist: the failure of Stoic rhetoric’, CQ 38, 392–427.
Austin, C. and Bastianini, G. (eds)
2002 Posidippi Pellaei quae supersunt omnia. Milan, 2002.
Austin, C. and Olson, D
2004 Aristophanes. Thesmophoriazusae, Oxford.
Barthes, R.
1975 The Pleasure of the Text, translated by R. Miller, New York.
1977 ‘The Grain of the voice’, in R. Barthes, Image, Music, Text. (ed. S. Heath).
New York. 179–89.
Bartman, E.
1992 Ancient Sculptural Copies in Miniature, Leiden, New York, and Cologne.
306
Against λεπτότης: Rethinking Hellenistic aesthetics
Bastianini, G.
1996 ‘κατὰ λεπτόν in Callimaco (fr. 1.11 Pfeiffer)’, in F. Adorno and M. Serena
Funghi (eds) ῾Οδοὶ διζήσιος. Le vie della ricerca: Studi in onore di Francesco Adorno,
Florence, 69–80.
Benedetto, G.
1990 ‘Una congettura di Augusto Rostagni (Call. fr. 1.11 Pf.)’, Quaderno di storia
32, 115–37.
Bergquist, B.
1990 ‘Sympotic space: a functional aspect of Greek dining rooms’, in O. Murray
(ed.) Sympotica: A symposium on the symposion, Oxford, 37–65.
Bernhardy, G.
1836 Grundriss der griechischen Literatur, mit einem vergleichenden Überblick der römischen
2 vols. in 3, Halle.
Bienkowski, P.
1891 ‘Lo Scudo di Achille’, Mitteilungen des Kaiserlich Deutschen Archaeologischen
Instituts, Roemische Abtheilung 6, 183–207.
Bing, P.
1998 ‘Between literature and the monuments’, in A. Harder, et al. (eds) Genre in
Hellenistic Poetry, Groningen, 21–45.
2005 ‘The politics and poetics of geography in the Milan Posidippus, Section
One: On Stones (AB 1–20)’, in Gutzwiller (ed.) 2005, 119–40.
2009 ‘Reimagining Posidippus’, in P. Bing, The Scroll and the Marble: Studies in
reading and reception in Hellenistic poetry, Ann Arbor,177–93.
Bua, M. T.
1971 I giuochi alfabetici delle tavole iliache, Atti della Accademia nazionale dei Lincei.
Memorie, Classe di scienze morali, storiche e filologiche. ser. 8, v. 16, fasc.
1 Rome.
Bugh, G. R.
2006 ‘Hellenistic military developments’, in idem (ed.) The Cambridge Companion to
the Hellenistic World, Cambridge, 265–94.
Cameron, A.
1995 Callimachus and his Critics, Princeton.
Carson, A.
1999 Economy of the Unlost: Reading Simonides of Keos with Paul Celan, Princeton.
Caston, V.
1997 ‘Epiphenomenalisms, ancient and modern’, The Philosophical Review 106,
309–63.
Chiron, P.
2001 Un rhéteur méconnu: Démétrios (Ps.-Démétrios de Phalére). Essai sur les mutations
de la théorie du style à l’époque hellénistique, Paris.
Clark, T. J.
1999 ‘Pollock’s smallness’, in K. Varnedoe and P. Karmel (eds) Jackson Pollock:
New approaches, New York, 15–31.
Clausen, W. V.
1964 ‘Callimachus and Latin poetry’, GRBS 5, 181–96.
Coleman, K. M. (ed.)
1988 Statius: Silvae IV. Oxford.
307
James L. Porter
Couat, A. H.
1882 La poésie alexandrine sous les trois premiers Ptolémées (324–222 av. J. C.), Paris.
Day, J. W.
1989 ‘Rituals in stone: early Greek grave epigrams and monuments’, JHS 109,
16–28.
Delattre, D. (ed.)
2007 Philodème de Gadara: Sur la musique. Livre IV, 2 vols., Paris.
Droysen, J. G.
1833 Geschichte Alexanders des Grossen, Hamburg.
1893–94 Kleine Schriften zur alten Geschichte. Edited by E. Hübner, 2 vols., Leipzig.
1998 [1836–43] Geschichte des Hellenismus. Edited by E. Bayer. Introduction by H.-J.
Gehrke, 3 vols., Darmstadt.
Eagleton, T.
1998 ‘Walter Benjamin: towards a revolutionary criticism (1981)’, in T. Eagleton,
The Eagleton Reader, ed. by S. Regan, Oxford, 194–211.
Fantuzzi, M. and R. Hunter
2004 Tradition and Innovation in Hellenistic Poetry, Cambridge.
Feuerbach, A.
1855 Der vaticanische Apollo: Eine Reihe archäologisch-ästhetischer Betrachtungen, 2nd
ed., Stuttgart and Augsburg. (1st ed. 1833, Nürnberg: Campe.)
Flemming, R.
2003 ‘Empires of knowledge: medicine and health in the Hellenistic world’, in
A. Erskine (ed.), A Companion to the Hellenistic World, Oxford, 449–63.
Forbes, R. J.
1955 Studies in Ancient Technology, vol. 5. Leiden.
Fuqua, C.
2007 ‘Two aspects of the Lithika’, Classical Philology 102: 281–91.
Grant, M. A.
1929 ‘The childhood of the gods’, The Classical Journal 24, 585–93.
Greenberg, C.
1986–93 [1940] ‘Towards a newer Laocoon’, in id., The Collected Essays and Criticism.
Translated by C. Greenberg, 4 vols., Chicago. 1: 23–38. (First published in
The Partisan Review, vol. 7, no. 4 [1940] 296–310.)
Gutzwiller, K.
2002a ‘Art’s echo: the tradition of Hellenistic ecphrastic epigram’, in M. A. Harder,
et al. (eds) Hellenistic Epigrams, Leuven, Belgium and Sterling, Va., 85–112.
2002b ‘Posidippus on statuary’, in G. Bastianini and A. Casanova (eds) Il papiro di
Posidippo un anno dopo: Atti del Convegno internazionale di studi, Firenze 13–14
giugno 2002, Florence, 41–60.
2005 ‘The literariness of the Milan Papyrus, or “What difference a book?’’’, in
Gutzwiller (ed.) 2005, 287–319.
2007 A Guide to Hellenistic Literature, Malden, MA.
Gutzwiller, K. (ed.)
2005 The New Posidippus: A Hellenistic poetry book, New York.
Hansen, P. A.
1976 ‘Pithecusan humour: the interpretation of Nestor’s Cup reconsidered’,
Glotta 54, 25–43.
308
Against λεπτότης: Rethinking Hellenistic aesthetics
Heyne, C. G.
1785 [1763] ‘Disputantur nonnulla de Genio Saeculi Ptolemaeorum’, in id.,
Opvscvla academica collecta et animadversionibvs locvpletata. 6 vols., Göttingen, 1:
76–134.
Hopkinson, N.
1988 A Hellenistic Anthology, Cambridge.
Horsfall, N.
1979 ‘Stesichorus at Bovillae?’ JHS 99, 26–48.
Hutchinson, G.
1988 Hellenistic Poetry, Oxford.
2006 ‘Hellenistic epic and Homeric form’, in M. J. Clarke et al. (eds) Epic
Interactions: Perspectives on Homer, Virgil, and the epic tradition. Presented to Jasper
Griffin by former pupils, Oxford, 105–29.
2008 Talking Books: Readings in Hellenistic and Roman books of poetry, Oxford.
Jacques, J.-M.
1960 ‘Sur un acrostiche d’Aratos’, Révue des études anciennes 62, 48–60.
Janko, R.
2000 Philodemus: On Poems. Oxford.
Kassel, R.
1987 Die Abgrenzung des Hellenismus in der griechischen Literaturgeschichte, Berlin and
New York.
Kazansky, N. N.
1997 Principles of the Reconstruction of a Fragmentary Text (New Stesichorean Papyri).
Saint-Petersburg: Russian Academy of Sciences, Institute of Linguistic
Studies, Institute of Foreign Languages.
Kosmetatou, E.
2004 ‘Vision and visibility: art historical theory paints a portrait of new
leadership in Posidippus’ Andriantopoiika’, in B. Acosta-Hughes et al. (eds)
Labored in Papyrus Leaves: Perspectives on an epigram collection attributed to
Posidippus (P.Mil.Vogl. VIII 309), Washington, D.C. and Cambridge, MA,
187–211.
Krevans, N.
1993 ‘Fighting against Antimachus: the ‘Lyde’ and the ‘Aetia’ reconsidered’, in
M. A. Harder et al. (eds) Callimachus, Groningen, 149–60.
Kuttner, A.
2005 ‘Cabinet fit for a queen: the Λιθικά as Posidippus’ Gem Museum’, in
Gutzwiller (ed.) 2005, 141–63.
Lehnus, L.
1972 ‘Note stesicoree (Pap. Oxy. 2506 e 2619)’, Studi classici e orientali 21, 52–5.
2006 ‘Prima e dopo αἱ κατὰ λεπτόν’, in G. Bastianini and A. Casanova, eds
Callimaco cent’anni di papiri: Atti del convegno internazionale di studi, Firenze,
9–10 giugno 2005, Florence, 133–47.
Lesky, A.
1971 Geschichte der griechischen Literatur, 3rd ed., Berne and Munich.
Lohse, G.
1973 ‘Die Aitien Prolog des Kallimachos als Reproduktion von Wirklichkeit’,
Antike und Abendland 19, 20–43.
309
James L. Porter
Männlein-Robert, I.
2007 Stimme, Schrift und Bild: Zum Verhältnis der Künste in der hellenistischen Dichtung,
Heidelberg.
Onians, J.
1979 Art and Thought in the Hellenistic Age: The Greek world view 350–50 BC, London.
Pendergraft, M. L. B.
1995 ‘Euphony and etymology: Aratus’ Phaenomena’, Syllecta Classica 6, 43–67.
Petrain, D.
2005 ‘Gems, metapoetics, and value: Greek and Roman responses to a third-
century discourse on precious stones’, TAPA 135, 329–57.
Pfeiffer, R.
1952 ‘The image of the Delian Apollo and Apolline ethics’, Journal of the Warburg
and Courtauld Institutes 15, 20–32.
1955 ‘The future of studies in the field of Hellenistic poetry’, JHS 75, 69–73.
Plantzos, D.
1997 ‘Crystals and lenses in the Graeco-Roman world’, AJA 101: 451–64.
Pollitt, J. J.
1974 The Ancient View of Greek Art: Criticism, history, and terminology, New Haven.
1999 Art and Experience in Classical Greece, Cambridge (1st edn 1972).
Ponge, F.
1994 Selected Poems. Edited by M. Guiton. Translated by C. K. Williams et al.,
Winston-Salem, NC.
Porter, J. I.
1989 ‘Philodemus on material difference’, Cronache Ercolanesi 19, 149–78.
1995 ‘οἱ κριτικοί: a reassessment’, in J. G. J. Abbenes, et al., (eds) Greek Literary
Theory after Aristotle: A collection of papers in honour of D. M. Schenkeveld,
Amsterdam, 83–109.
2001 ‘Des sons qu’on ne peut entendre: Cicéron, les ‘kritikoi’ et la tradition du
sublime dans la critique littéraire’, in C. Auvray-Assayas and D. Delattre
(eds) Cicéron et Philodème: La polémique en philosophie, Paris, 315–41.
2006 ‘Feeling Classical: classicism and ancient literary criticism’, in J. I. Porter
(ed.) Classical Pasts: The classical traditions of Greece and Rome, Princeton,
301–52.
2007 ‘Lasus of Hermione, Pindar, and the riddle of S ’, CQ 57, 1–21.
2009 ‘Hellenism and modernity’, in George Boys-Stones et al. (eds) The Oxford
Handbook of Hellenic Studies, Oxford, 1–18.
2010a ‘Language as a system in ancient rhetoric and grammar’, in E. Bakker (ed.)
A Companion to the Ancient Greek Language, Chichester, 512–23.
2010b The Origins of Aesthetic Thought in Ancient Greece: Matter, sensation, and experience,
Cambridge.
forthcoming Literary Aesthetics After Aristotle, Cambridge.
in progress On the Sublime.
Préaux, C.
1978 Le monde hellénistique: la Grèce et l’Orient de la mort d’Alexandre à la conquête
romaine de la Grèce, 323–146 av. J.-C, 2 vols. in 6, Paris.
Prioux, É.
2007 Regards alexandrins: histoire et théorie des arts dans l’épigramme hellénistique, Leuven.
310
Against λεπτότης: Rethinking Hellenistic aesthetics
Radke, G.
2007 Die Kindheit des Mythos: die Erfindung der Literaturgeschichte in der Antike,
Munich..
Ransom, J. C.
1941 ‘Wanted: an ontological critic’, in id., The New Criticism. Norfolk, CT. 279–
336.
Reitzenstein, E.
1931 ‘Zur Stiltheorie des Kallimachos’, in E. Fraenkel and H. Fränkel (eds)
Festschrift Richard Reitzenstein zum 2. April 1931, Leipzig and Berlin, 23–69.
Reitzenstein, R.
1970 [1893 Epigramm und Skolion: Ein Beitrag zur Geschichte der alexandrinischen
Dichtung, Hildesheim.
Rosen, R. M.
1990 ‘Poetry and sailing in Hesiod’s Works and Days,’ Classical Antiquity 9, 99–113.
Rostagni, A.
1956 Scritti Minori II, 1: Hellenica-Hellenistica, Turin.
Rouveret, A., Dubel, S. et al.
2006 Couleurs et matières dans l’antiquité: Textes, techniques et pratiques, Paris.
Sadurska, A.
1964 Les tables iliaques, Warsaw.
Sbordone, F.
1976 (ed.) Ricerche sui papiri ercolanesi, vol. 2, Naples.
Schiesaro, A.
1998 ‘Latin literature and Greece’, Dialogos 5, 144–9.
Schneider, W. J.
2001 ‘Phidiae Putavi: Martial und der Hercules Epitrapezios des Novius Vindex’,
Mnemosyne 54, 697–720.
Schor, N.
1987 Reading in Detail: Aesthetics and the feminine, New York.
Scodel, R.
1992 ‘Inscription, absence and memory: epic and early epitaph’, Studi italiani di
filologia classica 10, 57–76.
Shklovsky, V.
1962 [1923] ‘Form and material in art’, in P. Blake and M. Hayward (eds) Dissonant
Voices in Soviet Literature, [New York], 20–8.
1965 [1917] ‘Art as technique’, in L. T. Lemon and M. J. Reis (eds) Russian Formalist
Criticism: Four Essays, Lincoln, Nebraska, 3–24.
Squire, M.
forthcoming
(2010) ‘Visualising epic on the Tabulae Iliacae’, in H. Lovatt and C. Vout
(eds) Visualising Epic, Cambridge.
forthcoming
‘Texts on the table: the Tabulae Iliacae in their Hellenistic literary context’, JHS.
Steiner, D.
1993 ‘Pindar’s “Oggetti Parlanti”’, HSCP 95, 159–80.
Stephens, S.
2004a ‘Posidippus’s Poetry Book: where Macedon meets Egypt’, in W. V. Harris
311
James L. Porter
and G. Ruffini (eds) Ancient Alexandria between Egypt and Greece, Leiden and
Boston, 64–86.
2004b ‘For you, Arsinoe...’, in B. Acosta-Hughes et al. (eds) Labored in Papyrus
Leaves: Perspectives on an epigram collection attributed to Posidippus (P. Mil. Vogl.
VIII 309), Washington, D.C. and Cambridge, MA, 161–76.
Stewart, A.
1990 Greek Sculpture: An exploration, 2 vols. New Haven.
1993 ‘Narration and allusion in the Hellenistic baroque’, in P. J. Holliday (ed.),
Narrative and Event in Ancient Art, Cambridge, 130–74.
2005 ‘Posidippos and the truth in sculpture’, in Gutzwiller (ed.) 2005, 183–205.
2006 ‘Hellenistic art: two dozen innovations’, in G. R. Bugh (ed.), The Cambridge
Companion to the Hellenistic World, Cambridge, 158–85.
Stewart, S.
1993 On Longing: Narratives of the miniature, the gigantic, the souvenir, the collection,
Durham, (1st ed. 1984, Baltimore).
Susemihl, F.
1891 Geschichte der griechischen Litteratur in der Alexandrinerzeit, 2 vols., Leipzig.
Tilley, C.
2004 The Materiality of Stone: Explorations in landscape phenomenology, Oxford and
New York.
Valenzuela Montenegro, N.
2004 Die Tabulae Iliacae: Mythos und Geschichte im Spiegel einer Gruppe frühkaiserzeitlicher
Miniaturreliefs, Berlin.
van Groningen, B. A.
1953 La poèsie verbale grecque: Essai de mise au point, Mededelingen der Koninklijke
Nederlandse Akademie van Wetenschappen, Afd. Letterkunde n.s. 26,
no. 4 Amsterdam.
Visscher, F. de.
1962 Héraclès Epitrapezios, Paris.
Weinreich, O.
1918 ‘Die Heimat des Epigrammatikers Poseidippos’, Hermes 53, 434–9.
Wick, C.
2000 (ms.). ‘ “The Best of Nature”: Naturphänomene und Naturkatastrophen in
hellenistischen Epigrammen’, Paper read at Fifth Groningen Workshop,
‘Hellenistic Epigrams,’ 30 August–1 September, 2000.
Wilamowitz-Moellendorff, U. von
1924 Hellenistische Dichtung in der Zeit des Kallimachos, 2 vols., Berlin.
1943 [1882] (ed.) Callimachus, Hymni editio in usum academicum iuxta quartam
Wilamowitzianam iterata, Florence. (1st ed. 1882)
Wimmel, W.
1960 Kallimachos in Rom: Die Nachfolge seines apologetischen Dichtens in der Augusteerzeit,
Wiesbaden.
312
14
Peter Schultz
313
Peter Schultz
Greek art did change profoundly under Alexander, and the invigorating
combination of an audacious, opinionated and uniquely successful young
king and a set of supremely talented artists certainly had much to do with
it. So the fact that some of the period’s innovations had important classical
antecedents is essentially irrelevant. Antecedents can help us to measure
and contextualize innovations, but they can neither explain them nor
exhaust their meaning.4
Of course, neither scholar ever adopts a rigid or polemic stance about the
significance of stylistic continuity or evolution in the Hellenistic period.5
Even so, their remarks do exemplify two well-established interpretive
positions. The first acknowledges the existence of stylistic precedents for
certain characteristics of Hellenistic art and then suggests there might be
something amiss with our chronological or interpretive categories. The
second acknowledges the existence of stylistic precedents for certain
characteristics of Hellenistic art and then suggests that we focus on the
period’s innovations.
Both positions have much to offer. For the purposes of this brief
chapter, however, I will avoid any kind of ‘debate’ between the two.
I choose this line for two reasons. First, since it can be shown that both
perspectives provide useful bases for reading Hellenistic visual culture,
arguments about which position is ‘more correct’ inevitably become
contests of subjective emphases and thus unhelpful for our present
project.6 Second, I am unsure whether either position frames the problem
of stylistic precedents for Hellenistic sculpture in a way that is useful for
starting a discussion regarding possible connections between stylistic
continuity and meaning. In other words, identifying theoretical and stylistic
precedents is important, but pointing at them, questioning them or using
them to challenge traditional style periodizations – as important as these
projects are – may not allow us to begin asking what this stylistic continuity
may have meant for the creators, audiences and communities of the
Hellenistic age.7
And it is this last issue that seems to deserve some further attention.
Indeed, since the Hellenistic baroque is often seen as a key aesthetic
achievement of the Hellenistic period, discussing some possible
connections between ‘origins’ of the style and the style’s significance seems
like an appropriate subject for a book that explores the creation of the
Hellenistic world.
With this goal in mind, I will try to accomplish two objectives in this
chapter. First, I will try to show that some underlying stylistic and
conceptual components of the Hellenistic baroque were ‘invented’ in
Athens during the late fifth and early fourth centuries BC. Second, I will
314
Style, continuity and the Hellenistic baroque
try (briefly) to suggest one possible option as to what this continuity might
mean for us and for Hellenistic viewers with the hopes that these
suggestions might fuel further discussion. To develop this schema, I have
divided this chapter into two sections. In Part One – ‘Style and continuity’
– I will document some structural and conceptual continuities that exist
between ‘classical’ sculpture created ca. 450–350 BC and ‘baroque’ sculpture
created ca. 250–150 BC. In Part Two – ‘Style and meaning’ – I will very
briefly propose a hypothesis (a possibility, really) as to how and why these
continuities may have been significant to the sculptors, patrons and
communities who produced, commissioned and appreciated ‘baroque’
sculpture during the Hellenistic period.
315
Peter Schultz
316
Style, continuity and the Hellenistic baroque
This is one of our greatest challenges when we confront the idea of the
Hellenistic baroque as a stylistic and conceptual ‘system’ and when we
tackle the idea of what a ‘baroque stylistic tradition’ might have meant in
the Hellenistic age. When we consider revolutionary personalities like
Alexander and his successors, when we see the Hellenistic world
dramatically born in what seems like mere moments, when the Greek
world itself seems (at first glance, at least) to have been changed utterly, it
becomes all to easy to assume that the visual arts automatically and
simultaneously reflected and responded to these new realities. But is this
necessarily the case? On one level, I think that it is. But on another, I would
like to resist this initial response and spend some time discussing the
importance of the stylistic and conceptual continuities that lie beneath the
changing forms of this transitional age. For this reason, I have obviously
chosen to compare objects that I think exemplify these continuities for the
purpose of this chapter. But other choices could have been made and with
them other arguments.
In choosing the specific objects that follow as my foci, I have tried to
observe a few functional conditions. The first and most obvious is that I
have tried to confine my discussions to sculpture for which we have
reasonably secure dates. The second is that I have tried to compare
sculptures that belong to the same basic type. Finally, though stylistically
different, I have tried to keep in mind that these objects are all conceptually
similar. This similarity resides in the fact that these sculptures have come
to represent (for us) some of the most significant formal developments or
possibilities of their respective periods. Now whether or not this type of
statement will ever be a ‘true’ description of the sculpture in question –
whether our opinion finds parallel in antiquity and how we can begin to
speculate on such a possibility – is one of the oldest and most complex
problems in the study of ancient culture.15 For our purposes here, it is
sufficient to acknowledge the basic contingency of our statements, to
confess that many reasons for stylistic change might be suggested (intended
audiences, different media, different patrons, etc.), to admit that just
because we find what we are looking for does not mean that we are not
looking for the truth and to hope that this satisfies.
317
Peter Schultz
318
Style, continuity and the Hellenistic baroque
Fig. 1. Torso of Zeus from the Great Altar at Pergamon. A view of Zeus’s torso from
the east side of the gigantomachy frieze of the Great Altar at Pergamon,
Pergamonmuseum, Berlin. Marble, ca. 180–150 BC. Photo: Author.
being are formally merged and re-presented.21 Indeed, the god’s slashing
stance across the frieze is the formal device by which the sculptors of the
frieze sensually evoke a sort of divine metaphysic: Zeus is a personified
thunderbolt – the ïdea of divine power incarnate. This same action prompts
the falling mantle and subsequent revelation of his super-human anatomy.
And Zeus’ exaggerated body is indeed worth special attention. Each muscle
group has been identified and inflated beyond the boundaries of anatomical
reality.22 His pectorals ( pectoralis major) are huge, as are his abdominals (rectus
abdominis). His ribs are not evident, since they have been obscured by
multiple bands of inflated front-laterals (seratus interor). There is a real
concern with testing the limits of the male form. Again, this concern with
the physical seems to extend to the metaphysical. In addition to recalling
the Stoic Kleanthes’ third-century Hymn to Zeus (ll. 6–7) – ‘So will I praise
thee, ever singing of thy might, by whom the whole wide firmament is
swayed!’ – the god’s torso also reminds us of Theocritus’ baroque warrior-
king Amykos (Id. 22. 48–51) whose ‘huge chest and broad back swelled
319
Peter Schultz
like the iron flesh of a hammered statue’ and whose ‘muscles jutted out like
rounded boulders, polished smooth by the whirling onrush of a winter
torrent’. Considered within this poetic context, Zeus’ torso becomes a sensual
manifestation of the god’s divine power. 23 Zeus’ baroque anatomy suggests
the colossal, the corporeal and the cosmic – all made manifest in stone.
Now, stand the Pergamene Zeus next to the image of Poseidon from the
west pediment of the Parthenon carved 437–432 BC at the height of the
Periclean building project (Figs. 2–3). The comparison is well-known.24
Like the Pergamene Zeus, the west pediment Poseidon lunges dramatically
sideways, this time to his left. From Carrey’s drawing, we know that
Poseidon, like Zeus, held his weapon, the trident, in his upraised fist.
Racing with Athena for the patronage of Athens, the sea god is a powerful
and dynamic competitor captured in midst of dramatic action, a player in
a spectacular, theatrical scene.25
While the pose and gesture of the two gods are very close, it is
Poseidon’s over-emphatic musculature (seen particularly well from the
side, Fig. 3) that makes the comparison compelling. Like the Zeus from
Pergamon, each muscle group has been identified and expanded past
the limits of the norm. Poseidon’s pectorals are very large and very
pronounced, as are his abdominals. His ribs are evident and are paired with
multiple bands of inflated front-laterals. While a hint of classical restraint
might be detected here (although I wonder how much of that has to do
with the fragmentary condition of the piece), there remains an intense
emphasis on inflating the expressive range of the male torso. Again, this
concern with the body extends to the spirit. Kleanthes and Theocritus’
verses could apply nicely to the west pediment Poseidon, but there is no
need to look into the Hellenistic period. Pseudo-Arion, writing his Hymn
to Poseidon at the beginning of the fourth century, is just as evocative of a
baroque sensibility ‘Highest of the gods, marine Poseidon of the golden
trident, earth-holder bulging with might!’ Can there be a better lyric
description of Poseidon’s mighty frame? Considered within this poetic
context, Poseidon’s torso, like that of Zeus, becomes the physical
embodiment or manifestation of the god’s own kind of swelling, tidal force.
Again, like our Hellenistic Zeus, his baroque anatomy suggests the colossal,
the corporeal and the cosmic.26
When we see these images together, it seems clear that something
connects them. While there are formal differences, to be sure – the
undercutting of Zeus’ anatomy is more emphatic than that of Poseidon, for
example – when we look at the two torsos side by side it becomes rather
hard to tell which is the ‘real’ baroque at all. In this sense, it is easy to see
why Immo Beyer once argued that the Poseidon torso was, in fact, a
320
Style, continuity and the Hellenistic baroque
Figs 2–3. Torso of Poseidon the Parthenon. The fragmentary torso of a central figure
of the Parthenon’s west pediment, Athens. Parthenon West Pediment British Museum
‘M.’. Preserved ht. 83 cm, Pentelic marble, ca. 438–432 BC, perhaps the work of
Pheidias and his circle, although much controversy remains. Acr. Mus. 885 + 959
(front chest and abdomen) and BM London M (arms and back). Photo: Author.
321
Peter Schultz
322
Style, continuity and the Hellenistic baroque
Fig. 4. The Nike of Samothrace. A victory dedication set in the Sanctuary of the Great
Gods, Samothrace. Restored ht. 3.28 m (including wings), Parian marble, ca. 200 BC
(although much debate remains on this point). The work has been attributed to a
Rhodian workshop (with much controversy). Louvre MA 2369. Photo: Author.
323
Peter Schultz
was originally fashioned from several pieces of Parian marble (a fact that
allowed some dramatic liberties to be taken with her drapery) and was
recovered in multiple fragments. Her dress is complicated and seems to
be made up of two overlapping garments – a heavy himation and a
sleeveless chiton – that are shown folded and refolded multiple times. The
arrangement and position of these garments is controversial, primarily
because of the wind-swept environment that they indicate.30 Nevertheless,
the complexity, doubling and overlapping of her dress added to the
richness and complexity of her garments and thus allowed her sculptor the
freedom to explore and expand the formal possibilities of her drapery.
Alighting on her ship, waves crashing beneath its prow, Nike embodies
everything that we have come to expect from the baroque mode. While there
always remains a sense of underlying, bodily mass in her form, the Nike’s
sculptor has worked hard to cut his drapery loose from all real restraint. On
the one hand – especially at her stomach and breasts – Nike’s drapery
cradles, clutches and clings to her powerful and highly provocative body,
both describing and obscuring the sensual flesh beneath.31 On the other
hand – at her legs and hips – Nike’s drapery seems to have been released
from its task of outlining the human figure and is allowed to become raw,
expressive form in its own right. The energetic, the momentary, the ephemeral
– all these traditional aspects of nike- are captured here. The subtle, light
incisions that run over her drapery further this effect. The small, concentric
furls of drapery that sweep over her proper left hip and then rise away from
her body proper at her pubis have almost nothing to do with the rational
fall of wind-swept cloth (indeed, should not the gusts Nike rides have
carried this fluttering filigree in the opposite direction?) but everything to
do with a baroque illusion of force and dynamism, torsion and energy.
There is no doubt that the drapery of the Nike of Samothrace stands at
the zenith of the Hellenistic baroque, especially when it comes to her
drapery. And once again, as we saw with the Pergamene Zeus, the conceptual
concerns that governed her style and form seem to have some important
precedents in the fifth and early fourth centuries BC that speak to a long
standing interest in a baroque aesthetic.
Sometime around 380 BC, the citizens of the small Peloponnesian city of
Epidauros launched a program of monumentalization at the nearby healing
sanctuary of Asklepios. Whether in response to the Athenian plague or
other political factors, Epidaurian Asklepios had acquired an international
reputation during the last quarter of the fifth century.32 This change in
status was accompanied by a demand for sumptuous material votives and
thus attracted a number of important sculptors from Athens and elsewhere
to work on the expensive Pentelic elements of Asklepios’ new cult building.33
324
Style, continuity and the Hellenistic baroque
Fig. 5–6. Nike from the Temple of Asklepios at Epidauros. An akroteria from the
eastern pediment of the temple of Asklepios at Epidauros, Athens. Restored height
ca. 1.7 m, Pentelic marble, ca. 380 BC. This figure may be the work of Timotheos; his
contract is recorded on IG IV2 102A lines 88 – 90. National Archaeological Museum,
Athens 162. Photo: Courtesy Deutsches Archäologisches Institut, Athens; Gösta
Hellner, negs. 1974/1161 & 1170. All rights reserved.
325
Peter Schultz
326
Style, continuity and the Hellenistic baroque
Fig. 7. ‘Iris’ from the west pediment of the Parthenon. A fragmentary torso from the
Parthenon’s west pediment, Athens. Parthenon West Pediment British Museum “N.”
Preserved ht. 1.35 m, Pentelic marble, ca. 438–432 BC, perhaps the work of Pheidias
and his circle, although much controversy remains. Photo: Author.
327
Peter Schultz
328
Style, continuity and the Hellenistic baroque
Fig. 8. Alkyoneus from the Great Altar at Pergamon. A view of the suffering
Alkyoneus from the east frieze of the gigantomachy of the Great Altar at Pergamon,
Pergamonmuseum, Berlin. Marble, ca. 180–150 BC. Photo: Author.
329
Peter Schultz
Figs 9–10. Head of a warrior from Tegea. A fragmentary head from the pedimental
sculpture of the temple of Athena Alea at Tegea. Preserved ht. 32.6 cm, marble, ca.
350–340 BC. This figure may be the work of Skopas or his workshop, although much
controversy remains. National Archaeological Museum, Athens 180. Photo: Author.
Fig. 11. Face of a centaur from the Parthenon’s south metopes. A detail of a centaur’s
face from the south metope 2 of the Parthenon, Athens. South Parthenon Metopes
British Museum 2. Preserved ht. of metope ca. 1.37, Pentelic marble, 447–442 BC,
perhaps the work of Pheidias and his circle, although much controversy remains.
Photo: Katherine Schwab © 2006.
330
Style, continuity and the Hellenistic baroque
Eyes are over-wide, deeply undercut with their outer corners consistently
pulled down for expressive effect. Brows are always deeply and emphatically
furrowed. Mouths are consistently open; the drill is employed for all. In
addition to these features of physiognomy, another consistent trope is the
bent neck with either the hair or beard being pulled. Of course, in each
case we are dealing with a victim, so there is a certain amount of emotional
content that is easy to confuse with emotive form. But look closely at the
upper eyelids of our centaur and compare them to those of Alkyoneus
from Pergamon. Clearly there are some differences of technique, but the
basic effect and the basic conceptual goal – the dramatic, pathetic, upward
gaze of sorrow – is quite similar and is produced on a comparable
underlying formal structure.42 And, once again, it is the sculpture of the
Parthenon that seems to provide a formal and stylistic launching point for
baroque physiognomies.
331
Peter Schultz
332
Style, continuity and the Hellenistic baroque
Acknowledgements
I am grateful to the Department of Classics at the University of Cincinnati
for a Tytus Summer Fellowship and to Concordia College for a generous
grant from the Hendrickson Fine Arts Endowment; both of these awards
facilitated the initial research of this chapter in the summer of 2006. This
paper was written in the Carl B. Ylvisaker Library at Concordia College in
2008 and 2009; I am happy to thank Erika Rux, Amy Soma and Leah
Anderson for their generous (and patient!) assistance during the course of
its composition. It is also a pleasure to thank the following friends and
colleagues who have discussed various aspects of this project with me:
George Connell, Kathryn Gutzwiller, Craig Hardiman, Eddie Schmoll,
Kris Seaman and Olin Storvick. I am especially grateful to Andrew Stewart
for his frank criticisms of the argument and much helpful advice. Andrew
Erskine’s endurance regarding my completion of this text is testament to
the definition of patience. All mistakes are mine.
Notes
1 For stylistic innovation in Hellenistic sculpture and the ‘Hellenistic baroque’ see,
for example: Krahmer 1924, 138–40; Bieber 1961, 3–6; Stewart 1979, 137–9; Pollitt
1986, 1–16; Smith 1993, 18; Stewart 2006, 158–9; Schultz and von den Hoff 2007,
1–9. Some (see, for example, Havelock 1981, 113 and Carpenter 1960, 208–9) would
see the ‘invention’ of the baroque as a late third- or second-century phenomenon.
2 For stylistic continuity in Hellenistic sculpture and the ‘Hellenistic baroque’ see,
for example: Schuchhardt 1959; Brown 1973; Stewart 1979, 5, 9, 11; Ridgway 1990,
3–12; Robertson 1993, 84–101; Ridgway 1999, 7–8, 40–2; von den Hoff 2003 and
Bergemann 2007.
3 Robertson 1993, 84–5.
4 Stewart 2006, 158.
5 See, for example, Robertson 1981, 194–7 or Stewart 1993.
6 See, for example, Robertson 1993, 90–1; Fullerton 1998b; Donohue 2005;
Osborne 2007 and Schultz 2007a on this particular issue of style, rhetoric and
‘innovation’.
333
Peter Schultz
7 Indeed, most discussions of the Hellenistic baroque revolve around the definition
of a set of stylistico-formal characteristics and the debate about when and where these
characteristics can be observed in the archaeological record of the Hellenistic period.
See, for example, Krahmer 1923/24; Thiersch 1931, 364–7; Alscher 1957, 162–4;
Laurenzi 1965; Merker 1973, 11–14; Stewart 1979, 9–25; Pollitt 1986, 113–18; Andreae
1988, 114–34; Osada 1993; Kunze 1996; Moreno 1994, 127–46, 359–413, 605–46;
Pollitt 2000; Ridgway 2000a, 39–42. Pful 1930 is an important early step away from
this tradition. Stewart (1993; 2005 and 2006) and G. Zanker (2004) provide the
powerful and fundamental exceptions in English.
8 Style is here defined as the distinct combination of physical and formal
characteristics – scale, mass, shape, color, line and texture – evident in a given set of
objects and as the conceptual frame that these physical and formal characteristics
mediate. In general terms, the arguments that sustain the use of stylistic analysis as a
tool for investigating social and cultural meaning were first formulated by
Winckelmann and then refined by Arnold Houser (1951), Meyer Schapiro (1953) and
Ludger Alscher (1956; 1957). For the importance of style specifically in archaeological
theory and practice, see Shanks and Tilley 1992, 137–71, and Hodder and Hutson
2003, 59–65, both with bibliographies. For socio-stylistic analysis of material culture,
see Borbein 1973, Barnard 2001, 115–42; 168–93, Hölscher 2002, Elsner 2003 and
now Bol 2004, all with bibliographies. Recent case studies by Shanks and Tilley 1992,
172–240, Neer 2002 and Olson 2002, 137–62, have reestablished the significance of
this traditional type of analysis for contextual archaeologists and art historians.
9 Recent case studies in which the model is applied to Greek sculpture: Harrison
1988, Brouskari 1999, 16–52, Touloupa 2002, 68–76 and Bol 2004 among innumerable
others. General critique of the ‘normative model’: Shanks and Tilley 1992, 138–9.
Specific critique of the model: Ridgway, e.g. 1997, 364–6, and 2004, 539–56, 627–39,
Keesling 2003, 36–62 and Schultz 2003b and 2004a.
10 Recent case studies in which the model is applied to Greek sculpture: Palagia and
Carpenter 1929 and Schuchhardt 1930. Recent examples of the same: Brouskari 1999,
57–71, Symeonoglou 2004 and Harrison 2005. Personal styles in Greek sculpture:
Pollitt and Palagia 1996 with comprehensive bibliographies. General critique of the
‘motor habit variation model’: Shanks and Tilley 1992, 141. Specific critique of the
model applied to Greek sculpture: Carpenter 1960 and Ridgway, e.g. 1981, 5–8, 159–
91; 1997, 237–320.
12 Early case studies of the model applied to Greek sculpture include Krahmer
1923/24, Pfuhl 1930, Buschor 1947 and 1971 and Alscher 1956 and 1957. Recent
examples of the same with various refinements in theory and practice: Pollitt 1972 and
1986, Whitley 1991, Neer 2002, Hölscher 2002, von den Hoff 2007 among many others.
13 Alcock 2002; Scheer 1993; 2005. See also Stewart 2004, 220–6, and, now, Erll and
Nünning 2008.
14 Osborne 2007, 3.
15 Which does not mean that it should be neglected; Jean Rudhardt’s famous remark
regarding ancient Greek religion – ‘La difficulté principale de l’étude des religions me
334
Style, continuity and the Hellenistic baroque
paraît être celle de la compréhension d’autrui’ (Rudhardt 1981, 10) – can apply with
equal force to the study of ancient Greek art.
16 Bieber 1955, 125–35; Pollitt 1986, 111–126; Fowler 1989, 32–43; Stewart 1990,
205–18; Smith 1993, 99–126; Stewart 1993; de Grummond and Ridgway 2000; Stewart
2003; Stewart 2005; Stewart 2006, 171–2 with bibliography.
17 Pollitt 1986, 111.
18 Stewart 1993; 2005.
19 Stewart 1990, 207; Stewart 2006, 171–2. There is little disagreement on this point.
But this fact itself provokes a question: Can the kind of conceptual and formal
ekphrasis that I have just given represent the meaning of the baroque tradition for us?
Here our answer should probably be both ‘yes’ and ‘no’. On one hand, there is no
doubt that the meaning of the Hellenistic baroque is connected to the aforementioned
conceptual interests and to the formal devices through which Hellenistic sculptors
made these interests manifest. On the other hand, we should probably acknowledge
that the baroque’s significance as a culturally situated phenomenon depends upon
more than a description of its constituent narrative concerns and its underlying formal
components. There is no doubt, for example, that space, setting, religious context,
the omnipresent power-games of patrons all contributed to the meaning of any given
sculptural object. It is equally clear that when these individual works of art are brought
together and when the subsequent ‘baroque canon’ is considered, all of these factors
(and probably more) would need to be considered if some kind of complex expression
of the ‘style’s meaning’ were to be recreated. And even if all this was accomplished,
this type of culturally based reconstruction of potential meanings cannot explain why
Hellenistic sculptors chose the style that we call the ‘baroque’ as opposed to something
else without beginning to assess the origins of the style and the nature of the baroque
tradition. Much work remains to be done.
20 Amberger-Lahrmann 1996.
21 Himmelman 1998, 103–38.
22 Amberger-Lahrmann 1996.
23 Ridgway 1990, 6, considers such parallels between art and literature to be
Borbein 2002, 14–15. West pediment Poseidon ‘M’: Acropolis Museum 885 + 959
(front chest and abdomen) and BM London M (arms and back). The fundamental
discussions of the piece are given by Brommer 1963, 42–3, and Palagia 1998, 47 with
nn. 123–38. Periclean building program: Hurwit 2004 and Lapatin 2007 both with
bibliographies.
25 For the moment and possible significance of the pose: Schultz 2007c.
26 I have suggested elsewhere (Schultz 2004b) that Poseidon was shown wearing a
bronze cuirass in this scene and that his inflated anatomy might be a response to that
particular iconographic move.
27 Beyer 1988, 298 n. 13.
28 Borbein 2002, 14–15: ‘Die große Wirkung der hochklassischen Kunst beruhte
335
Peter Schultz
aber nicht nur auf ihrem “utopischen” Gehalt und auf ihrem kunstgeschichtlichen
Doppelgesicht (sie ist Höhepunkt und Neuansatz zugleich), sondern entscheidend
auch auf ihrem überragenden formalen Niveau. Die Werke, die wir im Original
besitzen – und erneut sei hier auf die Parthenon-Skulpturen verwiesen –, sind von
blutleerer Idealität und kalter Perfektion weit entfernt. Sie zeichnen sich vielmehr aus
durch kraftvolle Präsenz, sprühende Lebendigkeit, Reichtum im Detail. Affekte
scheinen gebändigt, doch nicht unterdrückt, Ideales greifbare Realität zu sein. Das oft
bemerkte Gleichgewicht zwischen Freiheit und Gebundenheit hat sich im Verlauf der
Hochklassik offenbar leicht zu Freiheit hin verschoben, ebenso das Gleichgewicht
zwischen Naturalismus und Stilisierung zum Naturalismus hin. Der gerwaltige Torso
des Poseidon (abb. 7) aus dem Westgiebel des Parthenon z. B. wird an unmittelbar
sinnlicher Ausstrahlung von vergleichbaren hellenistischen Werken wie den Göttern
und Giganten am Großen Fries des Pergamonaltars (abb. 8) nicht übertroffen. Die die
Sinne ansprechende Form trägt aber entscheidend dazu bei, die Barriere der
Fremdheit zwischen dem Betrachter oder Interpreten und dem klassischen Werk zu
überwinden und schließlich einen Proveß des Verstehens oder des Sich-Aneignens
in Gang zu setzen’. See also Stewart 2008, 140–2, on the emotional effect of the
Parthenon pediments.
29 The Nike of Samothrace: Bieber 1961, 125–6 with earlier bibliography; Stewart
1993; Knell 1995; Hamiaux 1998, 27–32; Ridgway 2000a, 150–9; Stewart 2005. Michel
Ellenberger’s (2000) compilation of poetry and descriptions of the baroque
masterpiece is a delight and worth tracking down.
30 Hamiaux 1998, 27; Ridgway 2000a, 155.
31 Of course, Nike as a type has been highly eroticized since the middle of the fifth
century, another conceptual continuity worth noting. See Stewart 1997, 148–9;
Ridgway 2000a, 154, and now Munn 2009.
32 Contextual evolution of the sanctuary’s development: Wickkiser 2003 and
1992; Smith 1993; Ridgway 1997, 41 and 366; Feyel 1998; Rolley 1999, 203–8; Levendi
2003, 101–2, and Schultz 2007a, 165–72. Sculptural and stylistic context of the
decorative program: Brown 1973, 5–15; Yalouris 1992: 82–3; and Schultz 2007, 165–79.
34 IG IV2 102 AI-BI, a famous inscription excavated at the site, records the expenses
involved in these artists’ work and provides a contemporary picture of their various
sculptural assignments. Translation and commentary: Roux 1961, 84–130, and
Burford 1969. Interpretation and context: Feyel 1998 and Schultz 2007a.
35 Style: Yalouris 1992, 67–74. Social context: Schultz 2007a.
36 The sensuality of the specific pose and the connection of Nike to Aphrodite:
discussions of the piece are given by Brommer 1954 and Palagia 1998, 48–9 with ns.
155–64. For the Periclean building program see n. 24 above.
336
Style, continuity and the Hellenistic baroque
41 Stewart 2008, 140.
42 As a brief aside, this discussion of baroque physiognomies and their presence in
Greek sculpture from the later fifth century BC and onwards prompts a look beyond
architectural adornment to free-standing portraits. Here again, clear formal
continuities are manifest between ‘baroque portraiture’ of the Hellenistic period and
its ‘classical’ forerunners in the fifth and fourth century (Stewart 1979, 9–12, remains
fundamental on this point). Pollitt 1986, 63–6, and Bergemann 2007 both provide
analyses of the art historical context. Take the most famous of all Hellenistic portraits,
the eiko-n (portrait) of Antisthenes attributed to the Athenian sculptor Phyromachos
(Antisthenes: Stewart 1979, 9–10; P. Zanker 1995, 175–7; Ridgway 2000, 285–6 with
n. 48; Stewart 2004, 215–6. Ridgway 2000, 285–6, rejects the connection between the
famous statue base of Antisthenes’ portrait in Ostia signed by Phyromachos and the
Roman copies of the philosopher’s portrait. See von den Hoff 1994, 135–50, for a
nuanced reading of the evidence). This image – with its tortured brow and deep set
eyes, its thick expressive hair and cascading beard – has long been seen as one of the
most powerful baroque images of the late third or early second century. But the basic
type, indeed all the specific formal devices that Phyromachos employs – the heavy,
dramatic undercutting of the eyes, the deep, exaggerated separation of hair locks, the
heavily muscled and expressive forehead – are not new. A similar structure shows up
in the fourth-century Euripides Rieti type recently studied by Hans Isler and, to lesser
extent, in Athenian grave reliefs of the middle fourth century such as the famous old
man from the Ilissos stele, Athens National Museum 4675 (Isler 1999; Bergemann
2007, 35–6). That these fourth-century images have long been conclusively connected
to fifth-century images of centaurs, specifically the centaurs on the south metopes of
the Parthenon (Fig. 11), also seems quite significant (Schweitzer 1963, 115–67. See
also Fittschen 1988; Himmelman 2001, 66; Bergeman 2007, 34; Von den Hoff 2007,
52). What Phyromachos brings to the baroque portrait is a fresh intensity of purpose
and a dramatic amplification of preexisting formal patterns. The underlying aesthetic
agenda that governed his sculptural art, however, seems to have set in late fifth and
fourth century in Athens. Stewart seems to have been quite right when he remarked
‘that “baroque” tendencies of a sort were already present in Attic sculpture long before
Phyromachos was born or turned his hand to portraiture’ ( Stewart 1979, 11).
43 Zerner 1988; Hodder and Hutson 2003, 67 and 82 with bibliographies.
44 Most 2005 with comprehensive bibliography.
45 Stewart 2005, 128–35 and 139.
46 See, for example, Stewart 2004.
47 Stewart 2004, 220–26.
48 ‘Genre styles’: Stewart 1993; 2005; Hölscher 2002; 2009, 57–8.
49 Stylistic retrospection: Fullerton 1990; 1998a; 1998b; 2003.
50 Stewart 2005, 139–40.
51 Perhaps we might usefully expand on Stewart’s notion that ‘By adopting [baroque
conventions a] sculpture offers a reprocessed image of its classical past that is filtered
though the lens of the baroque and tuned to a visually and historically sensitized
audience’ (2005, 128). Here, both ‘baroque’ and ‘classical’ modes represent stylistic
choices that are, in essence, variations on a theme, bound together, dependant upon
one another, yet distinct.
337
Peter Schultz
Bibliography
Alcock, S.
1997 ‘The heroic past in a Hellenistic present’, in P. Cartledge, P. Garnsey and
E. Gruen (eds) Hellenistic Constructs. Essays in culture, history and historiography,
Berkeley, 20–34.
2002 Archaeologies of the Greek Past. Landscape, monuments, memories, Cambridge.
Alscher, L.
1956 Griechische Plastik 3: Nachklassik und Vorhellenismus, Berlin.
1957 Griechische Plastik 4: Hellenismus, Berlin.
Amberger-Lahrmann, M.
1996 Anatomie und Physiognomie in der hellenistischen Plastik. Dargestellt am Pergamonaltar,
Stuttgart.
Andreae, B.
1988 Laokoon und die Gründung Roms, Mainz.
Barnard, M.
2001 Approaches to Understanding Visual Culture, New York.
Bergemann, J.
2007 ‘Attic grave reliefs and portrait sculpture in fourth-century Athens’, in
Schultz and von den Hoff 2007, 34–48.
Beyer, I.
1988 ‘Das nordliche Tympanonpferd der Zweigespanne des Parthenonostgiebels’,
Bathron, Beiträge zur Architektur und verwandte Künsten für H. Drerup,
Saarbrücken.
Bieber, M.
1961 The Sculpture of the Hellenistic Age, New York.
Bol, P. (ed.)
2004 Geschichte der antiken Bildhauerkunst 2, Mainz.
Borbein, A.
1973 ‘Die griechische Statue des 4. Jhs. v. Chr’, JdI 88, 43–212.
2002 ‘Klassische Kunst’, in P.-K. Schuster and W. Jacob (eds) Die griechische
Klassik. Idee oder Wirklichkeit, Mainz, 9–25.
Brinkmann, V. and Wünsche, R.
2004 Bunte Götter. Die Farbigkeit antiker Skulptur. Eine Ausstellung der
Staatlichen Antikensammlungen und Glyptothek München in Zusammenarbeit mit
der Ny Carlsberg Glyptotek Kopenhagen und den Vatikanischen Museen, Rom,
Munich.
Brommer, F.
1954 ‘Zur Iris des Parthenon-Westgiebels’, in Neue Beiträge zur klassischen
Altertumswissenschaft. Festschrift B. Schweitzer, Stuttgart, 181–4.
1963 Die Skulpturen der Parthenon-Giebel, Mainz.
Brouskari, M.
1999 To thorakio tou naou tis Athinas Nikis, Archaiologike Ephemeris Supplement
137, Athens.
Brown, B.
1973 Anticlassicism in Greek Sculpture of the Fourth Century BC, New York.
Burford, A.
1969 The Greek Temple Builders at Epidauros, Toronto.
338
Style, continuity and the Hellenistic baroque
Buschor, E.
1947 Bildnisstufen, Munich.
1971 Das hellenistische Bildnis, 2nd edn., Munich.
Carpenter, R.
1929 The Sculpture of the Nike Temple Parapet, Cambridge, Mass.
1960 Greek Sculpture, Chicago.
de Grummond, N. T. and Ridgway, B. S.(eds)
2000 From Pergamon to Sperlonga. Sculpture and context, Berkeley
Donohue, A.
2005 Greek Sculpture and the Problem of Description, Cambridge.
Ellenberger, M.
2000 La Victoire de Samothrace. Surgie d’un théâtre de statues, Paris.
Elsner, J.
2003 ‘Style’, in R. Nelson and R. Shiff (eds) Critical Terms for Art History, Chicago,
98–109.
Erll, A. and Nünning, A. (eds)
2008 Cultural Memory Studies. An international and interdisciplinary handbook, Berlin.
Feyel, C.
1998 ‘La structure d’un groupe socio-économique: les artisans dans les grands
sanctuaires grecs du IVe siecle’, TOPOI 8, 561–79.
Fittschen, K.
1988 Griechische Porträts, Darmstadt.
Fowler, B. H.
1989 The Hellenistic Aesthetic, Bristol.
Fullerton, M.
1990 The Archaistic Style in Roman Statuary, Mnemosyne Suppl. 110, Leiden.
1998a ‘Description vs. prescription: a semantics of sculptural style’, in K. J.
Hartswick and M. Sturgeon (eds) ΣΤΕΦΑΝΟΣ: Studies in honor of Brunilde S.
Ridgway, Madison, WI, 69–77.
1998b ‘Atticism, classicism and the origins of neo-Attic sculpture’, in Palagia and
Coulson 1998, 95–9.
2003 ‘A brief historiography of stylistic retrospection’, in A. Donohue and M.
Fullerton (eds) Ancient Art and Its Historiography, Cambridge, 92–117.
Gruben, G.
2001 Griechische Tempel und Heiligtümer, Munich.
Gulaki, A.
1981 Klassische und klassizistische Nikedarstellungen, PhD diss., University of
Bonn.
Habicht, C.
1997 Athens from Alexander to Antony, Cambridge, Mass.
Hamiaux, M.
1998 Les sculptures grecques II: la période hellénistique, Paris.
2007 La Victoire de Samothrace, Paris.
Harrison, E.
1988 ‘Style phases in Greek sculpture from 450–370 BC’, in XII[e] Congrès
International d’Archéologie Classique. Résumé des communications 16–17 1986,
Athens, 99–105.
339
Peter Schultz
340
Style, continuity and the Hellenistic baroque
Mattusch, C.
1998 ‘Rhodian sculpture: a school, a style, or many workshops?’, in Palagia and
Coulson 1998, 149–56.
Merker, G.
1973 The Hellenistic Sculpture of Rhodes, Studies in Mediterranean Archaeology 40,
Göteborg.
Moreno, P.
1994 Scultura ellenistica, 2 Vols., Rome.
Most, G. W.
2005 ‘Athens as the School of Greece’, in J. Porter (ed.) Classical Pasts: The classical
tradition in Greece and Rome, Princeton, 377–87.
Munn, M.
2009 ‘The Nike balustrade and the erotic attraction of victory’, Paper read at
the 110th Annual Meeting of the Archaeological Institute of America, 8–11
January, Philadelphia.
Neer, R.
2002 Style and Politics in Athenian Vase Painting. The craft of democracy, 530–460 BC,
Cambridge.
Olson, T.
2002 Poussin and France: Painting,hHumanism, and the politics of style, New Haven.
Osada, T.
1993 Stilentwicklung hellenistischer Relieffriese, Europäische Hochschulschriften 28,
Kunstgeschichte 185, Frankfurt.
Osborne, R.
2007 ‘Tracing cultural revolution in classical Athens’, in R. Osborne (ed.),
Debating the Athenian Cultural Revolution: Art, literature, philosophy and politics
430–380 BC, Cambridge, 1–26.
Palagia, O.
1998 The Pediments of the Parthenon, Leiden.
Palagia, O. and Coulson, W. (eds)
1998 Regional Schools in Hellenistic Sculpture: Proceedings of an international conference held
at the American School of Classical Studies at Athens, March 15–17, Oxford.
Pfuhl, E.
1930 ‘Ikonographische Beiträge zur Stilgeschichte der hellenistischen Kunst’,
JdI 45, 1–61.
Picon, C.
1993 ‘The Oxford Maenad’, Antike Plastik 20, 89–104.
Pollitt, J.J.
1972 Art and Experience in Classical Greece, Cambridge.
1986 Art in the Hellenistic Age, Cambridge.
2000 ‘The phantom of a Rhodian school of sculpture’, in de Grummond and
Ridgway 2000, 92–110.
Pollitt, J. J. and Palagia, O. (eds)
1996 Personal Styles in Greek Sculpture, Cambridge.
Ridgway, B.S.
1981 Fifth Century Styles in Greek Sculpture, Princeton.
1990 Hellenistic Sculpture I, Madison, WI.
341
Peter Schultz
342
Style, continuity and the Hellenistic baroque
Schweitzer, B.
1963 Zur Kunst der Antike: Ausgewählte Schriften, Tübingen.
Shanks, M. and Tilley, C.
1992 Re-Constructing Archaeology. Theory and practice, London.
Smith, A.C.
1993 ‘Athenianizing associations in the sculpture of the temple of Asklepios at
Epidauros’, AJA 97, 300.
Stewart, A.
1979 Attika. Studies in Athenian sculpture of the Hellenistic age, London.
1990 Greek Sculpture. An exploration, New Haven.
1993 ‘Narration and allusion in the Hellenistic baroque’, in P. Holliday (ed.),
Narrative and Event in Ancient Art, Cambridge, 130–74.
1997 Art, Desire and the Body in Ancient Greece, Cambridge.
2003 ‘Hellenistic Art, AD 1500–2000’, in A. Erskine (ed.) A Companion to the
Hellenistic World, Oxford, 494–514.
2004 Attalos, Athens and the Akropolis. The Pergamene ‘Little Barbarians’ and the Roman
and Renaissance legacy, Cambridge.
2005 ‘Baroque Classics: The Tragic Muse and the Exemplum’, in J. Porter (ed.)
Classical Pasts: The classical tradition in Greece and Rome, Princeton, 127–70.
2006 ‘Two dozen innovations’, in G. Bugh (ed.) The Cambridge Companion to the
Hellenistic World, Cambridge, 158–85.
2008 Classical Greece and the Birth of Western Art, Cambridge.
Symeonoglou, S.
2004 ‘A new analysis of the Parthenon Frieze’, in M. Cosmopoulos (ed.) The
Parthenon and Its Sculptures, Cambridge, 5–42.
Tanner, J.
2006 The Invention of Art History in Ancient Greece. Religion, society and artistic
rationalisation, Cambridge.
Thiersch, H.
1931 ‘Die Nike von Samothrake, ein rhodische Werk und Anathem’, Nachrichten
von der Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften zu Göttingen, 337–78.
Tiberios, M. et al. (eds)
2002 Color in Ancient Greece. The role of color in ancient Greek art and architecture
(700–31 BC), Thessaloniki.
Touloupa, E.
2002 Ta enaetia glupta tou naou tou Apollonos Daphniphorou stin Eretria, Library of
the Athenian Archaeological Society No. 220, Athens.
von den Hoff, R.
1994 Philosophenporträts des Früh- und Hochhhellenismus, Munich.
2003 ‘Tradition and innovation: portraits and dedications on the early Hellenistic
Acropolis’, in S. Tracy and O. Palagia (eds) The Macedonians in Athens,
322–229 BC, Oxford, 173–85.
2007 ‘Naturalism and classicism: style and perception of early Hellenistic
portraits’, in Schultz and von den Hoff 2007, 49–62.
Whitley, J.
1991 Style and Society in Dark Age Greece: The changing face of a pre-literate Society, 1100–
700 BC, Cambridge.
343
Peter Schultz
Wickkiser, B. L.
2003 ‘The appeal of Asklepios and the politics of healing in the Greco-Roman
world’, Ph.D. diss., University of Texas at Austin.
Yalouris, N.
1992 Die Skulpturen des Asklepiostempels in Epidauros (Antike Plastik 21), Berlin.
Zanker, G.
2004 Modes of Viewing in Hellenistic Poetry and Art, Madison, WI.
Zanker, P.
1995 The Mask of Socrates: The image of the intellectual in antiquity, Berkeley.
Zerner, H.
1988 ‘Classicism as power’, Art Journal 47.1, 35–6.
344